FRONTIER MINILAB 330 service Manual

www.minilablaser.com

SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL MINILAB

FRONTIER 330 FUJIFILM SCANNER AND LASER PRINTER

FRONTIER SLP-800SC Servicing and Electrical Circuit Diagrams

System Disk Ver.1.0

First Edition PP3-C917E


1

MENU

2

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

3

MESSAGES AND ACTIONS

4

SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

5

MAINTENANCE MENU

6

TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ABNORMAL IMAGES

7

OPERATION SECTION

8

FILM CARRIER SECTION

9

SCANNER SECTION

10

PAPER SUPPLY SECTION

11

PAPER FEED SECTION

12

REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS

13

PRINTER EXIT SECTION

14

PROCESSOR SECTION

15

PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM

16

PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM

17

DRYER/SORTER SECTION

18

ELECTRICAL SECTION

19

ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

20

APPENDIX


INTRODUCTION

This Servicing Manual outlines the maintenance and servicing procedures for the Fujifilm Digital Minilab FRONTIER 330 SLP-800SC. This manual is a professional publication provided for qualified service personnel or persons fully trained in equipment service procedures. All other personnel and operators are restricted from servicing the SLP-800SC. When maintenance service is needed, be sure to contact qualified service personnel. Precautions Generally Applying to All Serving Operations ! WARNING When servicing internal machine parts, make sure the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply on the power distribution board are both set to the OFF position. If the main power is left ON, electricity will flow as far as the power supply section, and this can cause electric shocks and/or short-circuiting. If the power is left on, there is also the possibility for the machine to maybe accidentally activated causing damage to the machine and/or bodily injury. ! CAUTION The light source section and dryer will be hot to the touch. Wait 15 minutes after turning off the power before commencing with servicing procedures. • Wear gloves when handling the optical system parts to keep the parts free from fingerprints. • When mounting machine parts, take care not to sandwich any of the wires. • Each of the connectors is provided with a symbol indicating what it is to be connected to. Make sure the connectors are connected to the connectors, harness ends or parts bearing the corresponding symbols. • The plastic connectors have a locking catch on the plug (male) end. To disconnect one of these connectors, loosen the catch first; to connect, make sure the catch engages (locks).

Service Manual Appropriations 1. All rights are reserved by the Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. (FUJIFILM). 2. Manual usage is restricted to FUJIFILM equipment related technical and service personnel. 3. This manual contains information relating to FUJIFILM equipment and is therefore proprietary. Unauthorized disclosure is prohibited. 4. FUJIFILM’s prior consent is required in regard to the following. K Manual copying in whole or in part. K Disclosure of manual contents to unauthorized personnel. K Manual uses for purposes other than technical service.


1. MENU 1.1 Menu Table


1.1 Menu Table User (Password)

Classification No.

Screen

0

Main Menu

1

Pre-operational Check

2

Operator

Laboratory Manager

SE1

SE2

–

0000

6666

7777

K

K

K

K

12 Check Item Display

K

K

K

K

13 Scanner Correction

K

K

K

K

14 Processor Temperature Check

K

K

K

K

15 Control Strip Processing

K

K

K

K

16 Print Condition Upkeep

K

K

K

K

(1) Quit

K

K

K

K

135

K

K

K

K

IX240

K

K

K

K

135/120

K

K

K

K

IX240

K

K

K

K

Back Print of Custom Setting (Display)

K

K

K

K

No.

Display Menu

(2) Printing

No.

(1) (2)

Index Print Back Print

Sub Menu

(3)

Front Print

K

K

K

K

(4)

P.SET Initial Setting

K

K

K

K

(5)

Special Film CH Select

K

K

K

K

(6)

Print Mode Selection

Normal Print

K

K

K

K

Mounted Print

K

K

K

K

Frame/Character Print

K

K

K

K

Red-eye/Soft/ Cross

K

K

K

K

Digital Image Import (sRGB)

K

K

K

K

Digital Image Import (No convert)

K

K

K

K

Digital Image Export

K

K

K

K

Digital Image Export and Print

K

K

K

K

Center Cropping

K

K

K

K

Free Cropping

K

K

K

K

(7)

(3) Scanner Op.

Pull-down Menu

Cropping

(8)

Preview

K

K

K

K

(9)

Exposure Condition Retrieve

K

K

K

K

(1)

Original Select

K

K

K

K

(2)

→Reorder⇔→1st Print

K

K

K

K

(3)

P.Size in Mixed Process

K

K

K

K

(4)

Frame Display Switch

K

K

K

K

6⇔1 (5)

Sort Data Display/Setting

K

K

K

K

(6)

Frame→Feed

K

K

K

K

(7)

AF

K

K

K

K


1.1 Menu Table User (Password)

Classification No.

Screen

No.

Display Menu

(4) Image Correction

(5) Printer Op. 3

Postoperational Check

No.

Pull-down Menu

Sub Menu

Setup and Maintenance

SE2

–

0000

6666

7777

K

K

K

K

(2)

Sharpness

K

K

K

K

(3)

Monotone Correction

K

K

K

K

(4)

RP-tone Correction

K

K

K

K

(5)

Auto Correction ON/OFF

K

K

K

K

(6)

Custom Setting Number Selection

K

K

K

K

(7)

Frame/Character Print

K

K

K

K

(8)

Retouch

K

K

K

K

(1)

Processor Start⇔Stop

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

K

412 Production Information 2

K

K

K

414 Timer Setup

K

K

K

415 Error log information

K

K

K

41C Accumulated error information

K

K

K

416 Installation Information Reference

K

K

K

417 Data Backup

K

K

K

411 Product Information 1

411 Production Information 1

415 Error Information Check

42 Print Condition Setup and Check

SE1

Tone Adjustment

31 Check Item Display

41 System Operation Setup and Check

Laboratory Manager

(1)

35 Next Timer ON Date/Time Confirmation 4

Operator

41E Clear Error Log

K

41F Installation Information Setup

K

41G Shipping Information Reference

K

41I DI Manager Administrative Setting

K

K

K

41J Timer Waiting Time Setup

K

K

K

421 Paper Condition Setup

K

K

K

K

422 Processor Temperature Check

K

K

K

K

423 Control Strip Processing

K

K

K

K

424 Print Size Setup

K

K

K

426 Monitor Adjustment

K

K

K

42C Image Correction Setup

K

K

42D Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag. Setting

K

K

42E Special Film Channel Setting

K

K

K

42G Monotone Correction Setting

K

K

K

42J Paper Condition Method Setup 42K Shop Logo Registration/ Delete

K K

K

K


1.1 Menu Table Classification No.

Screen

No.

Display Menu

43 Scanner Adjustment/ Maintenance

User (Password) Operator

Laboratory Manager

SE1

SE2

–

0000

6666

7777

42L Template Registration/ Delete

K

K

K

42M Custom Setting Registration/Delete

K

K

K

42N Holiday File Registration/ Delete

K

K

K

431 Input Check

K

K

K

432 Focus Calibration

K

K

K

433 Focus Position Adjustment

K

K

K

434 Operation Information Display

K

K

K

No.

Pull-down Menu

Sub Menu

43A I/O Check

K

43B Carrier Inclination Display

K

43C CCD Data Display

K

K

43D Lens Registration

K

K

43E Optical Axis Adjustment

K

K

43F Optical Magnification Calibration

K

K

K

K

K

K

43G Bright Correction

K

K

K

43H Dark Correction 43J Spectral Calibration 43K DC Offset Cancel

K

K

43L LED Light Amount Adjustment

K

K

K

K

K

441 Mask Position Adjustment

K

K

K

442 NC100AC Input Check

K

K

K

448 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup

K

K

K

44A NC100AC Sensor Calibration

K

K

44C NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information

K

K

43U Unexposed Frame Detect Level 44 Carrier Adjustment/ Maintenance

K

44D NC100AC Installation Information Display

K

44E NC100AC Installation Information Setup

K

44F NC100AC I/O Check

K

44K NC100AC Machine Data Setup

K

44M NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading

K

44N NC100AC Magnetic Verify

K

44R NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup 45 Printer Adjustment/ Maintenance

K

K

K

K

451 Paper Magazine Registration

K

K

K

452 Paper Feed Length Adjustment

K

K

K

K

K

453 Test Pattern Printing

K



Screen

No.

Display Menu

User (Password) Operator

Laboratory Manager

SE1

SE2

–

0000

6666

7777

454 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup

K

K

K

455 Paper Feed

K

K

K

456 Printer Temperature Display

K

K

K

457 Printer Input Check

K

K

K

458 Image Position Fine Adjustment

K

K

K

No.

Pull-down Menu

45A Printer I/O Check

K

45B Filter Replacement History

K

45C Laser Exposure Check

K

K

45D R Laser (R-LD) Data

K

K

45E G Laser (G-SHG) Data

K

K

45F B Laser (B-SHG) Data

K

K

45G Scanning Position/ Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup

K

K

45H Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment

K

45J Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print

K

45K Laser History Display

K

45L Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy

K

45M Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment

K

45N Back Printer Test

K

45P Printer Operation Data Display

K

45Q Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data

K

45R Clearing All Operation Data

K

45S Side Register Calibration

K

45T Data Saving

K

45U Data Download

K

45V Precut Length Setting 46 Processor Adjustment/ Maintenance

Sub Menu

K

K

K

461 Pump Output Measurement/Setting

K

K

462 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting

K

K

463 Processing Temperature Setting

K

K

K

464 Replenisher Rate Setting

K

K

K

465 Evaporation Correction Rate Setting

K

K

K

466 Low Volume Setup

K

K

K

467 Processor Temperature Calibration

K

K

K

468 Processor Input Check

K

K

K

46A Processor I/O Check

K



Screen

No.

Display Menu

No.

User (Password) Pull-down Menu

46B Processor Operating Condition Setup

49 Self-Diagnostic

Sub Menu

Operator

Laboratory Manager

SE1

SE2

–

0000

6666

7777

K

K

46C Processor Operation Data Display

K

46D Clearing Selected Processor Operation Data

K

46E Processor Operation Data Display 2

K

46F Installation

K

491 Trouble Help

K

492 Help Update

K

493 Abnormal Image Check

K

494 Paper Feed Check

K

410 Special Operations 410A Paint

K

410B Explorer

K

410C Command

K


2. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 2.1 Maintenance Schedule 2.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table 2.3 Maintenance and Inspection 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8

Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement Cutter Inspection Dryer Rack Roller Inspection/Cleaning Processing Solution Level Sensor Inspection Waste Solution Level Sensor Inspection Processing Rack Drive Gear Lubrication Processor Drive Chain Lubrication Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning 2.3.9 Circulation Pump Inspection 2.3.10 Processing Rack Roller Inspection 2.3.11 Processing Tank Heater Inspection 2.3.12 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubrication


2.1 Maintenance Schedule

Schedule (Every) Item Diffusion Box Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Control Strip Magnetic Heads of Auto Film Carrier NC100AC No.6 Crossover Rack Light Source Cooling Air Filter

Day Pre-operational Post-operational Check Check Clean Clean Process/Check Clean Wash

Week

Month

3 Months

Year

Clean

Printer Section Cooling Air Filters Clean Power Supply Section Cooling Air Filter Clean Control Section Cooling Air Filter Clean Solution Heater Cooling Air Filters Clean Dryer Air Filter Clean Crossover Racks Wash Dryer Entrance Guide/Roller Clean Circulation Filters Replace Processing Racks Wash Laser Unit Cooling Air filter Replace Densitometer Whiteboard Clean Auto Washing Nozzle Joint Rubbers Replace G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup Execute* *: Message to indicate execution will appear on the screen one month after initial installation and every three months thereafter.


2.2 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table

Implementation Period (Every) Item Scanner

Printer

Main Scanning Position/Laser Beam Synchronous Adjustment Laser Unit Air Filter Cutter Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replenisher Pump Output Auto Cleaning Output

Dryer Rack Rollers Processing Solution Lever Sensors Waste Solution Level Sensor Processing Rack Drive Gears Processor Drive Chain Processor Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzles Circulation Pumps Processing Rack Rollers Processing Tank Heaters Processing Solution Temperature Sensors Hose Clamps Dryer Rack Drive Chain

6 Months

Year

2 Years

Inspect Replace Inspect Replace

Measure/Set up Measure/Set up Inspect/Clean Inspect Inspect Lubricate Lubricate Clean Inspect Inspect Inspect Inspect/Calibrate Inspect Lubricate

Refer to Subsection: 5.6.15/ 5.6.16 2.3.1 Replace 2.3.2/10.4.2 12.3.2 5.7.1 5.7.2 3 Years

2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 2.3.9 2.3.10 2.3.11 5.7.7 15.2.8 2.3.12


2.3 Maintenance and Inspection 2.3.1 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement Removal 1. Shut OFF the system after performing the post-operational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply. 2. Open the magazine door and remove the front upper cover.

Front Upper Cover

Magazine Door CD006


2.3 Maintenance and Inspection

3. Loosen the screw, remove the screw and then the filter section cover.

Screw (Remove)

Screw (Loosen)

Filter Section Cover

CD708



4. Loosen the screw and remove the air filter.

Air Filter

Installation Install the air filter in the reverse order of removal. After installation, click [Replace] in the menu 45B “Filter Replacement History” screen. Screw (Loosen)

CD709



2.3.2 Cutter Inspection 1. In menu 452 “Paper Feed Length Adjustment”, enter “82.5” in “Small Size” boxes and “254.0” in “Large Size” boxes for both “Feed length set value” and “Actual measured value”.



2. In menu 453 “Test Pattern Printing”, print “Grid” patterns with “254.0” and “82.5” lengths for all paper magazines to be used. 3. Check the edges of the prints. If they are rough, replace the cutter with a new one (see subsection 10.4.2). 4. Measure and record the length of the grid test pattern prints.



5. In menu 452 “Paper Feed Length Adjustment”, enter actual measured lengths in “Actual measured value” boxes. 6. Click [OK].



2.3.3 Dryer Rack Roller Inspection/Cleaning 1. Remove the dryer section cover (see subsection 17.1.1). 2. Inspect the dryer rollers for:

Spring (No Mark) Spring (Black Mark)

• smooth rotation by turning them by hand.

Spring (Red Mark)

• paper passage without deflection by turning the knob by hand. • surface damage. • nip coil spring deterioration. 3. Clean or replace the parts if necessary. 4. Reinstall the dryer section cover.

Black soft (ø32) Black hard (ø20) Black soft (ø20) White hard (ø20) White hard (ø20) White hard (ø20) White hard (ø20) Brown hard (ø20) White soft (ø20) Black hard (ø22) Black hard (ø20) Black hard (ø16)

CD226



2.3.4 Processing Solution Level Sensor Inspection 1. Open the menu 468 “Processor Section Input Check” screen.



2. Remove the circulation filter section cover. 3. Remove the screw and then the level sensor.

Screw

Level Sensor CD348



4. Immerse the tip of the sensor in water and move it up and down. The sensor is normal if it matches the screen display.

Level Sensor

5. Reinstall the level sensor and circulation filter section cover. Water

EZ243



2.3.5 Waste Solution Level Sensor Inspection 1. Open the circuit board bracket (see subsection 15.3.2). 2. Remove the waste solution tank cap.

Waste Solution Tank Cap CD330



3. Turn ON the main power supply and the built-in circuit breaker and start the system up by pressing the START switch. 4. Open the menu 468 “Processor Section Input Check” screen.



5. Immerse the tip of the sensor in water and move it up and down. The sensor is normal if it matches the screen display. 6. Reinstall the level sensor and removed parts.

Water

Sensor CD1088



2.3.6 Processing Rack Drive Gear Lubrication 1. Shut OFF the system after performing the post-operational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply. 2. Remove the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks.

Drive Gears

3. Apply the recommended grease to the drive gears. Recommended Grease: FUJI MINILAB GREASE FOR CHAIN AND GEAR (P/N 891G02003) or equivalent 4. Reinstall the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks.

E116



2.3.7 Processor Drive Chain Lubrication 1. Shut OFF the system after performing the post-operational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply. 2. Remove the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks.

Drive Chain

3. Wipe off grease from the drive chain and sprockets. 4. Apply the recommended grease to the drive chain. Recommended Grease: FUJI MINILAB GREASE FOR CHAIN AND GEAR (P/N 891G02003) or equivalent 5. Reinstall the crossover racks.

E116



2.3.8 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning 1. Open the replenisher box door and remove the replenisher cartridge. 2. Clean the washing nozzles using a toothbrush. 3. Install the replenisher cartridge and close the door.

Toothbrush

Washing Nozzles EZ758



2.3.9 Circulation Pump Inspection 1. Remove the circulation pump section cover (see subsection 15.2.1). 2. Turn ON the main power supply and the built-in circuit breaker and start the system up by pressing the START switch. 3. Open the menu 46A “Processor Section I/O Check” screen. 4. Check the pumps for proper operation by clicking [ON] and [OFF] for “PU401 to PU406 Circulation Pumps”. 5. Reinstall the circulation pump section cover.



2.3.10 Processing Rack Roller Inspection 1. Remove the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks and wash them with warm water (30°C to 40°C/86°F to 104°F). 2. Remove the P1 processing rack and wash it with warm water. 3. Check for: • smooth rotation by turning the rollers by hand. • paper passage without deflection by turning the knob by hand. • damage on the roller surface. • deterioration of the roller nip coil spring.

CD225



4. Return the P1 processing rack and install the contamination prevention cover over the P1 tank. 5. Install the splash cover over the dryer fan section. 6. Remove the P2 to PS4 processing rack and perform step 3.

Splash Prevention Cover

IMPORTANT: Take special care to prevent overflow of the P2 solution into the P1 solution. 7. If the soft rollers on the racks are slimy, wipe them clean with a cloth moistened with warm water. 8. Replace the parts if necessary. 9. Remove the contamination prevention cover and splash prevention cover. 10. Reinstall the No.1 to No.6 crossover racks.

Contamination Prevention Cover CD117



2.3.11 Processing Tank Heater Inspection 1. Start the system up and open the menu 422 “Processor Temperature Check” screen. 2. Check that the temperatures increase properly. 3. If the temperature increases slowly or does not rise, the circulation filters are clogged or the safety thermostat or heater may malfunction. Safety Thermostat Replacement: See subsection 15.2.5. Processing Tank Heater Replacement: See subsection 15.2.6.



2.3.12 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubrication 1. Shut OFF the system after performing the post-operational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply. 2. Remove the dryer section cover (see subsection 17.1.1).

Drive Chain

3. Wipe grease off the dryer rack drive chain and sprockets. 4. Apply the recommended grease to the drive chain. Recommended Grease: FUJI MINILAB GREASE FOR CHAIN AND GEAR (P/N 891G02003) or equivalent 5. Reinstall the dryer section cover.

E117


3. MESSAGES AND ACTIONS 3.1 Error Indication Rule 3.1.1 3.1.2 3.1.3

Message Number Message Icon X-#### Actions

3.2 Messages and Actions


3.1 Error Indication Rule 3.1.1 Message Number The messages are identified by the following four codes. Symbol

Error

E

Trouble (Error requires action of the service representative.)

W

Mismatching of condition (Error can be corrected by the operator.)

I

Information

X

Software trouble

The first two digits indicate the location or operation of the error occurred. No.

Error Location

11XX

Scanner

12XX

CTC22 circuit board

13XX

Scanner image processing

14XX

Film carrier

15XX

Operation

21XX

Scanner to printer interface

22XX

Printer operation

23XX

Printer control

24XX

Paper feed

25XX

Laser printer

26XX

Processor

3.1.2 Message Icon Icon

Error Errors with code “E” (Take measures after turning OFF the power supply.) Errors with code “E” , “W” or “X” (Error can be recovered.) For code “I” (Informations)

3.1.3 X-#### Actions X-#### errors (software error) Take the following actions. 1. 2. 3. 4.

Write down the error number. Restart the system. Reinstall the software if the problem persists. Create the report in the specified format.


3.2 Messages and Actions No. W-1101

Message Film or mask not installed. Install film or mask.

E-1102

I-1103

Factor (Causes of the error message) 1. A film or mask is not installed. 2. Film leading end sensor/mask sensor -toCYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions 1. Install the film or mask correctly. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

3. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 4. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

No optical magnification calibration data. Optical magnification calibration not done. Consult your technical representative.

An operation such as scanning was attempted without first performing the optical magnification calibration. (Causes of the error message) 1. The calibration that was registered after the lens was exchanged has not been performed.

Carrier installation data will be written into the carrier EEPROM.

Confirmation message before writing data to the EEPROM

–

A scanning operation was attempted without first performing the scanner adjustment/ maintenance.

Perform the scanner correction at the pre-operational check.

1. Perform “Optical Magnification Calibration (43F).”

Do not remove the carrier. W-1104

Scanner correction not performed. Perform the scanner correction in “ 1. Pre-operational Check ”.

W-1105

Carrier not installed correctly or no carrier installed. Install carrier correctly.

W-1107

Carrier upper cover opened. Remove carrier and then close carrier cover.

W-1109

Scanner correction not started because the film or mask exists.

An operation such as scanning was attempted while the carrier was not installed. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier is not installed. 2. Plug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty CTC22 circuit board An operation such as scanning was attempted while the carrier cover was open. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier pressure cover was opened after the carrier was installed. 2. Upper cover open/close sensor (D120) to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D120 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board Scanner correction was attempted with film or mask left installed.

1. Install the carrier. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Remove the carrier and close the pressure cover. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. NC100AC: Remove film. M69D: Install the calibration mask.

Remove film or mask. W-1110

Diffusion box not installed. Install it.

Scanning was attempted without the diffusion box installed. (Causes of the error message) 1. The diffusion box is not set correctly. 2. Faulty diffusion box sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the diffusion box sensor and CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

1. Install the diffusion box correctly. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the harness or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.


3.2 Messages and Actions No.

Message

W-1111

No data for focus calibration. Focus calibration not performed. Perform the focus calibration in “ 3. Scanner Adjustment / Maintenance ” in “ 4. Setup and Maintenance ”.

An operation such as scanning was attempted without first performing the focus calibration. (Causes of the error message) 1. The necessary data set has not been created. 2. The necessary data set was deleted by mistake.

Perform “Focus Calibration (432).”

W-1112

No focus position adjustment data for each carrier. Focus position adjustment for each carrier not performed. Perform the focus position adjustment in “ 3. Scanner Adjustment / Maintenance ” in “ 4. Setup and Maintenance ”.

An operation such as scanning was attempted without first performing the focus position adjustment. (Causes of the error message) 1. The necessary data set has not been created. 2. The necessary data set was deleted by mistake.

Install the correct carrier/mask and perform “Focus Position Adjustment (433).”

I-1114

Measuring.

An operation such as the optical magnification calibration, focus calibration, or LED light amount adjustment is in progress.

Wait until the operation is completed.

Please wait. E-1117

E-1118

W-1120

No lens data registered. Lens registration not performed. Call technical representative.

An operation such as scanning was attempted without the lens data registered. (Causes of the error message) 1. The necessary data set was deleted by mistake.

No optical magnification calibration data. Optical magnification calibration not performed. Call technical representative.

An operation such as scanning was attempted without first performing the optical magnification calibration. (Causes of the error message) 1. The calibration that was registered after the lens was exchanged has not been performed.

Wrong combination of carrier, mask and diffusion box.

The film carrier and diffusion box do not match. (Causes of the error message) 1. 135 diffusion box is installed. 2. Incorrect wiring to the diffusion box sensor (D201, D202)

Install the carrier and diffusion box in a correct combination. W-1121

Factor

Carrier not installed correctly or no carrier installed. Install carrier correctly.

An operation such as scanning was attempted without the carrier installed. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier pressure cover was opened after the carrier was installed. 2. Upper cover open/close sensor (D120) to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D120 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Register “Lens ID No.” and “Lens focal distance” in “Lens Register (43D).”

1. Perform “Optical Magnification Calibration (43F).”

1. Install the 120 diffusion box. 2. Repair or replace the sensor.

1. Remove the carrier and close the pressure cover. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.



Message Film or cartridge remains. Remove the carrier and then take out the film or cartridge.

W-1123

No film. Insert film.

E-1126

DC offset cancel failed. Even in the minimum setting the DC level was beyond the aim range.

Factor An operation such as scanning was attempted with film remaining. (Causes of the error message) 1. The cartridge was left in the carrier. 2. Cartridge sensor (D115) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -toCTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D115 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board (Causes of the error message) 1. Scanning was attempted without the film installed. 2. Film leading end sensor (D101/D104) -toCYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTP22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D101/D104 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board The level is not within the specified range even if the DC level is set to the lower limit. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty CCD, ADC, and image processing section circuit boards 2. Faulty harness between the image processing section and the CCD circuit board 3. Faulty power supply unit

Actions

1. Remove the cartridge. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 1. Set the film. 2. Reconnect the harness or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493)” and follow the instruction found in this menu 493. 2. Repair or replace the harness.

3. Replace the PWR22 circuit board.

*The light source and CTC22 circuit board do not cause this problem. E-1127

DC offset cancel failed. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

The DC offset could not be adjusted normally. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty CCD, ADC, and image processing section circuit boards 2. Blown fuse (FE5, FE7) in the CTC22 circuit board 3. Blown fuse (FH3, FH32, FH38, or FH39) in the PWR22 circuit board

W-1130

The auto light amount adjustment failed because the output in the scanner section is too much. Check the light source, scanner and carrier sections, and then film.

E-1131

DC offset cancel failed. Call technical representative.

The auto light amount adjustment could not be completed in the auto focus mode or during brightness correction. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty CCD, light source, and image processing section circuit boards 2. Faulty power supply unit The level is not within the specified range even if the DC level is set to the upper limit. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty CCD, ADC, and image processing section circuit boards 2. Faulty power supply unit

1. Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493)” and follow the instruction found in this menu 493. 2. Replace the fuse. 3. Replace the fuse.

1. Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493)” and follow the instruction found in this menu 493. 2. Replace the PWR22 circuit board.

1. Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493)” and follow the instruction found in this menu 493. 2. Replace the PWR22 circuit board.



Message Auto focus failed. Check if carrier, film and mask are set correctly.

Factor The auto focus function could not achieve proper focus. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier is not firmly pressed against the carrier base. 2. The film is not firmly pressed.

3. Faulty scanner drive section (Lens/ Conjugate length variable motor) 4. There is an obstacle in the optical path (between the original negative and the lens). 5. The original negative is not set, or the current process focused the optical system on an unexposed part of a film. W-1133

Incorrect carrier ID.

Incorrect carrier is going to be used to perform adjustment/maintenance.

Actions

1. Install the carrier correctly. 2. Check the carrier upper mask for the state, or perform “NC100AC Input/ Output Check (44F)” to check mask pressing operation. 3. Repair the drive section. 4. Remove the obstacle.

5. Set the original negative or check it for the state. Install the correct carrier.

Install correct carrier. W-1135

Incorrect diffusion box. Install the correct diffusion box.

W-1140

Mask not installed. Install mask.

W-1143

The display data will be cleared.

(Causes of the error message) 1. Adjustment was attempted with an incorrect diffusion box. 2. Faulty diffusion box sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the diffusion box sensor and the CTC22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

1. Install the correct diffusion box. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the harness or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

A mask specially designed for the brightness correction is not installed for the spectral calibration, focus position adjustment, or brightness correction.

Install a mask specially designed for the brightness correction.

Data clear confirmation message on operational information data

Press [OK] or [Cancel].

The mechanism is being initialized after the maintenance on a carrier or other parts has been performed.

Wait until the initialization is completed.

The brightness correction for the spectral calibration is going to start.

Install the manual film carrier with the calibration mask and then press [OK].

OK? I-1144

Initializing. Please wait.

I-1145

Perform the bright correction. Install the carrier.

I-1146

Measurement was completed correctly.

The spectral calibration is now completed.

Press [OK].

I-1147

Sensor calibration data will be written into carrier EEPROM.

Confirmation message on writing data into the EEPROM

–

Confirmation message on writing data into the EEPROM

–

Do not remove the carrier. I-1148

Correction data will be written into the carrier EEPROM. Do not remove the carrier.



Message

Factor

E-1152

Communication error occurred.

Timeout occurred between the scanner PC and SH. (Causes of the error message) 1. Communication error due to the SCSI cable between the main control unit and the GHT22 circuit board 2. Faulty GMB22 circuit board 3. The GHT22 circuit board is faulty or the board is not installed correctly. 4. Faulty SCSI board in the main control unit.

Consult your technical representative.

W-1153

Auto-focus failure. Check if carrier, film and mask are installed correctly.

During the auto focus operation, the peak was always at the highest position even though the same operation was tried again. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier is off the surface. 2. The manual film carrier mask is not installed correctly. 3. The film is not pressed correctly against the surface or film curling is excessive. 4. Focus position maladjustment 5. Home position detection failure of the scanner-related mechanism drive section, or other drive system failure

W-1156

Auto-focus failure. Check if carrier, film and mask are installed correctly.

During the auto focus operation, the peak was always at the lowest position even though the same operation was tried again. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier is off the surface. 2. The manual film carrier mask is not installed correctly. 3. The film is not pressed correctly against the surface or film curling is excessive. 4. Focus position maladjustment 5. Home position detection failure of the scanner-related mechanism drive section, or other drive system failure

W-1157

No FD or wrong FD inserted. Insert the calibration FD into the drive.

W-1159

Image data judge error occurred. Insert film again.

Actions

1. Reconnect or replace the cable.

2. Replace the GMB22 circuit board. 3. Reconnect or replace the CHT22 circuit board. 4. Replace the SCSI board in the main control unit.

1. Install the carrier correctly. 2. Install the mask correctly. 3. Confirm whether or not the film is installed. 4. Perform “Focus Position Adjustment (433).” 5. Replace the CCD unit.

1. Install the carrier correctly. 2. Install the mask correctly. 3. Confirm whether or not the film is installed. 4. Perform “Focus Position Adjustment (433).” 5. Replace the CCD unit.

A floppy disk insertion error occurred during the spectral calibration. (Causes of the error message) 1. The floppy disk used for the spectral calibration is not inserted. 2. The data on the floppy disk is corrupted. 3. The FDD in the main control unit is faulty.

1. Insert the correct floppy disk.

Image data criterion error occurred during the spectral calibration. (Causes of the error message) 1. The spectral calibration chart is upside down, inverted or out of sequence. 2. Film type is incorrectly exchanged between the positive and negative films when writing data into a floppy disk. 3. Incorrect chart 4. Incorrect shade

1. Try the operation again after checking the procedure and original used. 2. Try the operation again after checking the original used.

2. Use an error-free floppy disk. 3. Replace the main control unit.

3. Replace or clean the chart. 4. Check whether or not the shield mask and external light satisfy the required conditions.



Message Calculating of adjustment parameter failed. Measurement cancelled.

W-1164

An error occurred during the pre-scan. Measurement cancelled.

Factor A calculation error occurred with a spectral adjustment parameter during the spectral calibration. (Causes of the error message) 1. The spectral calibration chart is upside down, inverted or out of sequence. 2. Film type is incorrectly exchanged between the positive and negative films when writing data into a floppy disk. 3. Incorrect chart 4. Incorrect shade

An error occurred during the pre-scanning process used with the spectral calibration. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software

2. Faulty hardware

W-1165

An error occurred during the fine-scan. Measurement cancelled.

W-1166

An error occurred during the fine-scan. Measurement cancelled.

An error occurred while executing a finescanning used with the spectral calibration. (Causes of the error message) 1. The original and floppy disk do not match. 2. The original is upside down, inverted or out of sequence. 3. The position verification cursor is out of place. 4. Abnormality in the CCD unit 5. Abnormality in the light source An error occurred during the fine-scanning process used with the spectral calibration. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty hardware

W-1169

Wrong mask. Install the mask again.

W-1176

Adjusting of LED light amount failed. Check if the carrier and mask are set correctly.

The 135M mask is not installed when the spectral calibration is performed. (Causes of the error message) 1. A mask other than the specified one is installed. 2. Faulty mask sensor 3. Mask Sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board (Causes of the error message) 1. Foreign matter is caught in the carrier. 2. LED is not lit due to poorly connected or broken harness. 3. Faulty LED 4. Faulty CTC22 circuit board 5. Faulty CCD unit

Actions

1. Try the operation again after checking the procedure and original used. 2. Try the operation again after checking the original used. 3. Replace or clean the chart. 4. Check whether or not the shield mask and external light satisfy the required conditions.

1. Restart the system software. If the error occurs again, reinstall the system software. 2. Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493)” and follow the instruction found in this menu 493. Confirm that the order and contents of the procedure are correct. Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493)” if the hardware is suspected.

1. Restart the system. If the error occurs again, reinstall the system software. 2. Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493)” and follow the instruction found in this menu 493.

1. Install the correct mask. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 1. Remove the foreign matter. 2. Reconnect the harness or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the LED. 4. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CCD unit.



Message Couldn’t perform the scanner correction for this carrier. Install the auto film carrier.

W-1183

Couldn’t perform the scanner correction for this mask. Install the 135F mask in the auto film carrier.

W-1184

Couldn’t do the scanner correction with this mask. Install the calibration mask.

W-1185

Couldn’t perform the scanner correction for this lane.

Factor (Causes of the error message) 1. The pre-operational check was attempted using the SC135A. 2. Faulty carrier position sensor (D121, D122) The 135F mask is not installed in the auto film carrier NC100AC. (Causes of the error message) 1. The 135H mask is installed, or no mask is installed. 2. Faulty mask sensor (D118, D119) (Causes of the error message) 1. The scanner correction was attempted without using the calibration mask for the manual film carrier. 2. Faulty mask sensor (D118, D119) The scanner correction was attempted in the auto film carrier(NC100AC) IX240 feed lane.

Actions 1. Install the NC100AC and re-execute this operation in the 135 feed lane. 2. Replace the sensor.

1. Install the 135F mask and try the operation again. 2. Replace the sensor. 1. Install the calibration mask.

2. Replace the sensor. Switch the feed lane to the 135 feed lane.

Switch to 135 lane. W-1188

Wrong diffusion box. Install the 135 diffusion box or below.

E-1189

I-1190

The scanner correction was attempted using the 120 diffusion box. (Causes of the error message) 1. The combination of the carrier and the diffusion box is inappropriate. 2. Faulty diffusion box sensor (D201, D202)

1. Install the correct diffusion box. 2. Replace the sensor.

A communication error occurred between the input mechanical control CB and image processing CB. (CTC22-GHT22) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

(Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken communication cable 2. Faulty system software 3. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Reading image.

The spectral calibration is in process.

Wait until the spectral calibration is completed.

1. Reconnect or replace the cable. 2. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 3. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

Please wait. I-1191

Cancel measurement?

The spectral calibration is canceled.

Select [OK] or [Cancel].

I-1192

Insert the next film. No.%NUM%

Message that prompts the operator to set the film used for the spectral calibration.

Set the next film for the spectral calibration.

W-1193

Auto light amount adjustment failed due to the lack of light amount.

The auto light amount adjustment, which is used in the auto focus and brightness correction, failed because the LED is not lit, or the light source section failed mechanically. (Causes of the error message) 1. An obstacle is on the diffusion box or in the carrier. 2. The original is too dark (such as an unexposed positive film). 3. The LED is not lit (faulty LED circuit board, harness, and CTC22 circuit board) 4. Abnormality in the image processing section and the circuit boards related to the CCD 5. Faulty power supply unit

Check the light source, scanner and carrier sections, and then film.

1. Remove the obstacle. 2. Check the film. 3. Replace the LED circuit board, the harness, or the CTC22 circuit board. 4. Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493)” and follow the instruction found in this menu 493. 5. Replace the PWR22 circuit board.



Message The pixel sensitivity correction not done. Perform the correction using the 135 lane for auto film carrier. When using the manual film carrier, perform the correction with the calibration mask.

Factor

Actions

When the brightness correction is performed as the scanner maintenance, the light source shading cannot be performed because the pixel sensitivity correction has not been conducted.

Perform the scanner correction in the pre-operational check or the “Pixel Sensitivity Correction” in “Bright Correction (43G).”

I-1203

The correction value registered.

Registration confirmation message displayed when the mask opening position correction is performed.

Press [OK].

I-1204

The setting value stored.

Confirmation display used when setting the monitor frame ratio

Press [OK].

W-1205

Wrong carrier.

A carrier other than the specified one is installed during maintenance or adjustment. (Causes of the error message) 1. A carrier type other than the specified type is used. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the plug-in connector and CTC22 circuit board 3. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Install the correct carrier.

W-1206

Chart pattern not detected.

An error occurred while executing the optical magnification calibration. 1. The reference chart is not installed. 2. The carrier base is out of place.

W-1219

Wrong character type of lens ID.

1. Set the correct carrier. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Install the reference chart and execute the operation. 2. Perform “Optical Axis Adjustment (43E)” and then “Optical Magnification Adjustment (43F).”

Inappropriate characters are entered.

Enter the lens ID as shown in the label on the lens cone.

Seven or more characters were entered as the lens ID in “Lens Registration (43D)”.

Enter the lens ID as shown in the label on the lens cone.

The focal length is outside of the specified range.

Enter as shown in the label on the lens cone.

Enter the correct lens ID. W-1220

Lens ID digit out of range. Enter the correct lens ID.

W-1221

Lens focal point distance out of range. Enter the correct focal point distance.

I-1222

Following adjustment data will be deleted. Perform the following menu again. To start adjustment, set the dedicated chart. “ “ Optical Magnification Calibration ” - “ Focus Calibration ” - “ Focus Position Adjustment ” ”

Registration data to be updated when replacing the lens unit

Re-execute “Optical Magnification Calibration (43F)”, “Focus Calibration (432)”, and “Focus Position Adjustment (433).”

I-1223

Following adjustment data will be deleted. Perform the following menu again. “ “ Focus Calibration ” - “ Focus Position Adjustment ” ”

The operator attempted to register data after executing “Optical Magnification Calibration (43F).”

Re-execute “Focus Calibration (432) ” and “Focus Position Adjustment (433).”


3.2 Messages and Actions No. I-1226

Message Focus calibration is in progress.

Factor

Actions

The focus calibration is being performed as the scanner maintenance.

–

The operator attempted to register data after executing “Focus Calibration (432).”

Re-execute “Focus Position Adjustment (433).”

Press [OK].

Please wait. I-1227

Following adjustment data will be deleted. Perform the following menu again. “Focus Position Adjustment ”

I-1228

DC offset cancel completed normally.

Normal completion message for the DC offset adjustment.

W-1232

The focus position adjustment for this carrier not done.

Message that confirms that the operator has not adjusted the MFC mask (Causes of the error message) 1. The necessary data has not been created.

Perform the focus position adjustment in “ 3. Scanner Adjustment / Maintenance ” in “ 4. Setup and Maintenance ”.

1. Install the correct carrier and mask and perform “Focus Position Adjustment (433).”

I-1234

Insert film.

The operator is requested to insert a film to be used for the focus position adjustment as the scanner maintenance.

Insert film.

I-1235

Focus position adjustment is in progress.

The focus position adjustment is being performed as the scanner maintenance.

Wait until the adjustment is completed.

The warm-up for the LED is not completed 10 minutes after the system startup. (Causes of the error message) Check the warm-up for the LED as per “Input Check (431).” When the temperature cannot be measured: 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between the LTC22 circuit board and the LED 2) Faulty LTC22 circuit board 3) Faulty LED

When the temperature cannot be measured:

When the Peltier element is faulty: 1) Abnormality with the Peltier element

When the Peltier element is faulty: 1) Replace the LED.

When the power is faulty: 1) Blown fuse in the PWR22 circuit board 2) Poorly connected or broken harness between the PWR22 circuit board and the LTC22 circuit board 3) Faulty LTC22 circuit board

When the power is faulty: 1) Replace the fuse. 2) Reconnect the connecter, or repair/ replace the harness.

Please wait. E-1238

Warming-up of the light source not completed. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

W-1242

Auto-exposure adjustment failure. Check the light source, scanner and carrier sections, and then film.

The auto light amount adjustment failed because the light amount was unstable during the auto focus, brightness correction, and so on. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty light source section (such as the light source not lit or there is an obstacle) 2. External light is detected. 3. Abnormality in the CCD circuit board, ADC circuit board, or image processing section 4. Faulty power supply unit

1) Reconnect the connecter, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the LTC22 circuit board. 3) Replace the LED.

3) Replace the LTC22 circuit board.

1.Remove the obstacle or replace the LED, harness, or CTC22 circuit board. 2. Install the shade mask. 3. Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493).” 4. Replace the PWR22 circuit board.


3.2 Messages and Actions No. E-1244

Message OFD auto adjustment failure. Try again or restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Factor The OFD auto adjustment level is not within the target range. (Causes of the error message) 1. The AD timing adjustment has not been performed. 2. Faulty CCD circuit board and the related places 3. Faulty light source section (not lit or dark) 4. Faulty power supply unit

W-1245

Too many gray pixels. Check and clean the optical system.

W-1246

Too large gray pixel. Check and clean the optical system.

(Causes of the error message) 1. There is dust or an obstacle in the diffusion box or scanner optical system. 2. Vignetting is produced during readout and light is not sensed evenly over the whole surface of CCD. 3. Faulty CCD (Causes of the error message) 1. There is dust, dirt or an obstacle in the diffusion box or scanner optical system. 2. There is vignetting. 3. Faulty CCD

Actions

1. Perform the AD timing adjustment 2. Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493).” 3. Replace the LED unit, harness, CTC22 circuit board, or diffusion box. 4. Replace the PWR22 circuit board. 1. Clean the dust or remove the obstacle. 2. Remove the cause of the vignetting.

3. Replace the CCD unit. 1. Clean the dust or remove the obstacle. 2. Remove the cause of the vignetting. 3. Replace the CCD unit.

E-1253

Image processing CB failure. (GIA22) Consult your technical representative.

Writing data to or reading data from the GIA circuit board has detected a failure. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty GIA22 circuit board 2. Faulty GHT22 circuit board (if an error related to another image processing circuit board is included) 3. Faulty GMB22 circuit board (if an error related to another image processing circuit board is included)

Perform “Abnormal Image Check (493)” and then follow the instructions in this self-diagnostic test.

W-1258

Couldn’t perform because the carrier is installed. Remove the carrier and perform it again.

An adjustment such as the OFD auto adjustment was attempted while the carrier was installed.

Remove the carrier and re-execute the operation.

W-1259

Wrong diffusion box.

(Causes of the error message) 1. The operator attempted to perform maintenance using the 135 diffusion box. 2. Incorrect wiring to the diffusion box sensor (D201, D202)

Install the diffusion box for 120 carrier. W-1263

Wrong value.

1. Install the 120 diffusion box. 2.Repair or replace the sensor. Correct the value.

Set the correct value again.

A value outside of the specified range was entered during scanner or carrier maintenance.

I-1265

Writing of data into the carrier EEPROM completed.

Writing data into the EEPROM is now completed.

–

W-1266

Wrong carrier type.

NC100AC-specific maintenance or adjustment was attempted using a carrier other than NC100AC. (Causes of the error message) 1. NC100AC is not set. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the plug-in connector and CTC22 circuit board. 3. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Install the auto film carrier.

1. Install NC100AC. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.



Message Wrong feeding lane. Switch to IX240 lane.

W-1268

Carrier or feeding lane changed. Press the [OK] button to exit, and try again.

E-1269

I-1270

Detecting of leading frame failed.

Light source temperature not stable yet. Do the scanner correction after the temperature is stabled. Press the [END] button to exit the scanner correction. Press the [Run] button to start the scanner correction ignoring the stabilization of the light source temperature.

I-1275

Correcting the scanner.

Factor An operation such as magnetic information readout was attempted while NC100AC is not at the IX240 feed lane. (Causes of the error message) 1. NC100AC is not at the IX240 feed lane. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the IX240 carrier position sensor (D121) and CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty D121 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board The manual film carrier was exchanged to the other type of carrier during spectral calibration. (Causes of the error message) 1. The manual film carrier was exchanged with another type of carrier. 2. The feed lane is changed. 3. Poorly connected plug-in connector or broken harness (Causes of the error message) 1. A film that has not been exposed was used. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the unexposed frame sensor (D108, D109) and CTP22 circuit board. 3. Faulty sensor (D108, D109) 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board The scanner correction was attempted while the LED temperature control was not completed. (Causes of the error message) 1. The optical source stays without the temperature control for longer time than usual because the room temperature is low. 2. Faulty LTC22 circuit board

The scanner correction is in progress.

Actions

1. Set the carrier in the IX240 feed lane. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Install the manual film carrier. 2. Install the carrier correctly. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 1. Check the film for exposure. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Try it again after a while.

2. Replace the LTC22 circuit board.

Wait until the scanner correction is completed.

Please wait. W-1276

Light source shading not done. Perform the scanner correction in “ 1. Pre-operational Check ”.

W-1277

LED light amount adjustment not done. Perform the LED light amount adjustment in “ 3. Scanner Adjustment / Maintenance ” in “ 4. Setup and Maintenance ”.

The light source shading correction table does not exist. (Causes of the error message) 1. While the auto film carrier was used, the film was inserted by suspending the light source shading on the print screen. The table used to adjust the LED light amount is unavailable. (Causes of the error message) 1.The LED light amount is not adjusted.

2. Foreign matter is caught in the carrier. 3. Faulty LED 4. Malfunction of the CCD shutter

1. Switch the film feed lane or perform the pre-operational check.

1. Perform the adjustments in the order of “LED Light Amount Adjustment (43L)” and “Spectral Calibration (43J).” 2. Remove the foreign matter. 3. Replace the LED. 4. Replace the CCD unit.



Message Mask removed. Processing cancelled.

W-1279

Diffusion box removed.

Factor The mask is out of place. (Causes of the error message) 1. The mask was removed while the scanner was being corrected. 2. Mask sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty mask sensor 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Processing cancelled.

The diffusion box was out of place. (Causes of the error message) 1. The diffusion box was removed. 2. Faulty diffusion box sensor (D201, D202) 3. Faulty diffusion box

W-1280

Film inserted. Processing cancelled. Install the carrier again.

The carrier needs to be removed because the film was installed during a scanner correction.

W-1283

Scanner correction not performed.

The pixel sensitivity correction table does not exist. (Causes of the error message) 1. The operator attempted to perform scanning without first performing the scanner correction.

Perform the correction using the 135 lane for auto film carrier. When using the manual film carrier, perform the correction with the calibration mask. W-1289

No film in the mask opening.

E-1301

E-1302

E-1303

1. Install the mask and try it again. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Install the diffusion box. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Repair or replace the diffusion box. Remove the film, release the lock lever, and then lock it again.

1. Perform the pre-operational check, or “Bright Correction (43G).”

(Causes of the error message) 1. The leading frame was set while there was no film at the mask opening section. 2. Faulty film sensor

1. Take the film out and try the operation again. 2. Replace the sensor.

Image processing CB not detected. (GIA22) Consult your technical representative.

(Causes of the error message) 1. The GIA22 circuit board is not installed correctly. 2. The GHT22 circuit board is not installed correctly. 3. Faulty GMB22 circuit board

1. Correctly install the GIA22 circuit board. 2. Correctly install the GHT22 circuit board. 3. Replace the GMB22 circuit board.

Image processing section failure. Image processing not completed. (GPA22) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Errors in the GPA22 DSP processing (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software

Image processing not completed within the time. (GPA22) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Timeout in the GPA22-DSP processing (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software

Communication error occurred in image processing. (GPA22) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Abnormal end in the GPA22-DSP processing (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software

Insert it again. E-1295

Actions

2. Faulty GPA22 circuit board 3. Faulty GMB22 circuit board 4. Faulty GHT22 circuit board



1. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 2. Replace the GPA22 circuit board. 3. Replace the GMB22 circuit board. 4. Replace the GHT22 circuit board.





Message %MAGAZINE% not installed or paper end processing in progress. Install the magazine, and then start printing.

W-1407

W-1408

Communication error occurred in image processing. (GPA22) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Back print cannot be performed with specified paper. Press [Continue] to perform printing without back print.

Factor The magazine is not installed. (Causes of the error message) 1. The magazine is not set. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board The widths of the print size and the magazine paper do not match. (Causes of the error message) 1. A magazine whose size does not match the print size is installed. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board Back printing is specified with medium weight paper. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect magazine or incorrect print mode 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

W-1410

An error occurred during the auto correction. Do the pre-scan again.

An error occurred during the auto setup for a roll of film. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

W-1411

An error occurred during the auto correction. Do the pre-scan again.

An error occurred during the auto setup for a frame. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

W-1417

An error occurred during creating of image.

An error occurred during the auto setup. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software

Do the pre-scan again. 2. Faulty main control unit W-1418

%MAGAZINE% not installed or paper end processing in progress. Install the magazine, and then start printing.

The index format consistency check detected absence of the magazine. (Causes of the error message) 1. The magazine is not installed. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Actions

1. Set the magazine. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the harness or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Set an appropriate magazine. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Set an appropriate magazine, or change the print size. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 2. Replace the main control unit.

1. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the same problem occurs again. 2. Replace the main control unit.


1. Set an appropriate magazine. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.



Message

Factor

W-1419

Selected paper width and index print size mismatched.

The paper size does not match in the index format consistency check. (Causes of the error message) 1. The magazine currently installed does not match the print size. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Press the [OK] button and replace magazine, or change the index format. If you press [Output], an incorrect index print will be outputted. I-1420

I-1421

Printer processor is busy, so post-operational check not performed.

(Causes of the error message) 1. The output section was busy printing when the post-operational check started.

Upon completion of printing, perform “3. Post-operational check”.

2. Faulty system software

Printer processor is busy.

(Causes of the error message) 1. An incorrect operating message (printing is in process, jammed paper is being run out, warm-up is in process) 2. Faulty system software

Please wait a moment, and then perform “3. Post-operational check”.

3. Faulty main control unit

3. Faulty main control unit W-1422

A communication error occurred between the main control section and printer processor.

A message saying that the output section did not respond is received when the postoperational check started. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI cable between the main control unit and the GHT22 circuit board 2. Faulty system software 3. Faulty GHT22 circuit board 4. Faulty main control unit

E-1425

Initializing of printer processor failed. Consult your technical representative. Press [End] to shut down the system. Press the [Stand-alone] button to start up the scanner only at the next start-up.

W-1427

A communication error occurred between the main control section and printer processor. Check the connection, and then press the [Retry] button.

The output device initialization failed when the system started (interface or communication error) 1. Communication error between the main control unit and the GHT circuit board 2. Faulty system software

3. 4. 5. 6.

Blown fuse (FH12, FH24, FH25, FH27) Faulty GHT22 circuit board Faulty CTP22 circuit board Faulty main control unit

A magazine status acquisition error occurred during the system startup. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. A SCSI cable breakage or poorly contacting connector between the main control unit and the GHT22 circuit board 3. Faulty CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty main control unit 5. Blown fuse (FH11, FH24, FH25, FH27, FH29, or FH30) in the PWR22 circuit board

Actions

1. Install the correct magazine. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connecter, or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 1. Perform the post-operational check after the print process has been completed. 2.Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 3. Replace the main control unit. 1. Perform the post-operational check when the printer finishes printing. 2. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the same problem occurs again. 3. Replace the main control unit.

1. Connect the cable correctly or replace it. 2. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 3. Replace the GHT22 circuit board. 4. Replace the main control unit.

1. Connect the SCSI cable correctly or replace it. 2. Restart the system software. If the error occurs again, reinstall the system software. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the GHT22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 6. Replace the main control unit.

1. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the same problem occurs again. 2. Reconnect or replace the cable.

3. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 4. Replace the main control unit. 5. Replace the fuse.



Message

W-1428

A communication error occurred between the main control section and printer processor. Check the connection, and then press the [Retry] button.

E-1432

Communication error occurred between main controller and image processor. (Sending parameter failed) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Factor Failed to acquire the magazine status when the system was started. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Poorly connected or broken SCSI cable between the main control unit and the GHT22 circuit board 3. Poorly connected or broken serial cable between the GHT22 circuit board and the GTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board 5. Faulty main control unit 6. Blown fuse (FH11, FH24, FH25, FH27, FH29, or FH30) in the PWR22 circuit board A SCSI communication error occurred when image processing conditions for a frame were transferred to the GMB22 circuit board. (Causes of the error message) 1. A SCSI cable breakage or poorly contacting connector between the main control unit and the GHT22 circuit board 2. Faulty system software 3. Faulty GHT22 circuit board 4. Faulty main control unit

E-1433

E-1434

W-1436

Communication error occurred between main controller and image processor. (Image processing control failure) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

An error occurred when the JOB list (Do FineIp_xxx) started. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI cable 2. Faulty system software

A communication error occurred between the main control section and image processing section. (Image processing CB failure) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

The JOB list failed. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI cable 2. Faulty system software

Software error.

An index frame image could not be edited correctly. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software

Restart the system.

3. Poorly connected or faulty GHT22 circuit board 4. Poorly connected or faulty GPA22 circuit board 5. Poorly connected or faulty GMB22 circuit board 6. Faulty main control unit

3. Poorly connected or faulty GHT22 circuit board 4. Poorly connected or faulty GPA22 circuit board 5. Poorly connected or faulty GMB22 circuit board 6. Faulty main control unit.


Actions

1. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 2. Reconnect or replace the cable.


4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 5. Replace the main control unit. 6. Replace the fuse.


2. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the same problem occurs again. 3. Replace the GHT22 circuit board. 4. Replace the main control unit.

1. Reconnect or replace the cable. 2. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 3. Check the GHT22 circuit board for good contact or replace it. 4. Check the GPA22 circuit board for good contact or replace it. 5. Check the GMB22 circuit board for good contact or replace it. 6. Replace the main control unit.

1. Reconnect or replace the cable. 2. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 3. Check the GHT22 circuit board for good contact or replace it. 4. Check the GPA22 circuit board for good contact or replace it. 5. Check the GMB22 circuit board for good contact or replace it. 6. Replace the main control unit.




Message Software error. Restart the system.

Factor The HW parameters could not be acquired correctly from SIP. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

W-1439

Software error. Restart the system.

SIP index print image could not be processed correctly. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

W-1440


SIP index print image could not be obtained correctly. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

W-1442


E-1443

Communication error occurred between main controller and image processor. (Parameter setting error) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

An error (DoFinelp_xxx) occurred when a JOB list started. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software

Do the pre-scan again.

Reading of parameter from the image-processing module failed. Do the pre-scan again.


A SCSI error occurred when transferring the image process condition and image process start commands into the GMB22 circuit board during file print such as index or DSC print. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI cable


An error occurred in GMB22 circuit board during pre-scanning. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty power supply to GMB22 circuit board 2. Poorly connected or broken SCSI cable 3. Faulty system software 4. Faulty GMB22 circuit board 5. Faulty main control unit

W-1446



3. Poorly connected or faulty GHT22 circuit board 4. Poorly connected or faulty GPA22 circuit board 5. Poorly connected or faulty GMB22 circuit board 6. Faulty main control unit Pre-scan not done correctly.



2. Faulty system software

W-1445

Actions

A scan data parameter error from SIP occurred during the consistency check. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

2. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 3. Check the GHT22 circuit board for good contact or replace it. 4. Check the GPA22 circuit board for good contact or replace it. 5. Check the GMB22 circuit board for good contact or replace it. 6. Replace the main control unit.

1. Inspect or repair the power supply system for the GMB22 circuit board.. 2. Reconnect or replace the cable. 3. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the same problem occurs again. 4. Replace the GMB22 circuit board. 5. Replace the main control unit.




Message FID cannot be read. Press the [Cancel] button to rewind the film. Check CID and then insert the film again.

Factor An error occurred while reading FID. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dusty film transfer path 2. The mask position is out of adjustment.

3. The optical axis is out of adjustment. W-1448

Back printer unit not installed. Install back printer properly.

W-1449

No valid frame detected during frame detection. Do the pre-scan again.

W-1450

Error occurred while reading magnetic information. Clean the magnetic head and then try pre-scan again.

I-1451

Film reversed.

The back printer is not set up correctly. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect back printer setup position. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the back printing set sensor and the CTP22 circuit board. 3. Faulty back printing set sensor 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board The number of detected frames was zero. (Causes of the error message) 1. The optical path is obstructed during the brightness correction while the preoperational check is being conducted. 2. Faulty LED 3. Faulty CCD unit Magnetic information read error (Causes of the error message) 1. Magnetic information on the film is corrupted. 2. Dirty magnetic head 3. Faulty magnetic head The 135 film was reversely loaded.

Actions

1. Clean the film feed path. 2. Perform the mask position correction as per “Mask Position Adjustment (441).” 3. Perform the optical axis adjustment as per “Optical Axis Adjustment (43E).”

1. Correctly set up the back printer. 2. Reconnect the connector. Repair or replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Perform the scanner correction at the pre-operational check. 2. Replace the LED. 3. Replace CCD unit.

1. Check the film for this problem. 2. Clean the magnetic head. 3. Replace the magnetic head. Load the film correctly.

Press the [Scan Cancel] key to eject the film, and insert it again. I-1453

Film bar code cannot be read. Process continued.

Illegible 135 barcode (Causes of the error message) 1. The mask position is out of adjustment.

2. Dusty 135 film feed path 3. A film with notch was inserted. 4. Blown fuse (FH3) in the PWR22 circuit board I-1455

Magnetic data registered on film failure. Continue the process ignoring the magnetic information.

W-1461

Reading of image file failed.

Magnetic information data error (Causes of the error message) 1. Magnetic information on the film is corrupted. 2. Dirty magnetic head 3. Faulty magnetic head

Mask type not recognized correctly. Install the mask again.

1. Check the film for this problem. 2. Clean the magnetic head. 3. Replace the magnetic head.

File print image cannot be obtained from the DI Controller.

1. Check the image file and the file format. 2. Restart the DI Controller.

The carrier mask type sent from the scanner SS is incorrect.

Set the mask correctly.

Image import printing cancelled. W-1468

1. Perform the mask position correction as per “Mask Position Correction (441).” 2. Clean the 135 film feed path. 3. Continue the process. 4. Replace the fuse.



Message

W-1471

Image file cannot be generated. Image export printing cancelled.

Factor An image file used for digital image export cannot be created. (Disk FULL, etc.) (Causes of the error message) 1. The hard disk in the DI Controller is full. 2. Communication errors with the DI Controller.

W-1473

Incorrect template. Delete all templates stored in HD and register them again.

Composite formats to be sent to the extended SIP cannot be set. (Causes of the error message) 1. The hard disk in the Frontier is full. 2. Faulty hard disk in the Frontier.

W-1475

Template and paper widths mismatched. Press the [OK] button, and then replace magazine.

I-1476

Film with FTPM loaded.

The template width and the magazine paper do not match. (Causes of the error message) 1. A magazine that matches the print size is not set. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Actions

1. Delete the unnecessary files and reexecute it again. 2. Perform the pre-operational check.

1. Delete all templates and re-register them. 2. Replace the main control unit.

1. Set the correct magazine. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connecter, or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

A film with FTPM specified is loaded.

–

Perform printing with FTPM. I-1477

“Series Scene” film loaded.

A film with Series Scene specified is loaded.

–

W-1478

“Series Scene” magnetic information failure. Continue process.

The Series Scene magnetic information does not comply with the RedBook. (Causes of the error message) 1. Magnetic information on the film is corrupted. 2. Dirty magnetic head 3. Faulty magnetic head

1. Check the film for this problem.

Template and print sizes specified in frame/ character print do not match.

Change the print size or template so that both sizes match.

The specified cropping area is out of the range.

Set the cropping area so that it is within the range.

W-1479

Template image size does not match print size.

2. Clean the magnetic head. 3. Replace the magnetic head.

Confirm print size and template size. W-1480

Cannot be printed with this cropping. Re-crop within the image area.

E-1481

Hard disk failure occurred during the data copy. Data copy cancelled. Consult your technical representative.

A hard disk error occurred when data was copied during the post-operational check. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

E-1482

Hard disk failure occurred. Consult technical representative.

A hard disk error was detected when file was imported from or exported to the imaging controller. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit





Message Index image data cannot be read. Consult technical representative.

Factor An image data file used for the index edition cannot be read. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

W-1484

Initializing of printer processor failed. Press the [Stand-alone] button, and only the film scanner will be started up.

The output device initialization failed during the system startup. (Causes of the error message) 1. A SCSI cable breakage or poorly contacting connector between the main control unit and the GHT22 circuit board 2. Faulty system software 3. Blown fuse (FH12, FH24, FH25, or FH27) in the PWR22 circuit board 4. Faulty GHT22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

W-1485

Couldn’t generate image file due to insufficient disk space. Please wait a moment and then press the [Retry] button. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

An image file used for digital image export cannot be created. (The hard disk on the DI Controller is full, and so on.) (FDi) (Causes of the error message) 1. The hard disk in the DI Controller has insufficient space. 2. Faulty system software 3. Faulty DI Controller software 4. Faulty hard disk in the DI Controller

W-1486

Writing image file failed. Check the network connections and press the [Retry] button. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

W-1487

Selected print size and paper width mismatched. Press [OK] to change magazine, or change print size. Press [Output] to output forcibly.

W-1488

Template and paper widths mismatched. Press [OK] and replace magazine. Press [Output] to output forcibly.

An image file failed to be output because the network is open. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected communication cables 2. Communication network failure (Causes of the error message) 1. The widths of the print size and the paper in the magazine do not match. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22circuit board 4. Faulty CTP22circuit board (Causes of the error message) 1. The widths of the template and the paper in the magazine do not match. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTP22circuit board

Actions



2. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the same problem occurs again. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the GHT22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Re-execute it after a while or delete the unnecessary files from the DI Controller. 2. Restart the system software. 3. Restart the DI Controller. Reinstall the software if the problem occurs again. 4. Replace the hard disk in the DI Controller.

1. Reconnect the cable. 2. Repair or replace the communication network. 1. Set the widths of the print size and the paper in the magazine correctly. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair or replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTP22circuit board. 1. Set the widths of the template and the paper in the magazine correctly. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair or replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTP22circuit board.



Message Carrier not installed. Install carrier and press [OK].

W-1494

An error occurred in calling the exposure condition retrieve. Return to the state just after the pre-scan.

Factor An operation such as scanning was attempted without a carrier installed. (Causes of the error message) 1. A carrier is not installed. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the plug-in connector and the CTC22circuit board 3. Faulty carrier 4. Blown fuse (FH7) in the PWR22 circuit board An error occurred when the exposure conditions were retrieved. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

W-1495

Select the correct magazine paper type. Press [Output] to output forcibly.

The magazine paper type (surface type or emulsion type) does not match. (Causes of the error message) 1. The magazine does not match the print size. 2. Faulty magazine ID sensor 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 board 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Actions

1. Install a carrier. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the carrier 4. Replace the fuse.


1. Set the correct magazine. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connecter, or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

I-1501

Selected function cannot be used.

The function currently not available was selected.

–

I-1502

Insert the floppy disk into the FD drive.

A message that requests the operator to exchange the floppy disk during data backup

Insert a floppy disk and then press [OK].

W-1503

The floppy disk not inserted, so writing not performed.

A floppy disk is not inserted during data backup to floppy disk. (Causes of the error message) 1. A floppy disk is not inserted. 2. Faulty floppy disk drive

Insert the correct floppy disk into the FD drive. I-1504

Insert the next floppy disk into the FD drive.

Message that prompts the operator to insert the next floppy disk when backing up data to more than one floppy disk.

W-1505

Incorrect floppy disk. Couldn’t perform writing.

The inserted floppy disk was inappropriate. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty floppy disk 2. The inserted floppy disk is set to the read only mode. 3. Faulty floppy disk drive

Insert the correct floppy disk into the FD drive. E-1506

Reading of control information file failed. Couldn’t display the selected screen. To use this function, consult your technical representative.

The file necessary to display data on the screen could not be read. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software

2. Faulty main control unit I-1507

Data backup completed abnormally.

Failed to back up data. (Causes of the error message) 1. The FD is faulty. 2. The FD is set to the read only mode. 3. There is an insufficient disk space in the hard disk in the main control unit.

1. Insert a floppy disk. 2. Replace the main control unit. Insert the next floppy disk and then press [OK].

1. Insert an error free floppy disk. 2. Set the floppy to the write enable mode. 3. Replace the main control unit.

1. Restart the system software. If the error occurs again, reinstall the system software. 2. Replace the main control unit.

1. Use a new FD. 2. Set the FD to the write enable mode. 3. Delete the unnecessary files.



Message

Factor

I-1508

Data backup is canceled.

The process used to stop backing up data through an operator request.

W-1510

Date value exceeds the limit. (1998/01/01 00:00:00 - 2040/12/ 31 23:59:59) Set the correct date.

The date entered exceeds the limit value. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrectly entered date 2. Faulty system software


W-1512

Next timer-ON time exceeds the limit. (1998/01/01 00:00:00 - 2040/12/ 31 23:59:59) Confirm the present time.

The FD free space insufficient. Insert the correct floppy disk into the FD drive.

W-1513

Unsorted print remains.

The next system startup time exceeds the limit value. Check the present time. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect present time 2. Faulty system software

Actions –

1. Enter the current date correctly. 2. Restart the system software. If the error occurs again, reinstall the system software. 3. Replace the main control unit.


1. Enter the present date correctly. 2. Restart the system software. If the error occurs again, reinstall the system software. 3. Replace the main control unit.

The FD currently being used has no disk space available. (Causes of the error message) 1. The floppy disk is full. 2. Faulty floppy disk drive

1. Insert an empty FD. 2. Replace the main control unit.

The data was not sorted when the job was completed.

Press the [Sort] key.

Perform sorting. W-1521

PU800B is not turned ON or is disconnected. Check the connection with PU800B, press the [Retry] button.

W-1522

PU800B is not turned ON or is disconnected. Check the connection with PU800B, press the [Retry] button.

W-1523

PU800B is not turned ON or is disconnected. Check the connection with PU800B, press [Retry] to retry. To stop printing of the price table, press the [Stop] button.

W-1524

Couldn’t read the backup data for PU800B. Check the connection with PU800B.

Communication error occurred when downloading data from the PU800B. (Causes of the error message) 1. The power for PU800B is turned off. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness of the PU800B communication cable

1. Turn the PU800B power on. 2. Connect the cable correctly or replace the cable.

Communication error occurred when uploading data to the PU800B. (Causes of the error message) 1. The power for PU800B is turned off. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness of the PU800B communication cable


Communication error occurred when sending the bill of charges for the PU800B. (Causes of the error message) 1. The power for PU800B is turned off. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness of the PU800B communication cable


A file read error occurred when downloading data from the PU800B. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software


Couldn’t write to the backup data for PU800B. Check the connection with PU800B.

A file write error occurred when uploading data to the PU800B. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software






Message

Factor

I-1526

Production information log file not found. A new file will be created.

A read error occurred while reading data from the production information log file.

W-1527

Production information cannot be written into file.

An error occurred while writing data on the production information log file. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software

To use this function, consult your technical representative.


FDi device registration failed. Check the network connections, and then press the [Retry] button.

W-1532

Registering with FDi not done. To register it, perform the “1. Pre-operational Check”.

W-1533

The image file output is stopped.

An error occurred while registering the FDIA logical output device (This problem can be recovered). (Causes of the error message) 1. The DI controller power is turned off. 2. Poorly connected LAN cable 3. Faulty software on the DI controller 4. Faulty main control unit on the DI controller side.

Actions –


1. 2. 3. 4.

Start the DI controller. Connect the LAN cable correctly. Reinstall the software. Replace the main control unit.

An error occurred while registering the FDIA logical output device with the external input enabled.

Perform the pre-operational check.

Failed to print the external input data.

Try to input data from the external source again.

Resume printing by selecting “Digital Image” as “Input Device”. W-1534

Order not unlocked. Check the network connections, and then press the [Retry] button.

A communication error occurred on the DI controller side while the Frontier was processing an order. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Faulty software on the DI controller

W-1535

Couldn’t provide the service. Check the network connections, and then press the [Retry] button.

A communication error occurred on the DI controller side while the Frontier was processing an order. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Faulty software on the DI controller

E-1536

Error occurred during the order completion. Incorrect order status.

An inappropriate status was detected because there was no device authority. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty software on the DI controller

Change the status in the DI Controller. E-1537

An error occurred in the DI Controller. Couldn’t provide the service. Consult technical representative.

Other errors in the FDIA (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty software on the DI controller

1. Connect the LAN cable correctly. 2. Restart the DI controller. If the error occurs again, reinstall the software.


1. Restart the DI controller. If the error occurs again, reinstall the software.




Message Registering with FDi not done. To register it, perform the “1. Pre-operational Check”.

E-1539

Error occurred during the order end process. The status shows “Wait to delete”.

Factor The FDIA logical output device is not registered. (Causes of the error message) 1. The pre-operational check has not been conducted. The order was already queued to be deleted. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty software on the DI controller

Actions

1. Perform the pre-operational check.


Change the status in the DI Controller. I-1540

No order of the selected paper width.

Any order cannot be printed with the lab-in.

W-1541

Couldn’t provide the service.

A communication error occurred on the DI controller side while the Frontier was processing an order. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected LAN cable

Check the network connections, and then press the [Retry] button.

2. Faulty software on the DI controller W-1542


An error occurred due to the status changes during normal printing. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Faulty software on the DI controller

W-1543


An error occurred due to the status changes during abnormal printing. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Faulty software on the DI controller

W-1544


W-1545


W-1546


An error occurred when the message informing that one order had finished was received. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Faulty software on the DI controller An error occurred while the order was being deleted. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Faulty software on the DI controller An error occurred when the status changed while no orders were registered. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Faulty software on the DI controller

Change the paper magazine appropriate for the external input.









Message Couldn’t provide the service. Check the network connections, and then press the [Retry] button.

W-1548

Printer processor not in standby. Check the network connections, and then press the [Retry] button. To cancel the image import, press the [Cancel] button.

E-1549

E-1551

E-1552

E-1553

E-1554

W-1556

Factor An error occurred while an order was being read. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Faulty software on the DI controller An error occurred when an image file was printed (while the external input was selected). (Causes of the error message) 1. The printer section was not in the standby mode while the external input was selected.

Actions


1. Set the printer to the standby mode and press [Retry].

Error occurred while deleting the order. The status of the order to be deleted does not become “Creating”. Change the status on the DI Controller.

Every order except for the one currently being registered is deleted. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty software on the DI controller

Dialog cannot be displayed. Message definition file not found or defective. To use this function, consult your technical representative.

The function used to manage character string resource returned an error while a dialog was being generated. (Causes of the error message) 1. The message file is corrupted. 2. Faulty hard disk

1. Reinstall the system software. 2. Replace the main control unit.

Could not start up the Red-eye/ Soft/Cross plug-in. The Red-eye/Soft/Cross plug-in not installed or the file may be corrupted. To use this function, consult your technical representative.

An error occurred when starting Red Eye/ Soft/Cross plug-in. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software (A1) 2. Faulty Variety Print software (B1) 3. Faulty hard disk

1. Reinstall the system software. 2. Reinstall the software. 3. Replace the main control unit.

Couldn’t continue the Red-eye/ Soft/Cross. Could not find the file that was required for the Red-eye/Soft/ Cross plug-in or the file may be corrupted. To use this function, consult your technical representative.

A read error occurred while Red Eye/Soft/ Cross plug-in was being read. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software (A1) 2. Faulty Variety Print software (B1) 3. Faulty hard disk


Couldn’t continue the Red-eye/ Soft/Cross. Could not create the file that was required for the Red-eye/ Soft/Cross plug-in. Could not create the file that was required for the Red-eye/ Soft/Cross plug-in. To use this function, consult your technical representative.

A write error occurred while Red Eye/Soft/ Cross plug-in was being written. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software (A1) 2. Faulty Variety Print software (B1) 3. Faulty hard disk


This frame cannot be selected.

A mounted print frame number does not match the specified one. (Causes of the error message) 1. Large index or template frame number does not match the specified one. 2. A frame number could not be read.

1. Specify the frame number that matches the template. 2. Reinstall the film.

Frame No. to specify template not matched. Select another frame again.




Message

Factor

Actions

W-1566

Printing the image file. Couldn’t perform the pre-scan. Eject film. After printing of the image file, insert the film.

Pre-scanning was attempted while an image file was being exported.

Install the film after the process has been completed.

E-1571

Message definition file not found or defective.

An error occurred while reading the character string resource. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software (A1) 2. Faulty hard disk


Check message definition file. W-1574

Frame with selected No. already mounted. Frame overwritten.

A frame was overwritten although the numbered frame was already mounted.

W-1580

Editing error log info failed.

An error occurred while editing error log information. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected communication cable 2. Faulty system software (A1) 3. Faulty hard disk

1. Connect the cable correctly. 2. Reinstall the system software. 3. Replace the main control unit.

An error occurred while editing working information. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected communication cable 2. Faulty system software (A1) 3. Faulty hard disk


An error occurred while editing the system configuration information. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected communication cable 2. Faulty system software (A1) 3. Faulty hard disk


An error occurred while editing quality information. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected communication cable 2. Faulty system software (A1) 3. Faulty hard disk


An error occurred while acquiring premaintenance data. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected communication cable 2. Faulty system software (A1) 3. Faulty hard disk


Data is being loaded from the registry.

Wait until the process is completed.

Data is being saved to the registry.


The frame specified by an invoice cannot be detected.

Confirm whether or not the film is installed.

W-1581

W-1583

W-1584

W-1585

I-1587

Editing working information failed.

Editing system information failed.

Editing quality information failed.

Reading of received data failed. Sending of the MI NETWORK mail canceled.

Reading print mag. fine adjust data.

–

Please wait. I-1588

Saving print mag. fine adjust data. Please wait.

W-1591

Frame specified on invoice not detected. Check the film.



Message %TEMPLATE%.

Factor

Actions

The template is being set.



Please wait.

This message is displayed while reading the service name list used for image file export/ import.

Start the connection with DI Controller, and update the data.

This message is displayed while registering the logical device.

–

Please wait. I-1594

I-1595

Reading service name list.

Press [OK] to start. E-1596

Couldn’t provide the service. Check the network connections.

W-1597

I-1598

A FDi error occurred while reading a service name list. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected LAN cable 2. Faulty software on the DI controller

The service type is not selected, so pre-scan not performed. Film is ejected. Select the service type, and then insert the film.

Pre-scanning was performed in a mode other than the image file export while the scanner was set to the stand-alone mode. (Causes of the error message) 1. Digital image export has not been selected.

Processing Red-eye/Soft/Cross %HQ%.

Red eye/Soft/Cross startup is in progress.


1. Select the external output. –

Please wait. E-1599

An error occurred. Couldn’t continue the “Red-eye/ Soft/Cross”. Complete the “Red-eye/Soft/ Cross” plug-in.

W-1701

This is the last frame. Press [OK] to feed out film.

Red eye/Soft/Cross failed to start up. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier or mask is removed during Red eye/Soft/Cross startup. 2. Faulty system software (A1) 3. Faulty Variety Print software (B1) 4. Faulty hard disk

1. Restart Red eye/Soft/Cross plug-in. 2. Reinstall the system software. 3. Reinstall the software. 4. Replace the main control unit.

When the film mode is “Manual,” the [START/ ENTER] key was pressed at the last frame of the film.

Press [OK] to terminate the operation or press the frame return key to return to the previous frame.

W-1702

The carrier or mask removed, so the custom setting information is not displayed correctly. The related dialog(s) closed. Install the carrier or mask, and then try again.

The carrier or mask was removed while the dialog box related to the custom setting was displayed.

Correctly install the carrier or mask and then perform the custom setting again.

W-1703

Invalid custom setting. Changed to master settings.

The selected custom setting number is invalid.

Print with the master settings or select a correct custom setting number.

E-1710

Templates are not available for the bordered print.

When Mounted print/Frame characters is selected , and when a print size for “Bordered print” is selected (Causes of the error message) 1. A print size with “Bordered print” is selected.

Select the borderless print size.

1. Change the print size to “Borderless.”



W-1752

Message %REALTIME_START% Could not start displaying the image. Film is ejected.

%REALTIME_OKEND% Could not adjust determine the image position.

Factor The real-time display is unavailable. (Causes of the error message) 1. A template used for mounted print or frame/character is being installed. 2. The “Output destination selection” screen is being displayed for exporting image file. 3. The “Original selection” screen is being displayed. 4. The template selection screen for mounted print or frame/character is being displayed. 5. Exporting image files is in progress. 6. The manual film carrier is installed during the single scan digitizing. 7. The carrier or mask type does not fit for the composite type. 8. The “Image preview” screen used for mounted print or frame/character is being displayed. 9. The batch retrieval of exposure conditions is in progress. (Causes of the error message) 1. A template used for mounted print or frame/character is being installed. 2. The “Output destination selection” screen is being displayed for exporting image file. 3. The “Original selection” screen is being displayed. 4. The template selection screen for mounted print or frame/character is being displayed. 5. Exporting image files is in progress. 6. The manual film carrier is installed during the single scan digitizing. 7. The carrier or mask type does not fit for the composite type. 8. The “Image preview” screen used for mounted print or frame/character is being displayed. 9. The batch retrieval of exposure conditions is in progress.

Actions

1. Wait until the template setting finishes. 2. Select the output destination using the “Output destination selection” screen. 3. Close the “Original selection” screen. 4. Select the template using the template selection screen, and then wait until it is set. 5. Wait until the file is output. 6. Set the auto film carrier. 7. Install the carrier or mask corresponding to the composite type. 8. Close the “Image preview” screen.

9. Close the “Exposure condition retrieve setup” screen. 1. Wait until the template setting finishes. 2. Select the output destination using the “Output destination selection” screen. 3. Close the “Original selection” screen. 4. Select the template using the template selection screen, and then wait until it is set. 5. Wait until the file is output. 6. Set the auto film carrier. 7. Install the carrier or mask corresponding to the composite type. 8. Close the “Image preview” screen.

9. Close the “Exposure condition retrieve setup” screen.



W-1754

W-1762

Message %REALTIME_START% Couldn’t start pre-scan. Film is ejected.

Factor The pre-scanning cannot be performed. (Causes of the error message) The film was inserted under the condition that the wait time for the leading frame position determination is 0 second. 1. A template used for mounted print or frame/character is being installed. 2. The “Output destination selection” screen is being displayed for exporting image file. 3. The “Original selection” screen is being displayed. 4. The template selection screen for mounted print or frame/character is being displayed. 5. Exporting image files is in progress. 6. The manual film carrier is installed during the single scan digitizing. 7. The carrier or mask type does not fit for the composite type. 8. The “Image preview” screen used for mounted print or frame/character is being displayed. 9. The batch retrieval of exposure conditions is in progress.

Actions

1. Wait until the template setting finishes. 2. Select the output destination using the “Output destination selection” screen. 3. Close the “Original selection” screen. 4. Select the template using the template selection screen, and then wait until it is set. 5. Wait until the file is output. 6. Set the auto film carrier. 7. Install the carrier or mask corresponding to the composite type. 8. Close the “Image preview” screen.

9. Close the “Exposure condition retrieve setup” screen.

Couldn’t provide the service. Check the network connections. If the network connections are correct, consult your technical representative.

An error occurred while a service name list was being read. (Causes of the error message) 1. The DI controller power is turned off. 2. Poorly connected LAN cable 3. Faulty software on the DI controller 4. Faulty main control unit on the DI controller side

“Print Mode Select” cannot be done while the scanned image is mounted.

A different type of service was requested while a mounted or frame/character printing was in progress.

Wait until one sheet of mounted print is completed, or select [Print] or [Cancel] on the image preview screen.

The process in progress was forcibly terminated while a mounted or frame/ character printing was in progress.

Wait until one sheet of mounted print is completed, or select [Print] or [Cancel] on the image preview screen.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Start the DI controller. Connect the LAN cable correctly. Reinstall the software. Replace the main control unit.

Complete a mounted print, or press the [Print] or the [Cancel] in the “Image Preview” screen, and then select it again. W-1763

The printing operation cannot be canceled while the image is mounted. Complete a mounted print, or press the [Print] or the [Cancel] button in the “Image Preview” screen, and then try it.

E-1801

Conjugate length variable upper limit sensor (D212) failure. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Conjugate length variable upper limit sensor (D212) failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Disconnected conjugate length variable home position sensor (D211) connector 2. Faulty D211 3. Disconnected D212 connector 4. Faulty D212 5. Faulty conjugate length drive system

1. Reconnect the connector. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Replace the sensor. Reconnect the connector. Replace the sensor. Replace the drive section (gear ASSY, etc.).

*This error may be recovered by performing “I/O Check (43A).”



Message

E-1802

Conjugate length variable lower limit sensor (D213) failure. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1803

Conjugate length variable home position sensor (D211) failure. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Factor Conjugate length variable lower limit sensor (D212) failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty conjugate length drive system 2. Foreign matter is caught in D121. 3. Blown fuse (FE2) in the CTC22 circuit board Conjugate length variable home position sensor (D211) failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Disconnected D211 connector 2. Faulty D211 3. Faulty conjugate length drive system 4. Faulty conjugate length variable motor (M201) 5. Shipping fixture remains in the scanner section. 6. Blown fuse (FE5) in the CTC22 circuit board 7. Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR22 circuit board

E-1804

Conjugate length variable home position sensor (D211) failure. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Conjugate length variable home position sensor (D211) failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Disconnected conjugate length variable motor (M201) connector 2. Faulty M201 3. Faulty drive gear

E-1805

Lens home position sensor (D214) failure. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1806

Lens home position sensor (D214) failure. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1807

Shutter home position sensor (D215) failure. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Lens home position detecting error (Causes of the error message) 1. Disconnected lens drive motor (M202) connector 2. M202 meshing error 3. Disconnected lens home position sensor (D214) connector 4. Faulty D214 5. Blown fuse (FE5) in the CTC22 circuit board 6. Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR22 circuit board Lens home position clearing error (Causes of the error message) 1. Disconnected lens drive motor (M202) connector 2. M202 meshing error Shutter home position detecting error (Causes of the error message) 1. Disconnected shutter home position sensor (D215) connector 2. Faulty D215 3. Disconnected shutter motor (M203) connector 4. Faulty M203 5. Blown fuse (FE5) in the CTC22 circuit board 6. Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR22 circuit board

Actions

1. Reconnect the connector. 2. Remove the foreign matter. 3. Replace the fuse.

1. Reconnect the connector. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Replace the drive section (gear ASSY, etc.). 4. Replace the motor. 5. Remove the shipping fixture. 6. Replace the fuse. 7. Replace the fuse.

1. Remove the scanner cover and reconnect the motor connector if disconnected. 2. Replace the motor. 3. Replace the drive gear ASSY.

1. Reconnect the connector. 2. Replace the lens unit. 3. Reconnect the connector. 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Replace the fuse. 6. Replace the fuse.

1. Reconnect the connector. 2. Replace the lens unit.

1. Reconnect the connector. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector. 4. Replace the motor. 5. Replace the fuse. 6. Replace the fuse.



Message Shutter home position sensor (D215) failure. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1811

Scanner cooling fan (F202) stopped. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1812

Light source cooling fan (F201) stopped. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1825

The temperature of the light source controller out of the range. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1826

Carrier motor driver temperature beyond the specified temperature range. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1827

Scanner motor driver temperature beyond the specified temperature range. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1828

An error occurred in the 3.3V power supply (PERR_3V) in the light source section. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Factor Shutter home position clearing error (Causes of the error message) 1. Disconnected shutter motor (M203) connector 2. Disconnected shutter home position sensor (D215) connector 3. Faulty D215 4. Faulty M203 Scanner cooling fan failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Disconnected scanner cooling fan (F216) connector 2. Faulty F216 3. Blown fuse (FE6) in the CTC22 circuit board 4. Blown fuse (FH30) in the PWR22 circuit board Light source cooling fan failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Disconnected light source cooling fan (F201) connector 2. Faulty F201 3. Blown fuse (FE6) in the CTC22 circuit board 4. Blown fuse (FH30) in the PWR22 circuit board Abnormal temperature of the LED controller (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty light source 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the CTC22 circuit board and LED 3. Faulty CTC22 circuit board Abnormal temperature of the carrier motor driver (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty feed motor in the carrier 2. Feed motor -toplug-in connector -toCTC22 circuit board, short-circuited harness 3. Faulty CTC22 circuit board Abnormal temperature of the scanner motor driver (Causes of the error message) 1. Short-circuited conjugate length variable motor 2. Conjugate length variable motor -to- plugin connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty CTC22 circuit board 3.3 V power supply failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FE3) in the CTC22 circuit board 2. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Reconnect the connector. 2. Reconnect the connector. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the motor.

1. Remove the scanner cover and reconnect the fan connector if disconnected. 2. Replace the fan. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the fuse.

1. Remove the scanner cover and reconnect the fan connector if disconnected. 2. Replace the fan. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the fuse.

1. Replace the LED. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Replace the motor. 2. Replace the harness.

3. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Replace the motor. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Replace the fuse. 2. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.



Message

E-1829

An error occurred in the P5V power supply (PERR_5V) in the scanner section. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1831

E-1833

LED connector was disconnected. (Causes of the error message) 1. Disconnected connector (CTC6, CTC7, CTC8, CTC9) in the CTC22 circuit board 2. Blown fuse (FE3) in the CTC22 circuit board

An error occurred in the piezoelectric actuator power unit (ZERRPZR) in the scanner section.

An error occurred in the piezoelectric actuator power unit. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PZR22 circuit board and the CTC22 circuit board 2. Blown fuse (FH37) in the PWR22 circuit board 3. Faulty PZR22 circuit board

An error occurred in the motor power supply (PERR_24V1) in the scanner section. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1835

An error occurred in the carrier motor power supply (PERR_24V2). Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1836

E-1841

P5V power supply failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FE5) in the CTC22 circuit board 2. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

The connector between the input mechanical control CB and the light source section disconnected. (CTC22-LED) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative. E-1834

Factor

An error occurred in the power supply CB in the scanner section. (PZR22) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Warming of light source section failed. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

24V1 motor power supply failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the scanner and the CTC22 circuit board 2. Faulty CTC22 circuit board 3. Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR22 circuit board 24V2 motor power supply failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty motor or solenoid (M101, M102, M103, M104, S101) in the carrier 2. Blown fuse (FE5) in the CTC22 circuit board 3. Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTC22 circuit board Excessive current control error (Causes of the error message) 1. Short-circuited piezoelectric actuator 2. Broken harness between the PWR22 circuit board and the PZR22 circuit board 3. Blown fuse (FE3) in the CTC22 circuit board 4. Blown fuse (FH37) in the PWR22 circuit board Temperature control error (Temperature could not be measured.) (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty LTC22 circuit board 2. Faulty PWR22 circuit board 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the LTC22 circuit board and the CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Replace the fuse. 2. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Reconnect the connector. 2. Replace the fuse.

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 3. Replace the fuse.

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 3. Replace the fuse.

1. Replace the motor or solenoid. 2. Replace the fuse. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Replace the CCD unit. 2. Replace the harness. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the fuse.

1. Replace the LTC22 circuit board. 2. Replace the PWR22 circuit board. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.



Message

Factor

E-1842

Warming of light source section failed.

Temperature control error (Peltier element is faulty.) (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty peltier element or broken harness 2. Faulty LTC22 circuit board 3. Faulty PWR22 circuit board 4. Poorly connected or broken harness to the light source temperature sensor (D203)

Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-1843

Warming of light source section failed. Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

W-1857

Diffusion box removed. Remove carrier, and then install diffusion box.

W-1901

An error occurred during storing of exposure conditions. Storing of exposure conditions will not be done from the next time.

Temperature control error (LTC power supply failure) (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty LTC22 circuit board 2. Faulty PWR22 circuit board 3. Poorly connected or broken harness to the light source temperature sensor (D203) No diffusion box was found just before driving the piezoelectric actuator. (Causes of the error message) 1. Diffusion box is not installed, or incorrectly installed. 2. Faulty diffusion box sensor (D201, D202) An error occurred while exposure conditions were being stored to a data file. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

W-1902

Memory full. Couldn’t printing. Wait until the memory space is available, and then start printing.

W-1903

Image data full. Couldn’t printing.

Actions

1. 2. 3. 4.

Replace the light source section. Replace the LTC22 circuit board. Replace the PWR22 circuit board. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

1. Replace the LTC22 circuit board. 2. Replace the PWR22 circuit board. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

1. Install the diffusion box. 2. Replace the sensor.


Data could not be output to the DI Controller because digitizing process continued, thus causing insufficient memory space.

Wait until the DI Controller outputs image data.

Data could not be output to the DI Controller because digitizing process continued, thus causing insufficient memory space.

Wait until the DI Controller outputs image data.

Please wait a moment, and start printing. E-1904

E-1905

Image processing CB failure. (GPA22) Call technical representative.

Image processing CB printing function failure. (GPA22) Call technical representative.

The DSP is unavailable due to the problem. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the GMB22 and the GPA22circuit boards 2. Faulty GPA22circuit board 3. Faulty GHT22 circuit board 4. Faulty GMB22 circuit board The DSP is unavailable due to a problem. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit 3. Faulty GPA22 circuit board

E-1906

Image processing CB pre-scan function failure. (GPA22) Call technical representative.

The DSP is unavailable due to the problem. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit 3. Faulty GPA22circuit board

1. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the GPA22circuit board. 3. Replace the GHT22 circuit board. 4. Replace the GMB22 circuit board.

1. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 2. Replace the main control unit. 3. Replace the GPA22 circuit board.

1. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 2. Replace the main control unit. 3. Replace the GPA22circuit board.



Message Printing.

Factor Animation scanning cannot be started because the DSP is busy.

Actions Re-execute it after a while.

Please wait. I-1908

I-1909

Available frame not detected. Eject film.

Light source not stabilized. After the stabilization, positioning of image will be displayed. Press the [End] to exit the image position adjustment. Press the [Run] button to start the image position adjustment ignoring the stabilization of the light source temperature.

W-1910

Carrier not installed. Install the carrier and then start pre-scan.

W-1911

Mask for MFC not installed. Install the mask and then start pre-scan.

W-1912

Carrier upper cover opened. Close it and then start pre-scan.

W-1914

Image not read correctly. Do the pre-scan again.

No frame is detected during animation scanning. (All the frames are unexposed.) (Causes of the error message) 1. All the frames of the installed film are unexposed. 2. Faulty unexposed frame sensor in the carrier The scanner LED is not stabilized. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty LED 2. Faulty LED22 circuit board 3. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

(Causes of the error message) 1. A carrier is not installed. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the plug-in connector and the CTC22 circuit board The mask sensor in the manual film carrier does not function. (Causes of the error message) 1. The mask is installed incorrectly floating above the target surface. 2. Faulty mask sensor 3. Faulty MFC circuit board 4. Poorly connected or broken harness between the plug-in connector and the CTC22 circuit board A scanning was attempted while the pressure cover was open. (Causes of the error message) 1. The pressure cover is open. 2. Faulty cover sensor 3. Faulty AFC circuit board 4. Poorly connected or broken harness between the plug-in connector and the CTC22 circuit board An image acquisition error occurred during animation scanning. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

W-1915

Image not read correctly. Do the pre-scan again.

A read error occurred during animation scanning. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

I-1916

Printing. Please wait.

The scanner cannot be corrected because DSP is busy.

1. Check the film. 2. Replace the sensor.

1. Replace the LED. 2. Replace the LED22 circuit board. 3. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Install the carrier. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

1. Correctly install the mask. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Replace the circuit board. 4. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Correctly install the mask. Replace the sensor. Replace the circuit board. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 2. Replace the main control unit. Re-execute it after a while.



Message

E-1998

Error table item( %TableItem% ) cannot be omitted. Sub-system:%SubSystemID% ( %TableFileName% ) Error No.:%NUM%

Factor The item(s) required for the error table file is(are) not written. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

E-1999

Error table items ( %TableItem% ) are incorrect. Sub-system:%SubSystemID% ( %TableFileName% ) Error No.:%NUM%

Incorrect values are written in the error table file. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty system software 2. Faulty main control unit

E-2102

W-2106

A communication error occurred between the film scanner and the printer processor. (Command time-out) Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

A communication timeout occurred. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected SCSI cable

Printer setup and maintenance is in progress.

An uncalibrated magazine was installed during printer maintenance.

2. Faulty GHT22 circuit board 3. Faulty CTP22 circuit board 4. Blown fuse due to a broken harness in the PWR22 circuit board or the LDD22 circuit board

Actions



1. Connect the SCSI cable correctly or replace it. 2. Replace the GHT22 circuit board. 3. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 4. Replace the fuse.

Quit “Setup and Maintenance” screen, and perform paper condition setup.

Perform the paper condition setup after the operation. E-2107

E-2109

Data file not opened. This message appears when performing the new intallation. It is not an error message. In case of the installation other than new installation, consult your technical representative.

The file could not be opened when saving/ loading data. (Causes of the error message) 1. The file used to save or load data is corrupted. 2. Faulty main control unit

A communication error occurred between the film scanner and the printer processor. (SCSI sending error: Code No.=%NUM%) If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Data cannot be sent to the printer processor. (Causes of the error message) 1. GMB22 circuit board power supply failure 2. Poorly connected or broken SCSI cable 3. Faulty system software

4. Faulty GMB22 circuit board 5. Faulty main control unit


1. Check or repair the power system related to the GMB22 circuit board. 2. Connect the SCSI cable correctly or replace it. 3. Restart the system software. If the error occurs again, reinstall the system software. 4. Replace the GMB22 circuit board. 5. Replace the main control unit. *: Open the main control unit, and disconnect/connect each circuit board (especially memory board). Sometimes this method solves the problem.

W-2110

A communication error occurred between the film scanner and the printer processor. (Sending error: Code No.=%NUM%) Do countermeasures referring to the manual.

Data cannot be sent to the printer processor. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken SCSI cable 2.Faulty system software


1. Correctly connect the SCSI cable or replace it. 2. Restart the system software. If the error occurs again, reinstall the system software. 3. Replace the main control unit.



Message CB failure detected in printer processor. (Error code:%NUM%) Consult your technical representative.

Factor When the circuit board diagnostic test detects an error (Causes of the error message) 1. CTP22 circuit board power supply failure 2. Blown fuse in the PWR22 circuit board 3. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

E-2305

E-2306

The backup memory of the printer processor failure. This message does not mean abnormality when the software version is updated. For other than the version-up, consult your technical representative.

SRAM information key is not found. (Causes of the error message) 1. When the software upgrade is performed

Current time of printer processor was changed to the time of film scanner.

During the first initialization after the power ON, time data read from the timer IC is abnormal. 1. Faulty system software

If this error persists, consult your technical representative. I-2307

The laser warm-up in the exposure section not completed. Please wait.

I-2308

Warming up the processing tanks.

2. Insufficiently recharged backup battery 3. Faulty backup battery 4. Faulty backup circuit

2. Faulty CTP22 circuit board (Causes of the error message) 1. When the print command was received while the laser temperature control was not completed 2. Blown fuse in the LDD22 circuit board 3. Faulty LDD22 circuit board

Actions

1. Check or repair the power system related to the GMB22 circuit board. 2. Replace the fuse. 3. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. This message does not mean an abnormality exists. 2. Recharge the battery for 1 or 2 days. 3. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Restart the system software. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 2. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 1. Wait until the temperature control finishes. 2. Replace the fuse. 3. Replace the LDD22 circuit board.

When the print command was received while the solution temperatures had not reached the setting values

Wait until the temperature control finishes.

–

Please wait. I-2311

Printing. If processing stopped, paper will remain in processor. Shut down the processor?

When the processor shutdown was attempted with the processor in operation

I-2312

The dryer unit or the dryer section cover opened.

The processor cover is open when driving/ stopping the processing rack. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the dryer unit detecting interlock switch (D416) and PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty D416 3. Faulty PAC22 circuit board

Close it.

1. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Replace the PAC22 circuit board.



Message Auto-loading of paper failed. Refer to manual for guidance.

Factor The paper end sensor and splice sensor do not change their state even if the film leading end is pulled out by a preset length. (Causes of the error message) 1. Paper supply motor (M301) does not rotate, or the drive system is faulty. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M301 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M301 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 4) Disengaged or worn timing belt in the paper supply section 5) Disengaged or worn timing pulley in the paper supply section 6) Increased load in the drive section 2. Paper splice sensor (D301) does not detect paper. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D301 and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D301 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. Paper cannot be rewound. 1) Broken magazine drive pulley 2) Paper slippage due to dirty rollers 3) Broken or disengaged magazine nip spring 4) Reverse-prevention lock in the magazine cannot be unlocked (broken cutter guide pin, bent or scuffed magazine lock pin) 4. Paper does not reach the sensor. 1) D301 cannot detect paper because the paper’s leading end is cut aslant. 2) Paper protrudes too much when setting it. 3) Paper hit the magazine nip roller. 4) Paper is set aslant. 5) Magazine table is incorrectly set. 6) Magazine shutter malfunction (broken cutter guide pin, faulty magazine shutter section) 7) Faulty magazine end detecting plate 5. Blown fuse (FH31) in the PWR22 circuit board

Actions

1. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the motor. 3) Replace the PDC22 circuit board. 4) Reinstall or replace the belt. 5) Reinstall or replace the pulley. 6) Inspect or repair the drive section. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 3. 1) 2) 3)

Replace the sensor. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. Replace the pulley. Clean the roller. Repair or replace the spring.

4) Replace the cutter guide or magazine.

4. 1) Cut the paper’s leading end straight. 2) Adjust the length of the paper that protrudes from the magazine. 3) Inspect or replace the magazine nip roller section guide. 4) Set the paper correctly. 5) Inspect or repair the table. 6) Replace the cutter guide or magazine.

7) Replace the magazine end detecting plate or magazine. 5. Replace the fuse.



Message Auto-rewinding of paper failed. Refer to manual for guidance.

W-2411

Paper remains in printer section. Remove paper.

E-2412

The cutter malfunctions. Call technical representative.

Factor The paper end sensor and splice sensor do not change their state even if the film leading end is rewound by a preset length. (Causes of the error message) 1. Paper supply motor (M301) does not rotate, or the drive system is faulty. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M301 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M301 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 4) Disengaged or worn timing belt in the paper supply section 5) Disengaged or worn timing pulley in the paper supply section 6) Increased load in the drive section 2. Paper splice sensor (D301) does not detect paper. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D301 and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D301 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. Paper cannot be rewound. 1) Broken magazine drive pulley 2) Paper slippage due to dirty rollers 3) Broken or disengaged magazine nip spring 4) Reverse-prevention lock in the magazine cannot be unlocked (broken cutter guide pin, bent or scuffed magazine lock pin) (Causes of the error message) 1. The magazine door was opened while the paper was being fed. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the interlock switch (D322) and the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty D322 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board The outputs of the home position and closing sensors did not change during operation. (Causes of the error message) 1. Cutter drive motor (M307) does not rotate. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M307 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M307 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 2. Cutter home position sensor (D312) does not change the state. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D312 and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D312 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 4) Deformed detecting plate 3. Cutter blade does not function 1) Broken drive gear 2) Paper is caught in the cutter section. 3) Faulty cutter blade sliding section

Actions




1. Remove the paper. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the interlock switch. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the motor. 3) Replace the PDC22 circuit board. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 4) 3. 1) 2) 3)

Replace the sensor. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. Repair the detecting plate. Replace the motor. Remove paper. Replace the cutter unit.



Message Paper end processing completed. Install the paper in the magazine, or replace with the magazine containing same width paper.

W-2423

Unknown magazine ID is set. Set correct magazine ID.

Factor The paper end sensor detected the paper end. (Causes of the error message) 1. The feed section stopped when the paper end process stopped. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the paper end sensor (D311) and the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty D311 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board 5. Paper end detecting plate on the magazine side that is deformed or out of place. A magazine replaced at the time of paper end had a different ID from the one used before the replacement. (Causes of the error message) 1. Magazine has been changed. 1) A magazine that was different from the one used before the replacement was installed. 2) The ID chip has been changed. 2. Magazine ID sensor (D306 to D310) does not detect the magazine ID. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty magazine ID sensor 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. The magazine is incorrectly installed. 1) The ID chip is not installed. 2) The magazine table is out of place or broken. 3) The sensor bracket is deformed or out of place.

W-2424

Magazine ID not registered. Set the paper magazine in the “4.Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adj./Maintenance” menu.

When a magazine whose ID is not registered is installed (Causes of the error message) 1. The ID of the currently installed magazine is not registered. 2. Magazine ID sensor (D306 to D310) does not detect the magazine ID. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty magazine ID sensor 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. The magazine is incorrectly installed. 1) The ID chip is not installed. 2) The magazine table is out of place or broken. 3) The sensor bracket is deformed or out of place.

Actions

1. Set a new roll of paper or replace the magazine. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 5. Repair the detecting plate, or replace the magazine.

1. 1) Change the print size or install the original magazine. 2) Install the original ID chip or register the ID. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 3. 1) 2)

Replace the sensor. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. Install the ID chip. Inspect or repair the magazine table.

3) Inspect or repair the bracket.

1. Install the correct magazine. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 3. 1) 2)





Message Identifying of magazine failed. Check magazine, and then reinstall it. If problems persist when it is correctly installed, consult your technical representative.

W-2427

Paper width and print size mismatched. Install the correct magazine.

W-2432

Back printer unit not installed. Do countermeasures referring to the manual.

I-2435

Magazine installed.

Factor The magazine is not installed in the specified position. (Causes of the error message) 1. Magazine ID sensor (D306 to D310) does not detect the magazine ID. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty magazine ID sensor 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 2. The magazine is incorrectly installed. 1) The ID chip is not installed. 2) The magazine table is out of place or broken. 3) The sensor bracket is deformed or out of place. When a magazine that has a different paper width is installed (Causes of the error message) 1. The size of the magazine does not match the paper size. 2. Magazine ID sensor (D306 to D310) does not detect the magazine ID. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty magazine ID sensor 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. The magazine is incorrectly installed. 1) The ID chip is not installed. 2) The magazine table is out of place or broken. 3) The sensor bracket is deformed or out of place. Back printer is not installed when starting printing. (Causes of the error message) 1. Back printer is not installed. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the back printer set sensor (D320) and the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty D320 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board Paper magazine whose paper condition setup is already performed is installed.

Actions

1. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 2. 1) 2)



1. Install the correct magazine. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 3. 1) 2)



1. Correctly install the back printer unit. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. Press [OK] to resume printing.

Printing resumed. W-2435

Magazine door opened. Close it.

(Causes of the error message) 1. The magazine door is open. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine door detecting interlock switch (D322) and the PDC22 circuit board 3. Faulty D322 4. Faulty PDC22 circuit board

1. Close the magazine door. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the PDC22 circuit board.



Message Front upper cover or feeding section upper/lower cover opened. Close it.

W-2441

Magazine with wrong ID specified.

Factor (Causes of the error message) 1. The cover is open. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the sensor (D323, D324, D325) and the PDC22 circuit board 3. Faulty sensor (D323, D324, D325) 4. Faulty PDC22 circuit board The ID of the installed magazine does not match the specified one.

Actions 1. Close the cover. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the PDC22 circuit board. Set the magazine that was installed during scanning.

Install magazine with ID=%NUM%. W-2450

W-2451

W-2452

W-2453

W-2454

Paper remains in printer section. (Paper supply section) Remove paper.

Paper remains in printer section. (Paper supply section or back printer section) Remove paper.

Paper remains in printer section. (Back printer section) Remove paper.

Paper remains in printer section. (Register section) Remove paper.

Paper remains in printer section. (Sub-scanning section) Remove paper.

(Causes of the error message) 1. A sheet of paper is left in the print section. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor (D306 to D310) and the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty sensors (D306 to D310) 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board Back printer entrance sensor detects paper when the initialization finishes. (Causes of the error message) 1. Back printer entrance sensor (D302) detects paper. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between D302 and the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty D302 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

1. Remove the paper. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.


The registration sensor detects a sheet of paper when the initialization finishes. (Causes of the error message) 1. Registration sensor (D303) detects paper. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between D303 and the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty D303 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

1. Remove the paper. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

The registration sensor detects a sheet of paper when the initialization finishes. (Causes of the error message) 1. Registration sensor (D303) detects paper. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between D303 and the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty D303 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

1. Remove the paper. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

The pre-exposure sensor detects a sheet of paper when the initialization finishes (Causes of the error message) 1. Pre-exposure sensor (D304) detects paper. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between D304 and the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty sensor D304 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.





Message

Factor

W-2455

Paper remains in printer section. (Exit section) Remove paper.

The processor entry sensor detects a sheet of paper when the initialization finishes (Causes of the error message) 1. A piece of paper is left in the feed section. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the processor entry sensor (D305) and CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty sensor (D305) 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

E-2460

The registration nip motor (M309) malfunctions. Consult your technical representative.

E-2461

Width detecting drive motor (M310) failure. Consult your technical representative.

When the mechanical section fails during the initialization (Causes of the error message) 1. Registration nip motor (M309) does not rotate. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness to M309 2) Faulty M309 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 2. Registration nip roller stops at the home position. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between the registration nip home position sensor (D316) and CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D316 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty nip release mechanism 1) Broken cam 2) Broken bearing 3) Disengaged or worn gear 4) Foreign matter is caught in the nip release mechanism. 5) Increased load in the drive section 4. Blown fuse (FH28) in the PWR22 circuit board When the mechanical section fails during the initialization 1. Width detecting drive motor (M310) does not rotate. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M310 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M310 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 2. Width detecting home position is not detected. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between the width detecting home position sensor (D315) and CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D315 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty width detecting slide mechanism. 1) Deformed home position detecting plate 2) Disengaged or worn timing belt 3) Disengaged or worn timing pulley 4) Increased load in the slide bearing

5) Foreign matter is caught in the slide mechanism. 4. Blown fuse (FH28) in the PWR22 circuit board

Actions


1. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the motor. 3) Replace the PDC22 circuit board. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 3. 1) 2) 3) 4)

Replace the sensor. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. Replace the cam. Replace the bearing. Reinstall or replace the gear. Remove the foreign matter.

5) Inspect/repair the drive section. 4. Replace the fuse.

1. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the motor. 3) Replace the PDC22 circuit board. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

2) 3) 3. 1) 2) 3) 4)

Replace the sensor. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

Repair the plate. Reinstall or replace the belt. Reinstall or replace the pulley. Clean/replace the slide shaft, or inspect/replace the width detecting guide 5) Remove the foreign matter. 4. Replace the fuse.



Message

Factor

E-2462

Sub-scanning nip motor (M311) failure.

When the mechanical section fails during the initialization (Causes of the error message) 1. Sub-scanning nip motor (M311) does not rotate. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M311 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M311 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 2. Sub-scanning nip home position sensor (D317) does not detect the nip home position. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D317 and CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D317 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty nip release mechanism 1) Broken cam (deformed detecting plate/ broken stopper) 2) Broken bearing 3) Disengaged or worn gear 4) Disengaged or worn timing belt 5) Disengaged or worn timing pulley 6) Foreign matter is caught in the nip release mechanism. 7) Increased load in the drive section


E-2464

Feed nip motor (M313) failure. Consult your technical representative.

When the mechanical section fails during the initialization (Causes of the error message) 1. Feed nip motor (M313) does not rotate. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M313 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M313 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 2. Feed nip home position sensor (D319) does not detect the nip home position. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D319 and CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D319 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty nip release mechanism 1) Broken cam (deformed detecting plate/ broken stopper) 2) Broken bearing 3) Disengaged or worn gear 4) Foreign matter is caught in the nip release mechanism.

Actions

1. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the motor. 3) Replace the PDC22 circuit board. 2.

1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the sensor. 3) Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 3. 1) Replace the cam. 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)

Replace the bearing. Reinstall or replace the gear. Reinstall or replace the belt. Reinstall or replace the pulley. Remove the foreign matter.

7) Inspect/repair the drive section.

1. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the motor. 3) Replace the PDC22 circuit board. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the sensor. 3) Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 3. 1) Replace the cam. 2) Replace the bearing. 3) Reinstall or replace the gear. 4) Remove the foreign matter.



Message

Factor

E-2465

Exit section up/down belt motor (M314) failure.

When the mechanical section fails during the initialization (Causes of the error message) 1. Exit section up/down motor (M314) does not rotate. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M314 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M314 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 2. Feed nip home position sensor (D319) does not detect the home position. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D319 and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D319 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty up/down release mechanism 1) Broken cam (deformed detecting plate/ broken stopper) 2) Broken bearing 3) Disengaged or worn gear 4) Foreign matter is caught in the nip release mechanism. 5) Increased load in the drive section 4. Blown fuse (FH28) in the PWR22 circuit board


Actions

1. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the motor. 3) Replace the PDC22 circuit board. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the sensor. 3) Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 3. 1) Replace the cam. 2) Replace the bearing. 3) Reinstall or replace the gear. 4) Remove the foreign matter. 5) Inspect/repair the drive section. 4. Replace the fuse.



Message An error occurred during measuring of the side registration. Do countermeasures referring to the manual.

Factor (Causes of the error message) 1. Width detecting waiting position is incorrect. 1) Side registration calibration has not been performed. 2) Disengaged or worn timing belt 3) Disengaged or worn timing pulley 4) Increased load in the slide bearing

5) The magazine ID does not match the paper width. 6) Poorly connected or broken harness between the magazine ID sensor (D306 to D310) and the CTP22 circuit board 7) Faulty sensor (D306 to D310) 8) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 2. Paper feed position is incorrect. 1) Paper width guide in the magazine is incorrectly set. 2) Flanges in the magazine is incorrectly set. 3) Positioning pin in the magazine is incorrectly set. 4) Broken cutter guide positioning hole 5) Faulty magazine table 6) Disengaged feed roller or nip spring in the magazine 7) Disengaged feed roller or nip spring in the feed section 8) Paper is incorrectly set (aslant) in the magazine 9) Paper skewing due to dirty roller 3. Width detecting sensor (D314) malfunction 1) LED in D314 is not lit. 2) Poorly connected or broken harness between D314 and the CTP22 circuit board 3) Deformed or broken width detecting guide 4) Faulty CTP22 circuit board W-2467

Can’t rewind because paper is being fed. Try again after the completion of feeding paper.

The rewind request from the PC was received while paper was being fed

Actions 1. 1) Perform “Side Register Calibration (45S).” 2) Reinstall or replace the belt. 3) Reinstall or replace the pulley 4) Clean/replace the slide shaft, or inspect/replace the width detecting guide. 5) Replace with the correct ID chip, or correct the setting. 6) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 7) Replace the sensor. 8) Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 2. 1) Correct the width guide position. 2) Correct the flange position. 3) Replace the magazine. 4) Replace the cutter guide. 5) Inspect/repair the magazine table. 6) Inspect/repair the nip roller/spring. 7) Inspect/repair the nip roller/spring. 8) Correctly set the paper. 9) Clean the roller. 3. 1) Replace the sensor. 2) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3) Replace the width detecting guide. 4) Replace the CTP22 circuit board. Try the operation again after the paper feed is completed.



Message Paper jam occurred in printer. (Paper supply section) Remove paper.

Factor The paper end sensor and splice sensor do not change the state even if the film leading end is pulled out by a preset length. (Causes of the error message) 1. Paper supply motor (M301) does not rotate, or the drive system is faulty. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M301 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M301 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 4) Disengaged or worn timing belt in the paper supply section 5) Disengaged or worn timing pulley in the paper supply section 6) Increased load in the drive section 2. Paper splice sensor (D301) does not detect paper. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D301 and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D301 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 3. Paper cannot be rewound. 1) Broken magazine drive pulley 2) Paper slippage due to dirty rollers 3) Broken or disengaged magazine nip spring 4) Reverse-prevention lock in the magazine cannot be unlocked (broken cutter guide pin, bent or scuffed magazine lock pin) 4. Paper does not reach the sensor. 1) D301 cannot detect paper because the paper’s leading end is cut aslant. 2) Paper protrudes too much when setting it. 3) Paper hit the magazine nip roller. 4) Paper is set aslant. 5) Magazine table is incorrectly set. 6) Magazine shutter malfunction (broken cutter guide pin, faulty magazine shutter section) 7) Faulty magazine end detecting plate 5. Blown fuse (FH31) in the PWR22 circuit board

Actions




4. 1) Cut the paper’s leading end straight. 2) Adjust the length of the paper that protrudes from the magazine. 3) Inspect or replace the magazine nip roller section guide. 4) Set the paper correctly. 5) Inspect or repair the table. 6) Replace the cutter guide or magazine.

7) Replace the magazine end detecting plate or magazine. 5. Replace the fuse.



Message

Factor

W-2471

Paper jam occurred in printer. (Paper supply section - Feeding section) Remove paper.

Paper feed error (Causes of the error message) 1. Paper jamming occurred. 1) The nip roller or spring is out of place. 2) Paper remains in the printer. 3) Deformed or incorrectly installed guide plate 4) The curl of the paper is excessive. 2. Feed drive motor 1 (M302) does not rotate, or the drive system is faulty. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M302 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M302 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 4) Disengaged or worn feed drive gear 5) Increased lode in the drive section 3. Back printer entrance sensor (D302) does not detect paper. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D302 and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D302 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board

W-2472

Paper jam occurred in printer. (Feeding section - Back printer section) Remove paper.

Paper feed error (Causes of the error message) 1. Paper jamming occurred. 1) Back printer clearance is incorrectly adjusted. 2) Paper remains in the printer. 3) Deformed or incorrectly installed guide plate 4) The curl of the paper is excessive. 2. Feed drive motor 2 (M303) does not rotate, or the drive system is faulty. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M303 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M303 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 4) Disengaged or worn feed drive gear 5) Increased load in the drive section 3. Back printer entrance sensor (D302) does not detect paper. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D302 and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D302 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Actions

1. 1) Inspect/repair the nip roller and spring. 2) Remove the paper. 3) Check/repair the guide plate. 4) Replace the paper. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 4) 5) 3.

Replace the motor. Replace the PDC22 circuit board. Reinstall or replace the gear. Inspect/repair the drive section.

1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the sensor. 3) Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. 1) Adjust the clearance correctly. 2) Remove the paper. 3) Check/repair the guide plate. 4) Replace the paper. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 4) 5) 3.


1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the sensor. 3) Replace the CTP22 circuit board.



Message Paper jam occurred in printer. (Back printer section - Register section) Remove paper.

Factor Paper feed error (Causes of the error message) 1. Paper jamming occurred. 1) Back printer clearance is incorrectly adjusted. 2) Paper remains in the printer. 3) Deformed or incorrectly installed guide plate 4) The curl of the paper is excessive. 2. Feed drive motor 2 (M303) does not rotate, or the drive system is faulty. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M303 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M303 3) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 4) Disengaged or worn feed drive gear 5) Increased load in the drive section 3. Registration sensor (D303) does not detect paper. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D303 and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D303 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty feed roller nip or pre-registration roller nip mechanism (The rollers do not nip paper.) 1) Broken nip release cam 2) Broken nip release arm 3) Faulty mechanism fine adjustment

Actions

1. 1) Adjust the clearance correctly. 2) Remove the paper. 3) Check/repair the guide plate. 4) Replace the paper. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 4) 5) 3.


1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the sensor. 3) Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 4.

1) Replace the cam. 2) Reinstall or replace the arm. 3) Perform fine adjustment again.



Message Paper jam occurred in printer. (Register section - Subscanning section) Remove paper.

Factor Paper feed error (Causes of the error message) 1. Paper jamming occurred. 1) Abnormal width detecting operation 2) The magazine ID does not match the paper width. 3) Abnormal magazine ID detection

5) Disengaged nip roller or spring 6) Width detecting section is incorrectly installed, deformed or broken. 7) Paper slippage due to dirty roller 8) Paper remains in the printer. 9) Heavily curled paper 2. Registration drive motor (M304) does not rotate, or the drive system is faulty. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M304 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M304 3) Disengaged or worn drive gear 4) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 3. Registration sensor (D303) or Preexposure sensor (D304) does not detect paper. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D303/D304 and the CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D303/D304 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty registration nip or first sub-scanning roller nip (The rollers do not nip paper.) 1) Broken nip release cam 2) Broken nip release arm 3) Faulty mechanism fine adjustment 5. Sub-scanning drive motor (M305) does not rotate, or the drive system is faulty. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M305 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M305 3) Faulty motor driver 4) Disengaged or broken steel belt 5) Abnormal steel belt tension 6) Increased load in the drive section 6. Exit section up/down belt malfunction 1) Broken cam 2) Faulty mechanism fine adjustment 3) Increased load in the drive section

Actions

1. 1) Refer to E-2466.) 2) Replace with the correct ID chip, or correct the setting. 3) (Refer to W-2426.) 4) Inspect or repair the width detecting section. 5) Inspect, repair or replace the nip roller or spring. 6) Inspect, repair or replace the guide plate. 7) Clean the roller. 8) Remove the paper. 9) Replace the paper. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the motor. 3) Reinstall or replace the gear. 4) Replace the PDC22 circuit board. 3.

1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the sensor. 3) Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 4. 1) Replace the cam. 2) Reinstall or replace the arm. 3) Perform the fine adjustment again. 5. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 6. 1) 2) 3)

Replace the motor. Replace the motor driver. Reinstall or replace the steel belt. Adjust the belt tension again. Inspect or repair the drive system. Replace the cam. Perform the fine adjustment again. Inspect or repair the drive section.



Message Paper jam occurred in printer. (Exit section) Remove paper.

Factor Paper feed error (Causes of the error message) 1. Paper jamming occurred. 1) The feed roller or spring is out of place. 2) Deformed, incorrectly installed or broken feed belt 3) Deformed or incorrectly installed guide plate 4) Paper slippage due to dirty rollers 5) The curl of the paper is excessive. 2. Exit drive motor (M306) does not rotate, or the drive system is faulty. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M306 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M306 3) Disengaged or worn exit drive motor drive gear 4) Disengaged or worn exit drive timing belt 5) Disengaged or worn exit drive pulley 6) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 7) Increased load in the drive section 3. Processor entry sensor (D305) does not detect paper. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D305 and CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D305 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 4. Exit section up/down belt malfunction 1) Broken cam 2) Faulty mechanism fine adjustment 3) Increased load in the drive section

W-2476

Paper jam occurred in printer.

The error recovery process used to cope with a jam is in progress.

Actions

1. 1) Inspect or repair the nip roller and spring. 2) Repair or replace the feed belt. 3) Inspect or repair the guide plate. 4) Clean the roller. 5) Replace the paper. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the motor. 3) Reinstall or replace the gear. 4) 5) 6) 7) 3.

Reinstall or replace the belt. Reinstall or replace the pulley. Replace the PDC22 circuit board. Inspect or repair the drive section.

1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the sensor. 3) Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 4. 1) Replace the cam. 2) Adjust the lowest position of the up/ down belt. 3) Inspect or repair the drive section. Wait until the process is completed.

The error recovery process is in progress. Please wait. I-2477

Loading paper. Please wait.

(Causes of the error message) 1. The feed section initialization is in progress during the system startup or after a cover is closed. 2. Blown fuse (FH14) in the PWR22 circuit board

1. Wait until the auto load operation is complete. 2. Replace the fuse.



Message

W-2478

Paper jam occurred in printer or processor section. (Exit section - Processor section) Remove paper.

Factor Paper feed error (Causes of the error message) 1. Paper jamming occurred. 1) The feed roller or spring is out of place. 2) Deformed, incorrectly installed or broken feed belt 3) Deformed or incorrectly installed guide plate 4) Paper slippage due to dirty rollers 5) Paper remains in the printer. 6) The curl of the paper is excessive. 2. Exit drive motor (M306) does not rotate, or the drive system is faulty. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between M306 and the PDC22 circuit board 2) Faulty M306 3) Disengaged or worn exit drive motor drive gear 4) Disengaged or worn exit drive timing belt 5) Disengaged or worn exit drive pulley 6) Faulty PDC22 circuit board 7) Increased load in the drive section 3. Processor entry sensor (D305) does not detect paper. 1) Poorly connected or broken harness between D305 and CTP22 circuit board 2) Faulty D305 3) Faulty CTP22 circuit board 4. Exit section up/down belt malfunction 1) Broken cam 2) Faulty mechanism fine adjustment 3) Increased load in the drive section 5. Blown fuse (FH26) in the PWR22 circuit board

I-2479

Paper-end processing.

Actions

1. 1) Inspect or repair the nip roller and spring. 2) Repair or replace the feed belt. 3) Inspect or repair the guide plate. 4) Clean the roller. 5) Remove the paper. 6) Replace the paper. 2. 1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the motor. 3) Reinstall or replace the gear. 4) 5) 6) 7) 3.

Reinstall or replace the belt. Reinstall or replace the pulley. Replace the PDC22 circuit board. Inspect or repair the drive section.

1) Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2) Replace the sensor. 3) Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 4. 1) Replace the cam. 2) Adjust the lowest position of the up/ down belt. 3) Inspect or repair the drive section. 5. Replace the fuse.

The paper end process is in progress.


The mechanical shutter linked to the optical system did not function. (The shutter-open signal could not be detected by the shutteropen sensor.) (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FC07) in the LDD22 circuit board 2. Poorly connected or broken harness that includes the connector in the laser unit 3. Faulty LDD22 circuit board 4. Faulty laser unit

1. Replace the fuse.

Please wait. E-2501

ROS shutter malfunctions. Consult your technical representative.

2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the LDD22 circuit board. 4. Replace the laser unit.



Message ROS fan malfunctions. Consult your technical representative.

E-2503

The polygon malfunctions. Consult your technical representative.

E-2506

The exposure section cooling fan malfunctions. Consult your technical representative.

W-2507

The paper condition setup of the magazine not performed. Perform the paper condition setup.

E-2508

E-2509

The communication error occurred in the printer processor. (GHT22-LDA22) Consult your technical representative.

R-laser information (R-LD) information failure. Call technical representative.

Factor The mechanical shutter linked to the optical system did not function. (The rotation sensor did not function.) (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness that includes the connector (JROS) in the laser unit 2. Poorly connected fan connector 3. Blown fuse (FC07) in the LDD22 circuit board 4. Faulty LDD22 circuit board The mechanical polygon did not function. (The rotation sensor did not function.) (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness that includes the connector (JROS) in the laser unit 2. Poorly connected connector (JPLG) at the bottom of the laser unit 3. Blown fuse (FC06) in the LDD22 circuit board 4. Blown fuse (FH12) in the PWR22 circuit board 5. Faulty LDD22 circuit board 6. Faulty PWR22 circuit board The fan in the exposure section did not function. (The rotation sensor did not function.) (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly contacting connector for the cooling fan 2. Blown fuse (FC06) in the LDD22 circuit board 3. Faulty cooling fan 4. Faulty LDD22 When a magazine is installed, a message indicating that the density measurement has not been performed is displayed. 1. The magazine has been replaced. A timeout with the optical section (LDA22) occurred. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the GHT22 and LDA22 circuit boards 2. Faulty GHT22 circuit board 3. Faulty LDA22 circuit board Incorrect data read from the EEPROM in the laser unit during the system startup. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 2. Poorly contacting connector (JML1 or JML2) or broken harness between the laser unit and the JML22 circuit board 3. Blown fuse (FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 4. Abnormal system software 5. Faulty laser unit

Actions

1. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Reconnect the connector. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the LDD22 circuit board.

1. Reconnect the connector, or replace/ repair the harness. 2. Reconnect the connector. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the fuse. 5. Replace the LDD22 circuit board. 6. Replace the PWR22 circuit board.

1. Reconnect the connector. 2. Replace the fuse. 3. Replace the fan. 4. Replace the LDD22 circuit board.

1. Perform the paper condition setup.

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the GHT22 circuit board. 3. Replace the LDA22 circuit board.

1. Replace the laser unit. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Restart the system. Reinstall it if the problem occurs again. 5. Replace the laser unit.



Message G-laser (G-SHG) information failure. Call technical representative.

Factor Incorrect data read from the EEPROM in the laser unit during the system startup. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 2. Poorly contacting connector (JML6) or broken harness between the laser unit and the JML22 circuit board 3. Blown fuse (FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 4. Abnormal system software 5. Faulty laser unit

E-2511

B-laser (B-SHG) information failure. Call technical representative.

Incorrect data read from the EEPROM in the laser unit during the system startup. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 2. Poorly contacting connector (JML1 or JML2) or broken harness between the laser unit and the JML22 circuit board 3. Blown fuse (FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 4. Abnormal system software 5. Faulty laser unit

E-2512

E-2513

E-2514

E-2515

R laser (R-LD) temperature outside specified range. Warming-up of laser stopped. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

G laser (G-SHG) temperature outside specified range. Warming-up of laser stopped. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

B laser (B-SHG) temperature outside specified range. Warming-up of laser stopped. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative. R-laser (R-LD) temperature error occurred. Warming-up of laser stopped. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Laser temperature is outside of the specified range during the initialization. (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FC01 or FC02) in the LDD22 circuit board 2. Poorly contacting connector or broken harness between the laser unit and the LDD22 circuit board 3. Faulty LDD22 circuit board 4. Faulty laser unit Laser temperature is outside of the specified range during the initialization. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly contacting connector (JML5) or broken harness between the laser unit and the JML circuit board 2. Blown fuse (FC01 or FC02) in the LDD22 circuit board Laser temperature is outside of the specified range during the initialization. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly contacting connector (JML8) or broken harness between the laser unit and the JML circuit board 2. Blown fuse (FC01 or FC02) in the LDD22 When laser temperature is outside of the specified range (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FC01 or FC02) in the LDD22 circuit board 2. Broken wire in the laser unit

Actions



1. Replace the fuse. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the LDD22 circuit board. 4. Replace the laser unit.

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the fuse.

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the fuse.

1. Replace the fuse. 2. Replace the laser unit.



E-2517

W-2518

Message

Factor

G-laser (G-SHG) temperature error occurred. Warming-up of laser stopped. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

When laser temperature is outside of the specified range (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FC01 or FC02) in the LDD22 circuit board 2. Broken wire in the laser unit

B-laser (B-SHG) temperature error occurred. Warming-up of laser stopped. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

When laser temperature is outside of the specified range (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FC01 or FC02) in the LDD22 circuit board 2. Broken wire in the laser unit

A temperature error detected in the printer. Warming-up of laser stopped. Check it referring to the manual.

When the ambient temperature is outside of the specified range (Causes of the error message) 1. The current temperature is above (or below) the specified range.

2. Poorly connected or broken harness of the temperature sensor 3. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 4. Faulty LDD22 circuit board 5. Faulty temperature sensor E-2519

AOM temperature error occurred. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

E-2520

Excessive R laser (R-LD) current detected. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

E-2521

Excessive G laser (G-SHG) current detected. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

E-2522

Excessive B laser (B-SHG) current detected. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

An abnormal temperature was observed at the AOM immediately before the exposure. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the LDD22 circuit board and the AOM driver 2. Blown fuse in the LDD22 circuit board 3. Faulty AOM driver 4. Faulty LDD22 circuit board The LD current limiter detected an excessive current. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 2. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 3. Faulty laser unit The LD current limiter detected an excessive current. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 2. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 3. Faulty laser unit The LD current limiter detected an excessive current. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 2. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 3. Faulty laser unit

Actions



1. Measure the internal temperature, and adjust it (using an airconditioner) to within 5 to 45 degrees centigrade as per “Printer Temperature Display (456).” 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the LDD22 circuit board 5. Replace the sensor.

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the fuse. 3. Replace the AOM driver. 4. Replace the LDD22 circuit board.

1. Replace the laser unit. 2. Replace the fuse. 3. Replace the laser unit.





Message R laser (R-LD) current measurement value outside specified range. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

E-2524

G laser (G-SHG) current measurement value outside specified of range. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

E-2525

B laser (B-SHG) current measurement value outside specified range. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

W-2526

R laser (R-LD) is about to its lifetime. No problem for the moment, but consult technical representative.

W-2527

G laser (G-SHG) is about to its lifetime. No problem for the moment, but consult technical representative.

Factor The PD current is not within the specified range. (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 2. Broken wire in the laser unit The PD current is not within the specified range. (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 2. Blown fuse (FH12 or FH14) in the PWR22 circuit board 3. Broken wire in the laser unit The PD current is not within the specified range. (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 2. Blown fuse (FH12 or FH15) in the PWR22 circuit board 3. Broken wire in the laser unit Laser deterioration was detected in the last post-operational check. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 2. Deteriorated laser Laser deterioration was detected in the last post-operational check. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 2. The temperature has not been periodically set to an optimum value. 3. Deteriorated laser

W-2528

B laser (B-SHG) is about to its lifetime. No problem for the moment, but consult technical representative.

Laser deterioration was detected in the last post-operational check. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrect data in the laser unit 2. The temperature has not been periodically set to an optimum value. 3. Deteriorated laser

E-2529

SOS detection failed. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

When SOS cannot be detected (Causes of the error message) 1. Cable to the AOM driver is not connected or the wires are incorrectly swapped (check them for the correct colors). 2. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 3. Faulty LDD22 circuit board 4. Faulty laser unit

Actions


1. Replace the fuse. 2. Replace the fuse. 3. Replace the laser unit.

1. Replace the fuse. 2. Replace the fuse. 3. Replace the laser unit.

1. Replace the laser unit. 2. Replace the laser unit.

1. Replace the laser unit. 2. Perform temperature optimization by referring to “B, G Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454).” 3. Replace the laser unit.

1. Replace the laser unit. 2. Perform temperature optimization by referring to “B, G Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454).” 3. Replace the laser unit.

1. Confirm that the AOM driver is properly connected. 2. Replace the fuse. 3. Replace the LDD22 circuit board. 4. Replace the laser unit.



Message

Factor

E-2530

Electrical failure occurred in the exposure section.

The power supply voltages are outside of the specified range. (Causes of the error message) 1. The cable between the LDD22 and PWR22 circuit boards is not connected. 2. Faulty LDD22 circuit board 3. Blown fuse(s) (FH9 to FH15) in the LDD22 circuit board

If problems persist, call technical representative.

W-2532

G laser (SHG) temperature adjustment required. Perform the G, B-laser (SHG) optimal temperature setup in the “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adj./Maintenance” menu.

W-2533

10 days passed since the last paper condition setup.

SHG needs to be set. (Causes of the error message) 1. Three months have passed since the setting was performed last.

The paper condition setup for the master magazine has not been performed for 10 days.

Actions

1. Connect the cable properly. 2. Replace the LDD22 circuit board. 3. Replace the fuse.

1. Perform temperature optimization by referring to “B, G Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454).”

Perform the paper condition setup.

We recommend paper condition setup. E-2534

An error detected by R-laser(RLD) sensor. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

E-2535

An error detected by G-laser(GSHG) sensor. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

E-2536

An error detected by B-laser(BSHG) sensor. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

W-2537

Laser temperature adjustment not started because the ambient temperature is too low(high). Adjust the ambient temp. between 15 to 30-C. (Laser temp. adjustment will be started when the ambient temp. exceeds 5-C.)

Laser Thermistor detects an error. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the laser unit and the JML22 circuit board 2. Faulty JML22 circuit board 3. Faulty laser unit Laser Thermistor detects an error. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the laser unit and the JML22 circuit board 2. Faulty JML22 circuit board 3. Faulty laser unit Laser Thermistor detects an error. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the laser unit and the JML22 circuit board 2. Faulty JML22 circuit board 3. Faulty laser unit After the initialization, the ambient temperature has been outside of the specified range for more than the specified period. (Causes of the error message) 1. The current temperature is above (or below) the specified range.

2. Poorly connected or broken harness of the temperature sensor. 3. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 4. Faulty LDD22 circuit board 5. Faulty temperature sensor

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the JML22 circuit board. 3. Replace the laser unit.



1. Measure the internal temperature, and adjust it (using an airconditioner) to within 5 to 45 degrees centigrade as per “Printer Temperature Display (456).” 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the LDD22 circuit board. 5. Replace the sensor.



Message Time to replace ROS filter. Replace ROS filter.

E-2539

Time to replace ROS filter. Replace ROS filter.

W-2540

Ambient temperature too low (high). Adjust the ambient temperature between 15 to 30-C.

Factor The air filter has not been replaced during the specified period. (Causes of the error message) 1. The specified time has elapsed since the filter was replaced last. The air filter has not been replaced during the specified period. (Causes of the error message) 1. The specified time has elapsed since the filter was replaced last. The ambient temperature is outside of the range between 10 to 42 degrees centigrade (by default). (Causes of the error message) 1. The current temperature is above (or below) the specified range.

2. Poorly connected or broken harness of the temperature sensor 3. Blown fuse (FC01, FC02, or FC03) in the LDD22 circuit board 4. Faulty LDD22 circuit board 5. Faulty temperature sensor E-2541

R-laser (R-LD) CB temperature error occurred. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

W-2541

Periodic time to set the optimal temperatures of B laser (SHG). Perform the G, B-laser (SHG) optimal temperature setup in the “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adj./Maintenance” menu.

W-2601

W-2602

Paper jam occurred in the processor section. %NUM% papers remain in processor. Remove paper.

Paper remains in the processor section. Remove paper.

R-laser (R-LD) CB temperature is outside of the specified range. 1. Disconnected connector (JML1, JML2) 2. Broken harness between the laser unit and the JML22 circuit board 3. Faulty JML22circuit board 4. Faulty laser unit SHG needs to be set. (Causes of the error message) 1. Three months have passed since the setting was last performed.

Paper is not fed out after the specified time has passed. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrectly installed unit (processing rack, crossover rack, dryer rack, etc.) 2. Paper remains in the processor due to a power failure during paper feed. 3. Poorly connected connector (CTP19) or broken harness between the Dryer section exit sensor (D411) and the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty D411 5. Faulty processing rack or crossover rack The power is turned OFF while paper is in the processor.

Actions

1. Replace the filter and press the [Replace] button in “Filter Replacement History (45B).”

1. Replace the filter and press the [Replace] button in “Filter Replacement History (45B).”

1. Measure the internal temperature, and adjust it (using an airconditioner) to within 5 to 45 degrees centigrade as per “Displaying the Internal Printer Temperature (456).” 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the fuse. 4. Replace the LDD22 circuit board 5. Replace the sensor.

1. Reconnect the connector. 2. Repair/replace the harness. 3. Replace the JML22circuit board. 4. Replace the laser unit.

1. Perform temperature optimization by referring to “B, G Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454).”

1. Reinstall each unit. 2. Remove paper. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

4. Replace the sensor. 5. Clean or replace the parts or unit. Remove the paper in the processor or dryer section.



Message Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor (M402) failure. Consult your technical representative.

W-2607

PSR replenisher nearly empty. Mix the replenisher.

W-2609

W-2611

The dryer unit or the dryer cover opened. Processing cancelled. Remove paper, and then start processing.

The dryer unit or the dryer section cover opened. Close the cover.

Factor Replenisher cartridge section is faulty. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the replenisher cartridge opening drive motor (M402) and the CTP22 circuit board 2. Faulty M402 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the cartridge box sensor (D408, D409) and the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty D408 or D409 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the replenisher door detecting interlock switch(D410) and the PAC22 circuit board 6. Faulty D410 When the PSR lower limit sensor sensed “solution low” during the FA process (Causes of the error message) 1. The PSR tank is empty. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PSR external replenisher solution level sensor (FS418) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS418 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board Dryer unit or dryer section cover is opened while paper is processed in the processor. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrectly installed dryer unit 2. Incorrectly installed dryer cover (incorrectly tightened thumbscrews) 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the dryer unit detecting interlock switch (D416) and the PWR22 circuit board 4. Blown fuse related to the interlock switch 5. Faulty PWR22 circuit board Dryer unit or dryer section cover is opened while paper is processed in the processor. (Causes of the error message) 1. Incorrectly installed dryer unit 2. Incorrectly installed dryer cover (incorrectly tightened thumbscrews) 3. Deformed interlock detecting plate 4. Poorly connected or broken harness between the dryer unit detecting interlock switch (D416) and the PWR22 circuit board 5. Faulty D416

Actions

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

2. Replace the motor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

6. Replace the interlock switch.

1. Add two liters of water. 2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace the harness.


1. Correctly install the dryer unit. 2. Correctly install the dryer cover. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

4. Replace the fuse. 5. Replace the PWR22 circuit board

1. Correctly install the dryer unit. 2. Correctly install the dryer cover. 3. Repair/replace the detecting plate. 4. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

5. Replace the sensor.



Message

Factor

E-2614

P1 processing tank temperature not rising. Processing tank heaters (H401) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Solution temperature does not rise more than 1°C within 30 minutes. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1 solution heater (H401) and the PAC6 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty electrical section 3. Faulty H401 4. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1 circulation pump (PU401) and the PAC22 circuit board 6. Faulty P1 solution temperature sensor (TS401) 7. Faulty CTP22circuit board

E-2615

P2 processing tank temperature not rising. Processing tank heaters (H402) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Solution temperature does not rise more than 1°C within 30 minutes. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2 solution heater (H402) and the PAC6 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty electrical section 3. Faulty H402 4. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2 circulation pump (PU402) and the PAC22 circuit board 6. Faulty P2 solution temperature sensor (TS402) 7. Faulty CTP22circuit board

E-2616

PS1, 2 processing tank temperatures not rising. Processing tank heaters (H403) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Solution temperature does not rise more than 1°C within 30 minutes. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS1/2 solution heater (H403) and the PAC5 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty electrical section 3. Faulty H403 4. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS1/2 circulation pump (PU403/PU404) and the PAC22 circuit board 6. Faulty PS1/2 solution temperature sensor (TS403) 7. Faulty CTP22circuit board

Actions

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Repair the electrical section. 3. Replace the heater. 4. Clean the hose or nozzle, or replace the circulation filter. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the sensor. 7. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.


1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Repair the electrical section. 3. Replace the heater. 4. Clean the hose or nozzle, or replace the circulation filter. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.




Message

Factor

E-2617

PS3, 4 processing tank temperatures not rising. Processing tank heaters (H404) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Solution temperature does not rise more than 1°C within 30 minutes. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS3/4 solution heater (H404) and the PAC5 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty electrical section 3. Faulty H404 4. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS3/4 circulation pump (PU405/PU406) and the PAC22 circuit board 6. Faulty PS3/4 solution temperature sensor (TS404) 7. Blown fuse in the CTP22 circuit board 8. Faulty CTP22circuit board

E-2618

E-2619

E-2620

Dryer section temperature not rising. Dryer section heaters (H406) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Solution temperature does not rise more than 1°C within 1 minute during heat-up. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the dryer heater (H406) and the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty electrical section 3. Faulty H406

Temperature of P1 processing tank outside the specified temperature range. Heater (H401) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Abnormal P1 solution temperature (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1 solution heater (H401) and the PAC6 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty electrical section 3. Faulty H401 4. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1 circulation pump (PU401) and the PAC22 circuit board 6. Faulty P1 solution temperature sensor (TS401) 7. Faulty CTP22circuit board

Temperature of P2 processing tank outside the specified temperature range. Heater (H402) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Abnormal P2 solution temperature (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2 solution heater (H402) and the PAC6 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty electrical section 3. Faulty H402 4. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2 circulation pump (PU402) and the PAC22 circuit board 6. Faulty P2 solution temperature sensor (TS402) 7. Faulty CTP22circuit board

Actions


6. Replace the sensor. 7. Replace the fuse. 8. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Repair the electrical section. 3. Replace the heater.





Message Temperature of PS 1,2 processing tank outside the specified temperature range. Heater (H403) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Factor Abnormal PS1/PS2 solution temperature (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS1/2 solution heater (H403) and the PAC5 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty electrical section 3. Faulty H403 4. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS1/2 circulation pump (PU403/PU404) and the PAC22 circuit board 6. Faulty PS1/2 solution temperature sensor (TS403) 7. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

E-2622

Temperature of PS 3,4 processing tank outside the specified temperature range. Heater (H404) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Abnormal PS3/PS4 solution temperature (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS3/4 solution heater (H404) and the PAC5 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty electrical section 3. Faulty H404 4. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS3/4 circulation pump (PU405/PU406) and the PAC22 circuit board 6. Faulty PS3/4 solution temperature sensor (TS404) 7. Faulty CTP22circuit board

E-2623

E-2624

E-2625

Temperature of dryer section outside the specified temperature range. Heater (H406) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Abnormal dryer temperature (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the dryer heater (H406) and the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty electrical section 3. Faulty H406

P1 safety thermostat (D401) activated. Heater (H401) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Safety thermostat in P1 processing tank is activated. (Causes of the error message) 1. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter

P2 safety thermostat (D402) activated. Heater (H402) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1 circulation pump (PU401) and the PAC22 circuit board 3. Faulty P1 solution temperature sensor (TS401) 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board Safety thermostat in P2 processing tank is activated. (Causes of the error message) 1. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2 circulation pump (PU402) and the PAC22 circuit board 3. Faulty P2 solution temperature sensor (TS402) 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Actions





1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Repair the electrical section. 3. Replace the heater.

1. Clean the hose or nozzle, or replace the circulation filter. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.




Message

Factor

E-2626

PS1/2 safety thermostat (D403) activated. Heaters (H403) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Safety thermostat in PS1/2 processing tank is activated. (Causes of the error message) 1. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter

E-2627

E-2628

W-2629

W-2630

PS3/4 safety thermostat (D404) activated. Heaters (H404) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

Safety thermostat in dryer section (D406) activated. Heater (H406) turned off. If problems persist after the restart, consult your technical representative.

P1 solution level has fallen. Temperature adjustment stopped. Refer to manual for guidance.

P2 solution level has fallen. Temperature adjustment stopped. Refer to manual for guidance.

2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS2 circulation pump (PU404) and the PAC22 circuit board 3. Faulty PS1/2 solution temperature sensor (TS403) 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board Safety thermostat in PS3/4 processing tank is activated. (Causes of the error message) 1. Clogged hose, nozzle or circulation filter 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS4 circulation pump (PU406) and the PAC22 circuit board 3. Faulty PS3/4 solution temperature sensor (TS404) 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board Safety thermostat in the dryer section is activated. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty dryer fan (F405) 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the dryer air temperature sensor (TS406) and the CTP13 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty TS406 4. Foreign matter is caught in the dryer duct. The solution level of the P1 processing tank is low. (Causes of the error message) 1. Solution leak 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1R replenisher pump (PU408) and PAC3 in the PAC22 circuit board 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1 solution level sensor (FS401) and the CTP15 in the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty PU408 5. Faulty FS401 6. Faulty CTP22 circuit board 7. Faulty PAC22 circuit board The solution level of the P2 processing tank is low. (Causes of the error message) 1. Solution leak 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2 solution level sensor (FS402) and the CTP15 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS402 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Actions



1. Clean the hose or nozzle, or replace the circulation filter. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Remove the foreign matter.

1. Repair the solution leak. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

4. 5. 6. 7.

Replace the pump. Replace the sensor. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. Replace the PAC22 circuit board.





W-2632

W-2633

W-2634

W-2635

Message PS1 solution level has fallen. Temperature adjustment stopped. Refer to manual for guidance.

PS2 solution level has fallen. Temperature adjustment stopped. Refer to manual for guidance.



P1R replenisher solution level has fallen. Mix the replenisher.

W-2638

P1R replenisher empty. Add replenisher.

Factor The solution level of the PS1 processing tank is low. (Causes of the error message) 1. Solution leak 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS1 solution level sensor (FS403) and the CTP15 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty sensor (FS403) 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board The solution level of the PS2 processing tank is low. (Causes of the error message) 1. Solution leak 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS2 solution level sensor (FS404) and the CTP15 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Safety FS404 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board The solution level of the PS3 processing tank is low. (Causes of the error message) 1. Solution leak 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PS3 solution level sensor (FS405) and the CTP15 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS405 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board The solution level of the PS4 processing tank is low. (Causes of the error message) 1. Solution leak 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the sensor (FS406) and the CTP15 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS406 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board When the P1R lower limit sensor detects “solution low” during the FA process (Causes of the error message) 1. P1R solution level is low. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1R external replenisher sensor (FS416) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS416 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board When the P1R lower limit sensor detects “Completely no solution” (Causes of the error message) 1. No solution is in the P1R tank. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1R external replenisher level sensor (FS416) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS416 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Actions







1. Repair the solution leak. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Replenish the P1R. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Replenish the P1R. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.




Message W2 waste tank nearly full. Collect it in the recovery tank.

W-2645

W2 waste tank full. Collect it in the recovery tank.

W-2648

PSR replenisher nearly empty. Replenish 4L of replenisher.

W-2649

PSR replenisher empty. Replenish 8L of replenisher.

Factor When the external waste solution sensor detects “solution exists” (Causes of the error message) 1. The external waste solution level sensor (FS420) detected “Solution exists.” 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between FS420 and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS420 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board When the external waste solution sensor detected “solution completely full” (Causes of the error message) 1. The external waste solution level sensor (FS420) detected “Solution exists.” 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between FS420 and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS420 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board When the PSR upper limit sensor detects “solution low” (Causes of the error message) 1. PSR solution level is low. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PSR upper level sensor (FS410) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS410 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board When the PSR lower limit sensor detects “solution low” (Causes of the error message) 1. The PSR tank is empty. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PSR lower level sensor (FS414) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS414 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

W-2650

W1 waste tank nearly full. Collect it in the recovery tank.

When the internal waste solution sensor detects “Solution exists.” (Causes of the error message) 1. The waste solution level sensor (FS415) indicates “Solution exists.” 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between FS415 and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS415 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Actions

1. Collect the waste solution. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Collect the waste solution. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Add one FSC and four liters of FRSS. 2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace the harness.


1. Add two FSCs and eight liters of FRSS. 2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace the harness.


1. Collect the waste solution. 2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board



Message W1 waste tank full. Collect it in the recovery tank.

E-2657

P1R replenishment pump (PU408) or P1R replenisher stirring valve (S410) malfunctions. Call technical representative.

E-2658

P2RA replenishment pump (PU409) or P2RA replenisher cartridge washing valve (S408) malfunctions. Call technical representative.

Factor When the external waste solution sensor detects “solution completely full” (Causes of the error message) 1. The waste solution level sensor (FS415) indicates “Solution exists.” 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between FS415 and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS415 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board When the integrated discharge up to the P1R upper limit sensor exceeds the specified value (1998 ml) (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between P1R replenisher pump (PU408) and the PAC3 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty PU408 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between P1R stirring valve (S410) and the PDC12 in the PDC22 circuit board 4. Faulty S410 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between P1R cartridge washing valve (S407) and the PDC12 in the PDC22 circuit board 6. Faulty S407 7. Poorly connected or broken harness between P1R upper level sensor (FS407) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 8. Faulty FS407 When the integrated discharge up to the P2RA upper limit sensor exceeds the specified value (777 ml) (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RA replenisher pump (PU409) and the PAC3 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty PU409 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RA cartridge washing valve (S408) and the PDC12 in the PDC22 circuit board 4. Faulty S408 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RB upper level sensor (FS408) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 6. Faulty FS408

Actions

1. Collect the waste solution. 2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board

1. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the pump. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the stirring valve. 5. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

6. Replace the washing valve. 7. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 8. Replace the sensor.


2. Replace the pump. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

4. Replace the washing valve. 5. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.




Message P2RB replenishment pump (PU410) or P2RB replenisher cartridge washing valve (S409) malfunctions. Call technical representative.

W-2660

PSR replenisher empty. Mix the replenisher.

Factor When the integrated discharge up to the P2RB upper limit sensor exceeds the specified value (777 ml) (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RB replenisher pump (PU410) and the PAC3 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty PU410 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RB cartridge washing valve (S409) and the PDC12 in the PDC22 circuit board 4. Faulty S409 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RB upper level sensor (FS409) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 6. Faulty FS409 When the PSR lower limit sensor detects “solution low” during the FA process (Causes of the error message) 1. The PSR tank is empty. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PSR external replenisher level sensor (FS418) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS418 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

I-2662

Performing the evaporation correction. Warming-up will be started after the evaporation correction. Please wait.

Evaporation replenishment is in progress.

E-2663

P1R replenisher pump (PU408) malfunctions.

When the integrated discharge between the P1R upper and lower limit sensors exceeds the specified value (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1R replenisher pump (PU408) and the PAC3 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty PU408 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1R lower level sensor (FS411) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty FS411

Call technical representative.

Actions



4. Replace the washing valve. 5. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Add eight liters of water into the FRSS. 2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace the harness.

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. Wait until the process is completed.






Message P2RA replenisher pump (PU409) malfunctions. Call technical representative.

E-2665

P2RB replenisher pump (PU410) malfunctions. Call technical representative.

W-2666

P2R replenisher nearly empty. Mix the replenisher.

W-2667

P2R replenisher empty. Mix the replenisher.

W-2670

Replenisher cartridge not loaded. Install new replenisher cartridge.

Factor When the integrated discharge between the P2RA upper and lower limit sensors exceeds the specified value (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RA replenisher pump (PU409) and the PAC3 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty PU409 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RA lower level sensor (FS412) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty FS412 When the integrated discharge between the P2RB upper and lower limit sensors exceeds the specified value (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RB replenisher pump (PU410) and the PAC3 in the PAC22 circuit board 2. Faulty PU410 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the sensor (FS413) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty FS413 When the P2R lower limit sensor detects “solution low” during the FA process (Causes of the error message) 1. The replenisher solution level is low. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the external replenisher level sensor (FS417) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS417 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board When the P2R lower limit sensor detects “solution completely empty” during the FA process (Causes of the error message) 1. The P2R tank is empty. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2R external replenisher level sensor (FS417) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS417 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board (Causes of the error message) 1. The replenisher cartridge is not installed. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the sensor (D407) and the CTP17 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty D407 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Actions





2. Replace the pump. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the sensor.

1. Replenish the P2R tank. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Replenish the P2R tank. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. 1. Install a new replenisher cartridge. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.



Message Replenisher door open. Close it.

W-2672

PSR lowered. Continue to replenish PSR until this message disappears.

Factor The replenisher box door is open. (Causes of the error message) 1. The replenisher box door is open. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the replenisher door detecting interlock switch (D410) and the PWR4 in the PWR22 circuit board 3. Faulty D410 4. Faulty PWR22 circuit board When the PSR upper limit level sensor detects “solution low” (Causes of the error message) 1. The replenisher solution level is low. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PSR upper level sensor (FS410) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS410 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

E-2673

Opening of replenisher cartridge failed. Call technical representative.

When the lower limit sensor does not detect “solution exists” within a specific time after the cartridge is opened. (Causes of the error message) 1. Faulty replenisher cartridge opening

2. Clogged replenishment pipe(s)

3. Faulty replenisher tank lower level sensor W-2674

The replenisher cartridge that is currently used is empty. Insert a new replenisher cartridge.

When the lower limit sensor detected “solution low in all tanks” a preset time after the valve was opened (Causes of the error message) 1. An empty replenisher cartridge is installed. 2. The replenisher cartridge is not installed. 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the lower level sensor (FS411,FS412,FS413) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 4. Faulty sensor (FS411,FS412,FS413) 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the cartridge setting sensor (D407) and the CTP17 in the CTP22 circuit board 6. Faulty D407 7. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

Actions

1. Close the replenisher box door. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the PWR22 circuit board.

1. Add FRSS until the message disappears. 2. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.


1. - Check whether or not if any solution remains in the cartridge due to opening failure. If an opening error occurred, also check whether or not the opening section is broken. - If an opening error occurred but no abnormality was found, drain off the P1R,P2RA,P2RB replenisher tanks, set a new replenisher cartridge and resume operation. 2. Check whether or not foreign matter is caught in the hopper section, the hose of the replenisher tank is clogged, or solution has leaked from the hopper section. If any abnormality is found, clean it. 3. Replace the sensor.

1. Install a new replenisher cartridge. 2. Install a new replenisher cartridge. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.




Message

Factor

E-2675

P1R replenisher cartridge washing valve (S407) or P1R replenisher stirring valve (S410) malfunctions.

When the P1R replenisher upper limit sensor detects “solution low” (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1R stirring valve (S410) and the PDC12 in the PDC22 circuit board 2. Faulty S410 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1R cartridge washing valve (S407) and the PDC12 in the PDC22 circuit board 4. Faulty S407 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the auto washing pump (PU407) and the PDC9 in the PDC22 circuit board 6. Faulty PU407 7. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P1R upper level sensor (FS407) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 8. Faulty FS407

Call technical representative.

E-2676

P2RA replenisher cartridge washing valve (S408) malfunctions. Call technical representative.

E-2677

P2RB replenisher cartridge washing valve (S409) malfunctions. Call technical representative.

W-2680

Number of prints exceeds limit. Cancel printing.

When the P2RA upper limit sensor detects “solution low” (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RA cartridge washing valve (S408) and the PDC12 in the PDC22 circuit board 2. Faulty S408 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the auto washing pump (PU407) and the PDC9 in the PDC22 circuit board 4. Faulty PU407 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the sensor (FS408) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 6. Faulty FS408 When the P2RB replenisher upper limit sensor detects “solution low” (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RB cartridge washing valve (S409) and the PDC12 in the PDC22 circuit board 2. Faulty S409 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the auto washing pump (PU407) and the PDC9 in the PDC22 circuit board 4. Faulty PU407 5. Poorly connected or broken harness between the P2RB upper level sensor (FS409) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 6. Faulty FS409 The integrated replenishment into the P1R exceeded the specified value.

Actions

1. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the stirring valve. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

4. Replace the washing valve. 5. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the washing pump. 7. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.



2. Replace the washing valve. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the washing pump. 5. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the sensor.


2. Replace the washing valve. 3. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the washing pump. 5. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness.

6. Replace the sensor. Clear the error previously displayed.



Message Mixing replenisher. Please wait.

W-2686

Washing solution nearly empty. Replenish the cleaning water.

W-2688

Washing solution empty. Replenish the cleaning water.

I-2689

The replenisher is mixed.

Factor Replenisher box door opening is designated during replenisher mixing. (Causes of the error message) 1. When replenisher mixing is in progress during system start-up. 2. When installation opening is specified during opening 3. When the solution exceeds the specified amount When the washing solution level sensor detects “solution low” (Causes of the error message) 1. Low solution level 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the external washing solution level sensor (FS419) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS419 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board When the washing solution level sensor detects “solution completely empty” (Causes of the error message) 1. Low solution level 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the external washing solution level sensor (FS419) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS419 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board The previous opening conditions were detected.

Actions –

1. Add eight liters of water into the tank. 2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace the harness.


1. Add eight liters of water into the tank. 2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace the harness.

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. Replace the replenisher cartridge.

Replace the replenisher cartridge. I-2691

Solution remains in the replenisher tank. Consult your technical representative.

I-2692

Intermittent operation.

When the replenisher lower limit sensor detects “solution exists” (Causes of the error message) 1. The solution is left in the replenisher tank. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the lower level sensor (FS411, FS412, FS413) and the CTP16 in the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty lower level sensor (FS411, FS412, FS413) 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

1. Drain the solution. 2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace the harness.


While in the auto intermittent operation

–

The auto washing was attempted while the processor section was processing.


Please wait. I-2693

Processing... Please wait.

W-2701

Sort position error occurred. Check the number of prints that were outputted in the sorter.

Paper overlapping occurred when sorting. (Causes of the error message) 1. The next paper caught up with the paper in the processor. 2. Paper jamming occurred at the dryer exit. 3. The actuator of the dryer section exit sensor (D411) was stuck.

1. Clean the processing rack. 2. Remove paper. 3. Release the actuator.



Message

E-2702

An error occurred in the solution temperature sensors (TS401 to TS405). The connectors of the solution temperature sensors may be disconnected. Consult your technical representative.

The thermistor connector is out of place. (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness at the temperature sensor (TS401, TS402, TS403, TS404, TS406) 2. Faulty temperature sensor (TS401, TS402, TS403, TS404, TS406)

An error occurred in the solution temperature sensors (TS401 to TS405). The solution temperature sensors may be shorted. Consult your technical representative.

Short-circuited thermistor (Causes of the error message) 1. Temperature sensor (TS401, TS402, TS403, TS404, TS406) is short-circuited.

PSR replenisher empty.

3.5 liters of solution has been used after the PSR upper level sensor detects “solution empty.”

E-2703

W-2704

Pour 4L of FRSS, and then put one FSC tablet into the port. W-2705

PSR lowered. Pour FRSS until this message disappears, and then put one FSC tablet into the port.

Factor

When the washing solution level sensor detects “solution low” (Causes of the error message) 1. Low solution level 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the PSR lower level sensor (FS414) and the CTP22 circuit board 3. Faulty FS414 4. Faulty CTP22 circuit board

W-5001

Perforation rupture exists. Frame position may not detected correctly. Remove carrier and then film, and mend the rupture.

Torn perforations were found while the film was being inserted when using the AFC135. (Causes of the error message) 1. Film with torn perforation(s) 2. Film jamming 3. Faulty sensor (D102) 4. D102 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 5. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 6. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5002

Perforation rupture exists. Frame position may not detected correctly. Remove carrier and then film, and mend the rupture.

Torn perforations were found while the film was being ejected when using the AFC135. (Causes of the error message) 1. Film with torn perforation(s) 2. Film jamming 3. Faulty sensor (D102) 4. D102 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 5. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 6. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Reconnect the connector, or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the sensor.


Add one FSC and 4 liters of FRSS.

1. Add FRSS until the message disappears, and the add one FSC. 2. Correctly connect, repair, or replace the harness. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CTP22 circuit board.

1. Repair the tearing, or print with the manual film carrier. 2. Repair the leading end of the film. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 5. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 6. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Repair the tearing, or print with the manual film carrier. 2. Repair the leading end of the film. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 5. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 6. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.



Message Too long film. Remove carrier and then film.

Factor The film is too long when using the AFC135. (Causes of the error message) 1. A film length of 2 m or more was used. 2. Dirty or faulty 135 frame sensor (D107) 3. Sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -to- plugin connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

E-5005

An error detected by mask motor home position sensor (D117). Install the carrier again. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-5006

An error detected by mask motor home position sensor (D117). Install the carrier again. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

W-5007

Too short film. Remove carrier and then film.

The LHP motor home position detection error occurred when using the AFC135. (Causes of the error message) 1. The mask motor home position sensor (D117) is not connected. 2. The mask motor (M103) is not connected. 3. Faulty D117 4. Faulty M103 5. Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR22 circuit board 6. Blown fuse (FH5) in the CTC22 circuit board 7. D117 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 8. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 9. Faulty CTC22 circuit board The LHP motor home position detection error occurred when using the AFC135. (Causes of the error message) 1. The mask motor home position sensor (D117) is not connected. 2. The mask motor (M103) is not connected. 3. Faulty D117 4. Faulty M103 5. Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR22 circuit board 6. Blown fuse (FH5) in the CTC22 circuit board 7. D117 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 8. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 9. Faulty CTC22 circuit board A film length of 67 mm or less was used when using the AFC135. (Causes of the error message) 1. A film length of 76 mm or less was used. 2. Faulty 135 frame sensor (D107) 3. Sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -to- plugin connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Use the manual film carrier or cut the film. 2. Clean or replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Connect it properly to the connector. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Connect it properly to the connector. Replace the sensor. Replace the motor. Replace the fuse.

6. Replace the fuse. 7. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 8. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 9. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Connect it properly to the connector. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Connect it properly to the connector. Replace the sensor. Replace the motor. Replace the fuse.

6. Replace the fuse. 7. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 8. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 9. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Use the manual film carrier. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board



Message Film sensors (D101 to D111) deteriorated.

Factor CTC sensor calibration error (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty sensor glass (D101 to D111)

Remove the carrier, clean the sensor and install the carrier again. If problems persist, consult your technical representative. 2. Faulty sensor (D101 to D111) 3. Sensor (D101 to D111) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board W-5016

135 film not inserted. Remove carrier and then film.

W-5018

Feeding of film failed. More than the specified number of perforations detected. Remove carrier and then clean 135 feeding lane.

A 135 film was installed while not in the feed lane control sequence. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier is not at the 135 feed position. 2. Faulty sensor (D101, D122) 3. Sensor (D101, D122) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board Incorrect number of perforation holes were detected while the AFC135 was used: Upstream perforation suffer overflow (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the upstream perforation sensor (D102) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D102 calibration failure 4. Faulty D102 5. Sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -to- plugin connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5022

Feeding of film failed. Remove carrier and then film.

Film feed error while using the AFC135. A perforation obstruction of 8.2 mm occurred in both directions. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the upstream perforation sensor (D102) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D102 calibration failure 4. Faulty D102 5. Sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -to- plugin connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. 1) Clean the glass surface. 2) First load data to the EPROM as per “NC100A Sensor Calibration Information (44C)” and then write data to the EPROM. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Set the carrier in the 135 feed lane. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Clean the sensor glass. 2. Clean the feed roller. 3. Perform the sensor calibration as per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A).” 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.




Message Feeding of film failed. Remove carrier and then film.

Factor Film feed error occurred while using the AFC135: the load correction is outside of the 5-mm tolerance. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the upstream perforation sensor (D102) or downstream perforation sensor (D103) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. Sensor (D102, D103) calibration failure 4. Faulty sensor (D102, D103) 5. Sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -to- plugin connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5024


A film feed error occurred while using the AFC135: the unload correction is outside of the 5-mm tolerance. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the upstream perforation sensor (D102) or downstream perforation sensor (D103) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. Sensor (D102, D103) calibration failure 4. Faulty sensor (D102, D103) 5. Sensor -to- CYS22 circuit board -to- plugin connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5029


Film feed error while using the AFC135 (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the downstream perforation sensor (D103) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D103 calibration failure 4. Faulty D103 5. D103 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5030


Film feed error while using the AFC135 (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the upstream perforation sensor (D102) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D102 calibration failure 4. Faulty D102 5. D102 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Clean the sensor glass.

2. Clean the feed roller. 3. Perform the sensor calibration as per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A).” 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Clean the sensor glass.

2. Clean the feed roller. 3. Perform the sensor calibration as per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A).” 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.





Message Film remains in 135 feeding lane.

Factor A switching error occurred when a film was still loaded while using the AFC.

Actions Remove the carrier, remove the film, and reinstall the carrier.

Remove carrier and then film. W-5032

W-5033

W-5034

W-5035

Film remains in 135 feeding lane. (Around 135 upstream perforation sensor (D102)) Remove carrier and then film.

Film remains in 135 feeding lane. (Around 135 downstream perforation sensor (D103)) Remove carrier and then film.

Film remains in 135 feeding lane. (Around 135 leading end sensor (D101)) Remove carrier and then film.

Carrier not locked. Lock it.

A switching error occurred near the upstream perforation sensor when a film was still loaded while using the AFC. (Causes of the error message) 1. The film remains in the 135 feed lane. 2. Dirty glass of the upstream perforation sensor (D102) 3. Poorly connected or broken harness of D102 4. Faulty D102 5. D102 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board A switching error occurred at around the downstream perforation sensor when a film was still loaded while using the AFC. (Causes of the error message) 1. The film remains in the 135 feed lane. 2. Dirty glass of the downstream perforation sensor (D103) 3. Poorly connected or broken harness at the sensor (D103) 4. Faulty D103 5. D103 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board A switching error occurred at around the leading end sensor when a film was still loaded while using the AFC. (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FH2) in the PWR22 circuit board 2. Dirty glass of the 135 leading end sensor (D101) 3. Faulty sensor (D101) 4. D101 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 5. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 6. Faulty CTC22 circuit board The carrier was not locked in five seconds after it was loaded. Warning against a unlocked carrier (Causes of the error message) 1. Unlocked carrier 2. Faulty carrier sensor (D123) 3. D123 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

1. Remove the film. 2. Clean the sensor glass. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Remove the film. 2. Clean the sensor glass. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Replace the fuse. 2. Clean the sensor glass. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 5. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 6. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Lock the carrier. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.




Factor (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the upstream perforation sensor (D102) or downstream perforation sensor (D103) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. Sensor (D102, D103) calibration failure 4. Faulty sensor (D102, D103) 5. Sensor (D102, D103) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5053

Carrier not installed. Install carrier.

W-5054

Carrier upper cover opened. Remove carrier and then close carrier cover.

A carrier is not detected: a timeout of 2 seconds occurred in CYS communication. (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FH7) in the PWR22 circuit board 2. Faulty CYS22 circuit board The pressure cover was open when the carrier was going to be installed. (Causes of the error message) 1. The pressure cover is open. 2. Dirty or faulty upper cover open/close sensor (D120) 3. D120 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

E-5055

Carrier EEPROM data failure. Consult your technical representative.

W-5056

Carrier EEPROM data failure. Consult your technical representative.

W-5057

Carrier installing error occurred. Install the carrier again.

E-5059

An error detected by 135, IX240 carrier position sensor (D121, D122). Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

Abnormal EEPROM data in the carrier. checksum discrepancy (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier was removed during carrier initialization. 2. The carrier was removed while pushing the carrier lock lever. (Causes of the error message) 1. The EEPROM software version stored in the carrier does not comply with the specifications. Abnormal carrier installation process, or abnormal IPL process of CYS (Causes of the error message) 1. Blown fuse (FH7) in the PWR22 circuit board Both carrier position sensors failed to detect the feed lane when it is switched. (Causes of the error message) 1. Carrier position sensor (D121, D122) is not connected. 2. Faulty sensor (D121, D122) 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the sensor (D121, D122) and the CTC22 circuit board, 4. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions 1. Clean the sensor glass.

2. Clean the feed roller. 3. Perform the sensor calibration as per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A).” 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Replace the fuse. 2. Replace the carrier.

1. Remove the carrier and close the carrier pressure cover. 2. Clean or replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Replace the carrier. 2. Replace the carrier.

1. Replace the carrier.

1. Replace the fuse.

1. Properly connect it to the connector. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Repair or replace the harness.




Message

Factor

E-5063

An error detected by 135, IX240 carrier position sensor (D121, D122).

Both carrier position sensors incorrectly detects the feed lane simultaneously. (Causes of the error message) 1. Carrier position sensor (D121, D122) is not connected. 2. Faulty sensor (D121, D122) 3. Poorly connected or broken harness between the sensor (D121, D122) and the CTC22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Restart the system. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

W-5064

Too long film. Remove carrier and then film.

W-5065

Too many piece of tape. Remove carrier and then film.

E-5066

Too many frames. Remove carrier and then remove film.

Inserting of film failed. Remove carrier and then clean the feed rollers.

1. Connect it properly to the connector. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Repair or replace the harness.


Buffer error: the sampling count exceeded 21000. (Causes of the error message) 1. A film of two meters in length or more was used. 2. Dirty or faulty 135 frame sensor (D107) 3. D107 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

1. Continue processing it using the manual film carrier, or cut the film. 2. Clean or replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

Incorrect number of tapes: the detected value exceeded 20. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty or faulty check tape sensor (D106) 2. D106 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 4. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

1. Clean or replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

Incorrect number of frames: the detected value exceeded 80. (Causes of the error message) 1. A film with 80 or more frames was used. 2. Dirty or faulty 135 frame sensor (D107) 3. D107 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5067

Actions

Film load error: Ten unsuccessful attempts were made to load the film while using the AFC135. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty feed roller 2. A film with the bent leading end 3. Faulty feed motor (M101) 4. Faulty film sensor (D101, D102) 5. Sensor (D101, D102) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board



1. Continue processing it using the manual film carrier, or cut the film. 2. Clean or replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Clean the feed roller. Repair or reshape the leading end. Replace the motor. Replace the sensor. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.




Message Carrier upper cover opened. Remove carrier and then close carrier cover.

E-5069

Writing EEPROM data into carrier failed.

Factor (Causes of the error message) 1. The pressure cover is open. 2. Dirty or faulty upper cover open/close sensor (D120) 3. D120 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board Carrier EEPROM data writing failure (Causes of the error message) 1. Abnormal carrier EEPROM data

Consult your technical representative. E-5072

W-5083

Communication error between input mechanism control CB and carrier. (CTC22-CYS22) Install the carrier again. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

CYS communication error (Causes of the error message) 1. Poorly connected or broken harness between the carrier and the plug-in connector 2. Faulty carrier

The lock of the carrier is released.

(Causes of the error message) 1. Five or more seconds elapsed from when the carrier was unlocked to when the carrier was removed. 2. Carrier sensor (D123) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D123 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Remove the carrier or lock it.

W-5084

The lock of the carrier is released. Remove carrier and then film.

W-5085

The lock was released during the initialization of the carrier. Remove the carrier or lock it again.

The carrier was unlocked although paper jamming did not occur and a film was present along the film feed lane. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier was unlocked while a film was in the carrier. 2. Carrier sensor (D123) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D123 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier was removed during carrier initialization. 2. Carrier sensor (D123) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D123 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions 1. Remove the carrier and close the carrier pressure cover. 2. Clean or replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Perform data writing again. If the error recurs, replace the carrier.

1. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 2. Replace the carrier.

1. Remove the film, lock the carrier, and unlock the carrier. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Remove the film, lock the carrier, and unlock the carrier. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

3. Replace the sensor. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 1. Lock the carrier again. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.




Message The auto film carrier not installed. Install the auto film carrier.

W-5101

Cartridge remains in carrier. Remove carrier and then cartridge.

W-5102


Factor (Causes of the error message) 1. The auto film carrier is not installed. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the plug-in connector and the CTC22 circuit board 3. Faulty CTC22 circuit board Cartridge present error when using the AFC240 (Causes of the error message) 1. A cartridge is in the carrier. 2. The cartridge set lever is in the operating position . 3. Faulty cartridge sensor (D115) 4. D115 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 5. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 6. Faulty CTC22 circuit board A film load jam occurred while using the AFC240: the load correction is outside of the 5-mm tolerance. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the IX240 perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D105 calibration failure 4. Faulty D105 5. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5103


Film load jam while using the AFC240: a perforation interval exceeding 29 and a perforation length exceeding 8 mm were detected during the fine scanning. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the IX240 perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D105 calibration failure 4. Faulty D105 5. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions 1. Install the auto film the carrier. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Remove the cartridge. 2. Return the cartridge set lever to the cartridge setting position. 3. Replace the sensor. 4. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 5. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 6. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Clean the glass of the sensor. 2. Clean the feed roller. 3. Perform the sensor calibration as per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A).” 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.





Factor Film load jam while using the AFC240: a perforation interval exceeding 9 mm and a perforation length exceeding 8 mm were detected during the fine scanning. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty IX240 perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D105 calibration failure 4. Faulty D105 5. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5105


Film load jam while using the AFC240: the film was fed with a distance of 11 mm after the DTP perforation during film feed. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5106


Film load jam while using the using the AFC240: the film was fed with a distance of 8 mm after the DTP perforation during film feed. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions







Factor Film rewind jam while using the AFC240: the hole count detected while rewinding exceeded the hole count detected while loading. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5108


Film rewind jam while using the AFC240.The rewind direction correction is outside of the 5mm tolerance. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D105 calibration failure 4. Faulty D105 5. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5109


Film rewind jam while using the AFC240: a perforation interval exceeding 9 mm and a perforation length exceeding 8 mm were detected during the fine rewind scanning. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D105 calibration failure 4. Faulty D105 5. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5110


Film rewind jam while using the AFC240: a perforation interval exceeding 29 mm and a perforation length exceeding 8 mm were detected during the fine rewind scanning. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D105 calibration failure 4. Faulty D105 5. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions








Factor Film rewind jam while using the AFC240: Perforation was detected in TAP or MTP during the FID scanning. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) or perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. Sensor (D104, D105) calibration failure 4. Faulty sensor (D104, D105) 5. Sensor (D104, D105) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5112


Film rewind jam while using the AFC240: TAP hole length exceeding 8 mm was detected. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5113

Unsupported perforation type detected, so film not fed correctly. Remove carrier and then film.

Perforation width error while using the AFC240: a perforation interval exceeding 9 mm was detected during the pre-feed. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D105 calibration failure 4. Faulty D105 5. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5114



Actions

1. Clean the sensor glass. 2. Clean the feed roller. 3. Perform the sensor calibration as per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A).” 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.







Message Unsupported perforation type detected, so film not fed correctly. Remove carrier and then film.

Factor Perforation width error while using the AFC240: a perforation interval exceeding 29 mm was detected during the pre-feed. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D105 calibration failure 4. Faulty D105 5. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5116



E-5117


Perforation width error while using the AFC240: a TAP was not detected at the last frame. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5118


Perforation width error while using the AFC240: a TAP perforation exceeding 8 mm was detected during the feed. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions







Message Unsupported perforation type detected, so film not fed correctly. Remove carrier and then film.

Factor Perforation width error while using the AFC240: a TAP (DTP) perforation exceeding 8 mm was detected during the feed. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5121

Unprocessed cartridge. Not used. If it is a processed cartridge, fold IPI. When IPI is damaged, consult your technical representative.

IPI error while using the AFC240 (Causes of the error message) 1. The film is not processed. 2. The cartridge cannot be set in the feed position. 3. Faulty IPI detection pin 4. Faulty IPI sensor (D113) 5. D113 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5122

Film inserted in reverse. Check right direction and surface, and then insert it again.

Installed film direction error while using the AFC240 (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty film sensor (D104, D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. Sensor (D104, D105) calibration failure 4. Faulty sensor (D104, D105) 5. Sensor (D104, D105) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

E-5123


Home position detection by the spool motor is incorrect while using the AFC240. (Causes of the error message) 1. Supply motor home position sensor (D114) or supply motor (M102) is not connected. 2. Faulty D114 3. Faulty M102 4. D114 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 5. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 6. Faulty CTC22 circuit board 7. Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR22 circuit board

Actions


1. Replace the cartridge with the one already processed. 2. Check whether or not the cartridge is in the installation position. 3. Check whether or not the detection pin functions correctly. 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Clean the glass of the sensor. 2. Clean the feed roller. 3. Perform the sensor calibration as per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A).” 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Connect it properly to the connector.

2. Replace the sensor. 3. Replace the motor. 4. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 5. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 6. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 7. Replace the fuse.



Message Cartridge not inserted. Remove carrier and then cartridge.

W-5125

IX240 film not inserted. Remove carrier and then film.

W-5126

Film perforation error. Remove carrier and then film.

Factor Cartridge was tried to be installed while not in the 240 feed lane control sequence. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier is not in the IX240 feed position. 2. Faulty carrier position sensor (D121) or cartridge sensor (D115) 3. D121 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board An attempt was made to install the cartridge while not in the 240 feed lane control sequence. (Causes of the error message) 1. The carrier is not in the IX240 feed position. 2. Faulty carrier position sensor (D121) or leading end sensor (D104) 3. Sensor (D121, D104) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board DTP detection error while using the AFC240: the DTP was detected within 66 mm after the TAP was detected. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5127

Film perforation error. Remove carrier and then film.

Holes were detected in the film while using the AFC240: the number of perforations are larger than the specified value. during the TAP. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Install the carrier in the IX240 feed position. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Install the carrier in the IX240 feed position. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.






Message Film remains in IX240 feeding lane. Remove carrier and then film.

Factor Feed lane switching error while using the AFC240: Attempt was made to switch the feed lane while a film remained in the 240 feed lane. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty leading end sensor (D104) or perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. Sensor (D104, D105) calibration failure 4. Faulty sensor (D104, D105) 5. Sensor (D104, D105) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5129

Inserting of film failed. Remove carrier and then film.

Film load error while using the AFC240: 1. Dirty feed roller 2. The leading end is bent or other problems 3. 4. 5. 6.

W-5130

Film rupture. Remove carrier and then film.

Faulty feed motor (M101) Faulty CYS22 circuit board Faulty CTC22 circuit board Blown fuse (FH32) in the PWR22 circuit board

Holes were detected in the film while using the AFC240: the number of perforations are larger than the specified value during the MTP. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D105 calibration failure 4. Faulty D105 5. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5131

Film remains in IX240 feeding lane. (Around IX240 TAP and leading end sensor (D104)) Remove carrier and then film.

Film remains in the 240 feed lane while using the AFC240 (TAP sensor ) (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Clean the sensor glass. 2. Clean the feed roller. 3. Perform the sensor calibration as per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A).” 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.

6. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 1. Clean the feed roller. 2. Repair or reshape the film leading end. 3. Replace the motor. 4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 6. Replace the fuse.





Message Film remains in IX240 feeding lane. (Around IX240 perforation sensor (D105)) Remove carrier and then film.

Factor Film remains in the 240 feed lane while using the AFC240 (MTP sensor ) (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty perforation sensor (D105) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D105 calibration failure 4. Faulty D105 5. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

E-5133

An error occurred in cartridge door. Install the carrier again. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

E-5134

An error occurred in cartridge door. Remove carrier and then remove film. If problems persist, consult your technical representative.

W-5135

Film not drawn from cartridge. Remove carrier and then cartridge.

Door motor initialization error 1. The door open/close sensor (D112) or door motor (M104) is not connected. 2. Faulty D112 3. Faulty M104 4. D112 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 5. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 6. Faulty CTC22 circuit board 7. Faulty door open/close mechanism Door motor drive error while using the AFC240 1. The door open/close sensor (D112) is not connected. 2. The connector of the door motor (M104) is not connected. 3. Faulty D112 4. Faulty M104 5. Faulty CTP22 circuit board 6. Faulty door open/close mechanism Leading end load error while using the AFC240: Inconsistency in the motor drive. (Causes of the error message) 1. The cartridge does not contain a film. 2. The connector of the leading end sensor (D104) or feed motor (M102) is not connected. 3. Dirty or faulty D104 4. Faulty M102 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Clean the sensor glass. 2. Clean the feed roller. 3. Perform the sensor calibration as per “NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A).” 4. Replace the sensor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 1. Connect it properly to the connector. 2. Replace the sensor. 3. Replace the motor. 4. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 5. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 6. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 7. Replace the unit in the nest section.

1. Connect it properly to the connector. 2. Connect it properly to the connector. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Replace the sensor. Replace the motor. Replace the CTP22 circuit board. Replace the unit in the nest section.

1. Confirm that the film is installed. 2. Connect it properly to the connector.

3. Clean or replace the sensor. 4. Replace the motor. 5. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 6. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 7. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.



Message Film not drawn from cartridge. Remove carrier and then cartridge.

W-5137


Factor Leading end load error while using the AFC240: The leading end does not reach the MTP. (Causes of the error message) 1. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 2. Dirty perforation sensor (D105) 3. D105 or the feed motor (M101) is not connected. 4. D105 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 5. Faulty sensor (D105) 6. Faulty motor (M101) 7. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 8. Faulty CTC22 circuit board Rewind error while using the AFC240: The TAP sensor detects the TAP when the rewind operation ends. (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty glass of the leading end sensor (D104) 2. Slips caused by a dirty feed roller 3. D104 calibration failure 4. Faulty D104 5. D104 -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 6. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 7. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5140

Magnetic head is stained. May not read magnetic data. Remove carrier and then clean the magnetic head.

Magnetic information verification error while using the AFC240 (Causes of the error message) 1. Dirty magnetic head 2. Magnetic head-related mechanism problem 3. Poorly connected or broken harness at the magnetic head connector (D116, MG101) 4. Faulty MRH circuit board 5. Faulty MWH circuit board 6. CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 7. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 8. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

W-5154

Cartridge lever locked. Release the lever lock.

Cartridge lock error while using the AFC240 (Causes of the error message) 1. The cartridge lock lever is in the locked state. 2. Cartridge sensor (D115) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -toCTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D115 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Clean the feed roller. 2. Clean the sensor. 3. Properly connect it to the connector. 4. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Replace the sensor. Replace the motor. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.


1. Clean the magnetic head. 2. Replace the magnetic head ASSY. 3. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 4. Replace the magnetic head ASSY or circuit board. 5. Replace the magnetic head ASSY or circuit board. 6. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 7. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 8. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.

1. Set the cartridge lock lever to the unlocked position. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.




Message

Factor

W-5160

The IX240 lane cannot be used.

The operator installed an IX240 cartridge while the 135 feed lane was selected. (Causes of the error message) 1. An IX240 cartridge was installed while the carrier was set to the 135 feed lane. 2. 135 carrier position sensor (D122) -toCYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D122 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Remove cartridge and then select the IX240 lane.

W-5161

The IX240 lane cannot be used. Remove film and then select the IX240 lane.

W-5162

Cartridge remains. Remove carrier and then cartridge.

W-5203

The manual film carrier not installed. Install the manual film carrier.

An IX240 cartridge was installed when the carrier was set midpoint between the two lanes. (Causes of the error message) 1. An IX240 cartridge was installed when the carrier was set midpoint between the two lanes. 2. IX240 carrier position sensor (D121) -toCYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -to- CTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D121 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board Switching error occurred when a cartridge was installed while using the AFC240. (Causes of the error message) 1. An IX240 cartridge was installed in the cartridge holder. 2. The cartridge set lever is set to the set position. 3. Cartridge sensor (D115) -to- CYS22 circuit board -toplug-in connector -toCTC22 circuit board, poorly connected or broken harness 3. Faulty D115 4. Faulty CYS22 circuit board 5. Faulty CTC22 circuit board (Causes of the error message) 1. The manual film carrier is not installed. 2. Poorly connected or broken harness between the plug-in connector and the CTC22 circuit board 3. Faulty CTC22 circuit board

Actions

1. Set the carrier to the 240 feed lane. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Set the carrier to the 240 position.

2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness.


1. Remove the cartridge. 2. Return the cartridge lever to the front. 3. Replace the sensor.

4. Replace the CYS22 circuit board. 5. Replace the CTC22 circuit board. 1. Install the manual film carrier. 2. Reconnect the connector or repair/ replace the harness. 3. Replace the CTC22 circuit board.


4. SOFTWARE INSTALLATION 4.1 Simple Upgrade 4.2 Update 4.3 Reinstallation 4.4 New Installation 4.5 Reversion


4.1 Simple Upgrade In the “Simple Upgrade”, you can upgrade the FRONTIER330 System Software(A1) and Variety Print Software(B1) by following the simple guidance messages on the screen. NOTE: 1)Insert the CD in the CD-ROM drive with its printed surface facing the front. 2)To open the tray of the CD-ROM drive, press the eject button.

1. Insert the FRONTIER330 System (A1) Disk into the CD-ROM drive.

FRONTIER330 System (A1) Disk

2. Perform the post-operational checks to shut down the system. 3. Press the START switch.

CD1053


4.1 Simple Upgrade • The installer is started and the “[L-001] Simple Upgrade” screen appears. 4. Click [OK]. NOTE: If [Cancel] is clicked, the FRONTIER330 System(A1) installation is skipped, and the “Variety Print(B1)” installation screen appears.

• The “Procedure Selection 1[C-001]” screen appears. 5. Select “User version up” and click [Next>].


4.1 Simple Upgrade • The “Starting Update[C-010]” dialog box appears.

6. Click [Yes]. • The updating process starts. • Upon completion of the upgrade, the “Update Completion[C-080]” dialog box appears.

7. Click [OK]. The “Setup Completion [C-090]” dialog box appears. 8. Click [OK].


4.1 Simple Upgrade • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not used, the “SETUP” dialog box appears. • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used, the “[L-003] Simple Upgrade” for Variety Print Service screen appears. NOTE: If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1) software is necessary, refer to the Installation Manual for the Variety Print Service (B1).

9. Click [Cancel].


4.1 Simple Upgrade • The “SETUP” dialog box appears.

10. Remove the FRONTIER 330 (A1) Disk from the CD-ROM drive. 11. Click [OK]. • The system is shut down. 12. Press the START switch to start up the system. FRONTIER330 System (A1) Disk CD1054


4.1 Simple Upgrade NOTE: When the message “E-2305” appears at the time of the start-up, click [OK] to clear it.

• The system software starts up and upgrade has been completed. 13. Perform printing operation after executing “Paper Condition Setup” and “Preoperational Checks”.


4.2 Update In the “Update”, the FRONTIER 330 System Software (A1) is upgraded. IMPORTANT: If more than 160MB of free space is not available in the hard disk, delete the variety print service template data. 1. Insert the FRONTIER 330 System (A1) Disk into the CD-ROM drive.


2. Shut down the system after performing the post-operational checks. 3. Press the START switch.

CD1053


4.2 Update • After starting up Windows, “(L-100) Simple Upgrade” screen appears. 4. Click [OK].

• “Procedure Selection 1 (C-001)” dialog box appears. 5. Select “SE maintenance” and click [Next (N)].


4.2 Update • “Procedure Selection 2 (C-002)” dialog box appears. 6. Select “Update” and click [Next (N)].

• The “Starting Update (C-010)” dialog box appears. 7. Click [Yes]. NOTE: If the error message “Insufficient disk space on drive D. Installation not performed.” Is displayed, delete unnecessary files or template data files, then start installation again.


4.2 Update • The “File Copy (C-020)” dialog box appears. 8. Check version information and click [Next (N)]. • The update processing starts.


4.2 Update • After approximately 16 minutes, the “Inherited Data Transport Media Selection (C-050)” dialog box appears. 9. Select “Inherit data from former version of application” and click [Next (N)]. NOTE: When data in FD is used, select “Inherit data from FD”.

• The “Update Completion (C-080)” dialog box appears. 10. Click [OK].

• The “Setup Completion (C-090)” dialog box appears. 11. Click [OK].


4.2 Update • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not used, the “SETUP” completion dialog box appears. • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used, the “(L002) Simple Upgrade” screen appears. NOTE: If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1) software is necessary, refer to the Installation Manual for the Variety Print Service (B1).

12. Click [Cancel]. • The “SETUP” completion dialog box appears.


4.2 Update 13. Remove the FRONTIER 330 System (A1) Disk from the CD-ROM drive. 14. Click [OK]. • The system is shut down. 15. Press the START switch to restart up the system. FRONTIER330 System (A1) Disk CD1054

• After starting up the system, the error message “E-2305” appears. 16. Click [OK] to clear the message.


4.3 Reinstallation The reinstallation procedure is performed after the following part has been replaced. • • • •

Main control unit CTP22 circuit board CTC22 circuit board GHT22 circuit board

1. Press the START switch. • The Windows desktop screen is displayed. 2. Rename the “FUJIFILM” folder in the “D” drive such as “FUJIFILM-1”, etc. except when the main control unit has been replaced.


4.3 Reinstallation 3. Insert the FRONTIER 330 System (A1) Disk into the CD-ROM drive.


CD1053


4.3 Reinstallation NOTE: Proceed to step 11 when the main control unit has been replaced.

4. Select “Run” from the “Start” menu.


4.3 Reinstallation 5. Click [Browse] and select “ISO9660 (N)” for the CD-ROM drive. 6. Click [Open].

7. Double click “EZ171” folder and select “EZSetup.exe”. 8. Click [Open].


4.3 Reinstallation 9. Make sure “N:\EZ171\EZSetup.exe” is displayed in the “Open” box. 10. Click [OK].

• The “Procedure Selection (A-001)” dialog box appears. 11. Select “Reinstallation” and click [Next (N)].


4.3 Reinstallation • The “Starting Reinstallation (A-100)” dialog box appears. 12. Click [Yes]. NOTE: If the error message “Insufficient disk space on drive D. Installation not performed.” Is displayed, delete unnecessary files or template data files, then start installation again.

• The reinstallation process starts. • After approximately16 minutes, the “FD Confirmation (A-117)” dialog box appears.

13. Click [Yes].


4.3 Reinstallation • The “Inserting Backup FD (A-120)” dialog box appears. 14. Click [Yes].

• The “Information” dialog box appears.


4.3 Reinstallation 15. Insert the scanner’s backup FD into the FD drive.

CD1055

16. Click [OK]. • The “Inserting Printer’s Backup FD (A-130)” dialog box appears when completing data backup of the scanner. 17. Click [Yes].


4.3 Reinstallation • The “Information” dialog box appears.

18. Insert the printer’s backup FD into the FD drive.

CD1055

19. Click [OK].


4.3 Reinstallation • The “New Installation Completion (A-020)” dialog box appears.

20. Click [OK]. • The “Setup Completion (A-150)” dialog box appears.

21. Click [OK].


4.3 Reinstallation • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not used, the “SETUP” completion dialog box appears. • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used, the “(L002) Simple Upgrade” screen appears. NOTE: If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1) software is necessary, refer to the Installation Manual for the Variety Print Service (B1).



4.3 Reinstallation 23. Remove the FRONTIER 330 System (A1) Disk from the CD-ROM drive.

FRONTIER330 System (A1) Disk CD1054


4.3 Reinstallation 24. Remove the backup FD from the FD driver. 25. Click [OK]. • The system is shut down. 26. Press the START switch to restart up the system.

CD1056

• After starting up the system, the error message “E-2305” appears. 27. Click [OK] to clear the message. NOTE: If the “DI Print and Data Writing Service (C4/C5)” software is used, install the software by referring the Instruction Manual of the “DI Print and Data Writing Service”.


4.4 New Installation The new installation procedure is performed only when the backup FD is not found when replacing the main control unit. 1. Press the START switch. • The Windows desktop screen is displayed.


4.4 New Installation 2. Insert the FRONTIER 330 System (A1) Disk into the CD-ROM drive.


CD1053


4.4 New Installation • The “Procedure Selection (A-001)” dialog box appears. 3. Select “New Installation” and click [Next (N)].

• The “Starting New Installation (A-010)” dialog box appears. 4. Click [Yes]. NOTE: If the error message “Insufficient disk space on drive D. Installation not performed.” Is displayed, delete unnecessary files or template data files, then start installation again.

• The new installation process starts.


4.4 New Installation • After approximately16 minutes, the “New Installation Completion (A020)” dialog box appears. 5. Click [OK]. • The “Setup Completion (A-030)” dialog box appears. 6. Click [OK].


4.4 New Installation • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not used, the “SETUP” completion dialog box appears. • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used, the “(L002) Simple Upgrade” screen appears. NOTE: If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1) software is necessary, refer to the Installation Manual for the Variety Print Service (B1).

7. Click [Cancel].


4.4 New Installation • The “SETUP” completion dialog box appears.

8. Remove the FRONTIER 330 System (A1) Disk from the CD-ROM drive.

9. Click [OK]. • The system is shut down.


10. Press the START switch to restart up the system.


4.4 New Installation • After starting up the system, the error message “E-2305” appears. 11. Click [OK] to clear the message. • The error message “E-2107” appears. 12. Click [OK] to clear the message. 13. Open the menu 41F “Installation Information Setup” screen. 14. Set up each item if necessary (see subsection 5.2.8). 15. Perform the post-operational checks to shut down the system. 16. Press the START switch to start up the system. NOTE: If the “DI Print and Data Writing Service (C4/C5)” software is used, install the software by referring the Instruction Manual of the “DI Print and Data Writing Service”.


4.5 Reversion This procedure reverts the system software to the previous version. 1. Perform the “Data Backup” in menu 417 to overwrite the Backup FD with the backup data. 2. Insert the FRONTIER 330 System (A1) Disk into the CD-ROM drive.


3. Shut down the system after performing the post-operational checks. 4. Press the START switch.

CD1053


4.5 Reversion • After starting up Windows, “(L-100) Simple Upgrade” screen appears. 5. Click [OK].


4.5 Reversion • “Procedure Selection 1 (C-001)” dialog box appears. 6. Select “SE maintenance” and click [Next (>)].

• “Procedure Selection 2 (C-002)” dialog box appears. 7. Select “Reversion to previous version” and click [Next (>)].


4.5 Reversion • The “Starting Version Back (C-100)” dialog box appears. 8. Click [Yes]. NOTE: If the error message “Insufficient disk space on drive D. Installation not performed.” Is displayed, delete unnecessary files or template data files, then start installation again.

• The “Inserting Printer’s Backup FD” dialog box appears. 9. Click [Yes].

• The “Information” dialog box appears.


4.5 Reversion 10. Insert the printer’s backup FD into the FD drive.

CD1055

11. Click [OK]. • The “Version Back Completion (C-120)” dialog box appears.

12. Click [OK].


4.5 Reversion • The “Setup Completion (C-130)” dialog box appears.

13. Click [OK]. • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is not used, the “SETUP” completion dialog box appears. • If the Variety Print Service (B1) software is used, the “(L002) Simple Upgrade” screen appears. NOTE: If upgrade of the Variety Print Service (B1) software is necessary, refer to the Installation Manual for the Variety Print Service (B1).



4.5 Reversion 15. Remove the FRONTIER 330 System (A1) Disk from the CD-ROM drive.



4.5 Reversion 16. Remove the Backup FD from the FD drive. 17. Click [OK]. • The system is shut down. 18. Press the START switch to restart up the system.

CD1056

• After starting up the system, the error message “E-2305” appears. 19. Click [OK] to clear the message. NOTE: If the “DI Print and Data Writing Service (C4/C5)” software is used, install the software by referring the Instruction Manual of the “DI Print and Data Writing Service”.


5. MAINTENANCE MENU 5.1 Operational Procedure

5.3.7

5.2 System Operation Setup and Check (41)

5.3.8 5.3.9 5.3.10 5.3.11 5.3.12 5.3.13 5.3.14

5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.9 5.2.10 5.2.11

Production Information 1 (411) Production Information 2 (412) Timer Setup (414) Error Information Check (415) Installation Information Confirmation (416) Data Backup (417) Clear Error Log (41E) Installation Information Setup (41F) Shipping Information Reference (41G) DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I) Timer Waiting Time Setup (41J)

5.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (42) 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6

Paper Condition Setup (421) Processor Temperature Check (422) Control Strip Processing (423) Print Size Setup (424) Monitor Adjustment (426) Image Correction Setup (42C)

Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (42D) Special Film CH Setting (42E) Monotone Correction Setting (42G) Paper Condition Method Setup (42J) Shop Logo Regist/Delete (42K) Template Regist/Delete (42L) Custom Setting Regist/Delete (42M) Holiday File Registration/Delete (42N)

5.4 Scanner Adjustment/ Maintenance (43) 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 5.4.6 5.4.7 5.4.8 5.4.9 5.4.10 5.4.11 5.4.12

Input Check (431) Focus Calibration (432) Focus Position Adjustment (433) Operation Information Display (434) I/O Check (43A) Carrier Inclination Display (43B) CCD Data Display (43C) Lens Registration (43D) Optical Axis Adjustment (43E) Optical Magnification Calibration (43F) Brightness Correction (43G) Darkness Correction (43H)


5.4.13 5.4.14 5.4.15 5.4.16

Spectral Calibration (43J) DC Offset Cancel (43K) LED Light Amount Adjustment (43L) Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set (43U)

5.5 Carrier Adjustment/ Maintenance (44) 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5

Mask Position Adjustment (441) NC100AC Input Check (442) Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (448) NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A) NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information (44C) 5.5.6 NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Display (44D) 5.5.7 NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Setup (44E) 5.5.8 NC100AC I/O Check (44F) 5.5.9 NC100AC Machine Data Setup (44K) 5.5.10 NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading (44M) 5.5.11 NC100AC Magnetic Verify (44N) 5.5.12 NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup (44R)

5.6 Printer Adjustment/ Maintenance (45) 5.6.1 5.6.2 5.6.3 5.6.4 5.6.5 5.6.6 5.6.7 5.6.8 5.6.9 5.6.10 5.6.11 5.6.12 5.6.13 5.6.14 5.6.15 5.6.16 5.6.17 5.6.18

Paper Magazine Registration (451) Paper Feed Length Adjustment (452) Test Pattern Printing (453) G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454) Paper Feed (455) Printer Temperature Display (456) Printer Input Check (457) Printer I/O Check (45A) Filter Replacement History (45B) Laser Exposure Check (45C) R Laser (R-LD) Data (45D) G Laser (G-SHG) Data (45E) B Laser (B-SHG) Data (45F) Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (45G) Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (45H) Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J) Laser History Display (45K) Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (45L)


5.6.19 5.6.20 5.6.21 5.6.22 5.6.23 5.6.24 5.6.25 5.6.26 5.6.27

Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (45M) Back Printer Test (45N) Printer Operation Data Display (45P) Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (45Q) Clearing All Operation Data (45R) Side Register Calibration (45S) Data Saving (45T) Data Download (45U) Precut Length Setting (45V)

5.7 Processor Adjustment/ Maintenance (46) 5.7.1 5.7.2 5.7.3 5.7.4 5.7.5 5.7.6 5.7.7 5.7.8 5.7.9

Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/ Setting (461) Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (462) Processing Temperature Setting (463) Replenisher Rate Setting (464) Evaporation Correction Rate Setting (465) Low Volume Setup (466) Processor Temperature Calibration (467) Processor Input Check (468) Processor I/O Check (46A)

5.7.10 5.7.11 5.7.12 5.7.13 5.7.14

Processor Operating Condition Setup (46B) Processor Operation Data Display (46C) Clearing Selected Operation Data (46D) Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E) Installation (46F)

5.8 Self-Diagnostic (49) 5.8.1 5.8.2 5.8.3 5.8.4

Trouble Help (491) Help Update (492) Image Abnormality Analyzer (493) Paper Feed Check (494)

5.9 Special Operations (410) 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3

Paint (410A) Explorer (410B) Command (49C)


5.1 Operational Procedure

NOTE: For mouse operations, see the instruction manual “Basic Operations”.

1. Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” from the main menu.



2. Select “SE2” for the user name and enter “7777” for the password, and click [OK]. NOTE: • “SE1” user name is prepared for the user who manages printing quality. The password is “6666”. • SE2” user name is prepared for the service engineer.

• The “Setup and Maintenance” screen appears. 3. Select the desired item from the item list and press its [+] button.



• The sub-item list appears. 4. Move the cursor to the desired item and click [START]. • Each screen appears. 5. Perform the operation by following the instructions on the screen. 6. Upon completion of the setup and maintenance operations, click [OK] to perform processing or [Cancel] to quit the screen. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 7. Click [END]. 8. Operation returns to the main menu.


5.2 System Operation Setup and Check (41) 5.2.1 Production Information 1 (411) (Maintenance menu for operator)

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation Setup and Check” → “ 1 Production Information 1”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the production information. The data can be cleared in this menu. 1. Select “Negative”, “Reversal”, “Digital Image” or “All” from the “Input Type” box. • The information of the input type is displayed. 2. Record the production information.



3. To clear the data, follow the steps below. 1) Select “Input Type” to be clear. 2) Click [Clear]. • The “Clear production information?” dialog box appears. 3) Click [OK]. • The data are cleared and clearing date appears. 4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.2.2 Production Information 2 (412) (Maintenance menu for laboratory manager)

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation Setup and Check” → “2 Production Information 2”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the production information. The data can be cleared in this menu. 1. Select “Negative”, “Reversal”, “Digital Image” or “All” from the “Input Type” box. • The information of the input type is displayed. 2. Record the production information.



3. To clear the data, follow the steps below. 1) Click [Clear]. • The “Clear production information?” dialog box appears. 2) Click [OK]. • The data are cleared and clearing date appears. 4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.2.3 Timer Setup (414) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation and Check” → “4 Timer Setup (414)”

[Procedure] This procedure sets the present date/time, timer ON date/time and preheat setup times. 1. To update “Present Date/Time”, change the date and time, and click [OK]. NOTE: To cancel the update, click [Cancel].

2. To change the timer date and time, enter a “tick” in the day of the week boxes and enter the time in the “Timer ON Date/Time Setting” box.



3. Set the preheat timer by following the steps below, if necessary. IMPORTANT: The ON time for a night-time preheating operation must not overlap with the ON time of the weekly timer since night-time preheating takes priority and shuts down all power when it is set OFF. If, for instance, the calendar timer is set to 5:00 and night-time preheating is turned ON at 3:30, all the power will be shut down two hours later at 5:30. NOTE: Night-time preheating is usually conducted when the room temperature drops below 10°C (50°F) at night and the temprature is not controlled for 8 or more hours.

1) Select “YES” for “Preheat Setting”.



• The 1st and 2nd preheat setting boxes appears. 2) Move the cursor to “1st Preheat” and enter the time. 3) Move the cursor to “2nd Preheat” and enter the time. NOTE: • For preheating once only, set the same time for both the first and second times. • Select “NO” when the preheat timer is not used. • The second preheating timer is ignored if the first preheat time and second preheat time overlap.

1st. pre-heat time: 2:00 2nd. pre-heat time: 3:00 With the above settings, night-time preheating will occur from 2:00 to 4:00 (2 hours). 4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.2.4 Error Information Check (415) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation and check” → “5 Error Information Check (415)”

[Procedure] The system error log is listed up in order of date and time. 1. Click [Accum. Info].



• Accumulated error information is displayed in order of code and frequency. 2. Click [OK].

• The log file is read out and the latest information is displayed on the screen. 3. Click [Log Information].



• Operation returns to the “Error log information” screen. 4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.2.5 Installation Information Confirmation (416) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation and check” → “6 Installation Information Confirmation (416)”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the scanner and printer installation information. 1. Check the installation information. 2. Click [Option].



• The “Optional Device Reference” dialog box appears. 3. Check if PU800BA, External File I/O and FDI Lab-in Built-in are used. 4. Click [OK]. • The dialog box disappears. 5. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.2.6 Data Backup (417) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation and check” → “7 Data Backup (417)”

[Procedure] This procedure makes a backup of the data stored on the hard disk of the main control unit when data, indicated on the data sheet located inside the front upper cover, are changed. The backup floppy disks are used when reinstalling or reverting to earlier system software. 1. Prepare a new floppy disk for data backup when backing up data. 2. Insert the diskette into the floppy drive of the main control unit.



3. Move the cursor to the “Destination” box and select “Film Scanner”, “Printer Processor” or “Pricing Unit”. NOTE: Perform the data backup for the pricing unit when pricing unit data are changed. Data are backed up from the pricing unit to the hard disk of the main control unit.

4. Click [OK]. • The “Making the backup of the data” message appears. 5. Upon completion of the backup, click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.2.7 Clear Error Log (41E) [Selection] Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation Setup and Check” → “E Clear Error Log”

[Procedure] This procedure clears the system error and printer error information. 1. Select the item to be cleared and click [Clear]. • The selected information is cleared. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.2.8 Installation Information Setup (41F) [Selection] Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation Setup and Check” → “F Installation Information Setup”

[Procedure] This procedure sets the installation information. After setting up, restart the system to activate the new settings. 1. Set the delivery date, startup date, lab ID and scanner type.



2. Click [Option]. 3. Select “Used”or “Not used” for “PU800BA” and “Bar-code Reader”. 4. Select “YES” or “NO” for “External File I/O”. 5. Click [OK]. • The dialog box disappears. 6. Click [OK]. • The following message appears. 7. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 8. Perform the post-operational checks to stop the system and then restart the system. • The new settings are activated.



5.2.9 Shipping Information Reference (41G) [Selection] Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation Setup and Check” → “G Shipping Information Reference”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the shipping information. 1. The model, serial no. and shipping date are displayed. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.2.10 DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation and Check” → “I Manager Administrative Setting”

[Procedure] This menu is used when connecting the optional FDI controller. “Delete Waiting Time”: Sets up the time until the order processed on the FDI controller is deleted. “Order Identifier”: Enter “b” for 2nd SLP800 when two machines are connected to one FDI controller. In this case, the “Device Name” for the 2nd SLP800 should be changed.

“Digital image import auto start-up”: The “Time to start-up” box appears by selecting “YES”. The “PR Status Notice” dialog box will appear automatically on the printing screen in the setting time when there is order in the DI controller.



5.2.11 Timer Waiting Time Setup (41J) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “1 System Operation and Check” → “J Timer Waiting Time Setup”

[Procedure] This procedure sets up “Sorter Information Display Time”, “Waiting Time for Monitoring” and “Waiting Time for the Position Adjust of the 1st Frame”. “Sorter Info. Display Time”: Time to display the number of prints and sort number when pressing the [Sort] key or during auto sorting



“Waiting time for monitoring”: Waiting time for 1or 6-frame display during prescanning. This function activates only when the “Auto” film drive mode is used. “Waiting time for the pos. adjust of the 1st frame”: Display time for black/white image displayed after inserting the film to adjust the position of the leading end frame. NOTE: The black/white frame will disappear in 20 seconds to protect the CCD.

1. Move the cursor to the “sec.” box. 2. Change the time by clicking the [▲] or [▼] utton. 3. Click [OK].

• Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.


5.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (42) 5.3.1 Paper Condition Setup (421) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “1 Paper Condition Setup”

[Procedure] When new paper is to be loaded, do this procedure to set up the new paper condition. 1. Install the paper magazine to be set up. NOTE: Click [Initialize] to initialize condition setup data.


5.3 Print Condition Setup and Check (42)

2. Click [Print].

• After about 5 minutes, a condition setup print is fed out.



3. After the condition setup print has come out, press the [Dens Measure] button.



4. Adjust the guide of the densitometer according to the width of the condition setup print.

Densitometer

Guide

NOTE: If an error occurs, press the orange [RESET] switch.

EZ634



5. Insert the condition setup print into the densitometer.

Densitometer

Condition Setup Print EZ635



6. Press the [START] button on the densitometer.

[START] Button EZ636



• The measurement is automatically started and the density measurement result is displayed. 7. Click [OK].

• The density measurement result disappears. NOTE: If the “Density Measurement Result” is not acceptable, the message shown at the right appears. Perform steps 4 to 9 again until the result becomes OK.

8. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.3.2 Processor Temperature Check (422) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “2 Processor Temperature Check”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the processing solution temperatures. 1. Check the processing solution temperatures. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.3.3 Control Strip Processing (423) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “2 Processor Temperature Check”

[Procedure] The processing solution performance is evaluated by processing a control strip, measuring the processed strip densities, and comparing them to the reference strip densities.



■Control Strip Preparation 1. Take the control strip package out of the freezer, and leave it for about one hour to bring it up to room temperature.

3188



2. Take the inner bag out of the control strip package and place it seam-side up on to the control strip holder and put them both in the dark box. Close the dark box cover.

Control Strip and Inner Bag

3. Insert your hands into the sleeves of the dark box, take one control strip out of the inner bag, and insert it into the control strip holder, as shown in the figure. Push it in until it reaches the far end. Control Strip Holder

Seam-side Surface E577



4. Fold over the open end of the inner bag to prevent fogging of the unused control strips.

Emulsion Surface Upward

Control Strip E575



■ Control Strip Processing 1. Proceed to the “[423] Control Strip Processing” screen. 2. Open the dryer unit.



3. Align the center rib of the control strip holder with the guide groove in the No. 1 crossover rack. 4. Close the dryer unit.

Control Strip

Control Strip Holder

5. Click [OK].

CD757

• The processor starts and the control strip processing begins.



• After about 4 minutes, the control strip is fed out. 6. Open the dryer unit. 7. Remove the control strip holder and close the dryer unit. 8. Click [OK]. • The message is cleared. 9. Click [Cancel]. • Control returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.3.4 Print Size Setup (424) [Selection] Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “4 Print Size Setup”.

[Procedure] This procedure sets the print size to be used.



• Normally, sizes are registered as shown in the following table. NOTE: The feed length range for No.1 (89C) to No.6 (102H) is limited to 82.5 mm to 254.0 mm.

1. Select the print size to be modified or registered from the list. • ID[No.], Name, Width, Length, Border, four BD values and [Display(ON/OFF)] are displayed. 2. Move the cursor to the print size to be used, select “ON” or “OFF” shown in the “Display”. • If you select “ON”, the description appears in the list. If you select “OFF”, nothing appears in the list. 3. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.

No. Name Width Length Border 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

89C 89P 89H 102C 102P 102H 3R 3R 5R 5R 4R 4R 6R 6RW 8R 8RW A5 A4 3DSC 3DSCf 4DSC 4DSCf 5DSC 5DSCf 89Ix CDIDX 127Ix

89 89 89 102 102 102 127 127 127 127 152 152 152 152 203 203 210 210 89 89 102 102 127 127 89 102 127

127.0 254.0 158.0 152.0 254.0 178.0 89.0 89.0 178.0 178.0 102.0 102.0 203.0 216.0 254.0 305.0 148.0 297.0 119.0 127.0 136.0 152.0 169.0 178.0 120.0 120.0 120.0

BL BL BL BL BL BL BL BD BL BD BL BD BL BL BL BL BL BL BL BD BL BD BL BD BL BL BL

Upper Lower BD BD 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 4.0 4.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Left Right Display BD BD 0.0 0.0 ON 0.0 0.0 ON 0.0 0.0 ON 0.0 0.0 ON 0.0 0.0 ON 0.0 0.0 ON 0.0 0.0 ON 4.0 4.0 OFF 0.0 0.0 ON 4.0 4.0 OFF 0.0 0.0 ON 4.0 4.0 OFF 0.0 0.0 ON 0.0 0.0 OFF 0.0 0.0 ON 0.0 0.0 OFF 0.0 0.0 OFF 0.0 0.0 ON 0.0 0.0 Not Use 4.0 4.0 Not Use 0.0 0.0 Not Use 4.0 4.0 Not Use 0.0 0.0 Not Use 4.0 4.0 Not Use 0.0 0.0 Not Use 0.0 0.0 Not Use 0.0 0.0 Not Use



5.3.5 Monitor Adjustment (426) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “6 Monitor Adjustment (426)”

[Procedure] This procedure sets the color balance of the monitor for each input type. 1. Make a print without color and density correction from a normal film using the master channel for “Custom Setting”. 2. On the printing screen, correct the prescanning image so that it matches the print using the C, M and Y keys.



3. Multiply each of the correction values by the “Key Step Width Setup” value of menu 41M “Custom Setting Regist/Delete”. Then enter the results in the respective boxes on the screen. 4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.3.6 Image Correction Setup (42C) This menu is used to enable image correction condition setting by selecting “Yes” for each item.

[Selection] Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “C Image Correction Setup”

[Procedure] Set the image correction type for each input device and input type. Input Type: Negative Reversal B/W negative 1. Set the nine items in the Hyper ACCS frame. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.3.7 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (42D) [Selection] Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “D Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting”

[Procedure] This procedure sets the fine adjustment values for the print magnification for the film size and print size. 1. Select the carrier, mask and film types. 2. Select the print size. 3. Select “Rate” 4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.3.8 Special Film CH Setting (42E) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “E Special Film CH Setting”

[Procedure] This procedure to register or delete channel for the DX code of special monotone films (which use color developer). Also to fine adjust the slope (for color) and balance (for black & white).



1. On the printing screen, insert the film to be registered to pre-scan it. 2. Click the input source information icon. • The “Input Source Information” dialog box appears. 3. Record the DX code. 4. Open the menu 42E screen. 5. Enter the DX code recorded into the “DX Code” box. 6. Enter the film name in the “Film Name” box. 7. Click [Register].

NOTE: Before channel setting, register the DX code and film name.

1. Enter the channel number to be registered in the “CH No.” box. There are 128 film channels. 2. Enter the film name in the box next to the “CH No.” box. 3. Select “Register”. • The registered channel is added to the window of “Print (2)” - “Special Film Channel Setting (5)” of the menu bar in the printing screen that appears when the DX code cannot be read. 4. Select the graininess control level in the “Graininess Control” box.



Graininess Control Level: Normal High Low 5. Select the tone in the “Tone” box. Tone: Color Sepia 1 Sepia 2 B/W 6. Set “Balance/Slope” for color and the “Balance” for black & white.

9. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 1. Select the channel number to be deleted in the “CH No.” box. • The DX code and name are displayed in the “Registered DX Code” box. 2. Click [Delete].

7. Enter the DX code registered in “Film Name Registration” into the “DX Code” box.

• The DX code is deleted.

8. Click [Register].

3. Click [OK].

• The DX code is listed in the “Registered DX Code” box.




5.3.9 Monotone Correction Setting (42G) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “G Monotone Correction Setting”

[Procedure] Do this procedure to fine adjust the balance values for the correction type indicated in the “Monotone Correction” dialog box for menu bar “Image Correct (4)” - “Monotone Correct (3)”. 1. Select the correction type to be adjusted in the “Correction” box. Correction: B/W Sepia 1 Sepia 2 User B/W User Sepia 1 2. Change the balance values. 3. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.3.10 Paper Condition Method Setup (42J) [Selection] Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “J Paper Condition Setup”.

[Procedure] This procedure sets the paper condition setup method. 1. Select “YES” or “NO” for the ambient variable correction. 2. Select “YES” or “NO” for the master magazine registration. 3. If “YES” is selected in step “2”, set the ID, width, paper and type for the master magazine.



NOTE: • Ambient variable correction: When there is a sudden change in temperature during the day, it influences the color development process of color papers. To maintain constant printing quality in that condition, select “YES”. • Master magazine registration: Paper condition setup must be performed for all papers if “NO” is selected.

4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.3.11 Shop Logo Regist/Delete (42K) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “K Shop Logo Regist/ Delete”

[Procedure] This procedure registers or deletes the shop logo that appears on the index prints. 1. Insert the floppy disk containing the shop logo to be registered into the floppy disk drive of the main control unit. 2. Click [Add].



• The “Media Selection” dialog box appears. 3. Select “FD” and click [OK]. • The shop logo is displayed in the dialog box. 4. Click [OK]. • The shop logo is registered. 5. Click [Cancel]. • The dialog box disappears. 6. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 1. Select the shop logo to be deleted. 2. Click [Delete]. • The shop logo is deleted from the list. 3. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.3.12 Template Regist/Delete (42L) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “L Template Regist/Delete”

[Procedure]

See the “Installation Manual” of the optional Variety Print Service software.



5.3.13 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (42M) Printing is normally performed according to the condition of the master “0” channel. The 65 (0 + 64) custom conditions can be set up for each input type. The custom conditions can be selected on the printing screen.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “M Custom Setting Regist/ Delete”

[Procedure] Set up the custom conditions. 1. Select the input type to be set up. Input Type: Negative Reversal Black & White Negative



2. Select number to be set up. 3. Enter the name for the back printing of custom setting in the “Name” box. 4. Click [Cond. Edit]. • The “Initial Value Selection” dialog box appears. 5. Select the number to be used as the initial value. 6. Click [OK].



• The “Corr. Level/Tone/Hypertone” panel appears. 7. Set up the “Correct Level”, “Tone Adjust” and “Hypertone”.



Tone Correction Color/DensityHypertone Correction Full Correction: Yes Yes ON Tone Fixing: No Yes OFF Condition Confirm: No No OFF Standard All Hard All Soft Highlight Hard Highlight Soft Shadow Hard Shadow Soft

Hypertone Process: Highlight Level:

Yes No Lower Low Normal High Higher Shadow Level: Lower Low Normal High Higher Mode: Mode 1 (Normal Hypertone Mode) Mode 2 (Preceding acceptance rate by improving back light and high contrast)



8. Click the “Key Step Width/BL-SL” tab. • The “Key Step Width/BL-SL” panel appears. 9. Set up the “Key Step Width” and “Balance/ Slope”. C, M, Y: Normally enter “8”. Dc, Dm, Dy: Normally enter “15”. Normally enter “0”. Change setting only when the whole slope condition is offset. 10. Click the “Sharpness/Grain Control” tab.



• The “Sharpness/Grain Control” panel appears. 11. Set up the “Sharpness”, “Grain Control Process” and “Sharpness Large-size Setup”.



Sharpness Level: Low 3 Low 2 Low 1 Normal High 1 High 2 High 3 Under Level: –2 –1 0 (Sharpness can be set only for individually under level.)

Modulation Roughness Normal Up Up Lower ↑ ↑ No Down Down Sharpness can be set up individually for magnification entered in the “Magnification” box or higher. –2 –1 0 +1 +2



12. Click the “High-def/Density Correct” tab. • The “High-def/Density Correct” panel appears. 13. Set up the High-definition”, “Density Correction” and “Saturation”. If this selection box is not displayed, select “YES” for “RP Tone Print” or “Face Express” in menu 42C. RP Tone RP Tone Print: Yes No Level: Low Normal High Face Express: Normal High



Level: Normal (Select “Normal” normally.) High (Tungsten lighting correction is increased. ) Type: Normal (Select “Normal” normally.) Strobe Pref. Back light Pref. Saturation: –9 to +9 (Color vividness is set up. Normally enter “0”.) 14. Click [OK]. • The condition panel disappears and operation returns to the “42M Custom Setting Regist/Delete” screen. • The “Status” changes to the “Use”. 15. To delete the custom condition, select number to be deleted and click [Delete].




5.3.14 Holiday File Registration/Delete (42N) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “2 Print Condition Setup and Check” → “N Holiday File Registration/Delete”

[Procedure] See the “Operating Instructions” of the optional Variety Print Service software.


5.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43) 5.4.1 Input Check (431) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “1 Input Check”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the current status of each section. NOTE: Refer to section 19.1 for input parts location.

1. Click [Next Page].


5.4 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43)




5.4.2 Focus Calibration (432) The center value for each printing magnification can be set up in this menu. The NC100AC with film in the 135-lane can be used to execute this menu if the focusing chart jig is not available.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “2 Focus Calibration”

[Procedure] Calibrate the focus pulses for the magnification.



1. Install the focusing chart jig instead of the carrier. 2. Click [Create table].

Focusing Chart Jig CD832



• The result is displayed on the screen. 3. Click [OK]. • The “I-1227” message appears. 4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen. 5. Perform menu 433 “Focus Position Adjustment”.



5.4.3 Focus Position Adjustment (433) This menu is used to set up the center value when auto focusing of each film carrier mask.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “3 Focus Position Adjustment”

[Procedure] Perform the focus position adjustment. NOTE: • If the scanner correction in the pre-operational checks is not executed after the system starts up, perform the following items before “Focus Position Adjustment”. • Menu 43K “DC Offset Cancel” • Menu 43H “Dark Correction”



1. Install the carrier and proceed to the “Focus Position Adjustment” screen. • Carrier ID, type and mask type (M69D only)are displayed. 2. Click [Run].



3. Insert a film into the carrier and click [OK].

• The position adjustment value is displayed when the adjustment is completed. 4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.4.4 Operation Information Display (434) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “4 Operation Information Display”

[Procedure] The LED lighting time and piezoelectric actuator operating time are displayed. 1. Click [Clear] when the LED or piezoelectric actuator has been replaced. • The clear confirmation dialog box appears. 2. Click [OK]. • The times are cleared. 3. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.4.5 I/O Check (43A) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “A I/O Check”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the status of motors, solenoids and sensors. • The status of each part is displayed in real time. NOTE: Refer to section 19.1 “I/O Parts Diagram” for parts location.

1. Press any buttons to specify an operation. • The selected operation is performed. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.4.6 Carrier Inclination Display (43B) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “B Carrier Inclination Display”

[Procedure] This procedure checks the status of the carrier inclination. NOTE: If value is more than 100, replace the film carrier.



• The auto focus is started and the position of the focus pulse in the front and rear sides of the carrier are displayed. 1. Insert a film into the carrier. 2. Click [135] or [120]. • The auto focusing is started and the position of the focus pulses in vertical and horizontal of the carrier are displayed. 3. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.4.7 CCD Data Display (43C) Use this menu to confirm the CCD settings when there is a CCD-related irregularity or when lines appear in prints due to dust or dirt on the CCD, or the light source LED is suspected.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “C CCD Data Display”

[Procedure] Do this procedure to read the CCD data and display the values in real time. NOTE: If the scanner correction in the pre-operational checks is not executed after the system starts up, perform the following items before “Focus Position Adjustment”. • Menu 43K “DC Offset Cancel” • Menu 43H “Dark Correction”



NOTE: Do not try to change “Output Mode” and “Test Pattern”. Output mode box Operating mode box (Full-in, 1/4 or 1/8)

Lens magnification box (0.27 to 0.82) Test pattern box (1 to 8) Light color switches Display update/stop buttons Auto exposure result Store time switch and box Auto focus button Offset cancel button Film pressure button Current value boxes and setting button Conjugate length moving box and button Lens moving box and button

Auto exposure button Density enable switch Dark correction enable switch and table create button Bright correction enable switch

Save button Display switching button S/N value inspection button OK button



1. Click the [Switch display] button. 1. Check mark the “R”, “G” and “B” switches in “Light color”. 2. Enter “10.000” in “Store time” and check mark the switch. 3. Move the pointer to the dust position and click the left button of the mouse while pressing the [Shift] key.



• The image of the dust area is centered and magnified. 4. Click the [Switch display] button.



• The graph is deformed at the dust position as shown. 1. Change “Magnification” to “0.27”. 2. Check mark the LED switch in “Light color” to be light. 3. Check mark the “Accum. time (ms)” switch and enter the following value in the box. IR: 20 R, G or B: 5 4. Remove the diffusion box and turn ON the diffusion box sensor. • The light-emitted pattern is displayed on the screen.



5. To focus the LED, enter the following value in the “Conjugate length move” and “Lens move” boxes and click the [Move] buttons.

IR Pattern

“Conjugate length move”: 11000 “Lens move”: 650

R Pattern



G Pattern

B Pattern



5.4.8 Lens Registration (43D) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “D Lens Registration”

[Procedure] This procedure sets the lens ID to be used and its focal length. • The current status is displayed.



1. Enter the lens ID number and the lens focal distance indicated on the label attached to the lens unit. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 3. Perform the following menus. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

43B “Carrier Inclination Display” 43E “Optical Axis Adjustment” 43F “Optical Magnification Calibration” 432 “Focus Calibration” 433 “Focus Position Adjustment” for each carrier 6) 441 “Mask Position Adjustment”

Label CD694



5.4.9 Optical Axis Adjustment (43E) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “E Optical Axis Adjustment”

[Procedure] This procedure adjusts the optical axis of the image by moving the film carrier base. • The magnification setting is 0.6 when the screen is opened.



1. Install the focusing chart jig to the carrier base. 2. Click [AF]. • The calculated values of 0.6 magnification are displayed in the “Axis Def.” and “Image rotation” columns in real time.




• OK is displayed if the data are within the specified range.



3. If the data are out of range, loosen the four hexagonal socket head bolts securing the carrier base and adjust the optical axis by moving the base together with the jig.

Focusing Chart Jig

Hexagonal Socket Head Bolts (4) CD1087



Out of optical axis Front (–)/Rear (+): Left (–)/Right (+): Image rotation Left (–)/Right (+):

Range of OK ±10 ±10 ±5

NOTE: Adjust image rotation first, then the optical axis. X-axis: Move the carrier base in front and rear. Y-axis: Move the carrier base in right and left.

4. Tighten the four hex. socket head bolts after “OK” is displayed. 5. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.4.10 Optical Magnification Calibration (43F) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “F Optical Magnification Calibration”

[Procedure] This procedure calibrates the optical magnification. • The current status is displayed.



1. Set the focusing chart jig to the carrier base. 2. Click [Run].




• The optical magnification calibration is performed. • The result is displayed.

3. Click [OK]. • The “I-1223” message appears. 4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 5. Perform the following menus. - 432 “Focus Calibration” - 433 “Focus Position Adjustment” for each carrier



5.4.11 Brightness Correction (43G) The brightness correction is executed automatically when the pre-operational checks or changing mask on the first printing screen of the day. Perform this menu when line appears in print due to dust or dirt. When reading the shading data again by performing the scanner correction with the IX240 mask, check mark “Light Source Shading Corr. Data Read” and execute the brightness correction.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “G Bright Correction”

[Procedure] Perform the brightness correction. 1. Clean the diffusion box.



2. For the auto film carrier NC100AC, set it in the 135 lane. 3. Check mark both “Pixel Speed Corr. Data Read” and “Light Source Shading Corr. Data Read”.

Auto Film Carrier NC100AC CD763



4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen after correction. 5. Change the auto film carrier NC100AC to the IX240 lane. 6. Proceed to menu 43G and check mark to “Light Source Shading Corr. Data Read”. 7. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen after correction.



8. Install the manual film carrier with the calibration mask.

Calibration Mask

9. Proceed to menu and check mark both “Pixel Speed Corr. Data Read” and “Light Source Shading Corr. Data Read”. 10. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen after correction. Manual Film Carrier M69D CD844



5.4.12 Darkness Correction (43H) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “H Dark Correction”

[Procedure] Perform the darkness correction.

1. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen after correction.



5.4.13 Spectral Calibration (43J) After replacing the LED circuit board assembly or light source unit, perform menu 43L “LED Light Amount Adjustment” and this menu for negative and reversal films and then clear “LED Light Time” in menu 434 “Operation Information Display”.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “J Spectral Calibration”

[Procedure] Perform the spectral calibration using the following tools. Tools: Chart/floppy disk set Manual film carrier M69D Calibration mask 135M mask



1. Insert the floppy disk into the main control unit. 2. Click [OK].



3. Install the manual film carrier with the calibration mask to the carrier base.

Calibration Mask

4. Click [OK].

Manual Film Carrier M69D CD844



• The brightness correction is performed. 5. Replace the calibration mask with the 135M mask.

6. Insert the “No. 1001001” film into the 135M mask and set it in the exposure position.

135M Mask

No.1001001 Film CD805



7. Click [OK]. NOTE: If the image on the screen is abnormal, click the [Read again] button to read the image again.



8. Adjust the position of the blocks so that they are at the center of each patch by using the arrow keys. 9. Click [OK].



10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 for Chart Film No. 10020001, No. 1003001, No. 1004001, No.1005001, No. 1006001 and No. 1007001. 11. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 12. Remove the floppy disk from the main control unit.



5.4.14 DC Offset Cancel (43K) This function cancels DC offset of the CCD and normally executed automatically when the preoperational checks.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “K DC Offset Cancel”

[Procedure] Cancel the DC level offset.



1. Click [OK]. • The “I-1228” message appears. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.4.15 LED Light Amount Adjustment (43L) This menu is executed after replacing the LED circuit board assembly or light source unit. After executing this menu, perform menu 43J “Spectral Calibration” and then clear “LED Light Time” in menu 434 “Operation Information Display”.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “L LED Light Amount Adjustment”

[Procedure] Adjust LED light amount when: • the LED circuit board assembly is replaced. • the gradation setting is changed. • the light source unit or CTC22 circuit board is replaced. 1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC in its 135 lane. NOTE: Do not insert a film.



2. Click [Run].

• The result is displayed. 3. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.4.16 Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set (43U) This menu sets up the detecting level for the unexposed frame of the IX240.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “3 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” → “U Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set “

[Procedure] Set up the unexposed frame detecting level. 1. Select “Unexposed Frame Detect Level”. Unexposed Frame Detect Level: 1: Unexposed frames are not displayed. 2: All frames including unexposed frames are displayed. 3: Unexposed frames between exposed frames are also displayed.] 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.


5.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44) 5.5.1 Mask Position Adjustment (441) This menu is used to adjust mask position against the monitor screen and prints. This menu should be executed for all carriers and masks to be used.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “1 Mask Position Adjustment”

[Procedure] Adjust the mask position. 1. Install the film carrier. • The carrier ID, carrier type and mask type are displayed. 2. Click [Run].


5.5 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44)

• The mask and adjustment frames are displayed. 3. Adjust the mask position so that it is centered with the adjustment frame by clicking the “Position Adjust” buttons. NOTE: Click [Initialize] to return to the initial position.

4. Click [Register]. • The “I-1203” message appears. 5. Click [OK]. • The message disappears. 6. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.5.2 NC100AC Input Check (442) The status of the sensors of the auto film carrier NC100AC can be checked.

[Selection] 4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “2 NC100AC Input Check”

[Procedure] Check the status of the sensors.

↓ [Next Page]

[Previous Page] ↑






5.5.3 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (448) The image frame size displayed after prescanning can be set up in this menu.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “8 Mask Position Adjustment”

[Procedure] Set up the monitor frame ratio for each mask. 1. Select the carrier type to be set up monitor frame ratio. 2. Change the monitor frame ratio by clicking the [▼] and [▲] buttons. NOTE: The default values are 95%.

3. Click [Save]. • The data are saved. 4. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.5.4 NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “A NC100AC Sensor Calibration”

[Procedure] This procedure calibrates the optical sensors and shows the result data. 1. Check that there is no film in the carrier. 2. Click [Run].



• The calibration results are displayed. NOTE: The calibration results are shown but not saved.




5.5.5 NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information (44C) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “C NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information”

[Procedure] This procedure calibrates the optical sensors and displays the LED current setup and sensor output data. The data can be read out and written in. 1. Make sure there is no film in the auto film carrier NC100AC. 2. Click [Run].

↓ [Next Page]

[Previous Page] ↑



• The sensors are calibrated and the results are displayed. NOTE: [EEPROM reading]: Data are read out from the EEPROM of the carrier and written to the main control unit. [EEPROM writing]: Data in the main control unit are written to the EEPROM in the carrier. [HD reading]: Data are read out from the EEPROM of the carrier and written to the hard disk. Of the main control unit [HD writing]: Data in the hard disk of the main control unit are written to the EEPROM of the carrier. [FD reading]: Data are read out from the EEPROM of the carrier and written to floppy disk.




5.5.6 NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Display (44D) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “D NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Display”

[Procedure] This procedure is used to check the auto film carrier ID and hard revision (modify history) numbers. 1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC. 2. Proceed to the “D NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Display “ screen. 3. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.5.7 NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Setup (44E) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “E NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Setup”

[Procedure] This procedure is used to register the auto film carrier ID and hard revision (modify history) numbers. 1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC to be registered. 2. Proceed to the “D NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Display “ screen. • The carrier ID and hard revision numbers are displayed. NOTE: The numbers can be rewritten if necessary.



3. Click OK]. • The “I-1103” message appears.

4. Click [OK]. • The “I-1265” message appears. 5. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.5.8 NC100AC I/O Check (44F) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “F NC100AC I/O Check”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the status of the motors, solenoid and sensors. 1. Connect the auto film carrier NC100AC to the plug-in connector using the carrier extension cable. 2. Proceed to the “F NC100AC I/O Check” screen. 3. Click the operation buttons and check if each part is operating normally. 4. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.

↓ [Next Page]

[Previous Page] ↑



5.5.9 NC100AC Machine Data Setup (44K) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “K NC100AC Machine Data Setup”

[Procedure] This procedure sets up the data for the auto film carrier NC100AC. ↓ [Next Page]

[Previous Page] ↑



1. Click [EEPROM reading].

↓ [Next Page]

[Previous Page] ↑



• Data are read out from the EEPROM and displayed. NOTE: [EEPROM reading]: Data are read out from the EEPROM of the carrier and written to the main control unit. [EEPROM writing]: Data in the main control unit are written to the EEPROM in the carrier. [HD reading]: Data are read out from the EEPROM of the carrier and written to the hard disk. Of the main control unit [HD writing]: Data in the hard disk of the main control unit are written to the EEPROM of the carrier. [FD reading]: Data are read out from the EEPROM of the carrier and written to floppy disk.



2. If necessary, change the setting values and click [EEPROM writing]. • The “I-1148” message appears. 3. Click [OK]. • The dialog box disappears and data is written to the EEPROM. 4. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.5.10 NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading (44M) This menu is used to check that the magnetic information of the IX240 can be read out.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “M NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading”

[Procedure] This procedure is used to check magnetic information reading operation. 1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC in IX240 lane. 2. Load the film cartridge or strip film. 3. Click [Run].



• The magnetic information is read out and displayed. 4. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.

K: Reading out is OK.

?: Magnetic information presents but format is NG. ×: Reading out is NG. –: No magnetic information.



5.5.11 NC100AC Magnetic Verify (44N) This menu is used to check that the magnetic head is operating correctly.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “N NC100AC Magnetic Verify”

[Procedure] The status of the magnetic reading head can be checked in this menu. 1. Install the auto film carrier NC100AC in IX240 lane. 2. Load the film cartridge or strip film. 3. Click [Run].



• The magnetic information is read out and the result is displayed. NOTE: If the magnetic reading head is fouling, the “W5140” message appears.




5.5.12 NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup (44R) In this menu, the feeding amount for the fixed feeding mode of the 135 films can be adjusted.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “R NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup”

[Procedure] This menu sets up the fixed frame feeding length of the auto film carrier NC100AC. 1. Set up fixed feed frame lengths for the 135 full and half sizes by clicking the [▼] and [▲] keys. NOTE: Click [Initialize] to return to the initial values.



5.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45) 5.6.1 Paper Magazine Registration (451) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “1 Paper Magazine Registration”

[Procedure] This procedure registers the paper magazine to be used. Change the dryer temperature if necessary.


5.6 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45)

1. Release the latches and open the paper magazine.

Paper Magazine

Latches (2) EZ643



2. Loosen the two screws and adjust the width of the paper guides. Tighten the two screws. 3. Loosen the four screws securing the paper flanges to the paper shaft.

Screws (2)

Paper Guides EZ854



4. Align the holes in the paper flange bosses with the paper width marks and tighten the four screws.

Paper Flanges

NOTE: • Be careful not to overtighten the screws. • Do not try to loosen the screws marked red.

Paper Shaft Screws (4) EZ1920



5. Find the appropriate paper from the table in the screen and install its ID chip to the magazine using the two screws.

Paper Magazine

NOTE: Do not use ID No. 13 and No. 14 because they are for 25.4 cm wide paper.

6. Check that the dryer temperature is set to the recommended value listed below. Paper Width Recommended High Temperature Low Temperature Temperature Setting Setting (mm) 89 to 130

75.0 °C

80.0 °C

75.0 °C

152

80.0 °C

85.0 °C

75.0 °C

162 to 210

85.0 °C

85.0 °C

80.0 °C

ID Chip

Screws (2) EZ1218



Except for the reasons indicated below, the dryer temperature should not be changed from the recommended value. If paper drying problems arise due to the change in the drying environment and other factors, select the high or low temperature setting. The high temperature setting should be used when the ambient humidity is high. The low temperature setting should be used when problems occur in paper collection due to strong curling of the paper. 7. Click [Set]. 8. Click [End]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.2 Paper Feed Length Adjustment (452) This menu should be executed for all paper magazines when installing the machine.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “2 Paper Feed Length Adjustment”

[Procedure] Adjust the paper feed length in this menu when a new magazine is registered.



1. Move the cursor to “ID” and select the magazine to be adjusted. 2. Enter “82.5” in both “Small Size” boxes for “Feed length setting value” and “Actual measured value” and “297.0” in both “Large Size” boxes. 3. Click [OK]. 4. Make each three grid pattern prints with feed length 254 mm and 82.5 mm in menu 453 “Test Pattern Printing”. Or feed each three sheets of paper with feed length 254 mm and 82.5 mm in menu 455 “Paper Feed”. 5. Measure and record the length of each third grid pattern print. NOTE: Always measure the third paper since the feed length may not stabilize immediately after setting paper.

6. Proceed to “Paper Feed Length Adjustment”.

7. Enter each measured value in “Actual measured value” boxes. 8. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. On this menu, the paper feed length can be adjusted by entering the offset value of the feed length. 1. Select magazine ID to be adjusted. 2. Enter the offset value in the “Input offset” box. 3. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 4. Make grid pattern prints in menu 453 “Test Pattern Printing” and make sure of the feed length of the prints.



5.6.3 Test Pattern Printing (453) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “3 Test Pattern Printing”

[Procedure] This procedure creates test pattern prints. 1. Move the cursor to “Test pattern selection”, and select “Grid”, “Border-less contact”, “Bordered contact”, “Gradation” or “Step wedge”.



Grid: For color drift and feed length inspection

Borderless contact: For exposure and processing unevenness inspection

Bordered contact: For exposure and processing unevenness, or white board inspection



2. Move the cursor to “Feed length” and enter the feed length (mm).

Gradation: For gradation inspection

Step wedge: For color inspection



3. Click [Print] . 4. Click [All process]. • After about 5 minutes, the print is output to the large size tray. ■ Color Drift Inspection 1) Make a grid test print. 2) Use a magnifying lens (X25) to check that the vertical line for the color drift is 1/ 8 pixel or less in width, and the horizontal line is 1/4 pixel or less in width. REFERENCE: 1 pixel width = 0.08mm 5. Click [End]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.4 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454) The G and B laser optimal temperature setting message appears every three months. Set up the optimal temperatures using this screen.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “4 G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup”

[Procedure] This procedure sets the G, B laser(SHG) optimal temperature. NOTE: Wait about 1 hour until the temperature adjustment is completed.



1. Click [Run].



2. Click [B-SHG].

3. Click [Run]. 4. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.5 Paper Feed (455) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “5 Paper Feed”

[Procedure] This procedure feeds and processes unexposed sheets of paper. 1. Enter the number of sheets in “Q’ty” box and the feed length in “Length” box. Number of sheets: 1 to 999 Feed length: 82.5 to 305.0 2. Click [OK].



• The sheets of paper are fed and processed. 3. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.6 Printer Temperature Display (456) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “6 Printer Temperature Display”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the printer temperature and printer status. NOTE: • The temperatures are updated every 5 seconds. • Always keep “ON” for “Working” of “Abnormal temperature monitoring”.




5.6.7 Printer Input Check (457) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “7 Printer Input Check”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the status of the sensors.



1. Click [Next Page]. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.8 Printer I/O Check (45A) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “A Printer I/O Check”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the status of the motors, solenoids and sensors. [Next Page]: Displays the next screen. [Previous Page]: Displays the previous screen. 1. Click the required operation button. • The respective motor or solenoid operates if it is normal. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.9 Filter Replacement History (45B) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “B Filter Replacement History”

[Procedure] This procedure is used to check the laser unit filter replacement history and the pressurizing time for last five times Click [Replace] to record when the filter is replaced. 1. Click [Replace] when the filter is replaced. • The replacement date is displayed. NOTE: Click [Initialize] to initialize the replacement history.




5.6.10 Laser Exposure Check (45C) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “C Laser Exposure Check”

[Procedure] This procedure performs an RGB test exposure and displays the results. 1. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.11 R Laser (R-LD) Data (45D) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “D R Laser(R-LD) Data”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the R laser(R-LD) data in the EEPROM. 1. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.12 G Laser (G-SHG) Data (45E) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “E G Laser(GSHG) Data”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the G laser(G-SHG) data in the EEPROM. 1. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.13 B Laser (B-SHG) Data (45F) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “F B Laser(B-SHG) Data”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the B laser(B-SHG) data in the EEPROM. 1. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.14 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (45G) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “G Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the parameters for exposure positions. 1. Enter the scanning position/scanning home position parameters by clicking [▼] and [▲]. 2. Click [OK] to set the parameters. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.15 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (45H) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “H Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment”

[Procedure] This procedure performs the scanning adjustment and laser beam synchronization rough adjustment. NOTE: Perform this adjustment after processing three or more sheets of paper because the feed length may not stabilize immediately after setting paper.

1. Install the paper magazine for the narrowest paper width.



2. Click [Print].



← →

• The print is outputted in about five minutes.

C

3. Measure the dimensions of A, B and C, then record them. NOTE: Error of measurement: Within 0.5mm

4. Move the cursor to “A: Left-side measured value” and enter the measured A value. 5. Move the cursor to “B: Right-side measured value” and enter the measured B value.

A→ ←

→

←B Sub-Scanning Line

Rough Adjustment Block



6. Click [Enter] of “Width direction (main scanning position)”. 7. Click [OK]. 8. Move the cursor to “C: Top measured value” and enter the measured C value. 9. Click [Enter] of “Feeding direction (subscanning position)”. 10. Click [OK]. 11. Find the X coordinate which has the minimum color drift on the print for the vertical lines using an inverted magnifier (x20-40), and record the coordinate value and the drifted color (CMY) order from the left side.



12. Check and record the drifted color (CMY) order of the sub-scanning line from the top using an inverted magnifier (x20-40). 13. Move the cursor to “X(Width)” and enter the measured X value 14. Move the cursor to “Y(Feed)” and enter the measured Y value. 15. Click [Enter] of “Coordinate with least amount of color drift”. 16. Click [OK]. 17. Click [End]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.16 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “J Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print”

[Procedure] This procedure performs the fine adjustment of the laser beam synchronization. 1. Move the cursor to “Order of drifted colors for main scanning” and enter the drifted color order from the left recorded in “Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (Menu 45H)”.



2. Move the cursor to “Order of drifted colors for sub-scanning” and enter the drifted color order from the top recorded in “Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (Menu 45H)”. 3. Click [Print].



• The print is outputted in about five minutes. NOTE: The adjustment print has 20 or 25 vertical and horizontal lines.

4. Find numbers that have the minimum color drift on the output print for the vertical and horizontal lines using the magnifier (x20-40). 5. Move the cursor to the “Best main scanning position” and enter the number of the vertical lines found. 6. Move the cursor to the “Best sub-scanning position” and enter the number of the horizontal lines found.



7. Click [Set]. 8. Click [OK]. 9. Click [End]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.17 Laser History Display (45K) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “K Laser History Display”

[Procedure] Display the exposure time and current value of R-LD, G-SHG and B-SHG.



1. Click [Switch display] to switch between the graph and numeric displays. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.18 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (45L) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “L Paper Condition Setup Table(LUT) Copy”

[Procedure] This procedure copies the LUT (Look-up Table) from one magazine to another. 1. Specify the ID of the source magazine. 2. Specify the ID of the destination magazine. 3. Click [OK]. • Copying is performed and operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.19 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (45M) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “4 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” → “M Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment”

[Procedure] This procedure adjusts the printer mechanism. [Next Page]: Displays the next screen. [Previous Page]: Displays the previous screen. [Calculating]: Calculates calibration value. [Set]: Sets up entered data. [Cancel]: Returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



Adjust the printer paper feed system. Adjust the sub-scanning motor speed to 60mm/ sec. for each paper magazine. 1. Make the following print in menu 453. Print feed length: 290mm Print type: Grid



2. Measure the length of 15 squares in the feed direction of the print. Standard length of 15 squares: 254.0mm 3. Enter “254.0” in “Length” box of “Calculating”. 4. Enter the measured value in “Meas. Val.” box of “Calculating”. 5. Click [Calculating]. • The calibrating value is calculated and displayed. 6. Enter the calculated value in the appropriate box of “Setting for each paper width”. 7. Click [OK]. • The entered value is set up. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.

15 Squares (254.0mm)



5.6.20 Back Printer Test (45N) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “N Back Printer Test”

[Procedure] This procedure makes a test print using the back printer. 1. Set “Q’ty” and “Feed length”. 2. Select the magazine to be used. 3. Click [OK]. • The test print is output. 4. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.21 Printer Operation Data Display (45P) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “P Printer Operation Data Display”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the printer operation data. 1. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.22 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (45Q) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “Q Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data”

[Procedure] This procedure clears specific items of printer operation data. 1. Select the item to be cleared. 2. Click [OK]. • The selected data item is cleared. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.23 Clearing All Operation Data (45R) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “R Clearing All Operation Data”

[Procedure] This procedure clears specific items of printer and processor operation data. NOTE: Total sorts and total number of prints are not cleared.

1. Click [OK]. • All operating data items are cleared. 2. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.24 Side Register Calibration (45S) In this menu, perform the exposure start position calibration when initial machine installation or after replacing the register unit or register sensor.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “B Filter Replacement History”

[Procedure] This procedure measures and corrects the side registration.



1. Click [Run].

• The result is displayed. 2. Click [OK]. • The calibration is set up. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.25 Data Saving (45T) The parameter displayed can be written from the memory on the CTP22 circuit board to the HDD in the main control unit.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “T Data Saving”

[Procedure] This procedure saves the printer data into the hard disk of the main control unit. 1. Select the item to be saved. 2. Click [OK]. • The data are saved. 3. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.6.26 Data Download (45U) The parameter displayed can be written from the HDD in the main control unit to the memory on the CTP22 circuit board.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintence” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “U Data Download”

[Procedure] This procedure loads the printer data into the printer after the CTL21 circuit board has been replaced. 1. Select the item to be downloaded. 2. Click [OK].



• The data are downloaded.

3. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 4. Shut down and restart the system.



5.6.27 Precut Length Setting (45V) This menu is used to set up the length of paper leading end cutting. The leading end of paper is cut after setting the paper magazine and before starting printing after the system is started up.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “5 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” → “V Precut Length Setting”

[Procedure] This procedure sets up the length of paper leading end precutting when setting the paper magazine or starting the system. 1. Enter the precut length in “Pre-cut len.” box. Range: 89.0 to 305.0mm 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.


5.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (46) 5.7.1 Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting (461) Normally measure only PSR. When execute this menu to confirm pump operation for the P1R, P2RA or P2RB, return the discharged replenisher into the replenisher tank.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “1 Pump Output Measurement/Setting”

[Procedure] This procedure measures and corrects the replenisher pump output. 1. Prepare a measuring cylinder.


5.7 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (46)

2. Remove the circulation filter section cover.

PSR Supply Port Cover

3. Click [Start] for the box to be measured.

Circulation Filter Section Cover CD866



• The alarm beeps intermittently for 10 seconds.



NOTE: Click [Cancel] to stop the operation.

Replenisher Nozzle

4. Before the pump starts discharging, disconnect the replenisher nozzle and insert it into the measuring cylinder. • The replenisher pump starts discharging. • The alarm beeps when discharging is completed. 5. Insert the replenisher nozzle into the subtank. Measuring Cylinder

6. Place the measuring cylinder on a level surface, and then read and record the output. 7. Pour the replenisher solution from the measuring cylinder into the waste recovery tank.

CD090



8. Select the “Measured value” box, and enter the recorded output value using the numeric keys or the [↑] and [↓] keys. NOTE: The machine automatically measures and adjusts the pump output for P1-R, P2-RA and P2-RB.

9. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 10. Reinstall the circulation filter section cover. 11. Clean the measuring cylinder.



5.7.2 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (462) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “2 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting”

[Procedure] This procedure measures and corrects auto cleaning pump output. 1. Prepare the measuring cup for auto-cleaning output measurement. 2. Open the dryer unit.



3. Install the splash prevention cover over the dryer fan section.

Splash Prevention Cover

CD091



4. Loosen the two screws and remove the No.1 crossover rack.

Screws (2)

NOTE: Do not remove the crossover racks not to be measured.

No.1 Crossover Rack CD092



5. Release the tab and remove the autocleaning nozzle from the No.1 crossover rack.

Locking Tab

Washer Nozzle

CD093



6. Drain the remaining water from the nozzle.

Washer Nozzle CD873



7. Install the auto-cleaning nozzle in the measuring cup.

Measuring Cup

Washer Nozzle CD094



8. Install the measuring cup by aligning the nozzle's rubber joint with the hole. NOTE: Make sure the rubber joint is properly inserted. If not, the solution will splash.

9. Press the [Start] button for the P1.

Measuring Cup Rubber Boots Hole CD095



• The countdown starts. NOTE: To stop the pump, press the [Cancel] button.

• The alarm beeps once when the discharging is completed.



10. If the output is completed, release the lock lever and remove the measuring cup.

Measuring Cup

Lock Release Lever CD096



11. Put the measuring cup on the horizontal place, read the liquid amount and record it.

Measuring Cup

12. Dispose of the water from the measuring cup. 13. Install the cleaning nozzle in the No.1 crossover rack, and install the rack in the P1 processing rack. 14. Move the cursor to the “Measured value” of the P1 and enter the value recorded in step 16. CD097

15. Release the lock and remove the No.2 crossover rack.



16. Release the tab and remove the autocleaning nozzle from the No.2 crossover rack.

No.2 Crossover Rack

17. Drain the remaining water from the nozzle.

Washer Nozzle Locking Tab CD098



18. Install the auto-cleaning nozzle in the measuring cup.

Measuring Cup

19. Repeat steps 8 to 18 for the P2. 20. Repeat steps 19 to 22 for the PS1 and PS3. 21. Click [OK]. • Operation reterns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen. 22. Remove the splash prevention cover and close the dryer unit.

Washer Nozzle

CD099



5.7.3 Processing Temperature Setting (463) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “3 Processing Temperature Setting”

[Procedure] This procedure sets the processing temperatures. 1. Enter the numerical values of the “P1”, “P2” and “PS” processing temperatures. P1 P2 PS

Range 30.0 to 40.0 30.0 to 40.0 30.0 to 40.0

Default Value 38.5 38.0 38.0




5.7.4 Replenisher Rate Setting (464) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “4 Replenisher Rate Setting”

[Procedure] This procedure sets the replenishment amounts. 1. Enter the numerical values of the “P1-R”, “P2-R” and “PS-R” replenishment amount. P1-R P2-R PS-R

Range 30.0 to 200.0 20.0 to 300.0 100.0 to 300.0

Default Value 45.0 35.0 175.0




5.7.5 Evaporation Correction Rate Setting (465) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “5 Evaporation Correction Rate Settting”

[Procedure] This procedure sets the evaporation correction rate. 1. Select “YES” for “Evaporation Correction” and “Standard” for “Humidity”. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.7.6 Low Volume Setup (466) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “6 Low Volume Setup”

[Procedure] This procedure sets up low volume processing. 1. Select “YES” for “Low volume”. 2. Enter minimum processing amount in the box. Range: 0.0 to 15.0 3. Enter minimum processing amount for last eight days in the box. Range: 0.0 to 99.9 NOTE: Click [Clear] to clear all data.




5.7.7 Processor Temperature Calibration (467) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “7 Processor Temperature Calibration”

[Procedure] This procedure calibrates the processor section temperatures. 1. Check that the display values have reached the “Setting” temperatures.



2. Turn the P1 filter holder 90° counterclockwise, remove the P1 circulation filter and place it on a tray.

P1 Circulation Filter Holder

NOTE: Do not let the solution drip or run.

CD100



3. Measure the temperature of the processing solution and record it.

Thermometer

CD101



4. Reinstall the filter by aligning the fastening tab with the cutout, and then turn it 90° clockwise.

Tab

5. If the “Setting” temperatures differ from the values displayed, move the cursor to the “Measured value” and enter the values recorded in step 3. Range: 0.0 to 99.9

Cutout

6. Click [Enter]. CD102

7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 for P2, PS2 and PS4. 8. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.7.8 Processor Input Check (468) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “8 Processor Input Check”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the status of the sensors. • This screen shows the replenisher tank levels. The levels are indicated by the color shown below. Upper limit: Blue Middle level: Yellow Lower limit: Red



1. Click [Next Page]. 2. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.7.9 Processor I/O Check (46A) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “A Processor I/O Check”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the status of the motors, solenoids and sensors. [Next Page]: Displays the next screen. [Previous Page]: Displays the previous screen. [Cancel]: Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



1. Click the required operation button. • The respective motor or solenoid operates, if it is normal. 2. Click [Cancel]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.7.10 Processor Operating Condition Setup (46B) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “B Processor Operating condition Setup”

[Procedure] This procedure sets up the processor operating condition. 1. Select “YES” or “NO” for “Dryer section preheat driving”. 2. Select “YES” for “Rack auto cleaning”. 3. Select “YES” or “NO” for “Auto intermittent driving”. 4. Select “YES” or “NO” for “PS rack cleaning”. 5. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.7.11 Processor Operation Data Display (46C) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “C Processor Operation Data Display”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the processor operation data. The data can be cleared using menu 46D (see subsection 5.7.12). 1. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.7.12 Clearing Selected Operation Data (46D) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “D Clearing Selected Operation Data”

[Procedure] This procedure clears specific items of processor operation data (displayed in menus 46C and 46E). 1. Select the item to be cleared. 2. Click [OK]. • The selected data item is cleared. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.7.13 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “E Processor Operation Data Display 2”

[Procedure] This procedure displays the processor operation data. The data can be cleared using menu 46D (see subsection 5.7.12). 1. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.7.14 Installation (46F) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “6 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” → “F Installation”

[Procedure] This procedure is used for setting, replenisher system air bleeding and cartridge opening when initial installation. 1. Select “CP-48S” for “Processing formula”. 2. Select “No use” for “External waste tank”. 3. Select “50Hz” or “60Hz” for “Frequency setting” in accordance with the power supply frequency. 4. Click [Set]. 5. Execute “Washing pump aeration”, “Opening” and “Replenisher pump aeration” in this order by clicking the [Run] buttons. 6. Click [OK]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.


5.8 Self-Diagnostic (49) 5.8.1 Trouble Help (491) If an abnormality occurs in print image, the cause can be diagnosed by following the guidance on the screens.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “9 SelfDiagnostic” → “1 Trouble Help”

[Procedure] This procedure is used to diagnose any abnormality of the print image by following the screens (see chapter 6 “MSDP TROUBLE HELP”). 1. Click “To The Manual for Image Abnormalities”.


5.8 Self-Diagnostic (49)

• The menu screen of “Manual for Image Abnormalities” appears (see chapter 6). 2. Diagnose the mage problem by following the indication of the screen. 3. Click “Back to cover”. • Operation returns to the menu screen. 4. Click [END]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.8.2 Help Update (492) This machine does not support this function.



5.8.3 Image Abnormality Analyzer (493) Execute this function if abnormality occurs in the print image without appearing any error.

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “9 SelfDiagnostic” → “3 Image Abnormality Analyzer”

[Procedure] This procedure is used to diagnose any abnormality of the image processing functions automatically. 1. Check mark the items to be checked. 2. Click [Start].



• The system checks the checking items in the order listed and displays the result.



• Faulty circuit boards and cables are displayed the end of the check list.

3. Click [Storage] to save data.



4. Insert the floppy disk into the drive of the main control unit. 5. Select “Floppy (A:) and click [Save]. • The result data are saved into the floppy disk. 6. Click [End]. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.



5.8.4 Paper Feed Check (494) The last 500 paper feeding data can be checked in this menu

[Selection] “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “9 SelfDiagnostic” → “4 Paper Feed Check”

[Procedure] This procedure is used to check the paper feed system automatically. 1. Select menu 494.



2. Click [OK].



• The “(8) About” screen appears.



3. Click “View” and select the item to be display. • The selected screen appears.



(1) Feed error log/Error occurrence order



(2) Feed error log/Number of error times order



(3) Feed sequence log/Raw data



(4) Feed sequence log/Passing time



(5) Feed sequence log/Side registration data



(6) Side registration calibration



(7) Feed sensor log

4. Click [Storage] to save data into the floppy disk.



5. Insert the floppy disk into the drive of the main control unit. 6. Select “Floppy (A:) and click [Save].



• The data are saved into the floppy disk. NOTE: Click “Option” to select functions.



5.9 Special Operations (410) 5.9.1 Paint (410A) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintence” → “10 Special Operations” → “A Paint”

[Procedure] Do this procedure to use “Paint”. NOTE: For information on “Paint” operations, see the Windows 2000® manual.

1. Press the [X] button in the upper right-hand side of the screen. NOTE: Be sure not press the emergency button.



5.9 Special Operations (410)

5.9.2 Explorer (410B) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintence” → “10 Special Operations” → “B Explorer”

[Procedure] Do this procedure to use “Explorer”. NOTE: For information on “Explorer” operations, see the Windows 2000 manual.

1. Press the [X] button on the upper right-hand side of the screen. NOTE: Be sure not press the emergency button.



5.9 Special Operations (410)

5.9.3 Command (49C) [Selection] “4 Setup and Maintence” → “10 Special Operations” → “C Command”

[Procedure] Do this procedure to perform MS-DOS command operations. NOTE: For information on “Command” operations, see the MS-DOS® manual.

1. Press the [X] button on the upper right-hand side of the screen. • Operation returns to the “4 Setup and Maintenance” screen.


6. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ABNORMAL IMAGES These troubleshooting flowcharts converted from maintenance menu 491 “Trouble Help” are used to diagnose the cause of abnormal images.

6.1 6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4 6.1.5 6.1.6

6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2

6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 6.3.3

6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3

6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2

6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2

6.7 6.7.1 6.7.2 6.7.3 6.7.4 6.7.5 6.7.6 6.7.7 6.7.8 6.7.9

Color Abnormalities Non-existent image or too light / white print Cyan non-existent or too light Yellow non-existent or too light Fogged magenta Ghost Color abnormality general

Color Misalignment Each color shifts perpendicular to feeding direction (Increments of 1cm) Each color shifts (Increments of 0.1mm)

Scratches Red paper scratches at the leading end of black print Scratch restoration malfunction or image scratch general Straight continuous scratch in fixed image position even if the film is exchanged Paper scratch general

Vignetting Vignetting (NC100AC) Vignetting (M69D/Negative) Vignetting (M69D/Reversal)

Frame Misalignment Frame misalignment in both monitor and print Frame misalignment in prints, OK in monitor

Graininess and Jaggedness Overall graininess Jaggedness in large-size prints/Jaggedness of straight line

Streaks Streak perpendicular to feed direction (53mm spacing) 2Streak perpendicular to feed direction (60mm spacing) Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 2mm of leading end) Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 13mm of leading end) Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks within 0 to 40mm of leading end) Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White clear streak at 4mm of trailing end) Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White/black blurred streak at 13mm of trailing end) Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White clear streak at 13mm of trailing end) Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 23mm of trailing end)


6.7.10 6.7.11 6.7.12 6.7.13

6.8 6.8.1 6.8.2 6.8.3

6.9

Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks within 0 to 25mm and at 33mm of trailing end) Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 48mm of trailing end) Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 52mm and 68 mm of trailing end) Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 72mm and 88 mm of trailing end)

White Border Imprecision 1White border imprecision (Shifted in feed direction) White border imprecision (Shifted perpendicular to feed direction) White border imprecision (Inclination)

Spots

6.10 Densitometer and Calibration Print Error 6.10.1 6.10.2 6.10.3

Repeated calibrations do not improve the result. Calibration print density is too low to be measured. Color becomes worse after calibration. Paper cannot be fed in Densitometer.

6.11 Focus Problems 6.11.1 6.11.2 6.11.3

Overall blur Blur along the periphery Periphery blur

6.12 Unevenness 6.12.1 6.12.2

Regular unevenness perpendicular to feeding direction (mm spacing) Regular unevenness in feed direction (mm spacing)

6.13 Others 6.13.1

Setup confirmation when developer degraded (Developer Degradation)


6.1 Color Abnormalities 6.1.1 Non-existent image or too light / white print Make sure there is no problem with the original beforehand.

Non-existent image or too light/white print?

No

B

To 6.1.2

Yes (I-7) Check the monitor screen. Is the image on the monitor screen normal?

No

A1

Yes (I-1)

A2

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print Condition Setup and Check” - “1. Paper Condition Setup”. Click [Initialize] and execute calibration printing. Check condition of calibration print.

Calibration print condition is so light that density cannot be measured.

(I-23)

Calibration print is normal. Try to follow troubleshooting for “Calibration print density is too low to be measured” in “Densitometer and Calibration Print Error”.

(I-2) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print Condition Setup and Check” - “1. Paper Condition Setup”. Measure density of calibration print. Has the trouble now been remedied?

End. Densitometer and calibration print error list

No

END

(I-3) Try troubleshooting for “Densitometer and Calibration Print Error”. Go to item list of “Densitometer and Calibration Print Error”. To Section 6.10

End.

End.

END

To 6.10.2

END


6.1 Color Abnormalities

A1 No (I-17)

Light source burnt out 1/4 or more.

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “C. CCD Data Display”. Remove the diffusion box and execute “135 detecting condition”. Check each lighting color and make sure condition of the light source on the monitor screen. Do not stare the light source. Select item applicable.

Light source burnt out in units of pair.

Normal (I-37) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Scanner)”. Check the shutter home position sensor for proper operation by repeating “Open” and “Close”. Yes

No

A3

(I-11) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END (I-4) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

(I-19)

(I-22) Check the connector to the LED circuit board. Check the harness between the LED and CTC circuit boards for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

The LED circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the LED circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

No

END

END (I-21)

(I-18) The CTC circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the CTC circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied?

The CTC circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the CTC circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

END

END (I-4)

(I-20)

No (I-4) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

No

No


Yes

Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END



A2 (I-6) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “G. Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup”. Check value in “G Main scanning start position”. Value lies from 490 to 560.

Value is less than 490 or more than 560. (I-28) Setting value change Change value of G main scanning start position to 525. Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “H. Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Rough Adjustment” to fine adjust scanning start position. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

Yes

END

(I-31) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “7. Printer Input Check”. Remove the front upper cover, turn ON the interlock switch and insert a sheet of paper near the sub-scanning area. Check the preexposure sensor is operating properly on the “7. Printer Input Check” screen. Is the sensor operating properly?

Yes (I-36) Check LDA and image processing (GMB) circuit boards for poor connection. Check connection between LDA and image processing (GMB) circuit boards for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

No (I-24) Check the pre-exposure sensor connection. Check the pre-exposure sensor harness for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

The laser unit may have malfunctioned. Replace the laser unit. Has the trouble now been remedied?

END

(I-5)

No

Yes

No

END

(I-8) Yes

Problem may be in the printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

END

A3

(I-35) Check circuit from pre-exposure sensor to downstream of power supply.

END

(I-41)

No CTP circuit board or pre-exposure sensor may have malfunctioned. Check following items. • Poor connection or open circuit between the CTP circuit board and the LDA circuit board. • Does voltage input/output normally from the CTP circuit board? Replace the CTP circuit board or pre-exposure sensor as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

(I-38) Checking shutter unit connector Check harness between the shutter unit and the CTC circuit board for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END


Yes

No

END

(I-40) The shutter unit may have malfunctioned. Remove the CCD circuit board and replace the shutter unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (I-4) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END



6.1.2 Cyan non-existent or too light From 6.1.1

B

Cyan non-existent or too light?

No

C

To 6.1.3


No

B1

Yes (I-30) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print Condition Setup and Check” - “1. Paper Condition Setup”. Execute calibration printing (Do not measure print density). Is print normal?

No (I-44) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes (I-15) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (I-45) Problem cannot be solved by “Image Abnormality Analyzer”.

Yes

Yes

END

No (I-12)

END

Check the R modulation cable and JML circuit board cable. Open the cover under the monitor and check the R modulation cable (BNC) and JML circuit board for poor and improper connection. Then execute calibration printing. Does density become normal?

Yes

END

No (I-27) The laser unit may have malfunctioned. Replace the laser unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (I-8) Problem may be in the printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END



B1

(I-43)




Normal (I-11) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(I-4) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

(I-22)

(I-19)

Check the connector to the LED circuit board. Check the harness between the LED and CTC circuit boards for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?


Yes

Yes

No No

END

(I-21)



Yes

No No

END

(I-4)

(I-20) The LED circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the LED circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (I-4) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).


Yes

END

END

Yes

END



6.1.3 Yellow non-existent or too light C

From 6.1.2

Yellow non-existent or too light?

No

D

To 6.1.4


No

C1

Yes (I-14) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print condition setup and Check” - “1. Paper Condition Setup”. Execute calibration printing (Do not measure print density). Is print normal?

No (I-25) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes (I-15) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (I-45) Problem cannot be solved by “Image Abnormality Analyzer”.

Yes

Yes

END

No (I-26)

END

Check the input and output cables on the AOM driver. Check input and output cables of the B-AOM driver for poor or incorrect connection and open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

END

No (I-27) The laser unit may have malfunctioned. Replace the laser unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (I-8) Problem may be in the printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END



C1

(I-43)





Yes

No

END


(I-22)

(I-19)



Yes

Yes

No No

END

(I-21)



Yes

No No

END

(I-4)



Yes

END

END

Yes

END



6.1.4 Fogged magenta D

From 6.1.3

Fogged magenta?

No

To 6.1.6

E


No

D1

Yes (I-9) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print Condition Setup and Check” - “1. Paper Condition Setup”. Execute calibration printing. Is calibration print normal?

No (I-10)

Yes

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “G. Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup”. Is scanning start position detecting interval 8800?


Yes

8800

No

No

END

(I-29) Incorrect setting value Change value of scanning start position detecting interval to 8800 or contact Fujifilm. Has the trouble now been remedied?

(I-45) Problem cannot be solved by “Image Abnormality Analyzer”.

Yes

No

END

(I-47) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test 16.6-17.0mm pattern Printing”. Print grid test pattern. Does the spacing between vertical (paper feed direction) lines lie between 16.6 and 17.0 mm?


No Yes (I-50)

No

END

(I-48) The LDA or LDD circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the LDA or LDD circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

Yes (I-13) The laser unit may have malfunctioned. Replace the laser unit. Has the trouble now been remedied?

END

Yes

(I-8) Problem may be in the printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

No (I-8) Problem may be in the printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

END


6.1 Color Abnormalities D1

(I-43)





Yes

No

END


(I-22)

(I-19)



Yes

Yes

No No

END

(I-21)



Yes

No No

END

(I-4)



Yes

END

END

Yes

END



6.1.5 Ghost F

From 6.1.6

Ghost (The same shape appears on 54 mm left hand on high density area when the leading end is positioned up. )?

No

Yes

END


No

Yes

END

(I-55) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print wide-size “Borderless contact” test pattern. Place the print with its leading end up. Is magenta density of left side on the boarder of 54 mm from the right end image high?

Yes

(I-57) No (I-45) Problem cannot be solved by “Image Abnormality Analyzer”.

The AOM driver may have malfunctioned. Replace the AOM driver.



6.1.6 Color abnormality general From 6.1.4

E

Color abnormality general?

No

F

To 6.1.5


No

E1

Yes (I-53) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print Condition Setup and Check” - “1. Paper Condition Setup”. Execute calibration printing. Is calibration print normal?

No (I-32)

Yes


(I-56) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (I-45)

Yes

Yes

No

END

(I-34)

END

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print Condition Setup and Check” - “3. Control Strip Processing”. Is color tint normal?

Problem cannot be solved by “Image Abnormality Analyzer”.

Yes

No (I-54) Problem may be in printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards. (I-58) The processor may be set incorrectly. Try to follow troubleshooting for “Developer Degradation” of “Others” item. Go to item of “Others”.

To Section 6.13

End

END



E1 (I-33) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(I-52) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing Image Abnormalities”. Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

No

END

(I-17) Light source burnt out 1/4 or more.



Normal (I-37) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Scanner)”. Check the shutter home position sensor for proper operation by repeating “Open” and “Close”.

No

E2

Yes (I-11) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END


(I-22)

(I-19)



Yes

No

No

END


Yes

No

No

END



Yes

END

END

(I-21)


Yes

Yes

END



E2

(I-38) Checking shutter unit connector Check harness between the shutter unit and the CTC circuit board for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END


Yes

No

END

(I-40) The shutter unit may have malfunctioned. Remove the CCD circuit board and replace the shutter unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (I-4) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END


6.2 Color Misalignment 6.2.1 Each color shifts perpendicular to feeding direction (Increments of 1cm) The printer is much influenced by vibration. Make sure color misalignment is not caused by vibration from external factor at scanning or exposing or by faulty original.

Select an appropriate item

Each color shifts. (increments of 0.1mm)

B

To 6.2.2

Each color shifts perpendicular to feeding. direction (increments of 1cm) (U-6) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print grid test pattern. Is print normal?

No

Yes (U-1) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(U-8)

(U-9)

The trouble may be in scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit board). Inequalities are not satisfied. (U-14) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - ”U. Data Download”. Select parameter and execute. Then make sure the inequalities “450 G main scanning home position 560”, “290 Main scanning shift amount (G-R) 350” and “600 Main scanning shift amount (G-B) 660” are satisfied.

The inequalities are satisfied.

Inequalities are satisfied. (U-2) Check R modulation, input and output cables from LDA circuit board. Check R modulation, input and output cables from LDA circuit board for poor connection or open circuit and reconnect correctly or repair. Then perform calibration. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Not changed (U-15) Change setting values. Change G main scanning home position, main scanning shift amount (G-R) and main scanning shift amount (G-B) to default values. And execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”-“5. Printer Adjustment / Maintenance”-“H. Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sysc. Rough Adjustment” and “J. Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print”. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “G. Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup”. Are the inequalities “450 G main scanning home position 560”, “290 Main scanning shift amount (G-R) 350” and “600 Main scanning shift amount (G-B) 660” satisfied?

No (U-4) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

END

No

(U-3) (U-3)

The trouble may be in printer (exposure section or image processing circuit board.)

No (U-3) The trouble may be in printer (exposure section or image processing circuit board.)

END

Yes

No

(U-16) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “H. Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sysc. Rough Adjustment” and “J. Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print”. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes


Yes

END

Yes

END


6.2 Color Misalignment

6.2.2 Each color shifts (Increments of 0.1mm) B

From 6.2.1 (U-10)

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print grid test pattern (3 color level values:20). Then check the amount of shift from grid using a magnifier. Is color shift less than 20 micrometer?

No

Yes (U-18) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”-“9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(U-8) The trouble may be in scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit board).

(U-5)

Line shift of horizontal line (sub-scanning direction) is more than 20 micrometer.

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “H. Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sysc. Rough Adjustment” and “J. Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print”. Adjust laser beam synchronization and print test pattern (grid) again. Check the amount of shift from grid using a magnifier.

Line shift of vertical line (feed direction) is more than 10 micrometer.

Shift amount of horizontal line is less than 20 micrometer and vertical line is less than 10 micrometer. (U-11) The performance limit of shift amount in transverse direction of feeding is within 10 micrometer and in feeding direction is withing 20 micrometer. (U-12) Readjust laser beam synchronization. (U-13) Check laser beam synchronization adjustment print. Check the amount of shift from horizontal line (sub-scanning direction) using a magnifier. Shift amount or each color is more than 200 micrometer.

Shift amount for each color is less than 200 micrometer.

(U-17) Confirm setting values. Shift can be adjusted by changing setting values. Check shifted color order and setting and execute laser beam synchronization adjustment print again.

Check setting again and execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “H. Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sysc. Rough Adjustment” and “J. Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print”.

Color shift cannot be remedied by adjustment of three times. (U-20) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (U-3)

(U-19) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?


Yes

No

END

(U-7) The laser unit may be faulty. Replace the laser unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (U-3) The trouble may be in printer (exposure section or image processing circuit board.)

Yes

END

End

END

Yes

END


6.3 Scratches 6.3.1 Red paper scratches at the leading end of black print B

From 6.3.3

Red paper scratches at the leading end of black print?

No

C

To 6.3.2

Yes (A-22) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print “Borderless contact” test pattern continuously. Then observe the leading end of prints. Always red scratches appear. (A-24) The cutter unit may have malfunctioned. Replace the cutter unit. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Red scratches appear on first several prints.

(A-23) Processor cleaning. Clean crossover racks. Has the trouble now been remedied? Yes

No

Yes

END

(A-25) No

END

(A-25)

Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.


6.3.2 Scratch restoration malfunction or image scratch general Straight continuous scratch in fixed image position even if the film is exchanged C

From 6.3.1

Scratch restoration malfunction or image scratch general?

Yes

C1

No

Straight continuous scratch in fixed image position even if the film is exchanged?

Yes (A-18)

No

END

Inside inspection of the carrier The carrier may be cause of film scratch. Clean and inspect the film guides on the carrier. Replace the carrier if the films are scratched at the same location by the carrier.


6.3 Scratches

C1

(A-8)




Normal (A-6) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(A-15) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

(A-12)

(A-14)



Yes

Yes

No No

END

(A-13)

(A-17) The CTC circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the CTC circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied?


Yes

No No

END

(A-15)

(A-16) The LED circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the LED circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (A-15) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).


Yes

END

END

Yes

END


6.3 Scratches

6.3.3 Paper scratch general Make sure there is no scratches on the original beforehand.

No

Paper scratch general?

B

To 6.3.1

Yes (A-1) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print “Borderless contact” test pattern. Is print normal?

No

A1

Yes (A-8)


Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “C. CCD Data Display”. Remove the diffusion box and execute “135 detecting condition”. Check light color IR and make sure lighting condition on the monitor screen. If the amount of light is insufficient, increase value of accumulated time. Do not stare the light source. Select item applicable.


Normal (A-6) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(A-15) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

(A-12) Checking connector on the LED circuit board Check wire harness between the LED circuit board and the CTC circuit board for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?


Yes

No

No

END


Yes

No No

END

(A-15)

(A-16) The LED circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the LED circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (A-15) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).


Yes

END

END

(A-13)


Yes

Yes

END


6.3 Scratches

A1

(A-2)

Observe paper scratches. Is scratches colored?

No (A-3)

Yes

Performing post-operational check. Perform post-operational check to wash processing racks. Then print ”Borderless contact” test pattern. Has print now been returned normal?

(A-9) Magazine inspection Remove the magazine and try to pull paper out by hand. Is paper scratched?

No

Yes

No (A-4)

Yes

Processor cleaning Clean the crossover racks, processing racks, dryer guides and rollers. Has the trouble now been remedied?

(A-10) The magazine may have malfunctioned. Inspect the magazine in a dark bag. Replace the magazine if paper scratches cannot be remedied. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

No

Yes

(A-7) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “6. Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” “B. Processor Operation Condition Setup”. If “No” for “Rack auto cleaning” is selected, it is recommended that “Yes” be selected.

END

(A-5) Problem may be in printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

(A-5) Problem may be in printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

(A-11) Printer feed unit inspection Remove the printer feed unit and pass paper through the unit by hand. Is paper scratched?

No

(A-20)

Yes (A-19)

Yes

An unit may have malfunctioned. Check and clean the suspected location of the feed path. Replace the unit if scratches cannot be remedied. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (A-5)

Printer exit unit inspection. Remove the printer exit unit and pass paper through the unit by hand. Is paper scratched?

Yes No (A-26)

END Yes

Problem may be in printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Sub-scanning unit inspection. Remove the sub-scanning unit and pass paper through the unit by hand. Is paper scratched? No (A-21)

Yes

Registration unit inspection. Remove the registration unit and pass paper through the unit by hand. Is paper scratched? No (A-5) Problem may be in printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).


6.4 Vignetting 6.4.1 Vignetting (NC100AC) Make sure there is no problem with the original and the carrier is installed correctly beforehand.

Vignetting (NC100AC) ?

No

B

To 6.4.2

Yes (K-11) Observing print images. Check the vignette edge for unclearness or jaggies. (Clearness: Printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards) (Unclearness or jaggies: Scanner or carrier)

Unclearness or jaggies at the end

Clearness (K-12) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print “Bordered contact” test pattern continuously. Is the edge of print normal?

Yes

No (K-21)

(K-13) Problem may be in printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards). Try to follow ”White Border Imprecision” item.

End

Go to “White Border Imprecision” item list.

Confirming vignetting position. Observe the film and print. Is vignetting top or bottom when the film is in feed direction?

END (K-2)

No (K-3)

Connect the carrier to the plug-in connector using the carrier extension cable and open the upper cover. Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “F NC100AC I/O Check” ( NC100AC carrier only ). Click [Mask motor]. Is the variable mask operating properly?If the carrier extension cable is not available, hear operating noise.

Yes

Yes (K-7)

No

END

(K-6) The CTC circuit board or variable mask mechanism may have malfunctioned. Check: the CTC circuit board for correct input and output voltages. the variable mask for proper operation by fingers. Replace the CTC circuit board or variable mask (or carrier) as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “K NC100AC Machine Data Setup” ( NC100AC carrier only). Fine adjust the correction value of mask home position. Has the trouble now been remedied?


END

(K-31) Yes


(K-8) (K-8)

Yes

No

No No

A1

Yes

To Section 6.8

Checking connection to the CTC circuit board. Check the harness to the CTC circuit board for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Check connector pins for bending. Has the trouble now been remedied?

No

END


Yes

END


6.4 Vignetting

A1 (K-5) Confirming upper and lower masks. Open the carrier upper cover and check the upper and lower masks: for bent? for broken? Replace the upper and lower masks as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(K-1) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “4. Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” - “1. Mask Opening Position Correction” to adjust position. Click [Measure] and adjust position using the arrow keys. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(K-4) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “E Optical Axis Adjustment”. Execute “Optical Axis Adjustment” (a focus chart jig is required). Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(K-2) Connect the carrier to the plug-in connector using the carrier extension cable and open the upper cover. Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “F NC100AC I/O Check” ( NC100AC carrier only ). Click [Mask motor]. Is the variable mask operating properly? If the carrier extension cable is not available, hear operating noise.

Yes (K-7) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “K NC100AC Machine Data Setup” ( NC100AC carrier only ). Fine adjust the correction value of mask home position. Has the trouble now been remedied?

No (K-3) Checking connection to the CTC circuit board. Check the harness to the CTC circuit board for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Check connector pins for bending. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

Yes

END

(K-31)

No

END


Yes

(K-6) The CTC circuit board or variable mask mechanism may have malfunctioned. Check: the CTC circuit board for correct input and output voltages. the variable mask for proper operation by fingers. Replace the CTC circuit board or variable mask (or carrier) as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (K-8) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

No (K-8) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END

END


6.4 Vignetting

6.4.2 Vignetting (M69D/Negative) B

From 6.4.1

Vignetting (M69D/Negative) ?

No

To 6.4.3

C

Yes (K-14) Confirming vignetting position. Observe the film and print. Is vignetting right or left-hand when the film is in feed direction?

Yes

B1

No (K-16) Observing print images. Is color of the vignetted edge black?

White (K-17)

Black (K-23) Adjust the position of the film guide in the carrier. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Confirming carrier position. Remove the carrier and reinstall it correctly. (Remove foreign matter.) Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

Yes

No No

END From 6.4.3

B2


(K-28) Inspecting the inside of the carrier. Check the carrier upper mask and shading parts for distortion. Remove dust and dirt from the inside of the carrier. Clean or replace the part or carrier as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

(K-19)

END

END

(K-8) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

Problem may be in printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards). Try to follow “White Border Imprecision” item. Go to “White Border Imprecision” item list.

Yes To Section 6.8

END

(K-31)

No

Yes

B3

(K-13)

Yes

No


Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print “Bordered contact” test pattern continuously. Is the edge of print normal? No

No (K-30) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “E Optical Axis Adjustment”. Execute “Optical Axis Adjustment” (a focus chart jig is required). Has the trouble now been remedied?

Observing print images. Check the vignette edge for unclearness or jaggies. (Clearness: Printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards ) (Unclearness or jaggies: Scanner or carrier) Clearness

No (K-29) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “4. Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” - “1. Mask Opening Position Correction” to adjust position. Click [Measure] and adjust position using the arrow keys. Has the trouble now been remedied?

END

(K-18)

Yes

END

End

END


6.4 Vignetting

B1

(K-15) Observing print images. Is color of the vignetted edge black?

White (K-24)

Black

Observing print images. Check the vignette edge for unclearness or jaggies. (Clearness: Printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards) (Unclearness or jaggies: Scanner or carrier) Clearness

B3 (K-35) Observing print images. Does vignetting vary with frames to be printed?

No

Yes (K-25) Confirming film position. Adjust frame position by moving the film. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(K-26) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (K-27) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

END


B2


6.4 Vignetting

6.4.3 Vignetting (M69D/Reversal) C

From 6.4.2

Vignetting (M69D/Reversal) ?

No

Yes

END

(K-10) Observing print images. Is color of the vignetted edge black?

White (K-20)

Black

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print “Bordered contact” test pattern continuously. Is the edge of print normal?

(K-32) Confirming vignetting position. Observe the film and print. Is vignetting right or left-hand when the film is in feed direction?

No

No

Yes (K-31)

Yes


(K-9) No

Observing print images. Does vignetting vary with frames to be printed?

No

Yes

END

(K-8)

Yes (K-22)


Confirming film position. Adjust frame position by moving the film. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(K-26) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

(K-13)

Yes

No

END

Problem may be in printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards). Try to follow “White Border Imprecision” item.

End

(K-27) Go to “White Border Imprecision” item list.


To Section 6.8

(K-33) Confirming carrier position. Remove the carrier and reinstall it correctly. (Remove foreign matter.) Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(K-34) Adjust film guide position in the carrier. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

B2 To 6.4.2

Yes

END

END


6.5 Frame Misalignment 6.5.1 Frame misalignment in both monitor and print Make sure there is no problem with the original and the carrier is installed correctly beforehand. Frame misalignment in prints, OK in monitor.

Select an appropriate item Frame misalignment both in monitor and print. (O-11)

240 film

135 film

Confirming the film Select film-type from followings. Others

(O-12)

(O-1)

Confirming the film. The image range of 240 films is specified. (Perforation right end to film center is 11.95 mm, width is 27.4 mm and height is 15.6 mm based on center.) Is misaligned frame out of the specified range?

Confirming setting of “2. Printing” - “Film Scanner Op.(3)”. Is “Fixed length feed” selected?

No

Yes (O-2)

Yes No (O-13)

Confirming film. Is frame length out of standard (38.1mm)?

The cause is in film. Adjust position on the monitor screen.

Yes (O-3)

No

Changing setting of “2. Printing” “Scanner Op. (3)”. Change to “Frame detecting feed” or adjust on the monitor screen. Has the trouble now been remedied? Yes

END

(O-9)

No

Confirming the film. Check the film: for too light image (image of fireworks, night sky, darkness, etc.). for unclearness start or end of the frame (vertical white line, dark pole, etc. or fogging). for silver halide film. (Above items may cause frame misalignment). Yes (O-10)

No

Changing setting of “2. Printing” “Scanner Op. (3)” Change to “Fixed length feed” or adjust on the monitor screen. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

B To 6.5.2

END

No (Frame feed)


6.5 Frame Misalignment

6.5.2 Frame misalignment in prints, OK in monitor B

From 6.5.2

(O-4)

Flaws in the film guides

Checking the film and the inside of the carrier. Check the film: for bent leading or trailing end. for check tape attached over the perforations. for splice tape left on. for leading or trailing end cut diagonally. for scratches and dust. (Above items may cause frame misalignment.) Check the film condition. Clean the film guides in the carrier and check them for flaws.

No flaws but frame misalignment cannot be remedied.

The trouble has now been remedied.

END

(O-8)

(O-5) Faulty carrier. Replace the carrier. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes No

No (O-7)

END

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “4. Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” - “K. NC100AC Machine Data Setup” (or “SC135A Machine Data Setup”. Check the correction value. (Fine adjustment of the correction value due to worn rubber rollers and belts.) Change or adjust the setting value. Has the trouble now been remedied?


Yes

No (Recur.)

END

(O-6) The rubber rollers or belts may be faulty. Replace the carrier or the rubber rollers, belts. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

(O-7) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

END


6.6 Graininess and Jaggedness 6.6.1 Overall graininess The printer is much influenced by vibration. Make sure the cause of graininess and jaggedness is not external vibration when scanning or exposing beforehand.


Jaggedness in large-size prints. Jaggedness of straight line.

B

To 6.6.2

Overall graininess. (Z-1) Actual printing with normal negative (normal density) Does graininess or jaggedness occur when printing with normal negative (normal density)?

No (Z-2)

Yes

The problem may be in film. Correct sharpness or tone by clicking “2. Print” “Image Correction” - “Sharpness” or “Tone Adjustment”.

(Z-14) Confirming setting value Correct sharpness or tone by clicking “2. Print” - “Image Correction” - “Sharpness” or “Tone Adjustment”. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(Z-3) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test pattern Printing”. Print “Borderless contact” test pattern. Is print normal?

Yes

A1

No (Z-10) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (Z-4) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END


6.6 Graininess and Jaggedness

A1

(Z-5) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “C. CCD Data Display”. Remove the diffusion box and execute “135 detecting condition”. Check each lighting color and make sure condition of the light source on the monitor screen. Do not stare the light source. Select item applicable.



Normal (Z-13)

(Z-12)

Checking the connector of the LED circuit board Check the harness between the LED and the CTC circuit boards for poor connection and open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?


Yes

Yes

No

No

END

(Z-11) The CTC circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the CTC circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied?

END

(Z-16) The CTC circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the CTC circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

Yes

No

No

END

END

(Z-15)

(Z-9) The LED circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the LED circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No


END

(Z-9) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

(Z-7) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “C. CCD Data Display”. Click [S/N value disp]. Does S/N value exceed the standard value? (Approximately 20 or more is normal.)

Yes

No (Z-8) S/N value is abnormal. Replace the ADC circuit board, CDS circuit board, power supply and CCD unit in this order. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

(Z-6) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (Z-9) Problem may be in the printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END

Yes

END



6.6.2 Jaggedness in large-size prints/Jaggedness of straight line From 6.6.1

B

(G-6) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print grid test pattern. Observe the grid lines with magnifier. Is print normal?

No

B1

Yes (G-1) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Scanner)”. Click [Piezoelectric actuator 1] or [Piezoelectric actuator 2]. Does it operate properly?

No

(G-3)

Yes

Checking connectors between the piezoelectric actuator 1/2 and the PZR circuit board/CTC circuit board Check the harness between the piezoelectric actuator 1/2 and the PZR circuit board/CTC circuit board for poor connection or open circuit. Correct or repair as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

(G-5) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (G-2) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

Yes

No

END

END

(G-4) The PZR circuit board, CTC circuit board or CCD unit (piezoelectric actuator 1/2) may have malfunctioned. Check the following items. Does voltage input/output normally from the CTC circuit board? Does voltage input/output normally from PZR circuit board? Replace the CTC circuit board, PZR circuit board or CCD unit as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (G-2) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

END



B1

(G-7) Observing test print (grid) Are there jaggedness lines spacing 0.17 mm in parallel to feed direction and left-hand darker when the leading end is positioned up?

No

(G-8) Yes

Observing test print (grid) Is each color misaligned?

(G-11) The laser unit may have malfunctioned. Replace the laser unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

No

Yes

Yes (G-10)

END

Try to follow items for “Color Misalignment”.

End.

(G-12) Problem may be in the printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Go to items for “Color Misalignment”.

END

To Section 6.2

(G-9) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? Yes (G-12) Problem may be in the printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

No

END


6.7 Streaks “Streaks” herein is limited to the cause in the printer side ( printer, processor, exposure section and image processing section ) . Refer to “Scratches” for streaks caused by scanner side ( scanner, carrier and image processing section ) . Print a test pattern ( gray contact ) to determine whether the cause is in scanner side or printer side. If the test pattern print is normal, the cause is in the scanner side. To 6.7.1 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (53 mm spacing)?

Yes

Definition of term Pitch streaks (Several streaks spacing in unit of mm by observing with a magnifier) Clear streak (Streak with clear edges) Blurred streak (Streak with blurred edges)

A

No To 6.7.2 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (60 mm spacing)?

Yes

B

No To 6.7.3 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (black blurred streak at 2 mm of leading end)?

Yes

C

No To 6.7.4 Streak perpendicular to feed direction ( black blurred streak at 13 mm of leading end)?

Yes

6.7.1 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (53mm spacing)

D A

No To 6.7.5 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (pitch streaks within 0 to 40 mm of leading end)?

Yes

E

No To 6.7.6 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (white clear streak at 4 mm of trailing end)?

Yes

F

No

(S-29) Probable causes are faulty bearings, loose bearings/sub-scanning rollers and fouling sub-scanning rollers. Check for: faulty bearings. loose bearings/sub-scanning rollers. fouling sub-scanning rollers. Replace the sub-scanning unit if necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

To 6.7.7 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (white/black blurred streak at 13 mm of trailing end)?

Yes

G

To 6.7.8 Yes

H

No To 6.7.9 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (black blurred streak at 23 mm of trailing end)?

Yes

I

No To 6.7.10 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (pitch streaks within 0 to 25 mm and at 33 mm of trailing end)?

Yes

J

No To 6.7.11 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (pitch streaks at 48 mm of trailing end)?

Yes

K

No To 6.7.12 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (pitch streaks at 52 mm and 68 mm of trailing end)?

Yes

L

No To 6.7.13 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (pitch streaks at 72 mm and 88 mm of trailing end)?

(S-13) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

No Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (white clear streak at 13 mm of trailing end)?

No

Yes

M

Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.2 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (60mm spacing) B

(S-1) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print several “Borderless contact” test pattern sheets. Are prints normal?

No

Yes (S-2) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(S-3) Problem may be in the scanner side (scanner, carrier or image processing circuit boards).

(S-4) Performing “3. Post-operational Check”. Wash the crossover racks and perform “Postoperational Check”. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No (S-6) Washing the processing racks Wash the processing racks. Has the trouble now been remedied?

No (streaks weaken but remain.)

Yes

No (streaks are not changed.) (S-7)

(S-5)

The crossover racks or processing racks may have malfunctioned. Replace the rollers. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Confirming processor setting It is recommended that “Yes” be selected for “Rack auto washing” and “Auto intermittent drive” in menu “4. Setup and Maintenance” “6. Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” - “B. Processor Operation Setup”. Perform periodical inspection and maintenance.

Yes

No

END

(S-9) Problem may be in the printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

(S-8) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (S-9) Problem may be in the printer side (printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.3 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 2mm of leading end) C

(S-11) The registration loop time may be insufficient. Fine adjust by changing the fine adjustment value of top registration loop in menu “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “M. Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment”. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(S-12) Probable causes are faulty registration nip pressure, improper backlash of registration drive motor gears and damaged gears. Check the registration unit: for damaged roller, spring, nip release motor, nip release cam or nip release gears. for damaged registration drive motor and gears. Replace the damaged parts or registration unit as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(S-14) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (S-13) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.4 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 13mm of leading end) D

(S-16) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “M. Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment”. Fine adjust the sub-scanning nip roller 2 nip timing by changing the value. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(S-15) Probable causes are improper subscanning 2nd roller nip timing, damaged sub-scanning 2nd roller nip release mechanism and improper roller nipping. Check the sub-scanning 2nd roller nip release for: damaged nip release cam. damaged nip home position sensor. damaged nip release arm. worn or damaged bearings. damaged nip release belt and gears. damaged nip rollers. Repair or replace the parts or subscanning unit if required. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END


Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.5 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks within 0 to 40mm of leading end) E

(S-17) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Printer)”. Open the cover, release interlocking and drive the sub-scanning nip motor (M311). Does the roller release nip normally?

Yes

No (S-18) Probable causes are vibration of subscanning nip release motor and damaged sub-scanning 2nd roller nip release mechanism. Check sub-scanning 2nd roller nip release mechanism for: faulty nip release motor (M311). faulty PDC circuit board. improper drive timing belt tension (nip release belt tension). damaged, distorted or worn pulley. damaged, distorted or worn nip release gears. worn nip release cam. broken nip release arm or out of position. worn or damaged bearings. broken nip release belt. Adjust or replace the parts as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(S-19) The sub-scanning unit may have malfunctioned. Replace the sub-scanning unit. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END


Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.6 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White clear streak at 4mm of trailing end) F

(S-20) Probable causes are faulty nip roller, distorted or broken nip roller bracket, and jamming foreign matter. Check the nip rollers for proper movement or jammed foreign matter. Remove foreign matter or replace the subscanning unit. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END


Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.7 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White/black blurred streak at 13mm of trailing end) G

(S-21) Paper curling may be too much. Check paper curling. Replace paper if necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(S-22) Probable causes are distorted nip roller bracket or paper guide. Check the nip roller bracket and guides for distortion. Repair or replace the parts as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END


Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.8 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (White clear streak at 13mm of trailing end) H

(S-23) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Printer)”. Open the cover, release interlocking and drive the sub-scanning nip motor (M311). Does the roller release nip normally?

Yes

(S-25)

No

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “M. Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment”. Fine adjust the sub-scanning nip roller 1 nip timing by changing the value. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

(S-24) Probable causes are improper subscanning 1st roller nip release timing, damaged sub-scanning 1st roller nip release mechanism and improper roller nipping. Check the sub-scanning 1st roller nip release for: distorted or damaged nip release cam. nip home position sensor out of position. out of position or damaged nip release arm. worn or damaged bearings. Repair or replace the parts as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END


Yes

END

Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.9 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 23mm of trailing end) I

(S-35) Probable causes are incorrect subscanning guide height (distorted registration side), incorrect feeding form the registration unit to the sub-scanning unit, incorrect nip roller height and incorrect sub-scanning 1st roller nip release height. Check for: feeding from the registration unit to the subscanning unit. nip roller height. sub-scanning roller nip release height. Replace the sub-scanning unit if necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END


Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.10 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks within 0 to 25mm and at 33mm of trailing end) J

(S-26) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Printer)”. Open the cover, release interlocking and drive the sub-scanning nip motor (M311). Does the roller move correctly? Is abnormal noise heard?

Yes

No (S-27) Probable causes are vibration of subscanning nip release motor and damaged sub-scanning 1st roller nip release mechanism. Check sub-scanning 1st roller nip release mechanism for: faulty nip release motor (M311). faulty PDC circuit board. improper drive timing belt tension (nip release belt tension). damaged, distorted or worn pulley. damaged, distorted or worn nip release gears. worn nip release cam. broken nip release arm or out of position. worn or damaged bearings. broken nip release belt. Replace the parts as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END


Yes

No

END

(S-14) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Selfdiagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (S-13) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.11 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 48mm of trailing end) K

(S-30) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Printer)”. Open the cover, release interlocking and drive the registration drive motor (M304). Do the rollers move normally? Is abnormal noise heard?

Yes

No (S-31) Probable causes are vibration of registration drive motor and interference between the sub-scanning unit and the registration unit. Check the registration unit for: faulty registration drive motor (M304). faulty PDC circuit board. damaged registration drive gears. interference between the sub-scanning unit and the registration unit. Replace the parts if necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END


Yes

No

END


Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.12 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 52mm and 68 mm of trailing end) L

(S-33) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Printer)”. Open the cover, release interlocking and drive the registration nip motor (M309). Do the registration rollers move normally? Is abnormal noise heard?

Yes

No (S-34) Probable causes are vibration of the nip release motor and damaged registration nip release mechanism. Check the registration nip and release mechanism for: faulty nip release motor (M309). faulty PDC circuit board. damaged, distorted or worn nip release gear. worn nip release cam. missing or damaged arm. worn or damaged bearings. interference between the sub-scanning unit and the registration unit. Repair or replace the parts as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

END

No


Yes

No

END


Yes

END


6.7 Streaks

6.7.13 Streaks perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 72mm and 88 mm of trailing end) M

(S-32) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Printer)”. Open the cover, release interlocking and drive the registration drive motor (M309). Do the pre-registration rollers move normally? Is abnormal noise heard?

Yes

No (S-28) Probable causes are vibration of preregistration motor and damaged registration nip release mechanism. Check the pre-registration nip and release mechanism for: faulty nip release motor (M309). faulty PDC circuit board. damaged, distorted or worn nip release gear. worn nip release cam. missing or damaged arm. worn or damaged bearings. interference between the sub-scanning unit and the registration unit. Repair or replace the parts as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

END

No


Yes

No

END


Yes

END


6.8 White Border Imprecision 6.8.1 White border imprecision (Shifted in feed direction) “White border imprecision” herein is limited to the causes in the printer side (printer, exposure section and image processing section). Refer to “Vignetting” for border imprecision caused by scanner side (scanner, carrier and image processing section). Print a test pattern (bordered gray contact) to determine whether the cause is in scanner side or printer side. If the border of the test pattern is normal, the cause may be in the scanner side.

Border imprecision ( Shifted in feeding direction ) ?

No

B

To 6.8.2

Yes (B-2) Measuring feed direction length of print. Is feed length of border imprecision print out of specified value? Perform test print.

No (B-6)

Yes

Measuring image length (feed direction) Measure image length in feed direction of border imprecision print. Is it out of specified value? The image should be 10 mm less than print length because normal border is 5 mm.

(B-3) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “2. Printer Feed Length Adjustment”. Perform feed length fine adjustment. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

A1

No (B-10)

No

END

(B-4) The magazine may have malfunctioned. Check the magazine for: faulty spool. faulty magazine nip roller. improperly setting paper. Replace the parts or magazine as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

Yes

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “H. Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment”. Check “Top measured value” of ”Feeding direction ( sub-scanning position )” and set up correctly. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(B-17) No (B-9) Problem may be in printer side (exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

END

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (B-9) Problem may be in printer side (exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END


6.8 White Border Imprecision

A1

(B-7) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “M. Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment”. Adjust image length on the sub-scanning feed speed fine adjustment screen. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(B-18) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(B-8) The sub-scanning unit (paper slipping at the rollers) may have malfunctioned. Check the sub-scanning unit for faulty or fouling rollers. Clean the rollers or replace the parts or unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (B-9) Problem may be in printer side (exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END



6.8.2 White border imprecision (Shifted perpendicular to feed direction) B

From 6.8.1

Border imprecision ( Shifted perpendicular to feeding direction ) ?

No

C

Yes (B-13) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “1. Paper Magazine Registration”. Check the magazine ID matches to paper width and correct the registration. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(B-12) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “H. Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment”. Check “Left measured value” and “Right measured value” of “Width direction (main scanning position)” and set up correctly. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(B-14) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “S. Side Registration Calibration”. Perform “Side Registration Calibration”. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(B-11) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(B-15) The registration unit may have malfunctioned. Check the registration unit for out of position or worn width detecting belt or pulley and faulty width sensor housing (too much sliding friction). Check the laser unit for malfunction. Correct or replace the parts or unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (B-9) Problem may be in printer side (exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END

To 6.8.3



6.8.3 White border imprecision (Inclination) C

From 6.8.2

Border imprecision ( Inclination ) ?

No

Yes

END

(B-5) Confirming back printing position. Is the center of back printing (center of two lines) out of the center of paper?

No (B-20)

Yes

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “M. Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment”. Fine adjust the top registration loop by changing the fine adjustment value. Has the trouble now been remedied?

(B-16) The printer feed unit or magazine may have malfunctioned. Check the paper feeding route from the paper feeding section to the back printer for cause to misalign paper. Repair or replace the parts or unit as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (B-9)

Yes

Yes

No

END

(B-19)

END

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Problem may be in printer side (exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

No

END

(B-1) Probable cause: faulty registration unit, faulty sub-scanning unit or improperly installed laser unit. Check registration, sub-scanning and laser units for following items: out of position or broken registration section spring damaged registration section rollers broken nip release cam, broken bearings and out of position or broken arm faulty registration drive gear improperly installed registration unit out of position or broken sub-scanning spring broken sub-scanning roller or nip release cam broken nip release arm or bearing improperly installed laser unit Replace parts or unit as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (B-9) Problem may be in printer side (exposure section or image processing circuit boards).

Yes

END


6.9 Spots Make sure there is no problem with the original beforehand.

Blurred spots?

No

Yes Clear spot in fixed place for every prints?

(T-1) Checking diffusion box. Check the diffusion box for dusty or damage and clean it. Replace the diffusion box if necessary. Perform “Pre-operational Check”. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (T-2)

No

A1

Yes Yes (T-3)

END

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “C. CCD Data Display”. Repeat bright correction ON/OFF. Do white spots appear only when turning ON bright correction?


Yes

No (T-4) Perform “Pre-operational Check” again to recreate bright correction data. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

END

(T-5) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(T-7) Probable causes are dusty CCD cover glass and faulty CCD pixels. Replace the CCD unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (T-2) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

END

Yes


6.9 Spots

A1

(T-9) Checking carrier type Is the problem carrier M69D?

No

Yes (T-10) Checking light-shield cover installation Has printing be done with the light-shield cover?

Yes

No (T-11) Retouch processing may be operated improperly. Intall the light-shield cover. Has the trouble now been remedied?

No

Clear spots in different place for every print?

No

Yes Yes (T-8)

END

Probable causes are dust, stain or defect on the film. Clean the film and inside of the carrier. If there is scratch on the film, execute “2. Print” “Image Correction” - “Scratch erasing”. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(T-2) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Patterned spots? Yes (T-6) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (T-2) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

END


6.10 Densitometer and Calibration Print Error 6.10.1 Repeated calibrations do not improve the result. Make sure there is no problem with the original beforehand.

Repeated calibrations do not improve the result?

No

B

To 6.10.2

Yes (N-1) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “1. Paper Magazine Registration”. Check to see that the magazine ID agrees with color paper type (A to I) and reset up if necessary. Check the time limit of paper. If it has passed the time limit, color may not be obtained. Confirm the time limit of paper. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(N-2) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(N-8) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print Condition Setup and Check” - “3. Control Strip Processing”. Is color tint normal?

No (N-10)

Yes

Try to follow the items of “Developer Degradation” of “Others”

(N-3) The densitometer or AOM driver may have malfunctioned. Replace the densitometer or AOM driver. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Go to “Others” item list.

Yes

To Section 6.13 No (N-4) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

END

End.

END


6.10 Densitometer and Calibration Print Error

6.10.2 Calibration print density is too low to be measured. B

From 6.10.1

Calibration print density is too low to be measured?

No

C

To 6.10.3

Yes (N-5) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print Condition Setup and Check” - “1. Paper Condition Setup”. Click [Initialize] and perform calibration print. Is density normal?

Yes

(N-6)

No

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print Condition Setup and Check” - “1. Paper Condition Setup”. Perform density measurement. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(N-7) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

Yes

No

END

(N-9) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “2. Print Condition Setup and Check” - “3. Control Strip Processing”. Is color tint normal?

No (N-10)

Yes

Try to follow the items of “Developer degradation” of “Others”.

(N-11) The laser unit may have malfunctioned. Replace the laser unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (N-4) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Go to “Other” item list.

Yes

END

To Section 6.13

End.

END


6.10 Densitometer and Calibration Print Error

6.10.3 Color becomes worse after calibration. Paper cannot be fed in Densitometer. From 6.10.2

C

Color becomes worse after calibration. Paper cannot be fed in densitometer?

No

Yes

END

(N-13) Cleaning the densitometer. Clean the white board. Replace the white board if dirt cannot be removed. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(N-12) The densitometer may have malfunctioned. Replace the densitometer. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (N-4) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

END


6.11 Focus Problems 6.11.1 Overall blur Make sure the original is not out of focus beforehand.

Overall blur?

No

B

To 6.11.2

Yes (P-1) Checking the carrier, carrier base and carrier table Check the carrier, carrier base and carrier table for incorrect setting. Reinstall the carrier. Remove foreign matter from bottom of the carrier and between the carrier and the carrier base. Check carrier and carrier table for incorrect contact. Clean or repair if necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(P-2) Confirm setting of “2. Print” - “Image Correction” - “Sharpness”. Select setting for higher sharpness if it is low. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(P-3) Execute “2. Print” - “Input Operation” “Frame AF”. Select “Frame AF” for the frame that print has been out of focus and reprint. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

(P-4)

No

Problem is in the film. Print the film using “Frame AF” function.

(P-5) Confirm with the other carrier. Does the same trouble occur with the other carrier? No (or there is no other carrier.)

A1

Yes

A2


6.11 Focus Problems

A1

(P-6) Checking the upper mask, lower mask and pressure plate. Open the upper cover and check the upper and lower masks and upper cover for: loose upper mask mounting screws and missing E-rings. incorrectly installed upper and lower masks. smooth movement of upper mask and upper cover. Replace the upper or lower mask, or pressure plate. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(P-7) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “4. Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” - “F. NC100AC I/O Check” (“M69D I/O Check”/“SC135A I/O Check”). Click [ON] and [OFF] for “Pressure solenoid” alternately and check for normal operation (hear operation noise).

Normal (No other carrier)

Normal (There is other carrier.)

(P-10) Abnormal or noise

A2

Problem is in the carrier. (P-8)

Checking the connector to the CTC circuit board Check the harness between the CTC circuit board and the carrier for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(P-9) The CTC circuit board or solenoid may have malfunctioned. Check the CTC circuit board and solenoid for the following items. Check the input voltage from the CTC circuit board. Open the carrier cover, execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “4. Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” - “F. NC100AC I/O Check” and check the solenoid for proper operation by using a steel piece and clicking [ON] and [OFF] for “Pressure Solenoid” (extension cable and steel piece should be prepared). Replace the CTC circuit board or solenoid (or carrier) as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (P-10) Problem is in the carrier.

Yes

END


6.11 Focus Problems

A2

(P-11) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Scanner)”. Click [Home] and [Maximum] for “Conjugate length variable” and “Lens home position”. Check for incorrect operation or abnormal noise due to interference of the cover to the scanner or loss of synchronism.

Abnormal or noise

(P-12)

Normal (P-16) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “2. Focus Calibration”. Click “Table Creation”. (To make sure the table can be created without performing optical calibration). Has the trouble now been remedied?

Normal Yes

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Scanner)”. Click [Home] and [Maximum] for “Conjugate length variable” and “Lens home position” alternately. Check the conjugate variable length section gears and lens unit for proper operation. ( Replace the scanner cover if the scanner interferences to it.)

Trouble has now been remedied.

Abnormal

No

END

END (P-13)

(P-17) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Confirming the connectors to the CTC circuit board. Check the harness between the conjugate variable length section/lens unit to the CTC circuit board for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

Yes

(P-18) No

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print grid test pattern (3 color level values:20). Then check grid using a magnifier.

The CTC circuit board, conjugate variable length motor/gears or lens unit may have malfunctioned. Check the CTC circuit board, conjugate variable length motor/gears or lens unit for following items. Check the input voltage from the CTC circuit board. Check the conjugate variable length motor/gears and lens unit for pinching foreign matter or loss of synchronism. Replace the CTC circuit board, conjugate variable length motor/gears or lens unit as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Normal (P-21) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

(P-19) Each color line is shifted.

Try to follow the items of “Color misalignment”.

End.

No (P-15)

Go to items of “Color Misalignment” (P-20) Lines are jaggedness.

Problem is in the scanner.

To Section 6.2

Try to follow the items of “Graininess and Jaggedness”.

End.

Go to items of “Graininess and Jaggedness” (P-27) Grid lines are out of focus.

To Section 6.6

The developer may be degraded. Try to follow items of setting check when the developer degraded of “Others” item. Go to list of “Others”. To Section 6.13

END

(P-14)

End.

END

Yes

END


6.11 Focus Problems

6.11.2 Blur along the periphery B

From 6.11.1

Partial blur?

No

C

To 6.11.3

Yes (P-22) Checking the carrier, carrier base and table Check the carrier, carrier base and carrier table for incorrect setting. Reinstall the carrier. Remove foreign matter from bottom of the carrier and between the carrier and the carrier base. Check carrier and carrier table for incorrect contact. Check the carrier, carrier base and table for inclination. Clean or repair as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(P-23) Install the carrier occurred out of side focus and execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “3. Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance” - “B. Carrier Inclination Display”. Measure carrier quantitative inclination. Check the vertical and horizontal values are within the standard value (standard value: less than 15). If they exceed the standard value, the scanner or carrier is inclined. Measure carrier inclination using the other carrier.

Value exceeds the standard value but value for the other carrier is OK.

Value exceeds the standard value for both carrier. (P-24) The lens or CCD unit may have malfunctioned. The lens or CCD unit may be inclined. Replace the lens unit or CCD unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (P-21) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

END

B1


6.11 Focus Problems

B1 (P-25) Checking the upper and lower mask and pressure plate. Open the upper cover and check the upper and lower masks and upper cover for: loose upper mask mounting screws and missing E-rings. incorrectly installed upper and lower masks. smooth movement of upper mask and upper cover. Replace the upper or lower mask, or pressure plate. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(P-26) Normal (No other carrier)

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “4. Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” - “F. NC100AC I/O Check” (“M69D I/O Check”/“SC135A I/O Check”). Click [ON] and [OFF] for “Pressure solenoid” alternately and check for normal operation (hear operation noise).

Abnormal or noise

(P-8)

Normal (There is other carrier.)

Checking the connector to the CTC circuit board Check the harness between the CTC circuit board and the carrier for poor connection or open circuit and correct as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

(P-28) The carrier may have malfunctioned. Replace the carrier. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

(P-21) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

Yes

No

END

END

(P-9) The CTC circuit board or solenoid may have malfunctioned. Check the CTC circuit board and solenoid for the following items. Check the input voltage from the CTC circuit board. Open the carrier cover, execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “4. Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance” - “F. NC100AC I/O Check” and check the solenoid for proper operation by using a steel piece and clicking [ON] and [OFF] for “Pressure Solenoid” (extension cable and steel piece should be prepared). Replace the CTC circuit board or solenoid (or carrier) as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (P-10) Problem is in the carrier.

Yes

END


6.11 Focus Problems

6.11.3 Periphery blur From 6.11.2

C

Periphery blur?

No

Yes

END

(P-29) Confirming film curling. Check the film for excessive curling. Is curling normal?

No (P-30)

Yes Problem is in the film. (P-21) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.


6.12 Unevenness 6.12.1 Regular unevenness perpendicular to feeding direction (mm spacing) External (inside or outside of the printer) vibration may cause print unevenness. Check for processor driving vibration, sub-scanning unit interference with the printer exit unit, abnormal noise and installation condition beforehand.


Regular unevenness in feed direction (mm spacing)

B

To 6.12.2

Regular unevenness perpendicular to feeding direction (mm spacing) (M-1) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Test Pattern Printing”. Print several “Borderless contact (each color)” test pattern sheets. (Print each color contact by changing output level of each color.) Are prints normal?

No

(M-2)

Yes No (M-6) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes.Is a solution to the problem found?

Observing prints. Does unevenness occur only on cyan contact print? Yes

Yes (M-8)

No

END

(M-7)

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes.Is a solution to the problem found?


Yes

No

END

(M-9) The laser unit may have malfunctioned. Replace the laser unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? (M-3)

Yes

No

Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found?

(M-10)

Yes

The LDA or LDD circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the LDA or LDD circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied?

No

END

No

(M-4) The LDA or LDD circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the LDA or LDD circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied?

(M-11) Yes

No

Problem may be in printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards.

END

(M-5) The laser unit may have malfunctioned. Replace the laser unit. Has the trouble now been remedied? No (M-11) Problem may be in printer exposure section or image processing circuit boards.

END

Yes

END

Yes

END


6.12 Unevenness

6.12.2 Regular unevenness in feed direction (mm spacing) B

From 6.12.1

(M-15) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “5. Printer Adjustment/Maintenance” - “A. I/O Check (Printer)”. Open the cover, release interlocking and drive the sub-scanning drive motor (M305). Does the motor operate normally? Is abnormal noise heard? Does the motor vibrate excessively?

No

(M-12)

Yes

The sub-scanning drive motor may vibrate. Replace the sub-scanning motor. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

(M-16) The drive steel belt or rubber belt drive system may have malfunctioned. Check the sub-scanning unit for: off center or bent drive steel belt. off center or worn rubber belt. faulty large pulley. tensioner maladjustment. Correct or replace the parts or sub-scanning unit as necessary. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(M-13) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance”- “9. Self-diagnosis” - “3. Image Abnormality Analyzer”. It will take approximately 10 minutes. Is a solution to the problem found? No (M-14) Problem cannot be solved by “Manual for Dealing with Image Abnormalities”.

Yes

END

Yes

END


6.13 Others 6.13.1 Setup confirmation when developer degraded (Developer Degradation) Setup confirmation when developer degraded. (Developer Degradation) (V-1) Developer may be degraded. Replace all processing solutions. After replacement, confirm processor setting.

End.

Confirm processor setting.

END

(V-2) Confirming number of processing prints Check that the number of processing prints per day is less than the minimum number of processing prints (standard number of processing prints: 353 (3R)). If it is less than the standard, increase quantity of prints.

End.

Confirm next setting.

END

(V-3) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “6. Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” - “5. Evaporation Correction Rate Setting”. Check that “YES” is selected for “Evaporation Correction”. Change to “YES” if “NO” is selected.

End.


END

(V-4) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “6. Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” - “B. Processor Operation Condition Setup”. Check that “YES” is selected for “Rack auto cleaning”. Change to “YES” if “NO” is selected.

End.


END

(V-5) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “6. Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” - “F. Installation Operation”. Check that “CP-48S” is selected for “Processing type”. Change to “CP-48S” if the other is selected.

End.


END

(V-6) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “6. Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” - “3. Processing Temperature Setting”. Check that setting temperatures are default values. If not, change them to the default values. Default values: P1:38.5 P2:38.0 PS:38.0

End.


END

(V-7) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “6. Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” - “4. Replenisher Rate Setting”. Check that setting replenisher rates are default values. If not, change them to the default values. Default values: P1R:45.0 P2R:35.0 PSR:175.0 Confirm next setting.

A1

End.

END


6.13 Others

A1 (V-8) Execute “4. Setup and Maintenance” - “6. Processor Adjustment/Maintenance” - “1. Pump Output Measurement/Setting”. Measure pump outputs. Are actual outputs within pluses and minuses 20% of the default values? Are the pumps operating normally? (No or too little output is abnormal.) Default values: When 50Hz P1R: 54.0 P2RA: 54.0 P2RB: 54.0 PSR: 57.0 (When 60Hz,50Hz default value multiplied by 1.2)

Yes

(V-9)

No

Confirmation of setting values is completed.

(V-10) Checking the replenisher pump connector Does AC100V exist at the replenisher pump connector. (Check the harness for loose connection and open circuit.)

Yes

(V-11) No

The replenisher pump may have malfunctioned. Replace the replenisher pump. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

(V-12) Confirming the CTP circuit board for correct voltage Are input and output voltage of the CTC circuit board normal?

yes

No (V-14) The CTP circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the CTP circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied?

Yes

No

END

(V-13) Confirming the PAC circuit board for correct voltage Are input and output voltage of the PAC circuit board normal?

Yes

No (V-15) The PAC circuit board may have malfunctioned. Replace the PAC circuit board. Has the trouble now been remedied? No

(V-16) Check the harness between the power supply and the replenisher pump again.

Yes

END

Yes

END


7. OPERATION SECTION Parts Location 7.1 Monitor 7.1.1

Monitor Replacement

7.2 Mouse/Keyboard 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4

Mouse Replacement Table Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation Keyboard Replacement Light Table (Optional) Replacement


Parts Location Monitor

Tble Top Cover

Light Table Keyboard CD879


7.1 Monitor 7.1.1 Monitor Replacement Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply.

Screws (4)

Monitor Supports

2. Loosen the four screws securing the monitor supports.

CD460


7.1 Monitor

3. Cut the two cord ties securing the monitor cable. 4. Disconnect the monitor cable connector.

Monitor Monitor Power Supply Cable

5. Disconnect the monitor power cable from the monitor. 6. Remove the monitor and monitor stand. Cord Ties

Monitor Cable Connector

CD1093


7.1 Monitor

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Loop the monitor cable as shown and secure it using the cord ties. • After installation, perform the following adjustments. 1) Adjust monitor color and density

Cord Ties

(see monitor instruction manual).

2) Menu 426 “Monitor Adjustment” (see subsection 5.3.5).

Monitor Cable

CD1094


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard 7.2.1 Mouse Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the mouse cable from the connector on the bracket.

Monitor Cable

CD864


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

2. Pass the mouse cable through the hole in the tablemat.

Mouse Cable

Tablemat

CD1095


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal.

Groove/Cable

Mouse

NOTE: Place the mouse on the right end of the table and insert its cable along the groove in the table as shown.

CD838


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

7.2.2 Table Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal Screws (4)

1. Remove: • Front upper cover (see subsection 13.1.1). • Monitor (see subsection 7.1.1). • Mouse (see subsection 7.2.1). • Printer Rear Cover (see subsection 18.2.1). 2. Remove the four screws and then the monitor stand.

Monitor Stand

CD1109


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

3. Remove the two screws and then the mouse cable bracket. Mouse Cable Bracket

Screws (2)

CD863


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

4. Disconnect the JNDL1 and JKEY1 connectors.

JNDL1

JKEY1

CD008


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

5. Remove the two screws and then the manual film carrier release lever.

Manual Film Carrier Release Lever

6. Remove the table mat. 7. Remove the five screws and then the table top cover.

Reinstallation Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of removal.

Screws (2)

Table Mat

CD462


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

7.2.3 Keyboard Replacement Removal Tapping Screws (4)

1. Remove the table top cover (see subsection 7.2.2). 2. Disconnect the connector from the keyboard. 3. Remove the four tapping screws and then the keyboard.

Installation Install the keyboard in the reverse order of removal. Keyboard

Connector

CD464


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

7.2.4 Light Table (Optional) Replacement Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

Light Table Cover Screw

2. Remove the screw and then the light table cover.

CD841


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

3. Disconnect the connector and remove the light table. Light Table

Connector

CD840-1


7.2 Mouse/Keyboard

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Insert the harness into the opening in the table top cover as shown.

Light Table Harness

CD840-2


8. FILM CARRIER SECTION Parts Location 8.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Upper Cover Section) 8.1.1 8.1.2

Carrier Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation 135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) Replacement 8.1.3 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D103L) Replacement 8.1.4 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation 8.1.5 135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) (FSP Circuit Board) Replacement 8.1.6 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor LED (LEF22 Circuit Board) Replacement 8.1.7 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement 8.1.8 135 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement 8.1.9 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor LED (D104L) Replacement 8.1.10 IX240 Perforation Sensor LED (D105L) Replacement

8.1.11 8.1.12 8.1.13 8.1.14 8.1.15 8.1.16

8.1.17 8.1.18 8.1.19 8.1.20 8.1.21 8.1.22

Write Head Circuit Board Replacement Read Head Circuit Board Replacement Reading Magnetic Head (D116) Replacement Writing Magnetic Head (MG101) Replacement IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor LED (D108L/D109L) (LEB22 Circuit Board) Replacement IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement IX240 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement Dummy Head Replacement Exit Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation Exit Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement Film Mask Replacement

8.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Main Body Section) 8.2.1 8.2.2

Plug-in Connector Section Cover Removal/ Reinstallation Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation


8.2.3 8.2.4 8.2.5 8.2.6 8.2.7 8.2.8 8.2.9 8.2.10 8.2.11 8.2.12 8.2.13 8.2.14 8.2.15 8.2.16 8.2.17 8.2.18

Bottom Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation Bottom Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation Indicator Lamp (L101) Replacement Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120) (MSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement Input Key 1 to 4 (D124 to D127) Replacement CYS22 Circuit Board Removal/Reinstallation Solenoid (S101) Replacement 135 Lower Mask H/F Sensor (D118/D119) (MSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement Variable Mask Removal/Reinstallation Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117) (SSE22 Circuit Board) Replacement 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P) (DTE22 Circuit Board) Replacement Mask Motor (M103) Replacement 135 Dust Removal Roller Replacement 135 Leading End Sensor (D101P) Replacement 135 Frame Sensor (D107P) Replacement 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor (DTF22 Circuit Board) Replacement

8.2.19 8.2.20 8.2.21

8.2.22 8.2.23 8.2.24 8.2.25 8.2.26 8.2.27 8.2.28 8.2.29

IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P) Replacement IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor (D104P) (DTG22 Circuit Board) Replacement IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor (D108P/D109P) (DTB22 Circuit Board) Replacement IX240 Dust Removal Roller Replacement Opposite Roller Replacement Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement IX240 Guide Roller Replacement Feed Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation Feed Motor (M101) Replacement Feed Roller/IX240 Drive Belt Replacement Plug-in Connector Replacement

8.3 Nest Section 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3

8.3.4 8.3.5

Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Strip Film Guide Removal/Reinstallation Door Open/Close Sensor (D112)/Cartridge Sensor (D115) (SSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement Nest Unit Removal/Reinstallation Door Drive Assembly Removal/Reinstallation


8.3.6 8.3.7 8.3.8 8.3.9 8.3.10 8.3.11 8.3.12 8.3.13 8.3.14 8.3.15 8.3.16 8.3.17 8.3.18 8.3.19 8.3.20

Set Lever Assembly Removal/Reinstallation Spool Assembly Removal/Reinstallation Supply Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Supply Motor (M102) /Gear Replacement IPI Sensor (D113) (SSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement Door Motor (M104) Replacement Door Drive Gear Replacement Supply Motor Home Position Sensor (D114) Replacement Spool Rack Replacement Spool Replacement IPI Unit Disassembly/Reassembly Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation Cartridge Holder Replacement Set Lever Stopper Replacement Cam Roller Replacement

8.4 Winding Section 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4

Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation Winding Gear Replacement Winding Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly Film Guide Replacement

8.5 Carrier Base Section 8.5.1 8.5.2 8.5.3 8.5.4 8.5.5 8.5.6 8.5.7 8.5.8 8.5.9

Carrier Base Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation IX240/135 Carrier Position Sensor (D121/ D122) Replacement Carrier Table Removal/Reinstallation Carrier Sensor (D123) Replacement Gear Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Gear Replacement Ball Catch Replacement Plug-in Connector Replacement Film Lane Changing Linkage Disassembly/ Reassembly

8.6 Manual Negative Carrier M69D (Optional) 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.6.5

MNC Circuit Board Replacement Negative Press Solenoid (S10) Replacement Negative Mask Detection Pin Replacement Negative Mask Adjustment Plug-in Connector Replacement


Parts Location Auto Film Carrier NC100AC IX240 Perforation Sensor LED Magnetic Reading Head Circuit Board Magnetic Writing Head (D105L) Circuit Board IX240 TAP and Leading End Sensor LED (D104L)

LEB22 Circuit Board IX240Rear Unexposed Frame Sensor LED (D108L) IX240Front Unexposed Frame Sensor LED (D109L)

135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) 135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) LEF22 Circuit Board 135 Upstream Perforation Sensor LED (D102L) 135 Check Tape Sensor LED (D106L) 135 Rear Fogging Sensor LED (D110L) 135 Front Fogging Sensor LED (D111L)

135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D103L)

CD602


Parts Location 135 Entrance Pressure Guide

Dust Removal Roller

135 Upper Mask

Exit Pressure Guide

Magnetic Writing Head (MG101)

IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide

Dummy Head

Magnetic Reading Head (D116)

Dust Removal Roller

IX240 Upper Mask CD603


Parts Location Plug-in Connector Spool Assembly

Solenoid (S101)

Dust Removal Roller

Supply Motor (M102)

Feed Motor (M101) Belt Tensioner

Set Lever Assembly

Strip Film Guide

Door Drive Assembly Dust Removal Roller

Winding Unit 135 Lower Mask

135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P) CD604


Parts Location Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117)

Dust Removal Roller

IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P)

IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensors (D108P/D109P)

IX240 TAP and Leading End Sensor (D104P)

Mask Motor (M103)

135 Leading End Sensor (D101P)

135 Frame Sensor (D107P)

Variable Mask

MSC22 Circuit Board Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120)

DTF22Circuit Board 135 Upstream Perforation Sensor 135 Lower Mask Indicator Lamp (D102P) 135 Check Tape Sensor (D106P) H/F Sensor (L101) 135 Rear Fogging Sensor (D110P) (D118/D119) 135 Front Fogging Sensor (D111P)

CD605


Parts Location Carrier Base Section Auto Film Carrier Lock Lever Manual Film Carrier Release Lever

Auto Film Carrier Lock Arm

Plug-in Connectors 135 Carrier Position Sensor (D122)

Ball Catch

Carrier Table

IX240 Carrier Position Sensor (D121) Slide Shaft

Carrier Table Lock Arm

Switching Shaft 135/IX240 Switching Button CD813


8.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Upper Cover Section) 8.1.1 Carrier Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Open the upper cover. Carrier Upper Cover

2. Remove the eight screws securing the upper cover.

Screws (8)

3. Remove the rear screw and then the upper cover.


Screw

CD601


8.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Upper Cover Section)

8.1.2 135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the carrier upper cover (see subsection 8.1.1).

Connector

2. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED. 3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor LED.

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Tighten the screw while pressing the sensor LED against the stopper.

Sensor LED (D101L)

Screw

CD606



8.1.3 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D103L) Replacement Removal Sensor LED

1. Remove the carrier upper cover (see subsection 8.1.1). 2. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED. 3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor LED.

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. Screw NOTE: Tighten the screw while pressing the sensor LED against the stopper.

Connector

CD609



8.1.4 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the carrier upper cover (see subsection 8.1.1).

FSP

LEF1

2. Disconnect the three connectors.

D101L

CD613



3. Remove the four special screws and then the pressure guide and four springs.

Special Screws (4) Springs (4)

Reinstallation Reinstall the guide in the reverse order of removal.

Entrance Pressure Guide

CD614



8.1.5 135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) (FSP Circuit Board) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the 135 entrance pressure guide (see subsection 8.1.4).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor LED.

Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.

135 Frame Sensor (D107)

CD615



8.1.6 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor LED (LEF22 Circuit Board) Replacement Code

Sensor LED

D102L

Upstream Perforation

D106L

Check Tape

D110L

Rear Fogging

D111L

Front Fogging

Removal 1. Remove the 135 entrance pressure guide (see subsection 8.1.4). Sensor LED (D102L/D106L/D110L /D111L)

2. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED.

Installation

Screw

Install the sensor LED in the reverse order of removal. CD616



8.1.7 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement Screw

Removal 1. Remove the 135 entrance pressure guide (see subsection 8.1.4). 2. Loosen one screw, remove one screw and then each retainer plate, two springs, two rollers, four poly-slider and shaft.

Installation

Retainer Plate

Poly-sliders (4)

Springs (2) Rollers (2)

Springs (White/Strong) Springs (Black/Weak)

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Entrance side roller springs: White (Strong) Middle and exist side rollers: Black (Weak)

CD617



8.1.8 135 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement Removal Dust Removal Roller

1. Remove the 135 entrance pressure guide (see subsection 8.1.4).

E-rings (2) Springs (2)

2. Remove the two E-rings, springs and then the dust removal roller.

Installation Install the roller in the reverse order of removal.

CD622



8.1.9 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor LED (D104L) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the carrier upper cover (see subsection 8.1.1).

Connector Screw

2. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED. 3. Disconnect the connector from sensor LED.


Senosr LED (D10SL)

CD607



8.1.10 IX240 Perforation Sensor LED (D105L) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the carrier upper cover (see subsection 8.1.1).

Connector

Screw



Sensor LED

CD608



8.1.11 Write Head Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the carrier upper cover (see subsection 8.1.1).

Print Harness Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the circuit board. 3. Disconnect the two connectors from the circuit board. Connector NOTE: Lift the print harness connector and disconnect the harness.

Installation

Connetor

Write Head Circuit Board

Install the circuit board in the reverse order of removal. CD610



8.1.12 Read Head Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the carrier upper cover (see subsection 8.1.1).

Circuit Board Cover

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the circuit board cover.

CD611



3. Disconnect the two connectors from the circuit board.

Read Head Circuit Board Screws (3)

4. Remove the three screws and then the circuit board.

Installation Install the circuit board in the reverse order of removal.

Connectors

CD612



8.1.13 Reading Magnetic Head (D116) Replacement Removal Circuit Board Connector

1. Remove the read head circuit board cover (see subsection 8.1.12). 2. Disconnect the connector from the read head circuit board. 3. Remove the screw and then the magnetic head guide.

Screw

Magnetic Head Guide

CD624



4. Remove the two screws and then the magnetic head. Magnetic Head (D116)

Installation Install the magnetic head in the reverse order of removal.

Screws (2)

CD625



8.1.14 Writing Magnetic Head (MG101) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the carrier upper cover (see subsection 8.1.1).

Print Harness

Writing Magnetic Head (MG101)

Screw

2. Disconnect the print harness from the write head circuit board. 3. Remove the screw and then the writing head.

Installation

Connector

Install the writing head in the reverse order of removal.

CD629



8.1.15 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the read head circuit board cover (see subsection 8.1.12).

Connectors (4)

2. Disconnect the four connectors.

CD618



3. Remove the three special screws and then the pressure guide and three springs.

Springs (3) Special Screws (3)


IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide

CD619



8.1.16 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor LED (D108L/D109L) (LEB22 Circuit Board) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the IX240 entrance pressure guide (see subsection 8.1.13).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor LED.

Installation Install the sensor LED in the reverse order of removal.

Sensor LED (D108L/D109L)

CD620



8.1.17 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement Screws (2)

Removal

Retainer Plate Rollers (2) Poly-sliders (4)

1. Remove the IX240 entrance pressure guide (see subsection 8.1.13). 2. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED.

Springs (Black) (2)

Screw Sensor LED

3. Remove the two screws and then the retainer plate, two (black) springs, two rollers, four poly-sliders and shaft.

Installation Install the rollers in the reverse order of removal. CD621



8.1.18 IX240 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement Removal

Dust Removal Roller E-rings (2)

1. Remove the IX240 entrance pressure guide (see subsection 8.1.13).

Springs (2)

2. Remove the two E-rings and then the two springs and the dust removal roller.


CD623



8.1.19 Dummy Head Replacement Removal 1. Remove the IX240 entrance pressure guide (see subsection 8.1.13).

Dummy Head

Screw

2. Remove the screw and then the dummy head.

Installation Install the dummy head in the reverse order of removal.

CD626



8.1.20 Exit Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the carrier upper cover (see subsection 8.1.1).

Print Harness

2. Disconnect the print harness from the write head circuit board. 3. Disconnect the D103L connector.

D103L Connector

CD627



4. Remove the four special screws and then the pressure guide and four springs.

Special Screws (4) Springs (4)


Exit Pressure Guide

CD628



8.1.21 Exit Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the exit pressure guide (see subsection 8.1.19).

Screws (2) Springs (Yellow/Short) (2)

Retainer Plate Rollers (2) Poly-sliders (4)

2. Remove two screws each and then the retainer plate, two springs, two rollers, four poly-sliders and shaft.

Installation

Shaft

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: IX240 Side Springs: Long (White) 135 Side Springs: Short (Yellow)

Springs (White/Long) (2)

CD630



8.1.22 Film Mask Replacement Removal

135 Mask

1. Open the carrier upper cover. 2. Remove the mask.

Installation Install the mask in the reverse order of removal.

IX240 Mask CD631


8.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Main Body Section) 8.2.1 Plug-in Connector Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Open the carrier upper cover.

Screws (2) (Remove)

Screw (Loosen)

2. Loosen one screw, remove the two screws and then the plug-in connector section cover.


Plug-in Connector Section Cover

CD632


8.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Main Body Section)

8.2.2 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal Screws (6)

1. Place the carrier up side down. 2. Remove the six screws and then the bottom cover.


Bottom Cover

CD634



8.2.3 Bottom Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Place the carrier up side down.

Countersunk Flat Head Screws (2) Bottom Left Cover

2. Remove the two countersunk flat head screws and then the bottom left cover.


CD650



8.2.4 Bottom Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove: • Bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2). • Bottom left cover (see subsection 8.2.3).

Left Guide Rail

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the left guide rail.

CD652



3. Disconnect the DTF1, DTB1 and D104P connectors. 4. Remove the three screws and then the bottom inner cover.

Bottom Inner Cover

D104P

DTF1

DTB1

Screws (3)

CD653



Reinstallation Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. Left Guide Rail NOTE: Tighten the two screws while pressing the left guide rail toward the left side.

Screws (2)

CD669



8.2.5 Indicator Lamp (L101) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2).

Screw

2. Disconnect the connector from the indicator lamp. 3. Remove the screw and then the indicator lamp.

Installation Install the lamp in the reverse order of removal.

Indicator Lamp (L101) Connector

CD636



8.2.6 Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120) (MSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2).

Screw

2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. 3. Remove the screw and then the sensor.

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. Sensor (D120)

Connector

Locating Pin

NOTE: Align the hole in the sensor with the locating pin on the carrier frame. CD638



8.2.7 Input Key 1 to 4 (D124 to D127) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2).

Connector

Transparent Sheet

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the transparent sheet, MSC22 circuit board and four keys. 3. Disconnect the connector from the MSC22 circuit board.


MSC22 Circuit Board Keys (4)

NOTE: Note the installation direction of the keys. CD639



8.2.8 CYS22 Circuit Board Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the plug-in connector section cover (see subsection 8.2.1). 2. Disconnect the three connectors.

Connectors

CD643



3. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2). Screws (2)

4. Remove the two screws and then the harness guide. 5. Disconnect all connectors from the circuit board.

Harness Guide

CYS22 Circuit Board Screws (6)

6. Remove the six screws and then the circuit board.

Reinstallation Reinstall the circuit board in the reverse order of removal.

CD644



8.2.9 Solenoid (S101) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2). 2. Remove the two screws and then the harness guide. 3. Disconnect the solenoid connector. 4. Remove the countersunk flat head screw and then the solenoid from the upper side.

Solenoid (S101) Screws (2)

Countersunk Flat Head Screw

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Align the hole in the solenoid with the pin on the carrier frame.

Harness Guide

Connector

CD668



8.2.10 135 Lower Mask H/F Sensor (D118/D119) (MSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2).

Screws (2)

2. Disconnect the connector form the sensor. 3. Remove the two screws and then the sensor.

Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Sensors (D118P/D119P) Connector

CD637



8.2.11 Variable Mask Removal/Reinstallation Removal Screws (4)

1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2).

D117 Connector

2. Disconnect the M103 and D117 connectors. 3. Remove the four screws and then the variable mask.

Reinstallation Reinstall the mask in the reverse order of removal.

Variable Mask

M103 Connector

CD640



8.2.12 Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117) (SSE22 Circuit Board) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the variable mask (see subsection 8.2.11). 2. Remove the screw and then the sensor.


Screws Sensor (D117)

CD641



8.2.13 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P) (DTE22 Circuit Board) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the variable mask (see subsection 8.2.11).

Connector



Screw Sensor (D103P)

CD642



8.2.14 Mask Motor (M103) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the variable mask (see subsection 8.2.11). 2. Remove the two screws and then the motor.

Screws (2)

Installation Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

Motor (M103)

CD648



8.2.15 135 Dust Removal Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the variable mask (see subsection 8.2.11).

Screws (2)

Dust Removal Roller

2. Remove the two screws and then the roller.


CD649



8.2.16 135 Leading End Sensor (D101P) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom left cover (see subsection 8.2.3).

Screw

2. Disconnect the D101P connector.

Sensor (D101P)

3. Remove the screw and then the sensor.


D101P Connector

NOTE: Press the sensor against the stopper and tighten the screw.

CD651



8.2.17 135 Frame Sensor (D107P) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom inner cover (see subsection 8.2.4).

Screws (2)

Sensor (D107P)

2. Disconnect the AR connector. 3. Remove the two screws and then the sensor.

Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. AR Connector

CD654



8.2.18 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor (DTF22 Circuit Board) Replacement Code

Sensor

D102P

Upstream Perforation

D106P

Check Tape

D110P

Rear Fogging

D111P

Front Fogging

DTF2 Connector

Screws (2)

Removal 1. Remove the bottom inner cover (see subsection 8.2.4). 2. Disconnect the DTF2 connector. 3. Remove the two screws and then the sensor.

Installation

Sensors (D102P/D106P/D110P/D111P)

Install the sensors in the reverse order of removal. CD655



8.2.19 IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2).

Connector

Screw


Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Sensor (D105P)

CD635



8.2.20 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor (D104P) (DTG22 Circuit Board) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom inner cover (see subsection 8.2.4).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor.


Sensor (D104P)

CD656



8.2.21 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor (D108P/D109P) (DTB22 Circuit Board) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom inner cover (see subsection 8.2.4). Screw



Sensors (D108P/D109P)

CD657



8.2.22 IX240 Dust Removal Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the dust removal roller.


Dust Removal Roller

CD645



8.2.23 Opposite Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2).

Roller Retainer Screws (2) Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the dust removal roller. 3. Remove two screws each and then the roller retainer.

Roller Retainer

Dust Removal Roller

Screws (2)

CD646



4. Remove two spring, two poly-sliders, opposite roller and shaft, respectively.

Poly-sliders (2) Screw


Screw

Springs (2) Poly-sliders (2)

Springs (2)

Opposite Roller

Shaft

Shaft

Opposite Roller

CD647



8.2.24 Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the bottom inner cover (see subsection 8.2.4).

Screw

Cover Screw

Poly-sliders (2)

2. Remove the screw and then the roller assembly. 3. Remove the screw and then the cover, two springs, roller, two poly-sliders and shaft from the roller bracket.

Springs (2) Shaft

Roller Roller Bracket


CD658



8.2.25 IX240 Guide Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove:

Screws (2)

• IX240 perforation sensor (see subsection 8.2.19). • IX240 dust removal roller (see subsection 8.2.22). • IX240 rear/front unexposed frame sensors (see subsection 8.2.21). 2. Remove the two screws and then the two rollers.

Installation

Rollers (2)

Install the roller in the reverse order of removal. CD939



8.2.26 Feed Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Open the carrier upper cover.

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the motor cover.


Motor Cover

CD660



8.2.27 Feed Motor (M101) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the winding section (see subsection 8.4.1). 2. Remove the three countersunk flat head screws and then the righthand harness cover. 3. Remove the two countersunk flat head screws and then the rear harness cover.

Countersunk Flat Head Screws (2)


Rear Harness Cover Right-hand Harness Cover

CD1111



4. Disconnect the M101 connector.

M101 Connector

CD1112



5. Remove the screw and spring and then the belt tensioner.

Screw

Belt Tensioner/Spring

CD1110



6. Disengage the belt from the pulley on the motor. 7. Remove the two screws and then the motor bracket. Motor Bracket

Screws (2)

Belt

CD1113



8. Remove the two screws and then the motor from the motor bracket. Screws (2)

Bracket Motor (M101)

CD1114



Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. Screw

NOTE: Adjust the belt tension by following the steps below.

1. Loosen the belt tensioner screw. Tensioner

2. Turn the belt one turn and tighten the tensioner screw. Belt

CD670



8.2.28 Feed Roller/IX240 Drive Belt Replacement Removal Screws (2)

1. Remove: • Bottom inner cover (see subsection 8.2.4). • Variable mask (see subsection 8.2.11). • Winding section (see subsection 8.4.1). • IX240 TPA & leading end sensor (see subsection 8.2.20). 2. Disconnect the CYS7 and CYS8 connectors from the circuit board.

Harness Guide

CYS7

CYS8

3. Remove the two screws and then the harness guide. CD659



4. Loosen the belt tensioner screw, move the tensioner to the loosening side and tighten the screw. Screw

Belt Tensioner

CD663



5. Remove two screws each securing the roller bearing holders.

CD664



Screws (2)

Bearing Holders (2)

CD665



6. Remove the bearing holders, bearing and the roller assembly.

Roller Assembly

Bearing Holder

Bearing

7. Remove the IX240 drive belt. NOTE: Do not try to remove the 135 drive belt.

IX240 Drive Belt

CD666



8. Remove the screw and then the guide roller.

Installation

Screw Guide Roller

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Adjust the belt tension (see subsection 8.2.27).

CD667



8.2.29 Plug-in Connector Replacement Removal 1. Remove:

Nest Section Harness Cover

• Plug-in connector section cover (see subsection 8.2.1). • Bottom cover (see subsection 8.2.2). • Bottom left cover (see subsection 8.2.3). 2. Remove the three countersunk flat head screws and then the nest section harness cover. Countersunk Flat Head Screws (3)

CD895



3. Remove the five countersunk flat head screws and then the two right harness covers.

Right Harness Covers

Countersunk Flat Hear Screws (5)

CD936



4. Remove the two countersunk flat head screws and then the rear harness cover.

Rear Harness Cover


CD937



5. Disconnect all connectors of the plug-in connector harness. Screws (2)

6. Remove the two screws and then the plug-in connector.

Installation Install the plug-in connector in the reverse order of removal.

Plug-in Connector

CD938


8.3 Nest Section 8.3.1 Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the plug-in connector section cover (see subsection 8.2.1).

Nest Section Cover Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the nest section cover.


CD633


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.2 Strip Film Guide Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Open the carrier upper cover.

Screws (2) Counter Sunk Flat Screw

2. Remove the two screw, countersunk flat head screw and then the strip film guide.


Strip Film Guide

CD892


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.3 Door Open/Close Sensor (D112)/Cartridge Sensor (D115) (SSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the strip film guide (see subsection 8.3.2).

Sensor (D112)

2. Remove the screw and then the sensor. 3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.


Connector Screw

CD893


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.4 Nest Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove:

Nest Section Harness Cover

• Nest section cover (see subsection 8.3.1). • Strip film guide (see subsection 8.3.2). 2. Remove the three countersunk flat head screws and then the nest section harness cover.


CD895


8.3 Nest Section

3. Disconnect the M102, M103, 121J, 122J and J123 connectors.

Connectors (5)

CD896


8.3 Nest Section

4. Move the spool section to its setting position by pushing down the cartridge set lever.

Cartridge Set Lever

Spool Section

CD894


8.3 Nest Section

5. Remove the four screws and then the nest unit.

Reinstallation Reinstall the nest unit in the reverse order of removal.

Nest Unit Screws (4)

CD897


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.5 Door Drive Assembly Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the nest unit (see subsection 8.3.4).

Door Drive Assembly

2. Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and then the door open/close sensor. 3. Remove the two screws and then the door drive assembly.

Reinstallation

Connector

Screws (2) Screw

Reinstall the door drive assembly in the reverse order of removal. CD898


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.6 Set Lever Assembly Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the door drive assembly (see subsection 8.3.5). 2. Move the set lever assembly to the motor side.

Spring E-ring Lever

3. Remove the E-ring and then the spring and the lever.

CD899


8.3 Nest Section

4. Remove the two coil springs.

Coil Springs

CD900


8.3 Nest Section

5. Remove the E-ring and polyslider. E-ring

Poly-slider

CD901


8.3 Nest Section

6. Remove the E-ring and then the shaft and the set lever assembly.

Set Lever Assembly

Shaft

E-ring

CD902


8.3 Nest Section

Reinstallation Spool

Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Push the spool fully to the cartridge side and engage the set lever assembly with the gear.

Set Lever

CD926


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.7 Spool Assembly Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the set lever assembly (see subsection 8.3.6).

Spool Assembly

2. Remove the E-ring from the guide shaft. 3. Withdraw the guide shaft and remove the spool assembly.

E-ring Guide Shaft

CD903


8.3 Nest Section

Reinstallation Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Install the spool assembly while pushing in the IPI shaft.

Spool Assembly

IPI Shaft

CD925


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.8 Supply Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the spool assembly (see subsection 8.3.7).

Motor Bracket

2. Remove the three screws securing the motor bracket.

Toothed Washer

Screws (3)

CD904


8.3 Nest Section

3. Remove the screw securing the gear to the motor shaft.

Screws

CD905


8.3 Nest Section

4. Remove the D-washer, collar, gear bracket, gear and motor bracket. Gear

Reinstallation Reinstall the bracket in the reverse order of removal.

Motor Bracket

Gear Bracket

Spring Collar

Screw D-washer

CD906


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.9 Supply Motor (M102) /Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the supply motor bracket (see subsection 8.3.8).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the motor from the bracket.

Motor Bracket Motor (M102)

CD907


8.3 Nest Section

3. Remove the two E-rings and then the two gears from the gear bracket. E-rings

Gears

Gear Bracket

CD908


8.3 Nest Section

4. Remove the two E-rings and then the two gears from the motor bracket.

Gears

E-ring

Installation Install the motor and gears in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring

Motor Bracket

CD909


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.10 IPI Sensor (D113) (SSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement Removal Connector

1. Remove the supply motor bracket (see subsection 8.3.8). 2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.

Screw

3. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket.

Sensor Bracket

CD910


8.3 Nest Section

4. Remove the screw and then the sensor from the bracket.

Installation Bracket

Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.

Sensor (D113) Screws

CD911


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.11 Door Motor (M104) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the door drive assembly (see subsection 8.3.5).

Motor (M104) Screws (2)

2. Cut the two cord ties. 3. Remove the two screws and then the motor.

Installation Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Cord Ties

CD912


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.12 Door Drive Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the door drive assembly (see subsection 8.3.5).

Rack

Poly-Slider

E-rings (2) Spring

2. Remove the spring. 3. Remove the two E-rings and then the poly-slider, rack and guide.

Guide

CD913


8.3 Nest Section

4. Remove the four gears. Gears

5. Remove the E-ring and then the door drive shaft and gear.

E-ring

Gear

Door Drive Shaft

CD914


8.3 Nest Section

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Align the gear timing by following the steps below. 1)Align the long tooth on the door drive shaft gear with the groove in the sector gear boss. 2)Rest the sector gear on the door drive shaft gear as shown.

Long Tooth

Door Drive Shaft Gear

Rest on Boss

CD915


8.3 Nest Section

3)While resting the sector gear on the door drive shaft as shown, engage the rack and gear so that the rack is positioned to the sensor side.

Rack

Rack

CD916


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.13 Supply Motor Home Position Sensor (D114) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the spool assembly (see subsection 8.3.7).

Connector Sensor (D114)


Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Screw

CD917


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.14 Spool Rack Replacement Removal 1. Remove the spool assembly (see subsection 8.3.7). Spring

2. Remove the spring. 3. Remove the two E-rings and then the rack.

Installation Install the rack in the reverse order of removal. Rack E-ring

CD918


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.15 Spool Replacement Removal 1. Remove the spool assembly (see subsection 8.3.7).

Screw

2. Remove the screw and clamp/cover.

Clamp/Cover

CD919


8.3 Nest Section

3. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing.

Bearing E-ring

CD920


8.3 Nest Section

4. Withdraw the spool and remove the gear, spacer and home position sensor.

Spool

Installation Install the spool in the reverse order of removal.

Gear Spacer Sensor Plate

CD921


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.16 IPI Unit Disassembly/Reassembly Disassembly 1. Remove the supply motor bracket (see subsection 8.3.8).

Screw

2. Remove the screw and then the IPI unit.

IPI Unit

CD922


8.3 Nest Section

3. Remove the E-ring and then the IPI shaft and spring. E-ring

IPI Shaft

Spring

CD923


8.3 Nest Section

4. Remove the E-ring and then the IPI detecting arm and spring.

Reassembly Reassemble the IPI unit in the reverse order of disassembly.

E-ring IPI Detecting Arm Spring

CD924


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.17 Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the nest unit (see subsection 8.3.4). 2. Remove the E-ring and bearing.

Bearing

E-ring

CD927


8.3 Nest Section

3. Loosen the two screws securing the guide bracket. Guide Assembly

Screws (2)

CD928


8.3 Nest Section

4. Remove the guide assembly, cam plate, bearing and shaft.

Cam Plate

Shaft Bearing

Reinstallation Reinstall the guide assembly in the reverse order of removal.

Guide Assembly

CD929


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.18 Cartridge Holder Replacement Removal 1. Remove the guide assembly (see subsection 8.3.17). 2. Remove the E-ring and then the cartridge holder assembly and spring.

Lever

Spring

3. Remove the E-ring and then lever and spring from the cartridge holder.

E-ring

Installation Install the cartridge holder in the reverse order of removal.

Cartridge Holder

E-ring

CD930


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.19 Set Lever Stopper Replacement Removal 1. Remove the guide assembly (see subsection 8.3.17).

Guide Braclet Screw

2. Remove the two screws and then the guide bracket.

CD931


8.3 Nest Section

3. Remove the E-ring and then the set lever stopper and spring.

Installation

Set Lever Stop

Install the set lever stop in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring

Spring

CD932


8.3 Nest Section

8.3.20 Cam Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the guide assembly (see subsection 8.3.17).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the cam roller assembly.

Cam Roller Assembly

CD933


8.3 Nest Section

3. Remove the spring, E-ring and then the roller bracket.

Spring

Roller Bracket

E-ring

CD934


8.3 Nest Section

4. Remove the E-ring and then the roller from the bracket.

Installation Install the cam roller in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring Roller

CD935


8.4 Winding Section 8.4.1 Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal Knob Cover

1. Remove the feed motor cover (see subsection 8.2.26). 2. Remove the screw and then the knob cover.

Screw

CD661


8.4 Winding Section

3. Remove the four screws and then the winding unit.

Reinstallation Reinstall the winding unit in the reverse order of removal.

Winding Unit

Screws (4)

CD662


8.4 Winding Section

8.4.2 Winding Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the winding unit (see subsection 8.4.1). 2. Remove the E-ring and then the poly-slider, knob, collar and gear.

Collar Knob

Gear Poly-slider

E-ring

CD883


8.4 Winding Section

3. Remove the pin and gear. 4. Remove the two E-rings and gears.

Installation Install the gears in the reverse order of removal. Gear Gears Pin E-rings

CD884


8.4 Winding Section

8.4.3 Winding Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly Disassembly Shaft Assembly

1. Remove the winding gears (see subsection 8.4.2). 2. Remove the two E-rings and then the shaft assembly by shifting the bearing.

Bearing

CD885


8.4 Winding Section

3. Disassemble the shaft. Pin Shaft

Reassembly Reassemble the shaft in the reverse order of disassembly.

135 Real One-way Clutch

Collar IX240 Reel

Spring Joint Collar Bearings (2)

E-rings (2)

Poly-sliders (2)

CD886


8.4 Winding Section

8.4.4 Film Guide Replacement Removal 1. Remove the winding shaft assembly (see subsection 8.4.3).

Screw

2. Remove the screw and then the spring retainer and two coil springs.

Coil Spring (2)

Spring Retainer

CD887


8.4 Winding Section

3. Remove the film guide.

Installation

Film Guide

Install the film guide in the reverse order of removal.

CD888


8.5 Carrier Base Section 8.5.1 Carrier Base Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the table top cover (see subsection 7.2.2).

Countersunk Flat Head Screw Screws (2)

2. Remove the countersunk flat head screw and two screws and then the cover.

Reinstallation Reinstall the front cover in the reverse order of removal.

Carrier Base Front Cover

CD728


8.5 Carrier Base Section

8.5.2 IX240/135 Carrier Position Sensor (D121/D122) Replacement Removal 1. Remove: Screws (2)

• Scanner front cover unit (see subsection 9.2.1). • Table top cover (see subsection 7.2.2).

Connector Cover

2. Remove the two screws and then the connector cover.

CD748



3. Disconnect the sensor connector and open the harness clamp.

135 Carrier Position Sensor (D122) Screw


IX240 Carrier Position Sensor (D121)


Connector Screw

Clamp

Connector

CD749



8.5.3 Carrier Table Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove: • Carrier base front cover (see subsection 8.5.1). • Scanner rear cover (see subsection 9.2.2). 2. Remove the two screws and then the printer exhaust fan bracket.

Screws (2) Printer Exhaust Fan Bracket

CD731



3. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire.

Grounding Wire

Screw

CD732



4. Remove the screw securing the grounding wires. Screw

Grounding Wires

CD746



5. Open the two harness clamps. 6. Disconnect the nine JCA connectors.

JCA Connectors (9)

Clamps

CD747



7. Remove the two screws and then the stop plate.

Screws (2) Stop Plate

CD733



8. Remove the cover spacer.

Cover Spacer

CD1104



9. Remove the screw and then the two springs and slide shaft.

Springs (2)

NOTE: Be careful not to miss the rear spring because it may fall when withdrawing the shaft.

Slide Shaft Screw

CD734



10. Remove the carrier table.

Reinstallation Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Face the flat surface on the slide shaft up and tighten the screw.

After installation, perform the following adjustments. 1) Menu 43E “Optical Axis Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.9). 2) Menu 433 “Focus Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.3). 3) Menu 441 “Mask Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.5.1).

Carrier Table

CD1105



8.5.4 Carrier Sensor (D123) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the carrier table (see subsection 8.5.3). 2. Remove the two screws and then the gear cover.

Gear Cover

Screws (2)

CD1106



3. Loosen the four plug-in connector guide screws. 4. Remove the four screws and then the plug-in connector bracket.

Plug-in Connector Bracket

Screws (3) Guide Screws (4)

CD1107



5. Disconnect the JCA10 connector.

JCA10 Connector

CD1108



6. Loosen the one screw, remove the one screw and then the harness guide.

Harness Guide Screw (Remove)

Screw (Loosen)

CD735



7. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket. Sensor Bracket

Screw

CD736



8. Cut the cord tie. 9. Remove the screw and then the sensor.

Installation

Cord Tie


Screw

Sensor (D123)

CD737



8.5.5 Gear Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the carrier sensor bracket (see subsection 8.5.4).

Gear Cover Screw (Loosen)

2. Loosen the screw, and remove the two screws and then the gear cover.

Screw (Remove)

CD738



3. Remove the release lever spring. 4. Remove the two screws and then the gear bracket. Spring

Reinstallation Screws (2)

Reinstall the bracket in the reverse order of

Gear Bracket

CD739



8.5.6 Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the gear bracket (see subsection 8.5.5).

Gears

2. Remove the two E-ring and then the two gears. 3. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews and remove the gear.

Hex.Socket Head Setscrews (2)

E-ring

CD740



4. Remove the two bearings and lock arm/shaft. Bearing

5. Remove the E-ring and then the gear, lock lever shaft and two bearings.

Gear E-ring

Lock Arm/Shaft Lock Lever Shaft Bearings (2)

CD741



Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Engage the three gears so that their the " " marks are aligned.

Marks

Marks

CD742



8.5.7 Ball Catch Replacement Removal 1. Remove the gear bracket (see subsection 8.5.5).

E-ring Ball Catch

2. Remove the E-ring and then the manual film carrier release arm and pin. 3. Remove the two screws and then the ball catch.

Manual Film Carrier Release Arm Pin

Installation Install the ball catch in the reverse order of removal. Screws (2)

CD743



8.5.8 Plug-in Connector Replacement Removal 1. Remove: Gear Cover

• Open the image processing circuit board bracket (see subsection 18.3.1). • Remove the scanner rear cover (see subsection 9.2.2). 2. Remove the two screws and the gear cover.

Screws (2)

CD1102



3. Loosen the four plug-in connector guide screws. Plug-in Connector Bracket

4. Remove the three screws and then the plug-in connector bracket.

Guide Screws (4)

Screws (3)

CD729



5. Remove the cover spacer. 6. Disconnect the JCA10 connector.

JCA10 Connector

Cover Spacer

CD730



7. Remove the two screws and then the printer exhaust fan bracket.

Screws (2) Printer Exhaust Fan Bracket

CD731



8. Remove the screw securing the grounding wires. Screw

Grounding Wires

CD746



9. Open the two clamps. 10. Disconnect the nine JCA connectors. 11. Remove the plug-in connectors.

Installation Install the plug-in connectors in the reverse order of removal.

JCA Connectors (9)

Clamps

CD747



8.5.9 Film Lane Changing Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly Disassembly 1. Remove the carrier base front cover (see subsection 8.5.1). 2. Remove the E-ring, polyslider, bearing, spring and arm.

E-ring Spring

Arm Poly-slider Bearing

CD744



3. Remove the E-ring and then the plain washer, spring and changing shaft.

Changing Shaft

Reassembly Reassemble the linkage in the reverse order of disassembly.

Spring

Plain Washer E-ring

CD745


8.6 Manual Negative Carrier M69D (Optional) 8.6.1 MNC Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the four screws and bottom cover.

Bottom Cover

Screws (4)

9286


8.6 Manual Negative Carrier M69D (Optional)

2. Remove the three screws and MNC circuit board. MNC Circuit Board

Screws (3)

9287



3. Disconnect the connectors from the circuit board.

Installation Install the new circuit board in the reverse order of removal.

MNC Circuit Board

Connectors

1959



8.6.2 Negative Press Solenoid (S10) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the screw and connector cover.

Connector Cover

Screw

9289



2. Remove the MNC circuit board (see subsection 8.6.1).

Cord Ties

3. Cut the three cord ties. 4. Disconnect the connector (CN3) from the MNC circuit board. 5. Remove the screw securing the solenoid and then the solenoid.

Installation Install the new solenoid in the reverse order of removal.

Connector

Screw MNC Circuit Board

9288



8.6.3 Negative Mask Detection Pin Replacement Removal 1. Remove the MNC circuit board (see subsection 8.6.1). 2. Remove the four screws securing the holder plate and then the holder plates, leaf springs and pins.

Leaf Spring

Holder Plates

Screws (4)

9290



Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal, nothing the following.

Spring Plate

No Good

1. Make sure the midpoint of the holder plate does not buckle upwards as shown in the figure below. If it buckles this way the spring plate will be out of place. 2. Make sure that the spring plates have play in the direction shown.

Good

Good

Holder Plate

9291



3. Make sure the pins move up and down smoothly.

Pins

2708



8.6.4 Negative Mask Adjustment 1. Depress the upper mask against the lower mask and make sure its opening is larger than the opening of the lower mask and that it is positioned equally against the lower mask opening.

Upper Mask

Lower Mask

9294



2. If necessary, loosen the two screws and adjust the opening by moving the upper mask.

Screws (2) Upper Mask

3. Tighten the two screws securely.

9295



8.6.5 Plug-in Connector Replacement Removal 1. Remove the screw and connector cover.

Connector Cover

Screw

9289



2. Remove the MNC circuit board (see subsection 8.6.1). MNC Circuit Board

3. Cut the three cord ties. 4. Disconnect the connectors (CN1, CN2) from the MNC circuit board.

Connectors

9293



5. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire. Grounding Wire/Screw

6. Remove the two screws and plug-in connector.

Plug-in Connector

Installation Install the new connector in the reverse order of removal.

Screws (2)

9292


9. SCANNER SECTION Parts Location

9.2.4 9.2.5

9.1 Light Source Section 9.1.1 9.1.2

Light Source Unit Removal/Reinstallation 135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensor (D201/D202) Replacement 9.1.3 Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation 9.1.4 Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) Replacement 9.1.5 LED Circuit Board Assembly Replacement 9.1.6 Peltier Element (LH201) Replacement 9.1.7 Light Source Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation 9.1.8 LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Light Source Cooling Fan (F201) Replacement 9.1.9 9.1.10 LTC22 Circuit Board Replacement 9.1.11 Plug-in Connector (on Frame) Replacement

9.2 Scanner Section 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3

Scanner Front Cover Unit Removal/Reinstallation Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Replacement

9.2.6 9.2.7

CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Replacement Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Replacement Shutter/Gear Replacement

9.3 Lens Unit 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3

Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Replacement Lens Unit Removal/Reinstallation Lens Drive Motor (M202) Replacement

9.4 Conjugate Length Variable Section/Circuit Board Section 9.4.1

9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 9.4.6

Conjugate Length Variable Section Home Position Sensor (D211)/Upper and Lower Limit Sensor (D212 and D213) Replacement Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Replacement Conjugate Length Variable Gear Replacement ADC22 Circuit Board Replacement PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board Replacement Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment


Parts Location Conjugate Length Variable Home Position Sensor (D211)/ CCD Unit Upper and Lower Limit Sensors (D212 and D213) Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Shutter/Gears

Scanner Rear Cover Lens Unit Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Lens Drive Motor (M202) Light Source Cooling Fan (F201)

LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket

LTC22 Circuit Board

Light Source Unit 135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensors (D201/D202) Light Source Assembly Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) LED Circuit Board Assembly Peltier Element (LH201) Light Source Section Cover Plug-in Connector (on Frame)

CD812


Parts Location Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Conjugate Length Variable Gears ADC22 Circuit Board

PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment

CD825


9.1 Light Source Section 9.1.1 Light Source Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the scanner front cover unit (see subsection 9.2.1). 2. Remove the diffusion box. 3. Remove the four screws and then the light source unit.

Light Source Unit

Screws (4)

CD716


9.1 Light Source Section

Reinstallation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. When the unit has been replaced, perform the following adjustment after installation. 1) Menu 43L “LED Light Amount Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.15). 2) Menu 43J “Spectral Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.13). 3) Clear the operation data in menu 434 “Operation Information Display” (see subsection 5.4.4).



9.1.2 135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensor (D201/D202) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the light source unit (see subsection 9.1.1). 2. Disconnect the sensor connector.

Sensor Connector

CD718



3. Remove the two screws and then the diffusion box sensor bracket.

Screws (2) Diffusion Box Sensor Bracket

CD717



4. Cut the cord ties and remove the two screws and then the sensors. Cord Ties

Installation Install the sensors in the reverse order of removal.

Sensor (D201) Sensor (D202)

Screws (2)

CD719



9.1.3 Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the light source unit (see subsection 9.1.1). 2. Disconnect the diffusion box sensor connector.

Sensor Connector

CD718



3. Remove the two screws securing the harness clamps.

Special Screws (4)

Screws/Clamps

Light Source

4. Remove the four special screws securing the plug-in connectors. 5. Remove the four screws and then the light source assembly.

Screws (4)

CD720



Reinstallation Reinstall the light source assembly in the reverse order of removal. After reinstallation, perform the following adjustments. 1) Menu 43L “LED Light Amount Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.15). 2) Menu 43J “Spectral Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.13).



9.1.4 Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the light source assembly (see subsection 9.1.3).

Transparent Cover/Gasket

2. Remove the five screws and then the transparent cover and gasket.

Screws (5)

CD721



3. Disconnect four connectors from the LED circuit boards.

Connector

LED Circuit Board Cover (4)

CD722



4. Disconnect the D203 and LH201 connectors. 5. Remove the JCP3 connector from the bracket.

D203 Connector

6. Remove the harnesses from the four clamps and then the plug-in connectors.

Installation Install the plug-in connectors in the reverse order of removal.

Plug-in Connector LH201 Connector

JCP3 Connector

Plug-in Clamps (4) Connector

CD723



9.1.5 LED Circuit Board Assembly Replacement Removal 1. Remove the light source assembly (see subsection 9.1.3).



Screws (5)

CD721



3. Disconnect the D203 connector.

D203 Connector

CD1116



4. Wear the grounding wristband on your wrist and connect the other end to the carrier base.

Screws (4)

LED Circuit Board

5. Disconnect the connector from the LED circuit board. 6. Remove the four screws and then the LED circuit board. Connectors (4)

Grounding Wristband

CD724



7. Remove the four spacers and spring washers from the LED circuit board assembly.

Spring Washers (4)

Spacers (4)

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Take care not to pinch the wires. • Do not touch to the surface of the LED. • After installation, perform the following adjustments.

1) Menu 43L “LED Light Amount Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.15). 2) Menu 43J “Spectral Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.13). 3) Clear the operation data in menu 434 “Operation Information Display” (see subsection 5.4.4).

CD1115



9.1.6 Peltier Element (LH201) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the light source assembly (see subsection 9.1.3).



Screws (5)

CD721



3. Disconnect the LH201 connector.

LH201 Connector

CD725



4. Disconnect the LED1 and LED4 connectors.

Screws (4)

5. Remove the four screws, spacers, spring washers, LED bracket and sponge.

Spacers (4) Spring Washers (4)

LED2 Connector LED Bracket LED1 Connector

CD726



6. Remove the LH201 connector from the bracket and then the Peltier element.

Heat Conduction Sheet Peltier Element

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Face the heat conduction sheet on the Peltier element up.

LH201 Connector

CD727



9.1.7 Light Source Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. 2. Remove the front upper cover (see subsection 13.1.1). 3. Remove the two screws and then the light source section cover.

Reinstallation

Screws (2)

Light Source Section Cover

Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of removal. CD710



9.1.8 LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the light source section cover (see subsection 9.1.7). 2. Remove the two screws securing the bracket. 3. Disconnect the LTC4 connector from the LTC22 circuit board. Screws (2)

4. Open the clamp and pull out the bracket.

Bracket

Clamp

LTC4 Connector

CD711



5. Disconnect the LTC1, LTC2, LTC3 and FAN201 connectors and remove the bracket.

LTC2

LTC1


Bracket

FAN201

LTC3

CD712



9.1.9 Light Source Cooling Fan (F201) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the LTC22 circuit board bracket (see subsection 9.1.8).

Screws (2)

Fan Guard Clamps

2. Open the two clamps. 3. Remove the two screws and then the fan guard and the fan.

Installation Fan (F201)

Install the fan in the reverse order of removal.

CD713



9.1.10 LTC22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the LTC22 circuit board bracket (see subsection 9.1.8).

Circuit Board Cover

2. Remove the four screws and then the circuit board cover.

Screws (4)

CD714



3. Remove the four screws and then the LTC22 circuit board.

Installation

Screws (4)

Install the circuit board in the reverse order of removal.

LTC22 Circuit Board

CD715



9.1.11 Plug-in Connector (on Frame) Replacement Removal 1. Remove:

Screws (2) Special Screws (4)

• Light source unit (see subsection 9.1.1). • LTC22 circuit board bracket (see subsection 9.1.8). • Printer rear cover (see subsection 18.2.1). 2. Remove the four special screws securing the plug-in connectors. 3. Remove the two screws and then the plug-in connector bracket.


CD750



4. Open the seven harness clamps.

Clamps (7)

CD751



5. Remove the four screws and open the circuit board bracket.

Screws (2)

Circuit Board Bracket

CD171



6. Disconnect the plug-in connector harness connectors (CTC6 to CTC10 and CTC13) from the CTC22 circuit board. 7. Open the clamps and remove the plug-in connectors.

Installation

CTC22 Circuit Board

Install the plug-in connectors in the reverse order of removal.

CD752


9.2 Scanner Section 9.2.1 Scanner Front Cover Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply.


Auto Film Carrier Lock Lever

2. Remove the screw and then the auto film carrier lock lever. 3. Remove the two screws and then the manual film carrier release lever.

Screw Screws (2)

CD671


9.2 Scanner Section

4. Remove the two screws and then the scanner upper cover. Screws (2) Scanner Upper Cover

CD014


9.2 Scanner Section

5. Remove the five screws and then the table top small cover. Screws (5)

Table Top Small Cover

CD672


9.2 Scanner Section

6. Remove the four screws securing the cover unit. Scanner Front Cover Unit

Screws (4)

CD673


9.2 Scanner Section

7. Remove the two screws securing the side of the cover unit. 8. Disconnect the scanner cooling fan (F216) connector.

Screws (3)

Screws (2)

9. Remove the three screws and then the cover unit.

Fan Connector

Reinstallation Reinstall the cover unit in the reverse order of removal. Scanner Front Cover Unit

CD674


9.2 Scanner Section

9.2.2 Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal Scanner Rear Cover

1. Remove the scanner front cover unit (see subsection 9.2.1). 2. Remove the three screws and then the scanner rear cover.

F216 Connector

3. Remove the F216 connector from the cover bracket.


Screws (3)

CD697


9.2 Scanner Section

9.2.3 Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the scanner front cover unit (see subsection 9.2.1).

Clamp Screws (2)

2. Remove the fan harness from the clamp. 3. Remove the two screws and then the louver and the fan.

Louver/Fan (F216)

CD675


9.2 Scanner Section

Installation Louver

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Install the fan so that its arrow points up. • Install the louver so that its installation direction is as shown.

Fan (F216) Arrow

CD676


9.2 Scanner Section

9.2.4 CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the scanner front cover unit (see subsection 9.2.1).

Screws

2. Loosen one screw and remove the two screws and then the CCD cover.

CCD Cover

Screw (Loosen)

CD677


9.2 Scanner Section

3. Disconnect the JSA8, JSA9, PZ201 and PZ202 connectors.

Coaxial Cable

PZ202

4. Remove the two screws securing the harness clamps. 5. Open the harness clamp.

PZ201 Screw /Clamp

6. Disconnect the coaxial cable.

JSA9 JSA8

Screw/Clamp

CD678


9.2 Scanner Section

7. Disconnect the M203 connector.

M203 Connector

CD679


9.2 Scanner Section

8. Disconnect the JSA7 connector.

JSA7 Connector

CD680


9.2 Scanner Section

9. Loosen the four screws and remove the two dustproof covers.

Screws (4)

10. Remove the four screws and then the CCD unit.

Dustproof Cover (2)

Screws (4)

CD681


9.2 Scanner Section

Reinstallation Reinstall the CCD unit in the reverse order of removal. When the unit has been replaced, perform the following adjustments after reinstallation. 1) CCD Data Setup 2) Piezoelectric voltage adjustment (see subsection 9.4.6). 3) Menu 43E “Optical Axis Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.9). 4) Menu 43F “Optical Magnification Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.10). 5) Menu 432 “Focus Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.2). 6) Menu 433 “Focus Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.3). 7) Menu 441 “Mask Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.5.1). 8) Pixel Correction 9) Clear “Piezoelectric actuator operating time” in menu 434 (see subsection 5.4.4).


9.2 Scanner Section

9.2.5 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the CCD unit (see subsection 9.2.4). 2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor bracket.

Screws (2) Sensor Bracket

CD682


9.2 Scanner Section

3. Remove the sensor from the bracket. 4. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.

Sensor (D215)

Installation

Connector


Bracket

CD683


9.2 Scanner Section

9.2.6 Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the CCD unit (see subsection 9.2.4).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the shutter drive motor.


Shutter Drive Motor (M203)

CD684


9.2 Scanner Section

9.2.7 Shutter/Gear Replacement Removal Special Screw

1. Remove the CCD unit (see subsection 9.2.4). 2. Remove the special screw, spring washer and shutter.

Special Screw

Shutter

Gear

3. Remove the special screw and gear. Lock Washer

Installation Install the shutter and gear in the reverse order of removal.

CD685


9.3 Lens Unit 9.3.1 Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the scanner front cover unit (see subsection 9.2.1).

JSA6 Connector

Screws (2)

2. Disconnect the JSA6 connector. 3. Remove the two screws and then the sensor bracket.

Sensor Bracket

CD686


9.3 Lens Unit

4. Remove the screw and then the sensor from the bracket. 5. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Connector

Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. After installation, perform the following adjustments. 1) Menu 43F “Optical Magnification Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.10). 2) Menu 432 “Focus Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.2). 3) Menu 433 “Focus Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.3).

Screw

Sensor (D214)

Bracket

CD687


9.3 Lens Unit

9.3.2 Lens Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the CCD unit (see subsection 9.2.4).

Lens Cover

2. Remove the three screws and then the lens cover.

Screws (3)

CD688


9.3 Lens Unit

3. Disconnect the JSA6 and M202 connectors. M202 Connector

JSA6 Connector

CD690


9.3 Lens Unit

4. Remove the boot. 5. Remove the three screws and then the lens unit.

Lens Unit

Screws (3)

Boot

CD689


9.3 Lens Unit

Reinstallation Reinstall the lens unit in the reverse order of removal. When the unit has been replaced, perform the following adjustments after installation. 1) *Menu 43D “Lens Registration” (see subsection 5.4.8). 2) Menu 43B “Carrier Inclination Display” (see subsection 5.4.6). 3) Menu 43E “Optical Axis Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.9). 4) Menu 43F “Optical Magnification Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.10). 5) Menu 432 “Focus Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.2). 6) Menu 433 “Focus Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.3). 7) Menu 441 “Mask Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.5.1). *: Perform when lens unit has been replaced.


9.3 Lens Unit

9.3.3 Lens Drive Motor (M202) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the lens unit (see subsection 9.3.2). 2. Cut the cord tie.

Motor (M202)

3. Loosen the two motor mounting screws and remove the two tension springs. Screws (2) Tension Springs (2)

4. Remove the motor.

Cord Tie

CD691


9.3 Lens Unit

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. Screws (2) NOTE: • Temporarily tighten the two motor mounting screws. Turn the motor shaft several turns and tighten the two screws. • After installation, perform the following adjustments.

1) Menu 43F “Optical Magnification Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.10). 2) Menu 432 “Focus Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.2). 3) Menu 433 “Focus Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.3).

Motor Shaft

CD693


9.4 Conjugate Length Variable Section/Circuit Board Section 9.4.1 Conjugate Length Variable Section Home Position Sensor (D211)/ Upper and Lower Limit Sensor (D212 and D213) Replacement Removal Sensor Bracket

1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see subsection 9.2.2). 2. Move the conjugate length drive base and remove the three screws securing the sensor bracket. 3. Disconnect the connector from each sensor.

Drive Base Connectors (3) Screws (3)

CD695


9.4 Conjugate Length Variable Section/Circuit Board Section

4. Remove the sensor from the bracket. Sensor (D213)

Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. After installation, perform the following adjustments.

Sensor (D211) Sensor (D212)

1) Menu 432 “Focus Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.2). 2) Menu 433 “Focus Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.3).

Bracket

CD696



9.4.2 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see subsection 9.2.2). Motor (M201)

2. Lower the conjugate length drive base. Screws (3)

3. Disconnect the M201 connector and remove the motor connector from the bracket.

Connector Bracker

4. Remove the three screws and then the motor.

M201 Connector

CD698



Installation Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. After installation, perform the following adjustments. 1) Menu 432 “Focus Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.2). 2) Menu 433 “Focus Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.3).



9.4.3 Conjugate Length Variable Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the conjugate length variable motor (see subsection 9.4.2).

Screws (5)

Gear Bracket

2. Remove the five screws and then the gear bracket.

CD699



3. Remove the two E-rings and then the gears.

E-rings

Installation Install the gears in the reverse order of removal. After installation, perform the following adjustments. 1) Menu 432 “Focus Calibration” (see subsection 5.4.2).

Gears

2) Menu 433 “Focus Position Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.3).

CD700



9.4.4 ADC22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see subsection 9.2.2).

Cable Connector

Clamp (5)

2. Disconnect the two cable connectors and coaxial cable from the circuit board.

Coaxial Cable

3. Open the five clamps.

Cable Connector

CD701



4. Remove the screw and then the cord tie bracket. Cord Tie Bracket

5. Loosen the three screws and then the circuit board box. 6. Disconnect the connector from the circuit board.

Screw Screws (3) Connector Circuit Board

CD702



7. Remove the six screws and then the circuit box cover. Circuit Board Box Cover

Screws (6)

CD703



8. Remove the six screws and then the ADC22 circuit board. Screws (6)


ADC22 Circuit Board

CD704



9.4.5 PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the scanner rear cover (see subsection 9.2.2).

Clamp

Screws (2) (Loosen)

2. Remove the screw securing the clamp and open the clamp. 3. Loosen the two screws and remove one screw securing the circuit board bracket.

Screw/Clamp

Screw (Remove)

CD705



4. Loosen the two screws and remove the screw and then the bracket and circuit board box cover.

Screws (2) (Loosen)

Bracket

Screws (2) (Remove)

Circuit Board Box Cover

CD706



5. Open the two clamps. 6. Disconnect the PZR1 to PZR3 connectors. 7. Remove the four screws and then the PZR22 circuit board.

PZR3 Screws (4)

Installation Install the circuit board in the reverse order of removal. After installation, perform the Piezo electric voltage adjustment (see subsection 9.4.6).

PZR1

PZR2

Clamps (2)

CD707



9.4.6 Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment 1. Remove the PZR22 circuit board box cover (see subsection 9.4.5). Monitor

2. Loosen the four screws securing the monitor supports and face the monitor screen to the rear as shown.

CD1083



3. Record the voltage data shown in the label on the CCD unit.

CCD Unit

4. Turn ON the main power supply and the built-in circuit breaker and press the START switch to start up the system.

Voltage Data

CD1080



5. Proceed to the next page of the menu 43A “I/O Check” screen. 6. Click the [ON] buttons for “Piezoelectric actuator 1” and “Piezoelectric actuator 2”.



7. X Voltage (1) Adjustment PZR22 Circuit Board

1) Measure the DC voltage between the test pin “TP4 X out” and “TP3 out” on the PZR22 circuit board.

TP4 Xout q

TP3 Out

CD1081



2) Adjust the voltage to the value (1) indicated in the label attached to the CCD unit by turning the “VR1 XADJ”.

VR1 (X-ADJ)

CD1084



8. Y Voltage (2) Adjustment PZR22 Circuit Board

1) Measure the DC voltage between the test pin “TP5 Y out” and “TP3 out” on the PZR22 circuit board.

TP5 Yout w

TP3 Out

CD1082



2) Adjust the voltage to the value (2) indicated in the label attached to the CCD unit by turning the “VR2 YADJ”. 9. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply.

VR2 (Y-ADJ)

10. Reinstall the removed parts.

CD1085


10. PAPER SUPPLY SECTION Parts Location 10.1 Paper Magazine 10.1.1 10.1.2 10.1.3 10.1.4 10.1.5

Paper End Sensor Plate Replacement Magazine Drive Gear Replacement Nip Roller Replacement Paper End Sensor (D311) Replacement Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover Removal/ Reinstallation 10.1.6 Magazine ID Sensor (D306 to 310) Replacement 10.1.7 Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D322) Replacement

10.2 Paper Magazine Table 10.2.1

Magazine Table Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation 10.2.2 Magazine Table Setting Gear Replacement 10.2.3 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Replacement 10.2.4 Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation

10.3 Paper Supply Drive Section 10.3.1

Paper Supply Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation

10.3.2 10.3.3

Paper Supply Motor (M301) Replacement Paper Supply Drive Belt Replacement

10.4 Cutter Unit 10.4.1 10.4.2 10.4.3

Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Replacement Cutter Unit Replacement Cutter Home Position Sensor 1/2 (D312/D313) Replacement 10.4.4 Cutter Drive Motor (M307) Replacement


Parts Location Paper Supply Drive Unit Papre Supply Motor (M301)

Paper Supply Drive Unit

Magazine ID Sensors (D306 to D310)

Paper Magazine Magazine End Sensor Plate Magazine Drive Gear Nip Roller Slide Arm

Magazine Table Unit

Magazine Table Front Cover

Magazine Table Setting Gear

Magazine Set Lever Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D322) CD814


Parts Location Paper End Sensor (D311)

Cutter Home Position Sensor 1 (D312) Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Cutter Unit

Cutter Home Position Sensor 2 (D313)

Cutter Drive Motor (M307)

CD815-1


10.1 Paper Magazine 10.1.1 Paper End Sensor Plate Replacement Removal 1. Remove the three screws securing the magazine exit cover.

Screws (3)

Magazine Exit Cover

CD753


10.1 Paper Magazine

2. Remove the magazine exit cover by pulling it toward front side.

Magazine Exit Cover

CD754


10.1 Paper Magazine

3. Remove the end sensor plate.

End Sensor Plate

CD755-1


10.1 Paper Magazine

Installation 1. Align the holes in the end sensor plate with the screw and the steel plate as shown.

Screw

Steel Plate

End Sensor Plate

CD755


10.1 Paper Magazine

2. Insert the latch release pin into the hole in the magazine exit cover.

Latch Release Pin

End Sensor Plate

3. Align the end sensor plate with the slot in the magazine exit cover and install the cover.

Magazine Exit Cover

EZ1843


10.1 Paper Magazine

4. Tighten the three screws while pressing the magazine exit cover as shown. Screws (3)

5. Make sure there is no clearance between the magazine exit cover and the magazine. NOTE: Paper fogging may result if there is clearance.

Magazine Exit Cover

EZ1844


10.1 Paper Magazine

6. Make sure the end sensor plate moves smoothly by pushing it by finger and freely returns to the original position when it is released. 7. Place the magazine upright and make sure the sensor plate is protruded 10.5mm or more from the magazine.

More than 10.5mm

End Sensor Plate

EZ1845


10.1 Paper Magazine

10.1.2 Magazine Drive Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the E-ring and then remove the gear. 2. Remove the drive pin from the shaft.

Gear

Installation Install the gear in the reverse order of removal. Pin E-ring

CD756


10.1 Paper Magazine

10.1.3 Nip Roller Replacement Removal 1. Place the paper magazine up side down and remove the six screws securing the nip roller assembly.

Screws (6)

EZ1902


10.1 Paper Magazine

2. Release the latches and open the magazine gently while holding the lid cover.

Lid Cover

EZ1903


10.1 Paper Magazine

3. Remove the lid cover.

Lid Cover

EZ1904


10.1 Paper Magazine

4. Remove the nip roller assembly.

Nip Roller Assembly

EZ1905


10.1 Paper Magazine

5. Remove the four screws and then the stainless steel guide plate. NOTE: Be careful not to distort the stainless steel guide plate.

Stainless Steel Guide Plate Screws (4)

EZ1906


10.1 Paper Magazine

6. Remove two nip springs each form both ends. NOTE: Mark the coil springs since there are two types of springs Inner roller springs:Strong Outer roller springs:Weak

Spring (Weak) Spring (Strong) Spring (Strong) Spring (Weak)

EZ1907


10.1 Paper Magazine

7. Remove the four bearings and then the two nip roller shafts from the bracket. Nip Roller Shafts

Bearings (4)

Spectacle Guides

EZ1911


10.1 Paper Magazine

8. Remove the four outside Erings and then the four rollers and two spectacle guides. E-rings (4)

Rollers (4)

Spectacle Guides

EZ1910


10.1 Paper Magazine

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. Nip Roller Shafts NOTE: • Install the rollers and four bearings so that the holes in the spectacle guides are positioned as shown in the figure below.

Bearings (4)

Spectacle Guides

EZ1911


10.1 Paper Magazine

• Position the flanges on the bearings between the spring arms and the side plates. • Install the nip springs in their correct positions.

Spring Arms

Nip Spring (Weak)

Nip Spring (Strong)

EZ1912


10.1 Paper Magazine

• Install the nip roller assembly on the magazine so that its rollers align with the ones on the magazine.

Nip Roller Assembly

EZ1913


10.1 Paper Magazine

10.1.4 Paper End Sensor (D311) Replacement Removal 1. Perform the post-operational checks and turn the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

D311 Connector

2. Disconnect the D311 connector from the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor by releasing its locking tabs.


D311 Sensor

CD381


10.1 Paper Magazine

10.1.5 Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal

Screws (Loosen)

1. Remove the feed section front cover (see subsection 11.1.4). 2. Loosen the two screws, remove the two screws and then the magazine ID sensor section cover.

Reinstallation Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Take care not to pinch the wire harness.

Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover

Screws (Remove)

CD382


10.1 Paper Magazine

10.1.6 Magazine ID Sensor (D306 to 310) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the magazine ID sensor section cover (see subsection 10.1.5). 2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.

Connector

CD383


10.1 Paper Magazine

3. Remove the two screws and then the sensor bracket. Screws (2)

Sensor Bracket

CD384


10.1 Paper Magazine

4. Remove the two screws and then the sensor circuit board. Screws (2)

5. Disconnect the wire harness from the circuit board.

Wire Harness Sensor Circuit Board

CD385


10.1 Paper Magazine

6. Remove the three screws and then the sensor circuit board bracket, four springs and sensor shafts.

Screws (3)

Sensor Shafts (4) Springs (4)

Sensor Circuit Board Bracket

CD386


10.1 Paper Magazine


Screws (2)

NOTE: Tighten the two screws while pressing the circuit board toward the arrow direction.

Sensor Circuit Board

CD1060


10.1 Paper Magazine

10.1.7 Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D322) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the feed section front cover (see subsection 11.1.4).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the switch bracket.

Switch Bracket

CD395


10.1 Paper Magazine

3. Disconnect the D322 connector from the switch. 4. Remove the spring and Ering and then the switch.

D322 Connector

Installation Switch

Install the switche in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring

CD394


10.2 Paper Magazine Table 10.2.1 Magazine Table Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the screw and then the magazine setting lever.

Magazine Setting Lever

Screw

CD368


10.2 Paper Magazine Table

2. Remove the three screws and then the magazine table front cover.


Screws (3)

Magazine Table Front Cover

CD369



10.2.2 Magazine Table Setting Gear Replacement Removal Stainless Steel Plate

1. Remove the magazine table front cover (see subsection 10.2.1). 2. Remove the four screws and four tapping screws and then the stainless steel plate.

Screws (4)

Tapping Screws (4)

CD370



3. Loosen the five screws securing the guide rollers and remove the sliding plate.

Guide Rollers (2)

Screws (5)

CD371



4. Remove the four magazine rests and two brackets. Magazine Rests (4)

5. Remove the four screws and then the guide plate.

Screws (4)

Brackets Guide Plate

CD372



6. Remove the three E-rings and then the two gears and the sliding arm/gear. E-rings (3)

Sliding Arm/Gear

Gears

CD373



7. Remove the screw and then the shaft, bearing and rubber roller. 8. Remove the two screws and then the gear from the sliding arm.

Screw

Gear Rubber Roller

Screws (2)

Bearing

Shaft

EZ038




Guide Pin Sliding Arm

NOTE: • Loosen the two screws and adjust the clearance between the stop of the bevel gear and the adjustment bracket to 0 mm by moving the bracket. Tighten the two screws securely.

0 mm

Stop

Screws (2)

Adjustment Bracket

CD374



• Align the roller on the sliding arm with the guide groove in the sliding plate and tighten the two screws while lightly pushing the guide rollers as shown. • Then tighten the three plate screws. After tightening the screws, make sure the magazine table moves smoothly without rattle.

Sliding Plate Guide Groove

Screws (2)

Roller

Screws (3) Guide Rollers (2)

CD375



10.2.3 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the magazine table front cover (see subsection 10.2.1).

Screws (4)

2. Remove the four screws and then the bevel gear bracket.

Bavel Gear Bracket

CD376



3. Remove the two screws and then the bracket and the gear.

Screws (2)

Bracket

Gear

CD377



4. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing, shaft, bevel gear, pin and bearing.

Shaft

Bearing E-ring

Bearing Pin Bevel Gear

CD378



Installation Shaft

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. 1) Point the “▲” mark on the gear to the right side and engage the gears so that the flat surface on the shaft is horizontal.

▲ Mark

CD1057



2) Move the magazine table to the right side fully and install the gear bracket. 3) Make sure the flat surface on the shaft is horizontal. Shaft

Gear Bracket

CD1058



4) If the flat surface is not horizontal, remove the gear bracket, point the “▲” mark to the left side and engage the gears.

▲ Mark

CD1059



5) Adjust the adjustment bracket position so that the clearance between the stop on the bevel gear and the adjustment bracket is 0 mm when the magazine setting lever is turned to the magazine setting position.

Magazine Seting Lever

Stop

Screws (2) Adjustment Bracket 0 mm

CD380



6) Turn the magazine setting lever clockwise fully and make sure there is no clearance between the lever and the magazine table front cover.

Magazine Setting Lever

CD379



10.2.4 Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the front lower cover (see subsection 18.1.1).

Magazine Table Unit

2. Remove the two screws and then the magazine table unit.

Reinstallation Reinstall the unit in the reverse order of removal.

Screws (2)

CD387


10.3 Paper Supply Drive Section 10.3.1 Paper Supply Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal Paper Supply Drive Unit

1. Remove: • Magazine ID sensor section cover (see subsection 10.1.5). • Magazine table unit (see subsection 10.2.4). 2. Disconnect the M301 connector. 3. Remove the six screws and then the paper supply drive unit.

M301 Connector

Screws (6)


CD388


10.3 Paper Supply Drive Section

10.3.2 Paper Supply Motor (M301) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the paper supply drive unit (see subsection 10.3.1).

Motor (M301)

2. Remove the four screws and then the motor.


Screws (4)

NOTE: Align the motor pulley with the drive belt when installing the motor.

CD389



10.3.3 Paper Supply Drive Belt Replacement Removal 1. Remove the paper supply motor (see subsection 10.3.2).

Screws (7)

2. Remove the seven screws and then the belt cover.

Belt Cover

CD390



3. Remove the spring, collars, belt tensioner and pulleys. Pulleys

Collar

Spring

Belt Tensioner

CD391



4. Remove the screw, pulley, shaft and the drive belt. Drive Belt Shaft

Installation

Pulley

Install the drive belt in the reverse order of removal.

Screw

CD392


10.4 Cutter Unit 10.4.1 Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the magazine table unit (see subsection 10.2.4).

Cutter Paper Guide

2. Remove the four screws and then the cutter paper guide.

Screws (4)

CD396


10.4 Cutter Unit

3. Disconnect the sensor connectors. Screw

4. Remove the screws and then the sensor and the sensor LED.

Installation

Sensor LED (D301L)

Connector

Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Screw

Sensor (D301P)

Connector

CD397


10.4 Cutter Unit

10.4.2 Cutter Unit Replacement Removal 1. Remove the magazine ID sensor section cover (see subsection 10.1.5).

JCU3

JCU1

2. Disconnect the four connectors.

JCU4

JCU2

CD399


10.4 Cutter Unit

3. Open the two harness clamps. 4. Remove the two screws and then the cutter unit. Screws (2) NOTE: Do not try to loosen the red painted screws.

Cutter Unit Clamp

CD400


10.4 Cutter Unit

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Tighten the two cutter mounting screws while pressing the cutter unit against the left side.

Cutter Unit

Screws (2)

CD1064


10.4 Cutter Unit

10.4.3 Cutter Home Position Sensor 1/2 (D312/D313) Replacement Removal Sensor Cover

1. Remove the cutter unit (see subsection 10.4.2).


2. Remove the screw and then the sensor cover and the bracket.

Screw Bracket


CD1061


10.4 Cutter Unit

3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. 4. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor from the bracket.


Connector

Sensor (D312/D313)

CD1062


10.4 Cutter Unit

10.4.4 Cutter Drive Motor (M307) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the cutter unit (see subsection 10.4.2).

Connector

Motor (M307)

2. Disconnect the motor connector. 3. Remove the two screws and then the motor.

Installation Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Screws (2)

CD1063


11. PAPER FEED SECTION Parts Location

11.2.8

11.1 Feed Section Cover

11.2.9

11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3 11.1.4 11.1.5 11.1.6 11.1.7

Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D324) Replacement Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D323) Replacement Feed Section Front Cover Removal/ Reinstallation Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D325A/B) Replacement Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Replacement Printer Suction Fan 1/2 (F308/F309) Replacement

11.2 Feed Unit 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 11.2.6 11.2.7

Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation Feed Nip Motor (M313) Replacement Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319) Replacement Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Replacement Feed Drive Motor 1 (M302) Replacement Entrance Guide Plate Roller Replacement Entrance Side Feed Roller Replacement

11.2.10 11.2.11 11.2.12

Back Printer Section Guide Plate Roller Replacement Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement Exit Guide Plate Roller Replacement Exit Feed Roller Replacement Feed Nip Cam Shaft Replacement

11.3 Back Printer Section 11.3.1 11.3.2 11.3.3 11.3.4

Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement Back Printer Set Sensor (D320) Replacement Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302) Replacement 11.3.5 Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board Replacement 11.3.6 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment 11.3.7 Platen Replacement


Parts Location Exit Feed Rollers Exit Guide Plate Rollers Paper Feed Unit Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319) Feed Nip Motor (M313) Back Printer Section Guide Plate Rollers

Feed Nip Cam Shaft Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Back Printer Unit Back Printer Set Sensor (D320) Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302) Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment Platen

Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Feed Drive Moter 1 (M302)

Back Printer Section Feed Rollers

Entrance Guide Plate Rollers

Entrance Side Feed Rollers Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switches (D324A/B) Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D323) Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switches (D325A/B)

Cutter Unit Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Printer Suction Fans 1/2 (F308/F309) CD815


11.1 Feed Section Cover 11.1.1 Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal Screws (14)

1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF.

Tapes (3)

2. Secure the feed section upper and lower doors using the three tapes. 3. Remove the fourteen screws and then the left cover. Left Cover


CD861



11.1.2 Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D324) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the left cover (see subsection 11.1.1).

Screws (2)


Switch Bracket

CD458



3. Disconnect the connectors from the switches. 4. Remove the spring and Ering and then the two switches.

Connectors

Spring

Installation Install the switches in the reverse order of removal. Switches (2)

E-ring

CD459



11.1.3 Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D323) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the left cover (see subsection 11.1.1).

Switch Bracket Screws (2)


CD1066



3. Disconnect the connector from the switch. Connector

Spring

4. Remove the spring and Ering and then the switch.

Installation Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.

Switch E-ring

CD1067



11.1.4 Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal Screws (6)

1. Remove the front lower cover (see subsection 18.1.1). 2. Remove the six screws and then the feed section front cover.

Feed Section Front Cover

CD363



3. Disconnect the F310 connector.

Reinstallation

F310 Connector

Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of removal.

CD364



11.1.5 Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D325A/B) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the feed section front cover (see subsection 11.1.4)

Interlock Switch Cover

2. Remove the four screws and then the interlock switch cover.

Screws (4)

CD1065




Screws (2) Switch Bracket

CD393



4. Disconnect the D325A and D325B connectors from the switches.

D325A and D325B Connectors

5. Remove the spring and Ering and then the two switches. Switches

Installation

E-ring

Install the switches in the reverse order of removal.

CD394



11.1.6 Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the feed section front cover (see subsection 11.1.4).

Connector

Screws (2) Fan (F310)

2. Remove the connector from the bracket and open the clamp. 3. Remove the two screws and then the fan and three louvers.

Bracket

Clamp

Louvers (3)

CD365




Arrow

NOTE: • Point the arrow on the fan to the inside of the printer. • Install the louvers alternately as shown.

Louvers (3)

CD366



11.1.7 Printer Suction Fan 1/2 (F308/F309) Replacement Removal

Screws (4)

1. Remove the left cover (see subsection 11.1.1). 2. Remove the four screws and then the fan bracket.

Fan Bracket

CD193



3. Disconnect the two fan connectors. Fan Connectors

CD194



4. Remove the two connectors from the bracket.

Fan Guards (2) Fan (F309)

5. Remove the four screws and then the clamp bracket, fan guards, fans and six louvers. 6. Remove the fan harnesses from the three clamps.

Fan (F308)

Louvers(6)

Connector

Screws (4) Clamp Bracket Clamps (3)

CD195




Arrow

NOTE: • Point the arrow on the fan to the inside. • Install each louver alternately as shown.

Louvers (6)

CD196


11.2 Feed Unit 11.2.1 Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal Connector Cover

1. Remove the left cover (see subsection 11.1.1). 2. Remove the two screws and then the connector cover.

Screws (2)

CD405


11.2 Feed Unit

3. Disconnect the JHA5 and JHK1 connectors and open the clamp.

Clamp

JHK1

JHA5

CD406


11.2 Feed Unit

4. Disconnect the JHA1 to JHA4 connectors. JHA1

5. Remove the four screws and then the feed unit.

JHA2

JHA4 JHA3

Reinstallation Reinstall the feed unit in the reverse order of removal.

Feed Unit

Screws (4)

CD407


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.2 Feed Nip Motor (M313) Replacement Removal Motor (M313)

1. Remove the feed unit (see subsection 11.2.1).

M313 Connector Gear

2. Remove the E-ring and then the idler gear. 3. Disconnect the M313 connector. 4. Remove the two screws and then the motor.

Installation Screws(3)

Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring

CD407-1


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.3 Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the feed section front cover (see subsection 11.1.3).

Locking Tabs

2. Disconnect the D319 connector from the sensor. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor.

Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Sensor (D319) D319 Connector

CD408


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.4 Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the feed unit (see subsection 11.2.1).

Back Printer Section Cover

2. Remove the six screws and then the back printer section cover.

Screws (6)

CD409


11.2 Feed Unit

3. Open the two clamps. 4. Disconnect the M303 connector.

Clamps (2)

Motor (M303)

E-rings (2)

5. Remove the two E-rings and then the two gears. 6. Remove the two screws and then the motor.


M303 Connector Screws (2)

CD410


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.5 Feed Drive Motor 1 (M302) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the feed unit (see subsection 11.2.1).

Screws (4)

2. Remove the four screws and then the entrance bracket.

Entrance Bracket

CD433


11.2 Feed Unit

3. Remove the screw and clamp. Motor Gear

Clamp

4. Disconnect the motor connector. 5. Release the locking tab and remove the gear. Screw

6. Remove the E-ring and then the motor gear.

Motor Connector

E-ring Spacer E-ring

CD434


11.2 Feed Unit

7. Remove the two screws and then the motor Motor (M302)


Screws (2)

CD435


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.6 Entrance Guide Plate Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the feed unit (see subsection 11.2.1).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the guide plate.

CD436


11.2 Feed Unit

3. Remove the four screws and then the entrance guide plate. 4. Disconnect the back printer entrance sensor connector.

Sensor Connector

Entrance Guide Plate Screws (4)

CD437


11.2 Feed Unit

5. Remove the springs and Erings and then the rollers and bearings.

Springs

Rollers

Installation Install the rollers in the reverse order of removal. E-rings

Bearings

Rollers Roller Shafts

Springs

CD438


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.7 Entrance Side Feed Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the entrance guide plate (see subsection 11.2.6).

Bracket

2. Disconnect the M302 connector. 3. Remove the two screws and then the bracket.

Screws (2)

M302 Connectors

CD439


11.2 Feed Unit

4. Release the locking tabs and remove the three gears and collar.

Locking Tab

Gears (3)

CD440


11.2 Feed Unit

5. Remove the bearing and then the three roller shafts toward the front.

E-ring Roller Shafts (3)

6. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing from the roller shaft.

Bearings (3)

Installation Install the rollers in the reverse order of removal.

Bearings (3)

CD441


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.8 Back Printer Section Guide Plate Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the feed unit (see subsection 11.2.1). 2. Remove the four screws and then the back printer section guide plate.

Back Printer Section Guide Plate

Screws (4)

CD425


11.2 Feed Unit

3. Remove the springs, bearings and two nip rollers. 4. Remove the E-rings and then the two roller shafts.

Springs (2)

Roller Shafts (2)

Bearings (2)

CD442


11.2 Feed Unit


Holes/Locating Half Punches (2)

NOTE: Align the holes in the guide plate with the two locating half punches.

CD432


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.9 Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the back printer section guide plate (see subsection 11.2.8). Screws (2)

2. Remove the ink ribbon cassettes. 3. Remove the two screws and then the harness bracket. Harness Bracket

CD444


11.2 Feed Unit

4. Remove the E-ring and then the one-way gear from the upper roller shaft.

One-way Gear

5. Release the locking tabs and remove the gear from the lower roller shaft.

Gear

E-ring

CD445


11.2 Feed Unit

6. Remove the bearings and then the two roller shafts toward the front. 7. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing from the roller shaft.

Bearings (2)

Installation Install the rollers in the reverse order of removal. E-rings (2) Bearings (2) Roller Shafts (2)

CD446


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.10 Exit Guide Plate Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the feed unit (see subsection 11.2.1).

E-ring

2. Remove the two guide plate return springs. 3. Remove the two nip springs. 4. Remove the E-ring and then the guide plate.

Nip Springs (2)

Guide Plate Return Springs (2)

CD447


11.2 Feed Unit

5. Remove the four screws and then the stainless steel guide plate.

Stainless Steel Guide Plate

Screws (4)

CD448


11.2 Feed Unit

6. Remove the two bearings, Ering, bearing and roller shaft. E-ring

7. Remove the two E-rings and bearing form the roller shaft. 8. Remove the E-ring and then the roller shaft.

Bearing E-ring Roller Shaft Bearing

Installation Install the roller in the reverse order of removal. E-ring Roller Shaft

Bearings (2)

CD449


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.11 Exit Feed Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the exit guide plate (see subsection 11.2.10). 2. Remove the return spring from the registration unit drive gear bracket.

Return Spring

CD450


11.2 Feed Unit

3. Remove the E-ring and then the roller shaft toward the rear side. Roller Shaft

Bearing

E-ring

CD451


11.2 Feed Unit

4. Remove the E-ring, then the bracket, two bearings, spacer, one-way gear, bearing and collar.

Gear Spacer

Bearing Shaft Collar

5. Remove the screw and then the gear shaft, spacer and gear.

Bearing


Screw Bracket E-ring

One-way Gear Bearings (2)

Spacer

CD452


11.2 Feed Unit

11.2.12 Feed Nip Cam Shaft Replacement Removal 1. Remove the exit guide plate (see subsection 11.2.10).

Gear

Screw

Gear

2. Remove the screws and then the sensor bracket. 3. Remove the E-ring and gear. 4. Remove the E-ring, sensor plate and gear.

Sensor Bracket

Sensor Plate

E-ring E-ring

CD453


11.2 Feed Unit

5. Remove the E-ring and idler gear. E-ring

Idler Gear

6. Remove the E-ring and then the one-way gear from the roller shaft.

E-ring

One-way Gear

CD454


11.2 Feed Unit

7. Remove the E-ring and bearing.

Bearing

8. Remove the E-ring securing the cam and then the cam shaft and two cams.

E-ring

Installation Install the cam shaft in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring

Cam Shaft Cams (2)

CD455


11.3 Back Printer Section 11.3.1 Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove feed drive motor 2 (see subsection 11.2.4).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the ink ribbon cassettes. 3. Remove the two screws and plain washers and then the back printer unit.

Back Printer Unit Plain Washers (2)

CD411


11.3 Back Printer Section

4. Remove the two screws and then the connector cover.

Connector Cover

Screws (2)

CD412



5. Disconnect the S301 and S302 connectors. S301 Connector

S302 Connector

CD413



Reinstallation Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Place the two poly-sliders to the pivots under the back printer unit base as shown.

Poly-slider

Poly-slider

CD424



11.3.2 Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the back printer unit (see subsection 11.3.1).

Locking Tab

2. Remove the locking tab and then the gear.

Gear

CD414



3. Remove the spring, two Erings, two bearings and then the gear shaft.

Gear Shaft Spring Bearings (2)

E-rings (2)

CD415



4. Withdraw the shaft and remove the gear and four bearings.

Gear

5. Release the locking tabs and remove the gear.

Shaft Gear

Bearings (4)

CD416



6. Remove the E-ring, and then the one-way gear, ink ribbon drive shaft, two bearings and two spacers.

Ink Ribbon Drive Shaft Bearings (2) Spacer Spacer

One-way Gear E-ring

CD417



7. Remove the E-ring and remove the gear from the unit. E-ring

Gear

CD418



8. Remove the three screws and then the gear bracket. 9. Remove the gear shaft Gear Bracket

Screws (3)

CD419



10. Remove the E-ring, then the bearing, spacer, gear, bearing and two poly-sliders. Poly-slider Bearing Gear

Spacer Bearing E-ring

CD420



11. Remove the E-ring and then the idler gear. E-ring

Installation Install the gears in the reverse order of removal.

Idler Gear

CD421



11.3.3 Back Printer Set Sensor (D320) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the back printer unit (see subsection 11.3.1). 2. Release the locking tab and remove the gear from the roller shaft. 3. Move the roller shaft slightly toward the front.

Roller Shaft

Gear Locking Tab

CD1068



4. Remove the two screws and then the sensor. 5. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.

Screws (2)


Sensor (D320)

Connectors

CD422



11.3.4 Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the back printer unit (see subsection 11.3.1). Locking Tabs

2. Disconnect the sensor connector. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor.


Connector

Sensor (D302)

CD423



11.3.5 Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the back printer section guide plate (see subsection 11.2.8). 2. Remove the ink ribbon cassettes. 3. Open the two clamps.

Clamps

CD427



4. Remove the two screws and then the connector cover. Screws (2)

Connector Cover

CD426



5. Remove the screw and then the front head. Front Head

Screw

EZ073



6. Remove the two screws and then the front head bracket. Front Head Bracket

Screws (2)

EZ074



7. Remove the screw and then the rear head. Rear Head

Screw

EZ075



8. Remove the screw and then the JNE20 circuit board bracket.

Screw

JNE20 Circuit Board Bracket

EZ076



9. Disconnect the S301 and S302 connectors from the JNE20 circuit boards. S301

S302

EZ077



10. Disconnect the print harnesses form the circuit boards.

Print Harness (2)

EZ078



11. Remove two screws each and then the JNE20 circuit boards.

JNE20 Circuit Board

Installation Screws (2)

Install the circuit boards and heads in the reverse order of removal. After installation, perform the following adjustments. • Back printer head clearance adjustment (see subsection 11.3.6). • Clear “Back Printing Quantity” on the menu 45Q “Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data” screen (see subsection 5.6.22).

EZ079



11.3.6 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment 1. Remove the feed unit (see subsection 11.2.1). Platen

2. Remove the ink ribbon cassettes. 3. Align the jig with the platen and screw in its screw fully, and then loosen it one turn. NOTE: The screw should be loosened one turn, or correct clearance cannot be obtained.

Jig 1. Screw in fully. 2. Loosen one turn.

CD428



4. Loosen the three screws slightly. Screws (3)

5. Turn the cam clockwise to increase head clearance.

Cam

CD429



6. Insert the feeler gauge between the rear head and the platen and adjust the head clearance by turning the cam. Specified Clearance: 0.50 to 0.59mm

Screws (3)

Feeler Gauge

7. Tighten the three screws,

Cam

CD430



8. Loosen slightly the two screws securing the front head. 9. Turn the cam clockwise to increase clearance. 10. Insert the feeler gauge between the front head and the platen. 11. Adjust the clearance by turning the cam. Specified Clearance: 0.50 to 0.59mm 12. Tighten the two screws. 13. Recheck the clearances. 14. Remove the jig and reinstall the removed parts.

Screws (2)

Cam

Feeler Gauge

CD431



11.3.7 Platen Replacement Removal 1. Open the feed section upper door.

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the platen bracket.

Platen Bracket

CD443



3. Remove the two E-rings and then the springs and platens.

Installation Install the platens in the reverse order of removal. After installation, adjust the back printer head clearance (see subsection 11.3.6).

E-rings (2)

Platens (2)

Springs (2)

GD1078


12. REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS Parts Location 12.3.7

12.1 Cover and Electrical Parts 12.1.1 12.1.2 12.1.3

Top Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation Laser Unit Cooling Fan (F314) Replacement Printer Exhaust Fan 3/4 (F315/F316) Replacement 12.1.4 JML22 Circuit Board Replacement 12.1.5 AOM Driver Replacement

12.2 Laser Unit 12.2.1 12.2.2

Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation Anti-Dust Fan 1/2/3 (FAN1/FAN2/FAN3) Replacement

12.3 Sub-scanning Unit 12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3

Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305) Replacement 12.3.4 Sub-scanning Nip Home Position Sensor (D317) Replacement 12.3.5 Sensor Cover Removal/Reinstallation 12.3.6 Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Replacement

12.3.8 12.3.9 12.3.10 12.3.11 12.3.12 12.3.13 12.3.14

Pre-exposure Sensor LED (D304L) Replacement Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement Exposure Section Temperature Sensor (THA1) Replacement Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311) Replacement Front Feed Rubber Belt Replacement Rear Feed Rubber Belt Replacement Nip Belt Replacement Nip Roller Replacement

12.4 Registration Unit 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4 12.4.5 12.4.6 12.4.7 12.4.8

Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation Width Detecting Home Position Sensor (D315) Replacement Register Sensor LED (D303L) Replacement Register Sensor (D303P) Replacement Width Sensor (D314P) Replacement Width Detecting Bracket Removal/ Reinstallation Width Sensor LED (D314L) Replacement Width Detecting Guide Shaft Replacement


12.4.9 Width Detecting Belt Replacement 12.4.10 Register Nip Home Position Sensor (D316) Replacement 12.4.11 Register Nip Motor (M309) Replacement 12.4.12 Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement 12.4.13 Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310) Replacement 12.4.14 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement 12.4.15 Exit Nip Roller Replacement 12.4.16 Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation 12.4.17 Entrance Feed Roller Replacement 12.4.18 Exit Feed Roller Replacement 12.4.19 Roller Nip Cam Shaft Replacement 12.4.20 Roller Nip Cam Arm Replacement


Parts Location Sub-scanning Unit

Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301)

Locating Jig Sub-scanning Steel Belt Rear Feed Rubber Belt

Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305)

Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311) Nip Belt Front Feed Rubber Belt Nip Roller

Exposure Section Temperature Sensor (THA1) Sub-scanning Nip Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Sensor LED (D304L)

Home Position Sensor (D317)

CD817


Parts Location Roller Nip Cam Shaft Register Nip Motor (M309) Register Nip Home Entrance Feed Roller Position Sensor (D316) Entrance Nip Roller

Roller Nip Cam Arm Width Detecting Sensor (D314P)

Guide Plate Width Home Position Sensor (D315)

Width Detecting Sensor LED (D314L) Width Detecting Guide Shaft Register Drive Motor (M304) Register Unit Exit Feed Roller

Width Detecting Belt Exit Nip Roller Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310)

Register Sensor (D303P) Register Sensor LED (D303L) CD816


12.1 Cover and Electrical Parts 12.1.1 Top Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove:

Top Inner Cover

• Left cover (see subsection 11.1.1). • Table top cover (see subsection 7.2.2). 2. Loosen the seven screws, remove the eight screws and then the top inner cover.


Screws (7) (Loosen)

Screws (8) (Remove)

CD009


12.1 Cover and Electrical Parts

12.1.2 Laser Unit Cooling Fan (F314) Replacement Removal 1. Remove:

Screws (Loosen)

• Left cover (see subsection 11.1.1). • Printer rear cover (see subsection 18.2.1). 2. Loosen the two screws and remove one screw and then the fan (F313) bracket.

Fan Bracket

Screw (Remove)

CD177



3. Open the clamp. 4. Disconnect the DR1 and DR2 connectors from the motor driver. 5. Loosen the two screws and remove the screw and then the cover.

Screws (Loosen)

Connectors

Screws (Remove) Clamp

CD190



6. Disconnect all connectors from the LDD22 and LDA22 circuit boards.


LDD22 Circuit Board

LDA22 Circuit Board

7. Remove the four screws securing the circuit board bracket and open the clamp. 8. Remove the circuit board bracket by shifting it to the left.

Screws (4)

Clamp

CD475



9. Remove the four screws and then the fan/start switch bracket.

Fan/Sart Switch Bracket

Screws (4)

CD474



10. Remove the three screws and then the bracket by shifting it to the left.

Screws (3)

Bracket

CD470



11. Disconnect the F314 connector.

Screws (4)

12. Remove the four screws and then the fan duct.

Fan Duct

F314 Connector

CD471



13. Remove the three screws and then the duct cover. Screws (3)

Duct Cover

CD472



14. Remove the fan connector from the duct. Screws (3)

15. Remove the three screws and then the fan.

Installation Install the fan in the reverse order of removal. Connector

Fan (F314)

CD473



12.1.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 3/4 (F315/F316) Replacement Removal 1. Remove: Screws (11)

• Left cover (see subsection 11.1.1). • Table top cover (see subsection 7.2.2). 2. Remove the eleven screws and then the fan bracket.

Fan Bracket

CD465



3. Disconnect the F315 and F316 connectors.

F316 Connector

F315 Connector

CD466



4. Open the clamp and remove the fan connector from the bracket. Screws (2)

5. Remove the two screws and then the three louver and the fan. Fan Connector Bracket

Clamp

CD467



Installation Louvers (3)

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Point the arrow on the fan to the outside. • Install the louvers alternately as shown.

Arrow

CD468



12.1.4 JML22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the top inner cover (see subsection 12.1.1).

Grouding Wristband

2. Wear the grounding wristband on the left wrist and connect the other end to the exposure section frame.

Exposure Section Frame

CD483



3. Disconnect all connectors from the circuit board. 4. Remove the six screws and then the circuit board.

Screws (6)

JMC22 Circuit Board


CD553



12.1.5 AOM Driver Replacement Removal 1. Remove the top inner cover (see subsection 12.1.1).

AMO Connector

2. Disconnect the AOM connector and G and B cables from the driver.

B Cable G Cable

CD554



3. Remove the four screws and then the AOM driver.

Installation

Screws (4)

Install the AOM driver in the reverse order of removal.

AOM Driver

CD555


12.2 Laser Unit 12.2.1 Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the top inner cover (see subsection 12.1.1). 2. Disconnect the R, G and B cables.

B Cable

R Cable

G Cable

CD478


12.2 Laser Unit

3. Wear the wristband on the wrist and connect the other end to the exposure section frame.

Grouding Wristband

Exposure Section Frame

CD483


12.2 Laser Unit

4. Disconnect the JML1, JML2 and JML4 to JML9 connectors from the JML22 circuit board.

JML1

JML4 JML2

JML5 JML6

JML7

5. Open the clamp. JML8 JML9

Clamp

CD479


12.2 Laser Unit

6. Remove the short connectors from the clamp. Clamp

Short Connectors

CD480


12.2 Laser Unit

7. Connect the short connectors to the JML4 and JML7 connectors of the harness.

JML7

JML4

Short Connectors

CD481


12.2 Laser Unit

8. Disconnect the JROS connector. JROS Connector

CD482


12.2 Laser Unit

9. Loosen the one screw and remove the three screws securing the laser unit.

Screws (Loosen)

Screws (3) (Remove)

CD484


12.2 Laser Unit

10. Grasp the handles and remove the laser unit.

Handles (2) Laser Unit

CD485


12.2 Laser Unit

Reinstallation Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Align the two holes in the laser unit base with the locating pins on the frame. • After reinstallation, perform the following adjustments. 1)Menu 45H “Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam/Synchronous Rough Adjustment” (see subsection 5.6.15). 2)Menu 45J “Laser Beam Synchronous Fine Adjustment Print” (see subsection 5.6.16). 3)Menu 454 “G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup” (see subsection 5.6.4). 4)Menu 16 “Print Condition Upkeep”

Laser Unit

Pins (2)

Holes (2)

CD050


12.2 Laser Unit

12.2.2 Anti-Dust Fan 1/2/3 (FAN1/FAN2/FAN3) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the top inner cover (see subsection 12.1.1). 2. Remove the four screws and then the air duct.

Air Duct

Screws (4)

CD476


12.2 Laser Unit

3. Disconnect the fan connectors and remove them from the bracket. NOTE: Take care not to apply excessive force to the vibration isolation rubbers. Excessive force may shorten the rubber's service life.

Screws (2)

4. Remove the two screws and then the fan.

Fan Connector (3)

Arrow


Fan

NOTE: Install the fan with the arrow pointing down. CD477


12.3 Sub-scanning Unit 12.3.1 Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the laser unit (see subsection 12.2.1).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the air duct.

Air Duct

CD486


12.3 Sub-scanning Unit

3. Disconnect the JHU1 to JHU4 connectors. Screws (8)

Screws (2)

4. Remove the two screws securing the grounding wires. 5. Remove the eight screws and then the sub-scanning unit. NOTE: • Always remove the subscanning unit with the damper mount rubbers. • Remove the sub-scanning unit while moving it toward the scanner section to prevent damage to the two transparent resin plates on the register unit.

JHU1 JHU2 Grouding Wires (2)

JHU4

JHU3

CD487



Reinstallation Locating Jigs (2)

Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Insert the two locating jigs into the holes in the frame. Position the frame so that the locating jigs fall into the locating holes smoothly and tighten the sub-scanning unit mounting screws. Make sure the jigs can be removed easily. • Note the route of the grounding wires. • Reinstall the sub-scanning unit while moving it toward the scanner section to prevent damage to the two transparent resin plates on the register unit. • When the sub-scanning unit has been replaced, enter new unit data by following the steps below.

Frame Screws (8)

CD488



1) Record the data indicated in the label attached to the right side of the nip release knob.

Sub-scanning Nip Roller 1 Release: mm 1 Pressure: pulse 2 Pressure: mm

CD959



2) Proceed to the menu 45M “Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment” screen. 3) Enter the data recorded in the data boxes as shown below. Enter the “1 Release” value in the “Sub-scanning nip roller 1 release timing” box. Enter the “1 Pressure” value in the “Sub-scanning nip roller 1 pressure timing” box. Enter the “2 Pressure” value in the “Sub-scanning nip roller 2 pressure timing” box. 4) Click [OK].



12.3.2 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement Removal 1. Remove the sub-scanning unit (see subsection 12.3.1).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the belt cover.

Belt Cover

CD489



3. Loosen the screw securing the belt tensioner. 4. Move the belt tensioner toward the loosening direction and secure it with the screw.

Steel Belt

5. Wear gloves and remove the steel belt. NOTE: Wear clean gloves when handling the belt and pulley. Fingerprints on the belt and pulley may cause slippage or corrosion of the belt.

Belt Tensioner

Screw

CD490



Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Take care not to bend or damage the belt as this may shorten its service life. • Perform the belt alignment adjustment by following the steps below.

1. Loosen the screw securing the belt tensioner. 2. Rotate the pulley several turns and tighten the screw.

Screw

Pulley

CD491



3. Rotate the pulley 30 times or more and make sure the belt is in the center of the pulley.

Pulley

About 30 turns

CD492



4. If the belt is off the center of the pulley more than 0.5 mm, adjust it by following the steps below.

Screws (2)

Steel Belt Pulley

1) Loosen the two screws securing the pulley bracket. 2) Adjust the belt position by turning the adjusting screw. When the belt moves outside: Turn the screw clockwise. When the belt moves inside: Turn the screw counterclockwise. 3) Repeat steps 1 to 3. Adjustment Screw

4) If necessary, repeat steps 1 to 3.

CD493



12.3.3 Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the sub-scanning steel belt (see subsection 12.3.2). 2. Remove the two screws and then the motor cover.

Screws (2)

Motor Cover

CD494



3. Disconnect the M305 connector. 4. Remove the two nuts (5.5 mm) and then the motor.

M305 Connector

Installation Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. After installation, clear “Subscanning motor operation” on the menu 45Q “Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data” screen.

Motor (M305) Nuts (2)

CD495



12.3.4 Sub-scanning Nip Home Position Sensor (D317) Replacement Removal 1. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. 2. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor.

Installation Locking Tabs


Connector

Sensor (D317)

CD496



12.3.5 Sensor Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the sub-scanning unit (see subsection 12.3.1). 2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor cover.


Sensor Cover

Screws (2)

CD497



12.3.6 Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Replacement Removal Screw

1. Remove the sensor cover (see subsection 12.3.5).

Sensor (D304P) Cover

2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. 3. Remove the screw and then the cover, the sensor and the spacer.

Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Connector

Spacer

CD498



12.3.7 Pre-exposure Sensor LED (D304L) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the sub-scanning unit (see subsection 12.3.1).

Cover

2. Place the sub-scanning unit up side down. 3. Remove the two screws and then the cover.

Screws (2)

CD521



4. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. 5. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED and the spacer.

Connector

Screw Sensor LED (D304L)


Spacer

CD522



12.3.8 Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement Removal

Fan (F301)

1. Remove the pre-exposure sensor (see subsection 12.3.6). 2. Disconnect the F301 connector. 3. Remove the two screws and then the fan.

Installation Install the fan in the reverse order of removal. F301 Connector

Screws (2)

CD499



12.3.9 Exposure Section Temperature Sensor (THA1) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the sensor cover (see subsection 12.3.5).

Temperature Sensor (THA1)

2. Disconnect the THA connector. 3. Remove the two screws and then the temperature sensor.

Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. THA Connector

Screws (2)

CD501



12.3.10 Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the sub-scanning unit (see subsection 12.3.1). 2. Disconnect the motor connector.

Screws (2)

3. Remove the two screws and then the motor.

Installation Motor (M311)

Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Conector

CD502



12.3.11 Front Feed Rubber Belt Replacement Removal 1. Remove the sub-scanning unit (see subsection 12.3.1).

Front Feel Rubber Belt

2. Rotate the knob and remove the front feed rubber belt.

Installation Install the belt in the reverse order of removal.

Knob

CD504



12.3.12 Rear Feed Rubber Belt Replacement Removal 1. Remove the sub-scanning steel belt (see subsection 12.3.2).

Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)

2. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews (2 mm) and remove the pulley.

Pulley

CD505



3. Remove the rear feed rubber belt.


Rear Feed Rubber Belt

CD506



12.3.13 Nip Belt Replacement Removal 1. Remove the sub-scanning unit (see subsection 12.3.1). 2. Rotate the knob and remove the nip belt.


Knob

Nip Belt

CD507



12.3.14 Nip Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove: • Exposure section temperature sensor (see subsection 12.3.9). • Front feed rubber belt (see subsection 12.3.11). • Rear feed rubber belt (see subsection 12.3.12). • Nip belt (see subsection 12.3.13). 2. Remove the front E-ring and then the nip release knob, pulley, pin and bearing.

Bearing

Pin

Pulley Nip Release Knob E-ring

CD508



3. Remove the rear E-ring and then the bearing and the cam shaft.

Cam Shaft Bearing

E-ring

CD509



4. Remove the four nip springs. Inlet Side Springs (Stronger)(Black Marked) NOTE: The inlet side nip springs are shorter (stronger) and have black marks.

Springs (4)

CD510



5. Remove the front and rear screws.

Screws (2)

CD512



6. Remove the shaft, two collars, two arms and spring.

Screw

Collar

Spring

Arms Collars (2)

Shaft

CD511



7. Remove the four springs and then the two spring brackets.

Screws (4)

Spring Bracket (2)

CD513



8. Remove the two nip rollers. 9. Remove the two hex. socket head setscrews and then the two pulleys.


Installation Install the rollers in the reverse order of removal. Pulleys (2)

Nip Rollers

CD515


12.4 Registration Unit 12.4.1 Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the sub-scanning unit (see subsection 12.3.1).

JRE2

2. Disconnect the JRE1 and JRE2 connectors.

JRE1

CD523


12.4 Registration Unit

3. Remove the four screws and then the registration unit.

Reinstallation

Screws (4)

Reinstall the unit in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installation, perform menu 45S “Side Register Calibration” (see subsection 5.6.24).

CD524



12.4.2 Width Detecting Home Position Sensor (D315) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the registration unit (see subsection 12.4.1).

Connector

2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. 3. Remove the sensor by releasing the locking tabs.


Sensor (D315) Locking Tabs

CD525



12.4.3 Register Sensor LED (D303L) Replacement Removal Connector

1. Remove the registration unit (see subsection 12.4.1). 2. Place the unit up side down. 3. Remove the screw and then the sensor LED and spacer.

Screw

4. Disconnect the connector from the sensor LED.


Sensor LED (D303L)

Spacer

CD526



12.4.4 Register Sensor (D303P) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the registration unit (see subsection 12.4.1).

Screw

2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.

Cover

3. Remove the screw and then the cover, sensor and spacer.


Sensor (D303P) Spacer

CD527



12.4.5 Width Sensor (D314P) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the registration unit (see subsection 12.4.1). 2. Remove the screw and then the cover, sensor and spacer.

Screws Cover Sensor (D314P)

3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.


Spacer

CD528



12.4.6 Width Detecting Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the registration unit (see subsection 12.4.1).

Screw

2. Remove the screw securing the belt holder.

Belt Holder

CD546



3. Disconnect the M304, M310 and D303L connectors. 4. Open the seven clamps. 5. Remove the four screws and then the width detecting bracket.

Width Sensor Bracket D 303L

Clamps (7) M 304

M 310

Screws (4)

CD547



6. Disconnect the flat cable connector. Screws (2)

7. Remove the two screws securing the flat cable.

Connector


Flat Cable

CD548



12.4.7 Width Sensor LED (D314L) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the width detecting bracket (see subsection 12.4.6).

Connector


Installation Sencor LED

Install the sensor LED in the reverse order of removal. Screw

CD549



12.4.8 Width Detecting Guide Shaft Replacement Removal 1. Remove:

Screws (3)

• Width sensor (see subsection 12.4.5). • Width detecting bracket (see subsection 12.4.6). 2. Remove the three screws and then the motor cover.

Motor Cover

CD532



3. Remove the screw and then the knob from the roller shaft.

Guide Shaft

4. Remove the E-ring and then the gear. 5. Remove the four screws and then the guide shafts.

Installation Install the shafts in the reverse order of removal.

Gear Screws (4)

E-ring Knob

Screw

CD550



12.4.9 Width Detecting Belt Replacement Removal 1. Remove the width detecting bracket (see subsection 12.4.6).

Gear

2. Remove the E-ring and then the gear.

Belt

3. Remove the belt.


E-ring

CD556



12.4.10 Register Nip Home Position Sensor (D316) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the registration unit (see subsection 12.4.1).

Connector

2. Remove the sensor by releasing the locking tabs. 3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.

Loking Tabs


Sensor (D316)

CD537



12.4.11 Register Nip Motor (M309) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the registration unit (see subsection 12.4.1).

Motor Connector Cord Tie

2. Disconnect the motor connector and cut the cord tie. 3. Remove the two screws and then the motor.


Motor (M309)

Screws (2)

CD529



12.4.12 Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the registration unit (see subsection 12.4.1).

Screws (3)

2. Remove the three screws and then the motor cover.

Motor Cover

CD532




Installation Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. Connector Motor (M304)

Screws (2)

CD533



12.4.13 Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the registration unit (see subsection 12.4.1).

Screws (2)



Motor (M310) Motor Connector

CD535



12.4.14 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement Removal Nip Roller

1. Remove the registration unit (see subsection 12.4.1). 2. Remove the two nip springs. 3. Remove the two fulcrum screws and then the both arms. Nip Springs (2)

4. Remove the nip roller. Arm


Fulcrum Screws (2)

Arm

CD538



12.4.15 Exit Nip Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the width sensor (see subsection 12.4.5).

Screws (3)

2. Remove the three screws and then the motor cover.

Motor Cover

CD532



3. Remove the two nip springs. 4. Remove the two fulcrum screws and then the both arms.

Nip Springs (2)

Arm (2)

5. Remove the nip roller.


Fulcrum Screws (2)

CD539



12.4.16 Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation Removal] 1. Remove: • Entrance nip roller (see subsection 12.4.14). • Exit nip roller (see subsection 12.4.15). • Two front nip cam arms (see subsection 12.4.20). 2. Remove the screw and then the knob.

E-ring Gear Knob

3. Remove the E-ring and then the gear. 4. Remove the two screws securing the upper guide plate fulcrum shafts.

Screws

Screws (2) Nip Roller

CD540



5. Remove the upper guide plate and two fulcrum shafts.

Screws (2)

Upper Guide Plate

Fulcrum Shafts (2)

CD541



6. Remove the two screws and then the two fulcrum shafts, springs and guide plate.

Screws (2)

Reinstallation Reinstall the guide plates in the reverse order of removal.

Guide Plate Springs (2) Fulcrum Shofts (2)

CD542



12.4.17 Entrance Feed Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the rear E-ring, spacer, gear, two spacers and bearing.

Gear

E-ring

2. Remove the front E-ring and bearing from the shaft. 3. Remove the roller shaft.


Spacer

Bearing

Bearing

E-ring Spacers

Roller shaft

CD544



12.4.18 Exit Feed Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the rear E-ring and then the bearing.

E-ring

2. Remove the front E-ring and then the bearing. 3. Remove the roller shaft.

Installation

Bearing

Install the roller in the reverse order of removal.

Bearing Feed Roller Shaft

E-ring

CD545



12.4.19 Roller Nip Cam Shaft Replacement Removal 1. Remove the nip motor bracket (see subsection 12.4.11). 2. Remove the two E-rings and bearings and then the cam shaft.

Roller Nip Cam Shaft

Bearings (2)

Installation Install the cam shaft in the reverse order of removal.

E-rings (2)

CD551



12.4.20 Roller Nip Cam Arm Replacement Removal Arms

1. Remove the roller nip cam shaft (see subsection 12.4.19).

E-rings (2)

Arms

2. Remove two E-rings each, then the arms and spring.

E-rings (2)

Installation Install the arms in the reverse order of removal. Spring

Spring

CD552


13. PRINTER EXIT SECTION Parts Location 13.1 Printer Exit Unit 13.1.1 13.1.2 13.1.3 13.1.4 13.1.5 13.1.6 13.1.7 13.1.8 13.1.9 13.1.10 13.1.11 13.1.12 13.1.13

Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation Exit Section Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor (D321) Replacement Exit Section Up/Down Belt Motor (M314) Replacement Exit Drive Motor (M306)/Gear Replacement Stainless Steel Exit Guide Plate Removal/ Reinstallation Processor Entry Sensor (D305P) Replacement Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L) Replacement Up/Down Belt Motor Bracket Removal/ Reinstallation Up/Down Gear Replacement Up/Down Arm Removal/Reinstallation Lower Exit Belt Bracket Removal/ Reinstallation Upper Exit Belt Bracket Removal/ Reinstallation Upper Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement

13.1.14 13.1.15 13.1.16 13.1.17

Lower Pulley Drive Belt Replacement Lower Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement Lower Exit Belt Height Adjustment Up/Down Belt Height Adjustment


Parts Location Up/Down Arm Up/Down Belt (Height Adjustment)

Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor (D321)

Up/down Gears Up/Down Belt Motor (M314) Exit Drive Motor (M306)

Lower Pulley Drive Belt Lower Exit Belts/Pulleys (Height Adjustment)

Processor Entry Sensor (D305P)

Upper Exit Belts/Pulleys Printer Exit Unit

Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L)

CD819


13.1 Printer Exit Unit 13.1.1 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply OFF. 2. Open the magazine door and remove the front upper cover.

Front Upper Cover Magazine Door

CD006


13.1 Printer Exit Unit

3. Remove the screw and lower the exit belt section by releasing the hook.

Screw

4. Turn the lever to the left.

Lever

Exit Belt Section

CD557



5. Turn the gear counterclockwise to lower the up/down belt. Gear Up/Down Belt

CD1069



6. Remove the two screws and then the connector cover. Connector Cover

Screws (2)

CD558



7. Disconnect the JSY1 and JSY2 connectors. JSY1

Screw

8. Remove the screw and then the printer exit unit.


Printer Exit Unit

JSY2

CD559



When the printer exit unit has been replaced, enter new unit data by following the steps below. 1) Record the data in the label attached to the front of the printer exit unit.

Exit Up/Down Belt Downward fine adjustment value: pulse Upward fine adjustment value: pulse

CD960



2) Proceed to the menu 45M “Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment” screen. 3) Enter the data recorded as shown below. Enter the “Downward fine adjustment value” in the “Exit section up/down belt downward fine-adj.” box. Enter the “Upward fine adjustment value in the “Exit section up/dpwn belt upward fine-adj.” box. 4) Click [OK].



13.1.2 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor (D321) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the printer exit unit (see subsection 13.1.1). 2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor.

Installation Connector

Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. After installation, perform the up/down belt height adjustment

Sensor (D321)

(see subsection 13.1.17)

CD560



13.1.3 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Motor (M314) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the printer exit unit (see subsection 13.1.1).

Screws

2. Disconnect the motor connector and open the clamp. 3. Using a long shank screwdriver, remove the two screws and then the motor.

Connector

Clamp

Motor (M314)

CD561



4. Remove the E-ring and then the gear from the motor.

Installation

Motor (M314)

Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring Gear

CD562



13.1.4 Exit Drive Motor (M306)/Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the printer exit unit (see subsection 13.1.1). 2. Disconnect the motor connector and open the clamp.

Motor Connector Clamp

Motor Bracket

3. Remove the four screws and then the motor bracket.

Screws (4)

CD563



4. Open the clamp and remove the connector from the bracket.

E-ring Gear

5. Remove the two screws and then the motor from the bracket.

Screws (2)

6. Remove the E-ring and then the gear from the motor.

Connector Clamp Motor (M306)

CD564



7. Remove the E-ring and then the three gears.

Installation Install the motor and gears in the reverse order of removal.

Gears (3)

E-rings (2)

CD565



13.1.5 Stainless Steel Exit Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the printer exit unit (see subsection 13.1.1).

Upper Exit Guide Plate

2. Remove the two screws and then the upper exit guide plate. 3. Remove the two screws and then the lower exit guide plate.

Reinstallation Reinstall the guide plates in the reverse order of removal.

Screws (2) Lower Exit Guide Plate

Screws (2)

CD566



13.1.6 Processor Entry Sensor (D305P) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the stainless exit guide plates (see subsection 13.1.5).

Screw

2. Disconnect the connector and open the clamp. 3. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket.

Sensor Bracket Clamp Connector

CD1070



4. Remove the countersunk head screw and then the sensor.

Installation Install the sensor/LED in the reverse order of removal.

Countersunk Flat Head Screw Sensor (D305P)

CD1071



13.1.7 Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the stainless exit guide plates (see subsection 13.1.5).

Sensor LED Bracket

2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor LED bracket.

Screws (2)

CD1072



3. Disconnect the sensor connector. 4. Remove the countersunk flat head screw and then the sensor LED.

Installation Countersunk Flat Head Screw

Install the sensor LED in the reverse order of removal.

Connector Sensor LED (D305L)

CD1073



13.1.8 Up/Down Belt Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the printer exit unit (see subsection 13.1.1).

Up/Down Shaft

2. Remove the spring. 3. Remove the E-ring from the up/down shaft and then the bearing. Spring

Bearing

E-ring

CD568



4. Open the two clamps. 5. Disconnect the M314 and D321 connectors.

Screws (3)

6. Remove the three screws and then the motor bracket.


D321

Clamps (2) M314

CD569



13.1.9 Up/Down Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the up/down belt motor bracket (see subsection 13.1.8)

Gear Bracket Screws (2)

E-ring Bearing

2. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing. 3. Remove the two screws and then the gear bracket. 4. Remove the E-ring securing the gear. E-ring

Idler Gear

CD570



5. Remove the E-ring and then the sensor plate. 6. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing, cam/gear shaft and idler gear.

Installation

E-ring Sensor Plate

Bearing

Install the gears in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring

Gear/Cam Shaft

CD571



13.1.10 Up/Down Arm Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the printer exit unit (see subsection 13.1.1).

E-rings (2) Spring

2. Remove the spring. 3. Remove the screw securing the arm to the link. 4. Remove the two E-rings and then the up/down arm.

Screw Up/Down Arm

CD572



5. Remove the E-ring and shat and pulley.

Reinstallation Reinstall the arm in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring

Pulley Shaft

CD573



13.1.11 Lower Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the stainless guide plates (see subsection 13.1.5).

Upper Bracket Deltight Screws

2. Remove the two deltight and one double-sems screws and then the upper bracket.

Double Sems Screw

CD574



3. Remove the two springs and open the three harness clamps. Clamps (3) Springs (2)

CD588



4. Open the clamp and disconnect the D305P connector.

Exit Side Upper Bracket

D305P Connector

5. Remove the two screws and then the exit side upper bracket.

Clamp Screws (2)

CD586



6. Remove the lower spring.

Spring

CD587





8. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews and remove the boss. 9. Remove the two E-rings and bearings.

Boss

Bearings (2) E-ring Gear

CD585



10. Open the six clamps and disconnect the two motor connectors and sensor connector.

Clamps (6)

Motor Connector

Motor Connector

Sensor Connector

CD1074



11. Remove the two screws and then the two nip release shafts. 12. Remove the lower exit belt bracket.

Screws (2) Nip Release Shafts (2)

CD1075



Reinstallation Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Insert a 150mm stainless steel ruler (T=0.5mm) between the E-ring and the bearing and tighten the two hex. socket head setscrews while pressing the lower belt drive shaft and the boss to remove bearing play. • After reinstallation, adjust lower exit belt height (see subsection 13.1.16).

150mm Ruler (T=Approx. 0.5mm)

E-ring

Boss Hex. Socket Head Setscrew

Bearing



13.1.12 Upper Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the lower exit belt bracket (see subsection 13.1.11).

Bearings (2)

2. Remove the two E-rings. Shift the bearing and remove the upper exit belt bracket.


E-rings (2)

Upper Exit Belt Bracket

CD589



13.1.13 Upper Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement Removal 1. Remove the upper exit belt bracket (see subsection 13.1.11). 2. Remove the three E-rings and then the three gears.

Spring

Bearing

3. Remove the spring, gear bracket and bearing.

Gear Bracket

Gears (3) E-rings (3)

CD575



4. Remove the E-ring from the opposite side and then the bearing and the exit pulley shaft. 5. Remove the two small bearings from the pulley shaft.

E-ring Bearings (4)

Exit Pulley Shaft Small Bearings (2)

CD576



6. Remove the four E-rings, four bearings and then the two entrance pulley shafts.

E-rings (4)

Bearings (4)

Entrance Pulley Shafts (2)

CD577



7. Remove the five screws and then the entrance side bracket.

Entrance Side Bracket

8. Remove the three belts.

Screws (5)

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Install the belts so that their manufacturer mark surface faces the inside.

Belts

CD578



13.1.14 Lower Pulley Drive Belt Replacement Removal 1. Remove the lower exit belt bracket (see subsection 13.1.11). 2. Remove the gear and pin. 3. Remove the belt, pulley and pin. Belt Pin Pulley Pin Gear

CD579



4. Remove the entrance side belt.

Installation Install the belts in the reverse order of removal.

Entrance Side Belt

CD580



13.1.15 Lower Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement Removal 1. Remove the lower pulley drive belts (see subsection 13.1.14).

Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2) Entry Belts (6)

Pully Shaft

2. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews and remove the boss. 3. Remove the three E-rings, bearings and two spring brackets. 4. Remove the two pulley belts and entry belts.

E-rings (3)

Spring Brackets (2) Bearings (4)

CD581



5. Remove the E-rings, spacers, pulleys, poly-sliders and pins from the shaft. Poly-sliders (5)

E-rings (2) Spacers (2)

Shaft Short Pulleys (4) Long Pulleys (2) Rubber Spacers (5)

Pins (5)

CD582



6. Remove the E-ring, two bearings and then the exit side lower pulley shaft.

E-rings (2)

Bearings (2)

7. Remove the belts. 8. Disassemble the pulley shaft. Poly-sliders (10)

Marking Surface

Long Pulleyrs (2) Short Pulleys (4) Bearings (12) Rollers with One-way Clutch (5)

CD583



9. Remove the E-ring, pulley, bearing and then the entrance side pulley shaft.

Screw Bearing

10. Remove the screw and then the gear from the pulley shaft.

Knob

11. Remove the E-ring and bearing.

Pulley

E-ring

E-ring

Entrance Side Pulley Shaft

CD584



Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Install the pulleys (black) with one-way clutch to the exit side lower pulley shaft so that their making surfaces face toward the front (short end) side. • Insert a sheet of print paper (approximately 0.2 mm) between the E-ring and the bearing as shown and tighten the two hex. socket head setscrews while pressing the shaft and boss to remove bearing play.



13.1.16 Lower Exit Belt Height Adjustment 1. Remove the printer exit unit (see subsection 13.1.1). 2. Place the printer exit unit on a level surface. 3. Measure the lower exit belt front and rear height from the floor as shown. Specified height: 97.2±0.5 mm

97.2 ± 0.5 mm

CD1077



4. If the height exceeds the limit, adjust by following the steps below. 1) Loosen the two screws. 2) Adjust the height by turning the adjusting cam. 3) Tighten the two screws. 5. Reinstall the printer exit unit.

Adjusting Cam

Screws (2)

CD1078



13.1.17 Up/Down Belt Height Adjustment 1. Remove the front upper cover and turn ON the interlock switch. 2. Proceed to the menu 45A “Printer I/O Check” screen.

SM054



3. Click [Home] of “M314 Exit up/down belt motor”. 4. Measure the clearance between the up/down belt and the lower exit belt.

Paper bent 25mm at a right angle

Specified Clearance: 25±2 mm

25 ± 2 mm

CD1079-1



5. Click [Descent] of “M314 Exit up/down belt motor”. 6. Measure the clearance between the up/down belt and the lower exit belt. Specified Clearance: 3±0.5 mm

3 ± 0.5 mm Paper bent 3mm at a right angle

CD1079-2



7. If the clearance exceeds the limit, adjust by following the steps below. 1) Proceed to the menu 45M “Printer Mechanism Fine Adjustment” screen. 2) Change the fine adjustment value in “Exit section up/ down belt downward fine adjustment” box. Increase the value to narrow the clearance Change the fine adjustment value in “Exit section up/ down belt upward fine adjustment” box. Increase the value to widen the clearance 8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 if necessary.

SM066


14. PROCESSOR SECTION Parts Location 14.1 Crossover Racks 14.1.1

Crossover Rack No.1 Disassembly/ Reassembly 14.1.2 Crossover Racks No.2 to No.5 Disassembly/ Reassembly 14.1.3 Crossover Rack No.6 Disassembly/ Reassembly

14.2 Processing Racks 14.2.1 14.2.2 14.2.3 14.2.4

Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly Roller Replacement Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation Rack Center Guide Replacement

14.3 Processor Drive System 14.3.1 14.3.2 14.3.3 14.3.4 14.3.5

Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement Processor Drive Bracket Removal/ Reinstallation Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement

14.3.6 14.3.7 14.3.8

Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement Dryer Drive Gear Replacement Processor Drive Chain Replacement


Parts Location Dryer Drive Gears Processor Drive Chain No.1 Crossover Racks No.6 Crossover Rack

No.2 to No.5 Crossover Racks

Processor Drive Idler Sprocket

Processing Racks Upper Guide Rollers Rack Drive Shaft Rack Center Guides

Chain Tensioner

Motor Driver Processor Drive Bracket Drive Sprocket Drive Gear Processor Drive Motor (M401) CD820


14.1 Crossover Racks 14.1.1 Crossover Rack No.1 Disassembly/Reassembly Disassembly 1. Remove crossover rack No.1 by loosening the two screws. Bearings (4)

2. Remove the auto washing nozzle.

Coil Springs (2)

3. Remove the two coil springs, four C-rings ,gears and bearings.

Gears (4) C-rings (4)

CD221


14.1 Crossover Racks

4. Remove the roller by pulling the roller shaft out. 5. Remove the two coil springs, four C-rings and bearings from the roller shafts.

Reassembly Reassemble the rack in the reverse order of disassembly. NOTE: Remove the P1 solution or water from the entrance side two rollers on the No.1 crossover rack by wiping them with a dry cloth. The moist rollers on the No.1 crossover rack may cause uneven print.

Roller Shafts (4) Rollers (4) Bearings (4) Coil Springs (2) C-rings (4)

CD222



14.1.2 Crossover Racks No.2 to No.5 Disassembly/Reassembly Disassembly 1. Remove the crossover rack.

C-rings (4)

Coil Springs (2)

2. Remove the auto washing nozzle. 3. Remove the two coil springs, four C-rings and bearings. 4. Remove the rollers by pulling the roller shaft out.

Reassembly Reassemble the racks in the reverse order of disassembly.

Bearings (4)

9751



14.1.3 Crossover Rack No.6 Disassembly/Reassembly Disassembly 1. Remove crossover rack No.6.

Coil Spring Gears (2)

2. Remove the auto washing nozzle. 3. Remove the two C-rings, two gears, coil spring, and two bearings for the exit roller. 4. Remove the C-ring and then the idler gear.

C-rings (2) C-ring Idler Gear

CD223



5. Remove the exit roller by pulling the roller shaft out.

Roller Shafts (4) Rollers (4)

6. Remove the two coil springs, four C-rings and bearings. 7. Remove the four rollers by pulling the roller shafts out.

Exit Roller Shaft Bearings (8)

Reassembly Reassemble the rack in the reverse order of disassembly. C-rings (8)

Exit Rollers C-rings

Bearings (2) Coil Spring

CD224


14.2 Processing Racks 14.2.1 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly Disassembly 1. Remove the screw, two washers, bearing, gear, pin, bearing washer and sprocket.

Sprocket Screw

2. Remove the gear, washer and bearing by removing the screws.

Gear

Washers (2)

Screw

9755


14.2 Processing Racks

3. Remove the drive bearing by removing the two tapping screws.

Drive Bearing

Tapping Screws (2)

9756



4. Remove the E-ring, washer and bearing from the crossover rack drive shaft.

Bearing

Washer

E-ring

9757



5. Remove the gear pin by pulling the shaft slightly, and remove the two gears, two bearings, and screw by pulling the shaft out.

Pin

Gear

Bearing

9758



6. Remove the upper guide/ handle by removing the four tapping screws. Upper Guide/Handle

Tapping Screws (4)

9759



7. P1 rack: Remove the gear, pin, bearing and roller by removing the C-ring and pulling the shaft out.

Entrance Roller (P1 only) Gear

C-ring

9760



Reassembly Reassembly is essentially in the reverse order of disassembly.

Shaft

NOTE: Align the D-flats of the shaft and the washer.

Washer

999d



14.2.2 Roller Replacement Removal 1. Loosen the locking tabs and remove the guides from both sides.

Locking Tab

Guide

9761



2. Remove the screw, Dwasher and plain washer and then the spiral gear and plain washer.

Screw D-washer Gear

Plain Washer

Plain Washer

CD1097



3. Remove the rack drive shaft (see subsection 14.2.3). 4. Remove the coil spring, Crings, gears and bearings.

Rack Drive Shaft

Bearings

C-rings

Gear

Coil Springs

CD1098



5. Remove the rollers by pulling the shaft out from the opposite side. C-rings (4)

Coil Springs (2)

6. Remove the two coil springs, four C-rings and bearings from the lower turn roller shafts.

Bearings (4)

9763



7. Remove the rollers by pulling the shafts out from the opposite side. Bearing

C-ring

8. Remove the roller by removing the C-ring, gear and bearing.

Gear

9764



Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal, noting the following.

Coil Spring Marks

1. Install shorter coil springs on the entrance side of the lower turn rollers and longer ones on the exit side. Wrong installation results in paper jamming.

Entrance Side

Exit Side

999e



Black Soft Roller (ø20mm) Gray Soft Roller (ø20mm) Black Hard Roller (ø20mm) Gray Soft Roller (ø20mm) White Soft Roller (ø20mm) Black Soft Roller (ø20mm) Gray Hard Roller (ø20mm) Black Hard Roller (ø15mm) Black Soft Roller (ø30mm) Black Hard Roller (ø30mm)

CD225



14.2.3 Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the crossover rack drive shaft (see steps 1 to 5 in subsection 14.2.1).

Bearing

2. Remove the E-ring, bearing and washer from the lower end of the shaft.

E-ring

9766



3. Shift the middle bearing to the lower side and remove the shaft.

Reinstallation

Shaft

Reinstall the shaft in the reverse order of removal.

Middle Bearing (P1, P2 only)

9767



14.2.4 Rack Center Guide Replacement Removal 1. Loosen the locking tabs and remove the guides.

Locking Tab

Guide

9761



2. Remove the guide by removing the two screws.

Installation

Screws (2)

Install the new guide in the reverse order of removal.

Guide

9765


14.3 Processor Drive System 14.3.1 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the replenisher pump section cover (see subsection 16.2.1).

Screws (4)

Motor Bracket

2. Disconnect the motor connector. 3. Remove the four screws and then the motor bracket.

Installation Install the motor bracket in the reverse order of removal.

Motor Connector

CD265


14.3 Processor Drive System

14.3.2 Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement Removal Collar

1. Remove the processor drive motor bracket (see subsection 14.3.1). 2. Loosen the hex. socket head bolt (3 mm) and remove the collar and gear.

Gear

Hex. Socket Head Bolt (3mm)

Boss

3. Loosen the two hex socket head setscrews (2 mm) and remove the boss and key. Flat Key

CD266



4. Open the clamp. 5. Remove the four hex, socket head bolts (3 mm) and then the motor from the bracket.

Hex. Socket Head Bolts (3mm) (4)


Motor (M401) Clamp

CD267



14.3.3 Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement Removal 1. Remove the replenisher pump section cover (see subsection 16.2.1).

Screw (Remove)

Motor Driver Bracket

2. Disconnect the three connectors from the motor driver. 3. Loosen the screw and remove the screw and then the motor driver bracket.

Connectors (3)

Screw (Loosen)

CD278



4. Remove the two screws and then the motor driver from the bracket. Motor Driver

Installation Install the motor driver in the reverse order of removal.

Scews (2)

CD277



14.3.4 Processor Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove:

Clamps (4)

• Circulation pump section cover (see subsection 15.2.1). • Replenisher pump bracket (see subsection 16.2.2). • Processor drive motor bracket (see subsection 14.3.1). • Processor drive motor driver (see subsection 14.3.3). 2. Open the four clamps and remove the PS2 and PS3 circulation hoses from the clamps.

PS2 Circulation Hose

PS3 Circulation Hose

CD269



3. Loosen the two screws and remove the two screws and then the drive bracket from the replenisher pump bracket side.

Screws (2) (Loosen)


Drive Bracket

Screws (2) (Remove)

CD268



14.3.5 Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement Removal 1. Remove the processor drive bracket (see subsection 14.3.4).

Cover Screws (2)

2. Remove the two screws and then the cover.

CD270



3. Loosen the hex. socket head bolt (3 mm) and remove the collar and gear.

Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2mm) (2)

4. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews (2 mm) and remove the boss and key. 5. Remove the E-ring.

Boss Flat Key

Gear

Hex. Socket Head Bolt (3mm) Collar

CD271



6. Remove the two screws and lock washers and then the sprocket.

Hex. Socket Head Screws (2)

7. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews and remove the boss. 8. Remove the E-ring.

Screws (2) Flat Key Boss Lock Washers (2)

Sprocket

CD272



9. Remove the two bearings and shaft. Shaft

Bearings (2)

CD273



10. Remove the E-ring and then the shaft, idler sprocket, two bearings and spacer. Bearings (2) Idler Sprocket

Shaft

Spacer

E-ring

CD274



11. Remove the E-ring, spring and tensioner.

Tensioner

E-ring

Spring

CD275



12. Remove the E-ring and then the two bearings and sprocket.


E-ring Bearings (2)

Sprocket

NOTE: Note the position of the setscrews.

CD276



14.3.6 Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement Removal 1. Remove:

Screw (Loosen)

• Replenisher pump section cover (see subsection 16.2.1). • Processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1). 2. Loosen the screw and remove the screw securing the sprocket bracket.

Screw (Remove)

CD279



3. Disengage the chain from the sprocket and remove the sprocket bracket. Sprocket Bracket

Chain

CD281



4. Remove the E-ring and then the two bearings, sprocket and poly-slider.

E-ring Bearings (2)

Installation Sprocket

Install the sprocket in the reverse order of removal. Poly-slider

CD280



14.3.7 Dryer Drive Gear Replacement Removal 1. Open the circuit board bracket (see subsection 15.3.2).

Circuit Board Protection Cover

2. Remove the two screws and then the circuit board protection cover.

Screws

CD262



3. Remove the screw and then the hose protector.

Gear Bracket

4. Remove the three screws and then the gear bracket. Screw

Screws (3) Hose Protector

CD263



5. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing, gear, bearing and spacer. 6. Remove the E-ring and then the bearing, sprocket/gear, bearing and spacer.

Spacer Bearing Gear Bearing E-ring

Installation Install the gear in the reverse order of removal.

Spacer Bearing Sprocket/Gear Bearing E-ring

CD264



14.3.8 Processor Drive Chain Replacement 1. Open the circuit board bracket (see subsection 15.3.2). Circuit Board Protection Cover

2. Remove all processing racks. 3. Remove the two screws and then the circuit board protection cover.

Screws

CD262



4. Remove the clip and then the master link from the drive chain. 5. Connect new chain to the old chain using the master link. Old Chain

New Chain Master Link

Clip

CD282



6. Install the new chain by using the old chain as a guide. 7. Remove the old chain from the new chain by removing the master link. 8. Connect the ends of the new chain using the master link and clip. NOTE: Face the closed end of the clip to the rotating direction.

Old Chain

New Chain

9. Reinstall the removed parts.

CD283


15. PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM Parts Location

15.3 Waste Solution System 15.3.1

15.1 Sub-tanks 15.1.1

Processing Tank Temperature Sensor Replacement 15.1.2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement

15.2 Processing Tank Heater/ Circulation Pump Section 15.2.1 15.2.2 15.2.3 15.2.4 15.2.5 15.2.6 15.2.7 15.2.8

Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/ Reinstallation Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403) Replacement Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/ F402) Replacement Safety Thermostat Replacement Processing Tank Heater Replacement Circulation Pump Replacement Hose Connection

15.3.2 15.3.3 15.3.4 15.3.5

Processor Rear Cover Removal/ Reinstallation Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement Waste Solution Tank Replacement Waste Solution Hose Replacement

15.4 Processing Solution Replacement 15.4.1 15.4.2 15.4.3 15.4.4 15.4.5 15.4.6

Processing Chemical Handling Precautions Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution Draining Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Reinstallation Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 10L kit Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 4.2L kit


Parts Location Circulation Filters Processing Tank Temperature Sensors (TS401 to TS404)

Sub-tanks P1 P2 PS1 PS2

Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401)

Solution Level Sensors (FS401 to FS406)

PS3 PS4

Waste Solution Tank Safety Thermostat (D401 to D404)

Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415)

H 401

H 402

PU 401 PU 402

Circulation Pumps (PU401 to PU406)

Waste Hose

H 403

PU 403 PU 404

H 404

Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403)

PU 405 PU 406

Processing Tank Heaters (H401 to H404) Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F402) CD284


15.1 Sub-tanks 15.1.1 Processing Tank Temperature Sensor Replacement Sensor TS401 TS402 TS403 TS404

Tank P1 P2 PS2 PS4

Removal 1. Remove the front upper connector cover (see subsection 15.2.2). 2. Disconnect the sensor connector.

Sensor Connector

CD345


15.1 Sub-tanks

3. Remove the replenisher nozzle hose.

Screw Sensor

4. Remove the harness from the clamp. 5. Remove the screw and then the sensor.


Clamp

Replenisher Nozzle Hose

CD346


15.1 Sub-tanks

15.1.2 Solution Level Sensor Replacement Sensor FS401 FS402 FS403 FS404 FS405 FS406

Tank P1 P2 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4

Removal 1. Remove the front upper connector cover (see subsection 15.2.2). 2. Disconnect the sensor connector.

Sensor Connector

CD347


15.1 Sub-tanks

3. Remove the replenisher nozzle hose.

Screw Sensor

4. Remove the harness from the clamp. 5. Remove the screw and then the sensor.


Clamp

Replenisher Nozzle Hose

CD348


15.2 Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Section 15.2.1 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply.

PSR Supply Port Cover

2. Open the PSR supply port cover and remove the circulation filter section cover.

Circulation Filter Section Cover

CD866


15.2 Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Section

3. Remove the air filter holder from the cover.

Air Filter Holder

CD023



4. Remove the five screws and then the circulation filter section cover.

Circulation Pump Section Cover


Screws (5)

CD867



15.2.2 Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the circulation pump section cover (see subsection 15.2.1). 2. Loosen the two screws and remove the front upper connector cover.

Screws (2)

Front Upper Connector Cover

CD342



3. Loosen the two screws and remove the front lower connector cover.

Reinstallation Reinstall the covers in the reverse order of removal.

Front Lower Connector Cover Screws (2)

CD339



15.2.3 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403) Replacement Removal 1. Remove: • Replenisher pump section cover (see subsection 16.2.1). • Front lower connector cover (see subsection 15.2.2). 2. Disconnect the F403 connector.

F403 Connector

CD340



3. Remove the two screws and then the fan guard and the fan.

Fan (F403)

Installation Fan Guard

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan inward.

Screws (2) Inside Arrow

CD341



15.2.4 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the front upper and lower connector covers (see subsection 15.2.2).

D401

D402

D403 D404

2. Open the two harness clamps. 3. Disconnect the D401 to D404 connectors and remove their harnesses from the bosses on the fans. 4. Disconnect the F401 and F402 connectors.

F401

F402

Clamps (2)

Boss

CD343




Fan Guard

Fan (F401)

Fan (F402)


Screws (2)

NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan inward.

Screws (2) Fan Guard

Arrow

CD344



15.2.5 Safety Thermostat Replacement Safety Thermostat D401 D402 D403 D404

Tank P1 P2 PS1/2 PS3/4

Safety Thermostat (D401 to D404)

Removal 1. Remove the circulation pump section cover (see subsection 15.2.1). 2. Remove the rubber cover. 3. Disconnect the wires from the safety thermostat. 4. Remove the two screws and then the safety thermostat.

Installation Install the safety thermostat in the reverse order of removal.

Wires (2)

Rubber Cover

Screws (2)

CD350



15.2.6 Processing Tank Heater Replacement Heater H401 H402 H403 H404

Tank P1 P2 PS1/2 PS3/4

Removal 1. Remove the front lower connector cover (see subsection 15.2.2). 2. H402/H403: Remove the screw and then the cover bracket.

Cover Bracket

Screw

CD351



3. Disconnect the heater connector.

Heater Connector

CD352



Hoses (2)

4. Remove the rubber cover, two screws and then the safety thermostat from the heater. 5. Pinch the heater inlet and outlet hoses with the two pinchcocks.

Pinchcocks (2)

Screws (2) Heater

Screws (2)

6. Loosen the hose clamps and disconnect the hoses from the heater.

Safety Thermostat

7. Remove the two screws and then the heater.

Clamps (2) CD353



Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8). • After installation, clear “Heater on time” in the menu 46D “Clearing Selected Processor Operation Data” screen (see subsection 5.7.12).



15.2.7 Circulation Pump Replacement Circulation Pump PU401 PU402 PU403 PU404 PU405 PU406

Tank P1 P2 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4

Screw (Loosen)

Screw (Remove)

Removal 1. Remove the front lower connector cover (see subsection 15.2.2). 2. Disconnect the pump connector. 3. Loosen the one screw, remove the one screw and then the connector bracket.

Connector Bracket

Pump Connector

CD354



4. Remove the two screws and then the pump from the bracket.

Screws (2)

Pump

CD355



5. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the two pinchcocks.

Hoses (2)

6. Loosen the hose clamps, disconnect the hoses from the pump. Pinchcocks (2)

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8).

Hose Clamps (2)

Pump

CD356



15.2.8 Hose Connection 1. Connect the hose securely to connecting opening as far as it will go. 2. Inspect the hose clamps, and replace them if the docking portion is damaged.

Docking Portion

Hose Clamp

0681



3. Install each hose clamp with its inside edge towards the end of the connection as shown.

5S074



4. Check that the hose clamps are not twisted when they are installed. Hold each end of the clamp with a pair of pliers and tighten securely. 5. After operating the machine for 30 minutes, check if there is no leakage of solution from the hose connections.

0680


15.3 Waste Solution System 15.3.1 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply.

Screws (6)

2. Remove the six screws and then the processor rear top cover.

Processor Rear Top Cover

CD025


15.3 Waste Solution System

3. Remove the seven screws and then the processor rear cover.

Reinstallation Screws (7)


Processor Rear Cover

CD865



15.3.2 Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing Bracket Opening 1. Remove the processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1). 2. Remove the four screws and open the circuit board bracket.

Bracket Closing Close the bracket in the reverse order of opening.

Screws (4)


CD261



15.3.3 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement Removal 1. Open the circuit board bracket (see subsection 15.3.2).

Connector Cover

2. Loosen the two screws and remove the connector cover.

Screws (2)

CD306



3. Disconnect the FS415 connector and open the clamp.

FS415

4. Remove the waste solution tank cap. Waste Solution Tank Cap

Clamp

CD330



5. Remove the two screws and then the sensor from the cap.


Screws (2) Sensor (FS415)

Cap

CD331



15.3.4 Waste Solution Tank Replacement Removal 1. Collect the waste solution into the waste solution recovery tank.

Chain Protection Cover

2. Move the P1R tank (see subsection 16.2.11 steps 1 to 5). 3. Remove the two screws and then the chain protection cover.

Screws

CD262



4. Loosen the two screws and remove the connector cover. Connector Cover

Screws (2)

CD306



5. Disconnect the FS415 connector and open the clamp.

FS415

Clamp

CD328



6. Loosen the five hose clamps and disconnect the hoses from the tank. Hose Clamps (5)

7. Remove the waste solution tank.

Hoses (5)


Waste Solution Tank

CD329



15.3.5 Waste Solution Hose Replacement Removal 1. Collect the waste solution. 2. Remove the replenisher pump section cover (see subsection 16.2.1).

Screws (2)

3. Remove the two screws and then the hose box. 4. Remove the two screws and then the hose bracket.

Screws (2)

Hose Box

Hose Bracket

CD358



5. Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the drain hose from the waste solution hose.

Drain Hose


Clamp

Waste Solution Hose

CD359


15.4 Processing Solution Replacement 15.4.1 Processing Chemical Handling Precautions *Processing chemicals should be handled in accordance with the precautions indicated on the boxes and labels of the respective chemicals. !

CAUTION Protective Gloves

Safety Goggles

• Always wear protective gloves and safety goggles when handling chemicals with the above indications. This is recommended even for chemicals without these indications. For greater protection, the use of a protective mask and apron is also recommended. • Wash hands thoroughly after handling processing chemicals or solutions.

• Any spilled chemicals should be wiped up immediately. • Use caution when mixing chemicals as certain mixtures may produce toxic gases. • If you get any chemical on your skin or in your eyes, immediately flush the affected part with a great amount of water. • If you swallow any chemical or get any in your eyes, seek medical attention immediately and show the physician the information printed on the box or label of the chemical(s) involved.


15.4 Processing Solution Replacement • In some countries, chemicals carrying a poison label are required by law to be stored under lock and key. You are responsible for ascertaining and complying with the regulations concerning the handling of poisonous substances that apply in your country. • Store chemicals in a safe place out of reach of children. • Waste solutions should be disposed of in accordance with the ordinances governing the handling of industrial waste products in your locale. The P1R chemical in the CP-48S replenisher cartridge and the Component A of the P1 start-up chemical fall into the category of industrial waste. Should you have any questions concerning these chemicals, consult your service representative. *Special note should be taken regarding the following properties of the CP-48S chemicals. !

•

•

•

•

CAUTION The P1R chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P1 Start-up Chemical These components contain P-phenylenediamine and may thus cause skin and eye irritation if improperly handled. They may be injurious to the health if swallowed. The P2RA Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component A of the P2 Start-up Chemical These components cause oxidation in metals. They may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-based bleach (hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1R or N1RA). The P2RB Chemical of the Replenisher Cartridge PC and Component B of the P2 Start-up Chemical These components may produce harmful ammonia gas if mixed with a chlorine-based bleach (hypochlorite) or an alkaline (P1R or N1RA). They may also produce harmful sulfur trioxide gas if mixed with an acid. FSC100 (Fuji Super Conditioner) This component contains dichloroisocyanurate and may thus produce harmful chlorine gas if mixed with an acid. It could be injurious to the health if swallowed.


15.4 Processing Solution Replacement

15.4.2 Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution Draining 1. Remove the crossover racks, wash and leave them to dry naturally.

Crossover Rack

CD032



2. Remove the processing racks, and run about one liter of water over the entire rack. Collect the waste in the waste solution collection tank.

Processing Rack

3. Run warm water (30° to 40°C/86° to 104°C) over the rack, and thoroughly wash the roller bearing section and parts that come in contact with the solution in the tank. Allow them to airdry.

CD031



4. Remove the circulation pump section cover (see subsection 15.2.1). 5. Connect a hose (ordinary water hose) to each of the drain valve of the processing tanks and drain the solution in the tank into the waste recovery tank.

Drain Valve

CD035



6. If the solution being drained off stops flowing, replace the waste recovery tank with a lower container (such as tray) which can bring the end of the hose to a level lower than the valve, and continue draining off the solution. Collect the solution in the waste recovery tank.

CD036



15.4.3 Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Reinstallation 1. Install the splash prevention cover over the dryer fan section. Splash Prevention Cover

CD033



2. Check that all drain valves of the processing tanks are closed.

P1

P2

Drain Valves

PS1

PS2

PS3

PS4

CD357



3. Wash out the inside of each processing tank using clean running water.

CD034



4. Connect a hose (ordinary water hose) to each of the drain valves of the processing tanks and drain the water in the tank into a bucket or other container.

Drain Valve

CD035



5. If the water being drained off stops flowing, and there is still water remaining in the tank, replace the bucket with a lower container (such as a tray) which can bring the end of the hose to a level lower than the valve, and continue draining off the water. 6. After all the water has been drained off, close the drain valve and remove the hose. 7. Repeat steps 4 to 7 for each tank. 8. Remove the splash prevention cover. CD036



9. Make sure all drain valves are closed. 10. Reinstall the circulation pump section cover. 11. Reinstall the processing and crossover racks.

Processing Tank Drain Valves (6)

CD357



15.4.4 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure • Tools • Measuring Cup (5L)

• Measuring Cylinder

• Level Gauge

PS1,2,3,4 P1, P2

• Chemicals • Preparation Procedure 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

Drain the processing tank (properly dispose of the drained solution). Remove the processing rack. Clean the processing tank and rack with running water (preferably warm water) and a sponge or soft cloth. Do not use any abrasive material such as a scrub brush. Install the processing rack into the tank. Prepare the solution in accordance with the “5.4 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S)”. Thoroughly clean the solution preparation tools with water. Ensure that they are free of processing solution incrustations so as to avoid problems with the ensuing solution preparation.

IMPORTANT

Use the dedicated measuring cup for P1 solution preparation. If the measuring cup has contained other solutions, thoroughly clean it before P1 solution preparation.

Name

Code

Packing Units Components

Quantity*

Color Developer Startup Chemicals

P1

To make 10 L (To make 4.2 L)

A+B

✕ 1 box (✕ 2 boxes)

Bleach-fix Startup Chemicals

P2

To make 10 L (To make 4.2 L)

A+B

✕ 1 box (✕ 2 boxes)

Tablets

5 tablets

Super Rinse To make 5 L ✕ Replenisher FSC100 100 (Fuji Super Conditioner)

P1R

Replenisher Cartridge

PC

2 Cartridge (PC ✕ 2)

P2RA

✕ 1 cartridge

P2RB NOTE: Paper area processed by a replenisher cartridge : 111 sq.m (Approximately 10,000 sheets of 3R-size) *Required quantity to initial installation.



15.4.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 10L kit * Prepare the processing solutions by following the numerical order shown. If these steps are not followed, abnormality of solutions may result. P1 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 9.4 liters) 1. Water 1 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters and one bottle of P1A

3. Water 2 liters and one bottle of P1B

A

4. Water (approximately 2.2 liters) up to P1 line on gauge.

B

P1

P1

Circulation Filter Water 2 liters

Water 2 liters P1 Line on Gauge

Water 1 liters Sub Tank

Water + P1A

Water + P1B

Water (Approximately 2.2 liters)



P2 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 9.5 liters) 1. Water 1 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters and one bottle of P2A

3. Water 2 liters and one bottle of P2B

A

4. Water (approximately 1.2 liters) up to P2 line on gauge.

B

P2

P2




Water + P2A

Water + P2B




PS Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 19.6 liters) 1. PS4 Tank 1) One tablet of FSC100 2) Water (approximately 5 liters) up to PS line on gauge FSC100

1)

2. PS3 Tank 1) One tablet of FSC100 2) Water (approximately 5 liters) up to PS line on gauge

Lift PS4 rack.

FSC100

Lift PS3 rack

3. PS2 Tank 1) One tablet of FSC100 2) Water (approximately 5 liters) up to PS line on gauge Lift PS2 rack.

PS3 Tank

PS4 Tank

FSC100


Lift PS1 rack.

PS2 Tank

FSC100

PS1 Tank

2) PS Line on Gauge

Sub Tank

PS Line on Gauge Water (Approximately 5 liters)



Water (Approximately 5 liters)



15.4.6 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 4.2L kit P1 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 9.4 liters)

A

P1

A

A

P1B 130mL

P1

P1A 100mL

3. Water 2 liters, two bottles 4. Water (approximately 0.2 liters) and 130 mL of P1B up to P1 line on gauge.

P1

1. Water 3 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters, two bottles and 100 mL of P1A

A

P1




Water + (P1A X 2 + 100mL)

Water + (P1B X 2 + 130mL)




P2 Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 9.5 liters)

P2B 180mL

P1 A

P2A 170mL

3. Water 2 liters, two bottles 4. Water (approximately 0.2 liters) up to P2 line on gauge. and 180 mL of P2B

A

P1

P1 A

1. Water 2 liters (15 to 40 ˚C) 2. Water 2 liters, two bottles and 170mL of P2A

A

P1

Circulation Filter

Water 2 liters



Water + (P2A X 2 + 170 mL)

Water + (P2B X 2 + 180mL)




PS Solution Preparation (Tank Capacity: 26.8 liters) 1. PS4 Tank 1) One tablet of FSC100 2) Water (approximately 5 liters) up to PS line on gauge FSC100

1)


Lift PS4 rack.

FSC100

Lift PS3 rack

3. PS2 Tank 1) One tablet of FSC100 2) Water (approximately 5 liters) up to PS line on gauge Lift PS2 rack.

PS3 Tank

PS4 Tank

FSC100


Lift PS1 rack.

PS2 Tank

FSC100

PS1 Tank

2) PS Line on Gauge

Sub Tank




Water (Approximately 5 liters)


16. PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM Parts Location 16.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section 16.1.1 16.1.2 16.1.3 16.1.4 16.1.5 16.1.6 16.1.7 16.1.8

Replenishing Section Cover Removal/ Reinstallation Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D410) Replacement Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D408/ D409) Replacement Replenisher Cartridge Box Removal/ Reinstallation Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replacement Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor (M402) Replacement Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement

16.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System 16.2.1

Replenisher Pump Section Cover Removal/ Reinstallation 16.2.2 Replenisher Pump Bracket Removal/ Reinstallation

16.2.3 16.2.4 16.2.5 16.2.6

Replenisher Filter Replacement Replenisher Pump Replacement Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement Rear Upper Connector Cover Removal/ Reinstallation 16.2.7 Rear Lower Connector Cover Removal/ Reinstallation 16.2.8 P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/ FS411) Replacement 16.2.9 P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor 16.2.10 16.2.11 16.2.12 16.2.13

Replacement PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS410/ FS414) Replacement P1R Tank Replacement P2RA/P2RB Tank Replacement PSR Tank Replacement

16.3 Auto Washing/P1R Stirring System 16.3.1 16.3.2

Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replacement Cartridge Washing /P1R Stirring Valve Replacement 16.3.3 Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement


Parts Location Rack Auto Washing Valves (S401 to S404)

Replenisher Nozzles

PSR Tank

P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/FS411)

Replenisher Cartridge P1

P2 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4

Cartridge Washing P1R Stirring Valves (S407 to S410) PSR (PU411)

PSR Upper Level Sensor (FS414)

P1R Tank

P2RA Tank

P2RB (PU410) P2RA (PU409)

Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replenisher Filters

P2RB Tank

PSR Lower Level Sensor (FS414)

P1R (PU408) P1R Replenisher Pumps

P2RA Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS408/FS412) P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS409/FS413)

PSR P2RB P2RA P1R

PSR P2RB P2RA Drain Valves P1R CD285


Parts Location Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D410)

Replenisher Box Door Lock Replenisher Cartridge Box Cartridge Opening Gear

Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor (M402)

Cartridge Box Upper Sensor (D408) Cartridge Box Lower Sensor (D409)

Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replenisher Cartridge Opening/Washing Nozzle CD821


16.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section 16.1.1 Replenishing Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal Screw (1) (Remove)

1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply. 2. Loosen the five screws and remove one screw and then the replenishing section cover.

Replenishing Section Cover


Screws (5) (Loosen)

CD038


16.1 Replenisher Cartridge Section

16.1.2 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing 1. Remove the screw securing the right front of the dryer fan section cover as shown. 2. Insert the rod with 3 mm outside diameter or less through the screw hole to release the lock and open the door.

Rod (3mm O.D. or less)

Screws (2)

3. Retighten the screw.

Replenisher Box Door

CD360



16.1.3 Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D410) Replacement Removal Switch Bracket

1. Remove: • Dryer fan section cover (see subsection 17.3.1). • Processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1). 2. Remove the screw and then the connector cover.

Screw (Remove)

3. Loosen the screw, remove the screw and then the switch bracket. Screw

Screw (Loosen)

Connector Cover

CD302



4. Disconnect the connector from the switch. E-ring

5. Remove the spring and Ering and then the switch from the bracket.

Switch (D410)

Connector


Spring

CD303



16.1.4 Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D408/D409) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the replenishing section cover (see subsection 16.1.1).

Sensor Bracket

2. Remove the two screws and then the sensor bracket.

Screws (2)

CD304



3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. 4. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor from the bracket.

Connector

Lower Sensor (D409) Upper Sensor (D408)

Installation Locking Tabs


Connector

CD305



16.1.5 Replenisher Cartridge Box Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove:

Clamp

• Rear upper connector cover (see subsection 16.2.6). • Rear lower connector cover (see subsection 16.2.7). • Replenishing section cover (see subsection 16.1.1). 2. Disconnect the JH01 connector and open the clamp.

JH01 Connector

CD307



3. Disconnect the M402 connector and open the clamp.

M402 Connector Clamp

CD308



4. Remove the six screws securing the opening nozzle section.

Screws (6)

Opening Nozzle Section

CD309



5. Loosen the two screws securing the lower of the replenisher cartridge box and remove the screw at the top.

Screw (Remove)

Screws (2) (Loosen)

CD310



6. Loosen the hose clamp, disconnect the overflow hose and remove the replenisher cartridge box.

Overflow Hose

Reinstallation Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Connect the hose securely (see subsection 15.2.8).

Hose Clamp

Replenisher Cartridge Box

CD311



16.1.6 Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the replenisher cartridge box (see subsection 16.1.5). 2. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket.

Sensor Bracket Screws

CD312



3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor. Sensor (D407)

4. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor from the bracket.


Connector

Locking Tabs

CD313



16.1.7 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor (M402) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the replenisher cartridge box (see subsection 16.1.5). 2. Loosen the two screws and then the motor bracket.

Screws (2)

Motor Bracket

CD314



3. Remove the two screws and then the motor. 4. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews and remove the gear from the motor.

Gear Screws (2)


Motor (M402) Hex. Socket Head Setscrews (2)

CD315



16.1.8 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement Removal Connector

Sensor

1. Remove the replenisher cartridge box (see subsection 16.1.5). 2. Remove the two E-rings and then the cartridge bracket. 3. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.

E-rings (2)

Cartridge Bracket

CD316




Installation

Gear

Install the gear in the reverse order of removal.

E-ring

CD317


16.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System 16.2.1 Replenisher Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the replenishing section cover (see subsection 16.1.1). 2. Remove the five screws and then the replenisher pump section cover.


Replenisher Pump Section Cover

Screws (5) CD1051


16.2 Processing Solution Replenishment System

16.2.2 Replenisher Pump Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the replenisher pump section cover (see subsection 16.2.1). 2. Remove the two screws and pull out the bracket.

Reinstallation Reinstallation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Take care not to bend or crush the replenisher hoses when reinstalling the bracket.

Replenisher Pump Bracket

Screws (2)

CD286



16.2.3 Replenisher Filter Replacement Removal 1. Remove the replenisher pump bracket (see subsection 16.2.2). 2. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the two pinchcocks. 3. Loosen the two hose clamps and disconnect the hoses from the filter.

Hoses

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8). • After PSR filter replacement, perform PSR output measurement and setting in menu 461 “Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting” (see subsection 5.7.1).

Pinchcocks (2)

Filter

Clamps

CD287



16.2.4 Replenisher Pump Replacement Pump PU408 PU409 PU410 PU411

System P1R P2RA P2RB PSR

Connectors PU411 PU409 PU410 PU408

Removal 1. Remove the replenisher pump bracket (see subsection 16.2.2).

Clamp

2. Disconnect the pump connector. 3. Open the harness clamp.

CD288



4. Pinch the inlet and outlet hoses with the two pinchcocks.

Pinchcocks (2)

Outlet Hose

Inlet Hose

5. Loosen the hose clamp and disconnect the inlet hose from the pump. 6. Cut the cord tie and disconnect the outlet hose from the pump.

Cord Tie

Clamp

CD289



7. Remove the screw and then the pump by pulling it.

Installation

Pump

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8). • After PSR pump replacement, perform PSR output measurement and setting in menu 461 “Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting” (see subsection 5.7.1).

Screw

CD290



16.2.5 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement Removal 1. Remove the replenisher pump bracket (see subsection 16.2.2). Mark

2. Pinch the pump inlet and outlet hoses with the two pinchcocks.

Joint Nuts (2) Mark

3. Loosen the two joint nuts. Label

4. Remove the valves.

Joints (2)

CD291



Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Use new valves identified by the same color mark as the label on the pump body. Color Pump Red P1R Yellow P2RA and P2RB White PSR • Note the installation direction of the valves and tighten the joint nuts securely. • After PSR pump replacement, perform PSR output measurement and setting in menu 461 “Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting” (see subsection 5.7.1).



16.2.6 Rear Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal Connector Cover

1. Remove the dryer fan section cover (see subsection 17.3.1). 2. Remove the two screws and then the connector cover.


Screws (2)

CD251



16.2.7 Rear Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1).

Connector Cover

2. Loosen the two screws and then the connector cover.


Screws (2)

CD306



16.2.8 P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/FS411) Replacement Removal 1. Remove:

Screws (2)

• Replenishing section cover (see subsection 16.1.1). • Open the circuit board bracket (see subsection 15.3.2). • Rear lower connector cover (see subsection 16.2.7). 2. Remove the two screws and then the connector bracket.

Connector Bracket

CD318



3. Disconnect the FS407 and FS411 connectors.

FS411

FS407

CD319



4. Remove the two screws and then the sensors. Screws (2)

Sensors (FS407/FS411)

CD320



Installation Arrows

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Install the gasket on the sensor flange correctly. • Align the arrow on the sensor with that on the tank.

Gasket

CD321



16.2.9 P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement Code FS408 FS409 FS412 FS413

Sensor P2RA Upper P2RB Upper P2RA Lower P2RB Lower

FS412

FS408 FS409

Removal 1. Remove: • Replenishing section cover (see subsection 16.1.1). • Rear lower connector cover (see subsection 16.2.7). 2. Remove the two screws and then the P1R tank bracket. 3. Disconnect the FS408/ FS412 or FS409/FS413 connectors. 4. Open the three clamps.

FS413

Clamps (3)

Screws (2)

P1R Tank Bracket

CD333



5. Open the two clamps. Screws (2)

6. Remove the two screws and then the tank bracket.

Tank Bracket

Clamps

CD334



7. Tilt the tank towards the outside.

Screws (2)


8. Remove the two screws and then the sensors.

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Install the gasket on the sensor flange correctly. • Point the arrow on the sensor outward.


Arrow

CD335



16.2.10 PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS410/FS414) Replacement Removal 1. Remove: • Replenishing section cover (see subsection 16.1.1). • Rear lower connector cover (see subsection 16.2.7). 2. Drain the PSR replenisher from the drain valve. PSR

P1R

P2RB P2RA Drain Valves

CD322



3. Remove the two screws and then the P1R tank bracket. FS414

FS410

4. Disconnect the FS410 or FS414 connector. 5. Open the three clamps.

Clamps (3)

Screws (2)

P1R Tank Bracket

CD337



6. Open the two clamps.

Clamps (2)

7. Loosen the two hose clamps, disconnect the hoses and remove the sensor.

Installation

Hose

Clamps (2)

Sensor (FS410)

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8).

Sensor (FS414)

Hose CD338



16.2.11 P1R Tank Replacement Removal 1. Remove: • Replenishing section cover (see subsection 16.1.1). • Open the circuit board bracket (see subsection 15.3.2). • Remove the rear lower connector cover (see subsection 16.2.7). 2. Drain the P1R, P2RA and P2RB replenishers from the drain valve. NOTE: Collect the replenishers into the W1 waste recovery tank.

PSR

P1R


CD322



3. Disconnect the FS407 and FS411 connectors. FS407

FS411

CD323




Screws (2)

P1R Tank Bracket

CD324



5. Pull out the tank. Inlet Hose

6. Disconnect the overflow hose from the boss on the floor pan. Stirring Hose

7. Loosen the four clamps and disconnect the hoses from the tank.

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8). • After installation, perform cartridge opening in menu 46F “Installation”.

Outlet Hose P1R Tank Drain Hose

Clamps (4)

Overflow Hose

CD325



16.2.12 P2RA/P2RB Tank Replacement Removal 1. Remove: • Replenishing section cover (see subsection 16.1.1). • Rear lower connector cover (see subsection 16.2.7). 2. Drain the P1R, P2RA and P2RB replenishers from the drain valve. PSR NOTE: Collect the replenishers into the W1 waste recovery tank.

P1R


CD322



3. Remove the two screws and then the P1R tank bracket. FS412

FS408 FS409

4. Disconnect the FS408/ FS412 or FS409/FS413 connectors. 5. Open the three clamps.

FS413

Clamps (3)

Screws (2)

P1R Tank Bracket

CD333



6. Open the two clamps. Screws (2)


Tank Bracket

Clamps

CD334



8. Tilt the tank to the outside. Overflow Hose

9. Loosen the four hose clamps and disconnect the hoses from the tank.

Clamps (4) P2RB Tank

Outlet Hose

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8). • After installation, perform cartridge opening in menu 46F “Installation”.

Drain Hose

P2RA Tank

Inlet Hose

CD336



16.2.13 PSR Tank Replacement Removal 1. Remove: • Replenishing section cover (see subsection 16.1.1). • Open the circuit board bracket (see subsection 15.3.2). 2. Drain the PSR replenisher from the drain valve. PSR

P1R


CD322



3. Remove the two screws, then the P1R tank bracket and pull out the tank.

Screws (2)

P1R Tank Bracket

CD324



4. Remove the two screws and then the tank bracket. Tank Bracket

Screws (2)

CD326



5. Loosen the five clamps and disconnect the hoses from the tank. 6. Remove the tank.

Installation

To Level Sensors

Breather Hose

Inlet Hose

Clamps (5)

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8). • After replacement, perform PSR output measurement and setting in menu 461 “Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting” (see subsection 5.7.1).

Drain Hose

Outlet Hose

PSR Tank

CD327


16.3 Auto Washing/P1R Stirring System 16.3.1 Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the replenisher pump bracket (see subsection 16.2.2).

Clamp PU407 Connector

2. Disconnect the PU407 connector. 3. Open the clamps.

CD292


16.3 Auto Washing/P1R Stirring System

4. Pinch the three hoses with the pinchcocks. Pinchcocks (3)

5. Loosen the two hose clamps and disconnect the hoses from the pump.

Clamps (2)

CD293



6. Remove the two screws and then the pump bracket.

Pump Bracket Screws (2)

CD294



7. Remove the two screws and then the pump from the bracket.

Pump (PU407)

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8). • After installation, perform the following adjustments. 1) Clear “Pump on times” on the menu 46D “Clearing Selected Processor Operation Data” screen (see subsection 5.7.12). 2) Menu 462 “Auto Cleaning output measurement/ Setting” (see subsection 5.7.2).

Screws (2)

CD295



16.3.2 Cartridge Washing /P1R Stirring Valve Replacement Code S407 S408 S409 S410

Valve P1R Washing P2RA Washing P2RB Washing P1R Stirring

Removal 1. Remove the replenisher pump section cover (see subsection 16.2.1). 2. Loosen the two screws and remove the valve bracket. Valve Bracket

Screws (2)

CD296



3. Disconnect the S407 to S410 connectors. 4. Open the clamp.

Clamp

S407

S408

S409

S410

CD297



5. Pinch the five hoses using the pinchcocks. Pinchcocks (5)

6. Loosen the five clamps and disconnect the hoses from the valve unit. 7. Remove the two screws and then the valve unit from the bracket.

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. Clamps (5) NOTE: Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8).

Valve Unit Screws (2)

CD298



16.3.3 Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement Code S401 S402 S403 S404

Rack P1 P2 PS1/2 PS3/4

S401

Removal 1. Remove: • Open the circuit board bracket (see subsection 15.3.2). • Remove the rear upper connector cover (see subsection 16.2.6).

Clamp

S404

2. Disconnect the S401 to S404 connectors. 3. Open the clamp.

S403

S402

CD299



4. Loosen the two screws and remove the valve bracket.

Valve Bracket

Screws (2)

CD300



5. Pinch the five hoses with the pinchcocks. Pinchcocks (5)

6. Loosen the five clamps and disconnect the hoses from the valve unit.

Valve Unit

7. Remove the two screws and then the valve unit from the bracket.

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. Clamps (5) NOTE: • Connect the hoses securely (see subsection 15.2.8). • After installation, perform menu 462 “Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/ setting” (see subsection 5.7.2).

Screws (2)

CD301


17. DRYER/SORTER SECTION Parts Location 17.1 Dryer Unit 17.1.1 17.1.2 17.1.3 17.1.4 17.1.5 17.1.6 17.1.7 17.1.8 17.1.9 17.1.10 17.1.11 17.1.12

Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement Feed Section Roller Replacement Entrance Side Roller Replacement Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416A) Replacement Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D416B) Replacement

17.2 Sorter 17.2.1 17.2.2 17.2.3

Sorter Drive Motor (M404) Replacement Sorter Removal/Reinstallation Sorter Belt Replacement

17.2.4 17.2.5 17.2.6 17.2.7

Belt Tension Adjustment CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement Sorter Full Sensor LED Replacement Sorter Full Sensor Replacement

17.3 Dryer Fan/Heater Section 17.3.1

Dryer Fan Section Cover Removal/ Reinstallation 17.3.2 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement 17.3.3 Dryer Heater (H406) Replacement


Parts Location

Dryer Rack Drive Gear

Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411)

Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch Dryer Fan (F405)

Dryer Rack Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Dryer Rack Exit Rollers

Dryer Heater (H406)

Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416)

Entrance Side Rollers

Sorter Belt Dryer Unit

Sorter Drive Motor (M404)

Feed Section Rollers Feed Belt/Pulleys Dryer Rack Drive Chane

CD822


17.1 Dryer Unit 17.1.1 Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply. 2. Loosen the two screws securing the dryer section cover.

Screws (2)

CD122


17.1 Dryer Unit

3. Remove the dryer section cover.

Reinstallation

Dryer Section Cover


CD123


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.2 Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement Removal 1. Remove the dryer section cover (see subsection 17.1.1).

Pulley Entrance Guide

2. Remove the four screws and then the entrance guide.

E-ring

Screws (4)

3. Remove the two springs. 4. Remove the two E-rings, and bearings.

Shaft Springs (2)

Bearings

CD198


17.1 Dryer Unit

5. Remove the E-ring securing the pulley to the shaft and then the pulley by pulling the shaft out.

E-ring

Pulley

Shaft

9689


17.1 Dryer Unit

6. Remove the drive side E-ring and then the gear and bearing.

Belt

Shaft

E-ring

7. Remove the E-ring and then the pulley and belt by pulling out the shaft.

Installation Install the belt/pulleys in the reverse order of removal. Pulley Bearing E-ring

Gear

9690


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.3 Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement 1. Open the dryer unit. 2. Disconnect the connector from the sensor.

Connector

Screw

3. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket.

Sensor Bracket

CD209


17.1 Dryer Unit

4. Release the locking tabs and remove the sensor. Locking Tabs


Sensor (D411)

CD210


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.4 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the dryer section cover (see subsection 17.1.1). 2. Open the dryer unit. 3. Loosen the two screws and remove the duct.

Duct

Screws (2)

CD230


17.1 Dryer Unit

4. Disconnect the sensor connector.

Dryer Temperature Sensor Connector

CD228


17.1 Dryer Unit

5. Cur the two cord ties and remove the sensor bracket. Cord Ties (2)

Sensor Bracket

Screws (2)

CD212


17.1 Dryer Unit

6. Cut the three cord ties. 7. Remove the screw and then the sensor.

Installation

Cord Ties (3)

Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Screw

Sensor (TS406)

E520


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.5 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement Removal 1. Open the dryer unit. 2. Loosen the two screws, remove the screw and then the drive gear bracket.

Screws (2)(Loosen)

Drive Gear Bracket

Screw (Remove)

CD229


17.1 Dryer Unit

3. Remove the two E-rings, spacer, gear bracket and gear. E-ring

Bracket

E-ring

Spacer

Gear

CD242


17.1 Dryer Unit

4. Remove the clip and then the gear and shaft. Shaft

Gear

Clip

CD243


17.1 Dryer Unit

5. Remove the E-ring and then the gear (green). E-ring

6. Remove the E-ring and two screws and then the bracket and the gear (white).

E-ring

Bracket

Screws (2) Gear (Green)

Gear (White)

CD244


17.1 Dryer Unit

Bearing

7. Remove the two bearings, gear (black) and shaft.


Thrust Washer

NOTE: Apply recommended resin grease to the gear and shafts as shown in the figures.

Bearing

Shaft Thrust Washer Gear (Black) CD245


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.6 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove: Screw

• Dryer section cover (see subsection 17.1.1). • Replenisher pump section cover (see subsection 16.2.1). • Dryer rack drive gear bracket (see subsection 17.1.5). 2. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire. 3. Open the dryer unit.

Grounding Wire CD227


17.1 Dryer Unit

4. Loosen the two screws and remove the duct.

Duct

Screws (2)

CD230


17.1 Dryer Unit

5. Disconnect the dryer temperature sensor connector.

Dryer Temperature Sensor Connector

CD228


17.1 Dryer Unit

6. Remove the four screws and then the cover. Cover Screws (4)

CD232


17.1 Dryer Unit

7. Loosen the six screws securing the dryer rack.

Screws (6)

CD231


17.1 Dryer Unit

8. Pull the lock release lever and remove the dryer rack. Lock Release Lever

Sensor Arm

NOTE: Take care not to damage the dryer section exit sensor arm.

Reinstallation Reinstall the rack in the reverse order of removal.

Dryer Rack

CD233


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.7 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement Removal 1. Remove the dryer rack (see subsection 17.1.6). 2. Remove the three screws and then the chain slider.

Screws (3) Chain Slider

CD234


17.1 Dryer Unit

3. Release the chain tensioner spring hook.

Chain

4. Remove the chain.

Installation Install the chain in the reverse order of removal.

Spring

CD1099


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.8 Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement Removal

Exit Side Spring Black Mark

1. Remove the dryer rack (see subsection 17.1.6).

Bearings (6)

2. Remove the six E-rings and three springs and then the gear, sprockets and bearings from the front side. NOTE: The exit side spring has the black mark and the entrance side spring has the red mark.

Sprockets (2)

Spring E-rings (6) Entrance Side Spring

Red Mark

CD235


17.1 Dryer Unit

3. Remove the six E-rings and then the six gears, three springs, six bearings and four rollers.

Black Mark

Exit Side Spring Rollers (4)

Spring

NOTE: The exit side spring has the black mark and the entrance side spring has the red mark.

Entrance Side Spring

Bearings (6) Red Mark Gears (6) E-rings (6)

CD236


17.1 Dryer Unit

4. Remove the four screws and two springs and collars and then the lower guide plate.

Long White Roller Shaft

5. Remove the four screws and then the upper guide plate.

Screws (4)

6. Remove the two long white roller shafts.

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Exit side coil spring has black mark the entrance side spring has the red mark.

Screws (4) Springs (2) Collars (2)

CD237


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.9 Feed Section Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the dryer rack drive chain (see subsection 17.1.7).

Roller

Bearing

2. Remove the E-ring and then the gear and bearing. 3. Withdraw the shaft from the front side and remove the roller (ø20 hard).

Gear

Shaft

E-ring

9731


17.1 Dryer Unit

4. Remove the three screws.

Screws (3)

CD238


17.1 Dryer Unit

5. Remove the six screws and then the stainless steel guide plate.

Screws (6)

Stainless Steel Guide Plate

CD239


17.1 Dryer Unit

6. Remove the E-ring and then the sprocket and bearing form the front side. Roller

7. Remove the E-ring and bearing and then the roller.

Bearing


Sprocket

E-ring

9733


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.10 Entrance Side Roller Replacement Removal 1. Remove the dryer rack drive chain (see subsection 17.1.7).

Spring

Plain Bearings (3)

2. Remove the four E-rings and then the gears from the rear side. 3. Remove the spring ends from the grooves in the bearings. 4. Remove the three plain bearings and ball bearing.

Ball Bearing

Gears (4) E-rings (4)

CD240


17.1 Dryer Unit

5. Remove the front four Erings, two sprockets and four bearings. 6. Withdraw the shafts from the front side and remove the roller.

Installation Install the rollers in the reverse order of removal. Shafts (4) Rollers (4)

CD241


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.11 Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416A) Replacement Removal 1. Remove:

Tapping Screws (3)

• Dryer section cover (see subsection 17.1.1). • Replenisher pump section cover (see subsection 16.2.1). Bracket

2. Open the harness clamp. 3. Remove the three tapping screws and then the bracket.

Clamp

CD247


17.1 Dryer Unit

4. Disconnect the D416A connector from the switch.

D416A Connector

5. Release the locking tabs and remove the switch from the bracket.


Locking Tabs Switch (D416)

CD248


17.1 Dryer Unit

17.1.12 Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D416B) Replacement Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply.

Switch Cover

2. Open the dryer unit. 3. Remove the two screws and then the switch cover.

Screws (2)

CD1023


17.1 Dryer Unit

4. Insert the flat blade screwdriver through the slots to release the locking tabs and remove the switch.

Switch

Flat Brade Screwdriver

CD1024


17.1 Dryer Unit

5. Disconnect the two connectors from the switch. Switch

Connectors (2)

CD1025


17.1 Dryer Unit


Cover Screws (4)

After installation, adjust the switch cover position. 1. Remove the four screws and then the cover.

CD232


17.1 Dryer Unit

2. Loosen the two screws securing the switch cover.

Switch Lever

3. Adjust the switch cover position so that the switch lever on the dryer unit aligns with the center of the hole in the switch cover.

Screws (2)

4. Tighten the two screws.

Switch Cover

CD1100


17.2 Sorter 17.2.1 Sorter Drive Motor (M404) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the dryer section cover (see subsection 17.1.1). 2. Remove the two screws and then the lower cover.

Screws (2)

Lower Cover

CD199


17.2 Sorter

3. Remove the two screws and then the lower cover bracket. Lower Cover Bracket

Screws (2)

CD200


17.2 Sorter

4. Loosen the two hex. socket head setscrews and remove the gear from the motor.

Motor

Gear

Hex. Socket Head Screws (2)

E505


17.2 Sorter


Screws (2) Motor (M404)

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Apply locking agent to the threads of the hex. socket head setscrews. Thread Locking Agent: LOCTITE 425 or equivalent

Motor Connector

E506


17.2 Sorter

17.2.2 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the dryer section cover (see subsection 17.1.1).

Screws (4)

2. Remove the four screws and then the sorter.

Sorter

CD201


17.2 Sorter

3. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire. Screw

Reinstallation Reinstall the sorter in the reverse order of removal.

Grounding Wire

CD202


17.2 Sorter

17.2.3 Sorter Belt Replacement Removal 1. Remove the sorter (see subsection 17.2.2).

Screws (2) Lower Cover

2. Remove the two screws and then the lower cover.

CD203


17.2 Sorter

3. Remove the two screws and then the lower cover bracket.

Connectors (3)

Lower Cover Bracket

4. Disconnect the three connectors.

Screws (2)

E516


17.2 Sorter

5. Remove the four screws and then the plug-in connector bracket.

Motor Connector Screw

6. Disconnect the motor connector. Screws (4)

Grouding Wire


CD204


17.2 Sorter

7. Disconnect the connectors from the sorter full sensor and LED.

Connectors

CD205


17.2 Sorter

8. Remove the three screws securing the motor bracket. Motor Bracket

Screws (3)

E512


17.2 Sorter

9. Remove the two screws and then the pulley bracket. Pulley Bracket

Screws (2)

E511


17.2 Sorter

10. Remove the four screws and motor protection cover. Motor Protection Cover

Screws (4)

CD206


17.2 Sorter

11. Remove the flat countersunk head screws. 12. Remove the two screws securing the pulley shaft.

Flat Countersunk Head Scews (2)

Pulley Shaft Screws (2)

9685


17.2 Sorter

13. Remove the spring on the one side and then the belt.

Installation

Spring

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installation, adjust the belt tension (see subsection 17.2.4).

Belt

9686


17.2 Sorter

17.2.4 Belt Tension Adjustment 1. Remove the sorter (see subsection 17.2.2). 2. Remove the two screws and then the lower cover.

Screws (2) Lower Cover

CD203


17.2 Sorter

3. Loosen the three screws securing the motor bracket. Pulley Bracket

Screws (2) (Remove)

4. Remove the two screws and then the pulley bracket.

Screws (3) (Loosen)

Motor Bracket

999u


17.2 Sorter

5. Move the motor bracket as far as it will go to tighten tension and secure with the three screws.

Motor Bracket

Screws (3)

E515


17.2 Sorter

6. Measure the belt tension near the rib on the sorter as shown using the spring balancer.

Spring Balancer

Belt Tension: 250g±25g/25mm 7. Adjust the belt tension by loosening the three screws and moving the motor bracket. 8. Reinstall the removed parts.

25mm Rib Belt

999v


17.2 Sorter

17.2.5 CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the dryer section cover (see subsection 17.1.1). 2. Remove the two screws and then the lower cover.

Screws (2)

Lower Cover

CD199


17.2 Sorter


Screws (2)

CD200


17.2 Sorter

4. Disconnect the three connectors from the CTS04 circuit board.

CTS04 Circuit Board

Connectors (3)

E507


17.2 Sorter

5. Remove the two screws and then the circuit board from the spacer. Screws (2)

CTS04 Circuit Board


Spacer

E508


17.2 Sorter

17.2.6 Sorter Full Sensor LED Replacement Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply.

Upper Cover

2. Remove the two screws and then the upper cover.

Screws (2)

E502


17.2 Sorter

3. Disconnect the connectors from the LED. 4. Remove the two screws and then the LED.

Sensor LEDs (2)

Screws (2)

Installation Install the LED in the reverse order of removal.

Connectors (2)

CD208


17.2 Sorter

17.2.7 Sorter Full Sensor Replacement Removal 1. Remove the dryer section cover (see subsection 17.1.1). 2. Remove the two screws and then the lower cover.

Screws (2)

Lower Cover

CD199


17.2 Sorter


Screws (2)

CD200


17.2 Sorter

4. Disconnect the motor connector. 5. Disconnect the two connectors from the circuit board and cut the cord tie.

Connector Motor Connector Screws (4)

6. Remove the four screws and then the plug-in connector bracket.

Cord Tie


CD207


17.2 Sorter

7. Disconnect the connectors from the sensor and LED. Sensors (2)

Connectors (2)

E518


17.2 Sorter

8. Remove the screw and then the sensor from the front side. Screw

Sensor Sensor

9. Remove the screw and then the sensor bracket from the rear side. 10. Remove the screw and then the sensor from the bracket.

Installation Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal. Screw

Bracket

Screw

E519


17.3 Dryer Fan/Heater Section 17.3.1 Dryer Fan Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply.

Densitometer

2. Open the Dryer unit. 3. Disconnect the cable and remove the densitometer.

Cable

CD213


17.3 Dryer Fan/Heater Section

4. Remove the six screws and then the dryer fan section cover.

Dryer Fan Section Cover


Screws (6)

CD214



17.3.2 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the dryer fan section cover (see subsection 17.3.1). 2. Remove the three flat countersunk head screws. NOTE: Be careful not to drop the screws.

Flat Countersunk Head Screws (3)

CD215



3. Remove the three screws and the fan duct. Screws (3)

Fan Duct

CD216



4. Remove the screw securing the grounding wire. Fan Connector

5. Open the two clamps. 6. Remove the screw securing the capacitor.

Grounding Wire

Capacitor

Screw

7. Disconnect the fan connector.

Screw Clamps

CD217



8. Remove the two screws and then the fan. Fan (F405)

Screws (2)

CD218



Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: After installing the fan and duct, tighten the screws in the following order. (1) Install the two fan screws loosely. (2) Tighten the three fan duct screws. (3) Tighten the three countersunk flat head screws. (4) Tighten the two fan screws.

CD1101



17.3.3 Dryer Heater (H406) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the dryer fan section cover (see subsection 17.3.1). 2. Disconnect the heater connectors.

Heater Connectors

CD219



3. Remove the five screws and then the heater.

Installation Install the heater in the reverse order of removal. After installation, clear “Heater on time” on the menu 46D “Clearing Selected Processor Operation Data” screen (see subsection 5.7.12).

Heater (H406)

Screws (5)

CD220


18. ELECTRICAL SECTION Parts Location 18.1 Power Supply Input Section 18.1.1 18.1.2 18.1.3 18.1.4 18.1.5 18.1.6 18.1.7 18.1.8 18.1.9 18.1.10 18.1.11 18.1.12

Front Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Test Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP10) Replacement Power Supply Section Bracket Removal/ Reinstallation Relay (K1 to K6) Replacement SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP14) Replacement Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3)/Capacitor (C1 to C3) Replacement Step Down Transformer Replacement PAC22 Circuit Board Replacement

18.2 DC Power Supply Section 18.2.1 18.2.2

Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/ Reinstallation 18.2.3 LED Circuit Board Replacement

18.2.4 18.2.5 18.2.6

PWR22 Circuit Board Replacement DC Power Supply Replacement DC Voltage Adjustment

18.3 Image Processing Circuit Board Section 18.3.1 18.3.2 18.3.3 18.3.4 18.3.5 18.3.6 18.3.7 18.3.8 18.3.9 18.3.10 18.3.11

Image Processing Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing Printer Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F311/F312) Replacement Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313) Replacement Image Processing Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F217/F218) Replacement GHT22/GIA22/GPA22 Circuit Board Replacement GMB22 Circuit Board Replacement CTC22 Circuit Board Replacement Pulse Motor Driver Replacement LDA22 Circuit Board Replacement LDD22 Circuit Board Replacement Start Switch Replacement


18.4 Main Control Unit Section 18.4.1 18.4.2

Main Control Unit Replacement UPS Battery (Optional) Replacement

18.5 Control Circuit Board Section 18.5.1 18.5.2 18.5.3

PDC22 Circuit Board Replacement CTP22 Circuit Board Replacement Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22 Circuit Board Discharged. 18.5.4 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406) Replacement 18.5.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317) Replacement 18.5.6 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1 (F306/ F307) Replacement


Parts Location Power Supply Input Section Terminal Block (TB4) Step Down Transformer

Capacitors (C1 to C3)

Noise Filters (NF1 to NF3)

1 1

5

3

1

6

4

2

Relays (K1 to K6)

2 2 3

Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1)

3

SSR3 SSR2 SSR1

Circuit Protectors (CP1 to CP10)

2

2 5 7

2

4 6

9

8 10

4 11

Power Supply Terminal Block (TB1) Connection Label

3

1

14

12 13

Terminal Block (TB2) Leakage Breakers (NFB2 to NFB4)


PAC22 Circuit Board

CD823-B


Parts Location Printer Rear Section Printer Exhaust Fans G1A22 Circuit Board 1/2 (F311/F312) Image Processing Section Cooling Fans 1/2 (F217/F218)

GHT22 Circuit Board

LDD22 Circuit Board

Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313)

GPA22 Circuit Board

Start Switch LDA22 Circuit Board Printer Suction Fans 1/2 (F3081)

GMB22 Circuit Board

Pluse Motor Dirver CTC22 Circuit Board

DC Power Supply

Image Processing Circuit Board Section

Main Control Unit Section

DC Power Supply Section

Main Control Unit

PWR22 Circuit Board LED Circuit Board

CD823-A


Parts Location Processor Rear Section Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406)

Printer Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317)

PDC22 Circuit Board

Control Circuit Board Section CTP22 Circuit Board

Power Supply Section Exhaust Fans 1 (F306/F307)

CD824


18.1 Power Supply Input Section 18.1.1 Front Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply.

Front Lower Cover

2. Remove the front upper cover. 3. Remove the nine screws and then the front lower cover.

Reinstallation

Screws (9)

Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of removal. CD047


18.1 Power Supply Input Section

18.1.2 Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the front lower cover (see subsection 18.1.1).

Screws (2)

2. Remove the four screws securing the breaker to the bracket. 3. Remove the two screws and then the bracket.

Bracket

Screws (4)

CD149



4. Remove the eight terminal screws to disconnect the wires from the built-in circuit breaker.

Screws (8)

Wires (8)

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Connect the wires correctly. Bi1-4 Bi1-3 Bi1-2 Bi1-1

Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Bo1-4 Bo1-3 Bo1-2 Bo1-1

CD150



18.1.3 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Test NOTE: Perform the leakage breaker test once a month.

1. Remove the front lower cover (see subsection 18.1.1).

Leakage Breaker (NFB2)

NFB3

NFB4

2. Turn ON the main power supply and the built-in circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the leakage breaker turns OFF by pressing the red button. 4. Reinstall the front lower cover. Red Button

CD143



18.1.4 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the front lower cover (see subsection 18.1.1).

NFB2

NFB3

Screws (2) B4IL B4IN Screws (4)

2. Remove the terminal covers. 3. Loosen the four screws and disconnect the wires from the breaker. 4. Remove the two screws and then the leakage breaker.

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Connect the wires correctly.

NFB4

B40L

B40N

Terminal Covers (2)

CD144



18.1.5 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP10) Replacement Removal Screws (2) (Remove)

1. Remove the front lower cover (see subsection 18.1.1). 2. Loosen the two screws, remove the two screws and move the circuit protector bracket.

Screws (2) (Loosen)

Circuit Protector Bracket

CD145



3. Disconnect the two wires from the circuit protector. Wires

4. Release the locking tabs and remove the circuit protector.

Installation Install the circuit protector in the reverse order of removal.

Circuit Protector

Locking Tabs

CD146



18.1.6 Power Supply Section Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove: • Left cover (see subsection 11.1.1). • Front lower cover (see subsection 18.1.1). 2. Remove the screw and the grounding wire. 3. Remove the screws and disconnect the power supply wires from the input terminal block (TB1). 4. Remove the four screws and pull out the power supply section bracket.


Wires

Input Terminal Block (TB1) Screws

Power Supply Section Bracket Screw/Grounding Wire

CD151



18.1.7 Relay (K1 to K6) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the power supply section bracket (see subsection 18.1.6).

Connectors (6) Screws (2)

K1

K3

2. Disconnect the six connectors from the relay. 3. Remove the two screws and then the relay.

K2

Installation Install the relay in the reverse order of removal.

K4

K5 K6

CD152



18.1.8 SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the power supply section bracket (see subsection 18.1.6).

SSR3

SSR2

2. Remove the four screws and disconnect the four wires from the SSR. 3. Remove the two screws and then the SSR.

SSR3

Installation Install the SSR in the reverse order of removal.

Screws (4) Screws (2)

CD153



18.1.9 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP14) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the power supply section bracket (see subsection 18.1.6). Screws (3) (Loosen)

2. Open the six clamps and remove the harnesses from them. 3. Loosen the three screws, remove one screw and move the relay bracket.

Clamps (6) Screw (Remove)

CD154



4. Disconnect the wires from the circuit protector. 5. Release the locking tabs and remove the circuit protector.

Circuit Protector (CP11) Locking Tabs

Installation Install the circuit protector in the reverse order of removal.

CP12 CP13 Wires

CP14

CD155



18.1.10 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3)/Capacitor (C1 to C3) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the power supply section bracket (see subsection 18.1.6).

Bracket

2. Open the two clamps. 3. Loosen the three screws and move the bracket. Clamps

Screws (3)

CD156



4. Open the five clamps.

Clamps (5)

CD157



5. Remove the three terminal covers, loosen the six screws and disconnect the six OUT wires from the NFB2 to NFB4.

Screws (6)

Terminal Covers (3)

OUT Wires (6)

CD158



6. Remove the four nuts and disconnect the wires from the noise filter.

Screws (2)

Noise Filter (NF1)

7. Remove the two screws and then the noise filter.

NF3

NF2

Nuts (4)

CD159



8. Remove the two nuts and disconnect the capacitor wires from the noise filter.

Capacitor

Screws

Nuts

9. Remove the screw and then the capacitor.

Installation Install the capacitor and noise filter in the reverse order of removal.

CD160



18.1.11 Step Down Transformer Replacement Removal 1. Remove the power supply section bracket (see subsection 18.1.6).

Screws (10)

Screws (2) (Remove)

2. Remove the ten terminal screws on the step down transformer terminal block and disconnect the wires. 3. Loosen the two screws, remove the two screws and then the transformer.

Wires

CD161




200N 200L

200V

210L

210V

220L

220V

230L

230V

240L

240V

NOTE: Connect the wires correctly.

E 100N1D 100N1U 100L1D 100L1U 100N2-D 100N2-U 100L2-D 100L2-U 200N2 200L2

100V

100V



18.1.12 PAC22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the front lower cover (see subsection 18.1.1).

Circuit Board Spacers (6)

2. Disconnect all connectors from the PAC22 circuit board. 3. Release the locking tabs of the six circuit board spacers and remove the circuit board.


PAC22 Circuit Board

CD147


18.2 DC Power Supply Section 18.2.1 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Shut down the system after performing the postoperational checks and turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply. Screws (11)

2. Remove the eleven screws and then the printer rear cover.

Reinstallation Reinstall the cover in the reverse order of removal. Printer Rear Cover

CD162


18.2 DC Power Supply Section

18.2.2 DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation Removal 1. Remove the printer rear cover (see subsection 18.2.1). 2. Remove the two screws and then the main control unit section harness cover.

Screws (2) Main Control Unit Section Cover

CD163



3. Remove the three screws and pull out the DC power supply bracket. NOTE: Open the harness clamps if necessary.

DC Power Supply Section Bracket Screws (3)

CD164



NOTE: Place the bracket on a suitable block to keep it to the installed height.


Block

CD875



18.2.3 LED Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the DC power supply bracket (see subsection 18.2.2).

Screws (4)

LED Circuit Board

2. Disconnect the two connectors from the LED circuit board. 3. Remove the four screws and then the LED circuit board.


Connectors

CD165



18.2.4 PWR22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal PWR22 Circuit Board

1. Remove the DC power supply bracket (see subsection 18.2.2). 2. Disconnect all connectors form the circuit board. 3. Remove the thirteen screws and then the circuit board.

Installation Install the circuit board in the reverse order of removal. Screws (13)

CD166



18.2.5 DC Power Supply Replacement Removal 1. Remove the DC power supply bracket (see subsection 18.2.2). 2. Disconnect all connectors from the PWR22 circuit board and DC power supplies.

Connectors

CD167



3. Remove the seven screws and then the DC power supply bracket.

DC Power Supply Bracket

Screws (7)

CD168



4. Remove the four screws and then the DC power supply from the bracket.

Installation

M4×8 Screws (2)

M4×6 Screws (6)

Toothed Washers (2)

Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Replace the wire harnesses from the old unit to a new unit one by one. • After installation, adjust DC voltages (see subsection 18.2.6).

CD169



18.2.6 DC Voltage Adjustment 1. Remove: • DC power supply bracket (see subsection 18.2.2). • Processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1).

Screws (7)

2. Remove the seven screws securing the DC power supply bracket.

CD874



3. Place a 2 cm spacer under the DC power supply bracket to raise the bracket.

Spacer (Approximately 2cm)

CD876



4. Turn ON the main power supply and the built-in circuit breaker. Start up the system. 5. Measure the voltage at the points shown in the “CD Voltage Check List” (see subsection 19.6.1).

A+12V

A+24V A+13V

A+20V

A+5V

P+5V

+24V0

+24V3

6. Adjust the voltage by turning the VR on the DC power supply. 7. Turn OFF the built-in circuit breaker and the main power supply.

A—13V A—12V D+3.3V P+8V +24V2 A—5V +24V1 A+8V D+5V +24V4

VR Location

8. Reinstall the removed parts. CD170


18.3 Image Processing Circuit Board Section 18.3.1 Image Processing Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing Opening 1. Remove the printer rear cover (see subsection 18.2.1).

Screws (4)

2. Remove the four screws and open the circuit board bracket.

Closing Close the bracket in the reverse order of opening.

Circuit Bracket

CD171


18.3 Image Processing Circuit Board Section

18.3.2 Printer Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F311/F312) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the printer rear cover (see subsection 18.2.1).


Auto Film Carrier Lock Lever

2. Remove the two screws and then the manual film carrier release lever. 3. Remove the screw and then the auto film carrier lock lever.

Screw Screws (2)

CD671



4. Remove the five screws and then the small table top cover.

Screws (5)

Table Top Small Cover

CD173



5. Remove the five screws and then the fan bracket.

Fan Bracket

Screws (5)

CD174



6. Disconnect the F311 and F312 connectors. Connectors

7. Open the clamp and remove the fan connectors from the bracket.

Screws (2)

8. Remove two screws each and then the fan guard and the fan. Clamp

Fan Guard Fan

Fan Guard

Screws (2) Fan

CD175




Arrow

NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan to the outside.

CD176



18.3.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313) Replacement Removal 1. Remove the printer rear cover (see subsection 18.2.1).

Screws (Loosen)

2. Loosen the two screws, remove the one screw and then the fan bracket.

Fan Bracket

Screw (Remove)

CD177



3. Disconnect the fan connector. 4. Open the clamp and remove the fan connector from the bracket.

Screws (2)

Connector

Fan Connector

5. Remove the two screws and then the fan guard.

Fan Guard Clamp

CD178



6. Remove the two screws and then the fan and fan guard from the bracket.

Fan (F313)

Fan Guard Screws (2)

CD179




Arrow

NOTE: Point the arrow of the fan to the outside.

Outside

CD180



18.3.4 Image Processing Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F217/F218) Replacement Removal 1. Open the image processing circuit board bracket (see subsection 18.3.1).

Screws (2) Fan Cover

2. Disconnect the two connectors. 3. Remove the two screws and then the fan cover.

Connectors

CD181



4. Remove the fan connectors from the fan cover. Fan Cover Connectors

5. Remove the two screws and then the fan.

Fan (F217)

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Install the fan with the arrow pointing up.

Up

Screws (2) Fan (F218)

Screws (2)

CD182



18.3.5 GHT22/GIA22/GPA22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Open the image processing circuit board bracket (see subsection 18.3.1).

Fan Connectors Clamp

2. Disconnect the five connectors from the circuit board box. 3. Disconnect the two fan connectors and open the clamp. Connectors (5)

CD1089



4. Loosen the four screws and remove the circuit board box from the bracket. Circuit Board Box

Screws (4)

CD183



5. Remove the thirteen screws and then the circuit board box cover.

Circuit Board Box Cover

Screws (13)

CD1090



6. Loosen the two screws and then the circuit board holder. Screws (2)

Circuit Board Holder

CD184



7. Release the locks and remove the circuit boards.

Locks

Connector

8. Disconnect the connector from the GHT22 circuit board.

GPA22 Circuit Board

GIA22 Circuit Board

CHT22 Circuit Board

CD185



Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: • Connect the harness connector to the GHT22 circuit board securely. • Insert each circuit board into the connector on the GMB22 circuit board securely.

GHT22 Circuit Board Locks

Connector

CD1091



• Align the GPA22, GIA22 and GHT22 circuit boards with the grooves in the circuit board holder and install the holder while depressing it lightly.

Circuit Board Holder

• Install the system software when the GHT22 circuit board has been replaced (see section 4.3).

GPA22 Circuit Board

GIA22 Circuit Board

GHT22 Circuit Board CD1092



18.3.6 GMB22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal

Screws (12)

1. Remove the GHT22, GIA22 and GPA22 circuit boards (see subsection 18.3.5). 2. Remove the twelve screws and then the GMB22 circuit board.


GMB22 Circuit Board CD187



18.3.7 CTC22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Open the image processing circuit board bracket (see subsection 18.3.1). 2. Disconnect all connectors from the CTC22 circuit board. 3. Remove the nine screws and then the circuit board.

Screws (9)

Installation Install the circuit board in the reverse order of removal. After installation, perform followings. 1) System software reinstallation (see section 4.3). 2) Menu 43L “LED Light Amount Adjustment” (see subsection 5.4.15).

CTC22 Circuit Board

CD188



18.3.8 Pulse Motor Driver Replacement Removal 1. Remove the printer rear cover (see subsection 18.2.1).

Connector

Motor Driver

2. Disconnect the DR1 and DR2 connectors. 3. Remove the two screws and then the motor driver.

Installation Install the motor driver in the reverse order of removal. Screws (2)

CD189



18.3.9 LDA22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the F313 fan bracket (see subsection 18.3.3). 2. Disconnect the DR1 and DR2 connectors from the motor driver and open the clamp.

Screws (Loosen)

Connectors

3. Loosen the two screws and remove one screw and then the cover. Screws (Remove) Clamp

CD190



4. Disconnect the R, G and B cables and all connectors from the circuit board.

B Cable

G Cable

R Cable Screws (2)

5. Remove the six screws and then the circuit board.


LDA22 Circuit Board

CD191



18.3.10 LDD22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal Screws (7)

1. Remove the LDA22 circuit board (see subsection 18.3.9).

Spacers (6)

2. Disconnect all connectors from the circuit board. 3. Remove the seven screws and six spacers and then the circuit board.

LDD22 Circuit Board


CD192



18.3.11 Start Switch Replacement Removal 1. Remove the F313 fan bracket (see subsection 18.3.3). 2. Disconnect the DR1 and DR2 connectors from the motor driver and open the clamp.

Screws (Loosen)

Connectors

3. Loosen the two screws and remove one screw and then the cover. Screws (Remove) Clamp

CD190



4. Disconnect the POSW connector. POSW Connector

Locking Tabs

5. Release the locking tabs and remove the start switch.


Start Switch

CD469


18.4 Main Control Unit Section 18.4.1 Main Control Unit Replacement Removal Main Control Unit

1. Remove: • Left cover (see subsection 11.1.1). • Printer rear cover (see subsection 18.2.1). 2. Pull the main control unit slightly toward the left side.

Cables

3. Disconnect all cables from the main control unit. 4. Remove the main control unit.

CD197


18.4 Main Control Unit Section

Installation 1. Insert the main control unit from the left side halfway.

Main Control Unit

CD058



(2) Mouse Cable

2. Connect the cables to the main control unit in the order listed below.

(1) Keyboard Cbale

(5) UPS Serial Cable (optional) (COM2)

(10) Power Supply Cable

(1) Keyboard cable (2) Mouse cable (3) USB-A cables (4) PC Ethernet cable (5) COM2-UPS serial cable (6) COM1 cable (7) PC2 cable (8) CRT cable (9) PCON cable (10) Power supply cable

(4) PC Ethrnet Cable

(3) USB-A Cable

3. Make sure the power switch on the main control unit is ON.

Power Switch

(6) To Outside (COM1 Cable) (8) To Monitor (CRT Cable)

(9) Power Control Serial Cable (PCON) (7) SCSI Cable to Image Processing Section (PC2) CD969



4. Push the main control unit all the way in. 5. Install the system software (see section 4.4).

Main Control Unit

CD063



18.4.2 UPS Battery (Optional) Replacement Removal 1. Loosen the two screws and then the battery cover.

Screws (2)

Battery Cover

CD060



2. Remove the UPS battery from the battery cover.

Installation

UPS Battery

1. Install a new UPS battery to the battery cover.

Battery Cover

CD061



2. Install the UPS battery/cover to the main control unit and tighten the two screws.

UPS Battery/Cover

3. When an UPS battery has been newly installed, proceed to the following “UBS Setup”.

Screws (2)

CD062



1) Select “4 Setup and Maintenance” → “10 Special Operations” → “B Explorer”.



2) Double click “Control Panel”.



3) Double click “RICHO UPS Service”. 4) Click [start] when optional UPS battery is used. Click [stop] when no optional UPS battery is used. 5) Click [exit]. 6) Close “Explorer”.


18.5 Control Circuit Board Section 18.5.1 PDC22 Circuit Board Replacement Removal 1. Remove the processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1).

Screws (12)

2. Disconnect all connectors from the PDC22 circuit board. 3. Remove the twelve screws and then the circuit board.


PDC22 Circuit Board

CD249


18.5 Control Circuit Board Section

18.5.2 CTP22 Circuit Board Replacement Screws (12)

Lithium Battery

Removal 1. Remove the processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1). 2. Disconnect all connectors from the CTP22 circuit board. 3. Remove the twelve screws and then the circuit board.

CTP22 Circuit Board CD250

• When the CTP22 circuit board needs replacing, always replace its assembly entirely. • Do not try to replace the lithium battery for data backup. Incorrect battery replacement may cause explosion.



• Return the old CTP22 circuit board to the FUJIFILM's factory.

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Change the jumper plug (J2) from 1-2 (OFF) to 2-3 (Backup).

After installation, reinstall the system software (see section 4.3). Jumper Plug J2 NOTE: If the system does not start up, proceed to “Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22 Circuit Board Discharged” (see subsection 18.5.3).

CTP22 Circuit Board

CD064



18.5.3 Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22 Circuit Board Discharged. NOTE: If the machine does not start up due to discharged backup battery, follow the steps below to start up.

Battery

1. Remove the processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1). 2. Measure the voltage between the TP17 (GND) and the battery positive (+) terminal on the CTP22 circuit board.

CTP20 Circuit Board

CD970



3. If the voltage is less than 2.5V, remove the front lower cover (see subsection 18.1.1).

PAC22 Circuit Board

Jumper Connector

4. Disconnect the jumper connector from the PAC18 connector on the PAC22 circuit board and connect it to the PAC19 connector.

PAC18

PAC19

CD077



5. Press the start switch to start up the machine. 6. After starting up the machine, return the jumper connector to the PAC18 connector.

PAC18

PAC19

7. Reinstall the removed parts. 8. In the menu 45U “Data Download” screen, select “All” and click [OK].

Jumper Connector

CD078



18.5.4 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406) Replacement Removal Connector Cover

1. Remove: • Processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1). • Dryer fan section cover (see subsection 17.3.1). 2. Loosen the two screws and remove the connector cover.

Screws (2)

CD251



3. Disconnect the F406 connector and open the clamp.

F406 Connector

Clamp

CD252




Fan (F406)

Fan Guard

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan to the outside.

Screws (2)

Arrow

CD253



18.5.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317) Replacement Removal Connector Cover

1. Remove: • Processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1). • Dryer fan section cover (see subsection 17.3.1). 2. Loosen the two screws and remove the connector cover.

Screws (2)

CD251



3. Disconnect the F317 connector and open the clamp.

F317 Connector

Clamp

CD254



4. Remove the three screws and then the fan bracket. Fan Bracket

Screws (3)

CD255



5. Remove the two screws and then the fan guard and fan. Fan Guard Screws (2)

CD256



Screws (2)


Fan Guard

NOTE: Point the arrow on the fan outward.

Fan (F317)

Arrow CD257



18.5.6 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1 (F306/F307) Replacement Removal Fan Bracket

1. Remove the processor rear cover (see subsection 15.3.1). 2. Remove the two screws and then the fan bracket.

Screws (2)

CD258



3. Disconnect the F306 and F307 connectors. F307

F306

CD259



4. Open the clamp. 5. Remove the four screws and then the fan guard and the fan.

Arrow Fan Guard Fan (F307)

Installation Installation is essentially in the reverse order of removal. Clamp NOTE: Point the arrow of the fan to the outside.

Fan (F306) Screws (4)

CD260


19. ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS 19.1

Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams

19.1.1 19.1.2 19.1.3 19.1.4

Input Power Supply Section Printer Rear Section Processor Rear Section Scanner Section

19.2

Block Diagram

19.3

Wiring Diagrams

19.3.1 19.3.2 19.3.3 19.3.4 19.3.5 19.3.6 19.3.7 19.3.8 19.3.9 19.3.10 19.3.11 19.3.12 19.3.13 19.3.14 19.3.15

AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram CCD22/ADC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram CTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram CTP22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram LDD22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram LTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram PAC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram Main Control Unit Wiring Diagram PDC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram PZR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Laser Unit) Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Sensors and Mechanical System) Image Processing Circuit Board Wiring Diagram Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Wiring Diagram

19.4

Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams

19.4.1 19.4.2

PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram PDC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram

19.5

List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC Power Supply Unit

19.5.1 19.5.2 19.5.3 19.5.4 19.5.5 19.5.6

DC Power System List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PAC22 Circuit Board List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PDC22 Circuit Board List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTP22 Circuit Board List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTC22 Circuit Board List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CYS22 Circuit Board

19.6

DC Voltage Adjustment

19.6.1 19.6.2

DC Voltage Check List Potentiometers Used to Adjust the DC Power Supply Voltages


19.1 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams 19.1.1 Input Power Supply Section Terminal Block (TB4) Relays (K1 to K6) Step Down Transformer

Capacitors (C1 to C3) Noise Filters (NF1 to NF3)

5 3 1

1 Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1)

6 4 2

1 2

2

3

3 SSR3 SSR2 SSR1 Circuit Protectors (CP1 to CP10)

13 579 2 4 6 8 10 2

3

4 11 14 12 13

Terminal Block (TB2) Leakage Breakers Power Supply Terminal (NFB2 to NFB4) Block (TB1)

Power Supply Connection Label


PAC22 Circuit Board CD823B


19.1 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams

19.1.2 Printer Rear Section

Image Processing Section Cooling Fans 1/2 (F217/F218)

GIA22 Circuit Board

Printer Exhaust Fans 1/2 (F311/F312)

GHT22 Circuit Board

LDD22 Circuit Board

Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313)

GPA22 Circuit Boards (4 to 6)

Start Switch LDA22 Circuit Board Printer Suction Fans 1/2 (F308/F309)

GMB22 Circuit Board

Pulse Motor Driver CTC22 Circuit Board

Image Processing Circuit Board Section

Main Control Unit Section

DC Power Supply Unit (Alpha 600)

Main Control Unit DC Power Supply Section

DC Power Supply Unit (Alpha 400) PWR22 Circuit Board LED Circuit Board CD823A



19.1.3 Processor Rear Section Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406)

Printer Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317)

PDC22 Circuit Board

Control Circuit Board Section

CTP22 Circuit Board

Power Supply Section Exhaust Fans 1 (F306/F307) CD824



19.1.4 Scanner Section

ADC22 Circuit Board PZR22 Circuit Board

LTC22 Circuit Board

CD825

Lens PZR22 Circuit Board (See 19.3.11)

LTC22 Circuit Board (See 19.3.7)

Mouse Keyboard

Densitometer

PDC22 Circuit Board (DC Driver) (See 19.3.10)

PWR22 Circuit Board (See 19.3.2)

Main Control Unit (See 19.3.9)

GPA22 Circuit Board

(See 19.3.15)

GPA22 Circuit Board

GHT22 Circuit Board

GPA22 Circuit Board

Manual Film Carrier M69D

GPA22 Circuit Board

GMB22 Circuit Board (See 19.3.14)

GPA22 Circuit Board

CYS22 Circuit Board (Auto Film Carrier NC100AC)

Monitor

Image Processing Section GIA22 Circuit Board

(See 19.3.2)

PWR22 Circuit Board

Heaters Pumps Dryer Fan

PAC22 Circuit Board (AC Driver) (See 19.3.8)

(See 19.3.1)

Power Supply Section

Interlock Information

Laser Unit (See 19.3.12) (See 19.3.13)

Interlock Information

JML22 Circuit Board (See 19.3.12)

AOM-B

AOM-G

CTP22 Circuit Board (Printer and Processor Control) (See 19.3.5)

LDD22 Circuit Board (See 19.3.6) (See 19.3.12)

LDA22 Circuit Board (See 19.3.12)

Sensors of Printer and Processor

Motors Solenoids Fans

GPA22 Circuit Board

CTC22 Circuit Board (Carrier and Scanner Control) (See 19.3.4)

ADC22 Circuit Board

CCD22 Circuit Board (See 19.3.3)

LED22 Circuit Board

Scanner Section

PWR22 Circuit Board (See 19.3.2)


19.2 Block Diagram


19.3 Wiring Diagrams 19.3.1 AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

A ORG BLK

Electrical Wiring Diagram

BLK

BLK

WHT

WHT

Power Supply Section Wiring Diagram (for a Three-phase Four-wire System)

ORG BLK

BLK

B

WHT RED

RED

ORG

ORG

BRN

BRN

BLU

BLU

YEL

BLK

BLK

WHT

WHT

BLK WHT

YEL

BLK

BLK

WHT BLK

WHT

BLK

WHT

To the DC power supply unit

RED

WHT

BLK

BLK WHT

C

To the dryer heater A

GRN/YEL

RED BLK

D

Power Supply Section Wiring Diagram (for a Single-phase System)

RED

RED

ORG

ORG

BRN

BRN

BLU

To the dryer heater B

YEL YEL YEL

BLU

BLK

BLK

WHT

WHT

BLK

BLK

WHT

WHT

BLK

BLK

WHT

BLK WHT BLK

WHT

WHT

E

Panel

BLK BLK

WHT ORG

WHT BLK

GRN/YEL

GRN/YEL

BLK

BLK

BLK

WHT

WHT

WHT

To the PC (100 VAC) ORG

Solution heater A ( )

BLK BLK

ORG

F

Power Supply Section Wiring Diagram (for a Three-phase Three-wire System)

RED

RED

ORG

ORG

BRN

BRN

BLU

BLU

WHT

BLK

YEL YEL

BLK

BLK

BLK

BLK

Solution heater B

WHT

WHT

WHT

WHT

(

BLK

BLK

WHT YEL

BLK WHT

)

BLK

BLK

WHT

WHT

RED

WHT

Panel

BLK

Dryer fan

Transformer

G

BLK WHT GRN/YEL

Panel

H

To the 100 VAC-related loads in the PAC circuit board

G

H 1 2

2 1 3 4 JSA8 JSA8 3 4

3 4 5 6 7 8 CCD2 CCD2

CCD2 5 6 7

5 6 7

6 3 2 4 1 5 ADC2 ADC2

ADC2 To CTC_2/3_JCA8

2 3

N.C

1 4 7 LDD2 LDD2 8 10 9 5 6

LDD22 5 7 1 3 2 4 6 LDD1 LDD1 1 2 LTC1 LTC1

LTC22

N.C

PWR13 PWR13 8 9 10 11121314

PWR22 Circuit Board (1/2)

PWR12 PWR12 1 13 2 14 3 15 4 16 5 17 6 18 7 19 8 20 9 21 10 22 11 23 12 24

3 4

(ORG) (BLK)

+9V GND

N.C N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK)

To PAC22_PAC16

1 2 JNDL2 JNDL2 1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213 1415 16 17 18 PWR17 PWR17

N,C N,C

N.C N.C

1 2 3 4 JPS2 JPS2 1 2 3 4

N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C

N,C N,C

24V GND

(ORG) (BLK)

8

D416A/D416BD416x_RTN N.C N.C

+24v30 +24v31 +23v32 GND-24V3 +24v41 +24v42 +24v43 GND-24V4 GND-24V4 +24v30 +24v31 +24v32 GND-24V3 +24v41 +24v42 +24v43 GND-24V4 GND-24V4

(RED) (BLK)

1 2

N.C

N.C N.C

P+5V1 GND_5P P+9V1 GND_9P N.C P+5V1 GND_5P P+9V1 GND_9P N.C

To PAC22_PAC16

N.C

6 7

(BLU) (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5

N.C (BLK)

1 2

(ORG) (BLK) N.C

To CTC_2/3_JCA3

(RED)

N.C

(RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK)

1 2

P+5V1 GND-5P P+9V1 P+9V2 GND-9P N.C N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK)

CTC3 CTC3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

+24V13 GND-24V1

N.C

N,C

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

N.C N.C N.C N.C

+24V01 GND_24V0 +24V11 GND_24V1 +24V01 GND_24V0 +24V11 GND_24V1

1 2 NDL NDL 1 2

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

A+24V1 A+24V1 A+24V2 A+24V2 GND-24A GND-24A A+8V1 A+8V1 A+8V2 A+8V2 GND-8A GND-8A A+13V1 A+13V1 A+13V2 A+13V2 A+13V3 A+13V3 GND-13A GND-13A GND-13A GND-13A A-13V A-13V

N,C N,C

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK) (ORG) (BLK)

1 2 JPS1 JPS1 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

PWR11 PWR11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324

P+5V1 GND-5P P+9V1 P+9V2 GND-9P

GND-24V2 +24V01 +24V02 GND-24V0 +24V11

1112 131415

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

N.C N.C

N.C

N,C N,C N,C N,C N,C

N,C N,C N,C N,C

N,C

N,C

(BLK)

D+5V2 GND_5D D+5V2 GND_5D

Vcc Vcc +24V1_on/off P+9V_on/off P+5V2_on/off GND(DGND)

D+5V DGND

JCA9 JCA9

(RED) (BLK)

+24V12 GND-24V1 +24V21 +24V22 +24V23 GND-24V2 GND-24V2

16171819202122 PWR15 PWR15

(RED) (BLK) N.C

(ORG) (BLK) N.C

(BLK) (BLK) (BLU) N.C

(RED) N.C

A+24V1 A+24V2 GND-24A A+8V1 A+8V2 GND-8A A+13V1 A+13V2 A+13V3 GND-13A GND-13A A-13V A+24V1 A+24V2 GND-24A A+8V1 A+8V2 GND-8A A+13V1 A+13V2 A+13V3 GND-13A GND-13A A-13V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(BLK)

(BLK) (RED) N.C

PWR10 PWR10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

(ORG)N.C

+24V01 +24V02 GND-24V0 +24V11 +24V12 GND-24V1 +24V21 +24V22 +24V23 GND-24V2

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 5 9 10 PWR8 PWR8

N.C N.C N.C

N,C

(RED) (RED) (RED) (BLK) (BLK)

N.C N.C

CTC4 CTC4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

7

-13V GND

To CTC_2/3_JCA7

N.C


N.C

N,C

N,C N,C To CTC_2/3_JCA6

6

+13V GND

7 13 14

N.C N.C N.C

6 12 CTC2 CTC2 1 2 3 4

IL24I I24GI IL+13I I13GI N.C N.C N.C

7 13 14

D+5V1 D+5V1 D+5V2 D+5V2 D+5V3 D+5V3 GND-5D GND-5D GND-5D GND-5D

(RED) (RED) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (BLK)

C

(RED) (BLK) (BLU)

(RED) (BLK) (BLU)

A+20V GND-20A A+12V1 A+12V2 GND-12A A-12V1 A-12V2 A+5V GND-5A A-5V A+20A GND-20A A+12V1 A+12V2 GND-12A A-12V1 A-12V2 A+5V GND-5A A-5V

Vcc(D+5V2) Vcc(D+5V2) +24V1_on/off P+9V_on/off P+5V2_on/off GND(DGND) 1 2 3 4 5 6 PWR2 PWR2

5

13GI 13GI -13I G+8I G8GI

6 12

N.C N.C N.C

(RED) (BLK) (BLU)

N.C

(BLK) N.C

2 4 CTC5 CTC5 1 2 3 4 5 6 CTC22

+13I

2 9

(RED)N.C

CTP11 CTP11

4

B8GI

1 8 3 4 10 11 5 JSA5 JSA5 3 4 10 11 5

N.C

2 9

N.C

1 8

N.C

N.C

1 4 2 7 3 8 6 9 5 10 PWR7 PWR7

(RED) N,C (BLK) N,C

D+5V DGND

3

24GI B+8I

l+24I

1 4 2 5 3 8 6 9 7 10 BOX2 BOX2

N.C

(RED) (BLK) (BLU) N.C

(RED) (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314 PWR1 PWR1

N,C N,C N,C N,C

1 3

(RED) (BLK) (BLU)

(BLK) (BLU) N.C

D+5V1 GND-D5 D+5V2 D+5V2 D+5V3 D+5V3 D+5V1 GND-5D GND-5D GND-5D

CTP22

(RED) (BLK) (BLU)

1 2

(BLK) (BLU)

A+20V GND-20A A+12V1 A+12V2 GND-12A A-12V1 A-12V2 A+5V GND-5A A-5V A+20V GND-20A A+12V1 A+12V2 GND-12A A-12V1 A-12V2 A+5V GND-5A A-5V

N.C

N.C N.C

VCC(FU1) VCC(FU1) D322 D323 D324 D325 D416 D410 PINSP1 PINSP2 24VON PONSP1 PONSP2 PONSP3 GND GND

2

(RED) (BLK) N.C

Image Processing BOX

(BLK) (BLU) N.C (RED) (BLK) (BLU)

PWR9 PWR9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

(RED) (BLK)N.C N.C

(RED) (RED) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) N,C (GRY) (BLK) (BLK) CTP10 CTP10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 13141516

(RED) (BLK)

F Vcc(D+5V1) Vcc(D+5V1) D322 D323 D324A/D324B D325A/D325B D416A/D416B D410 +24V2_on/off +24V3_on/off +24V4_on/off N.C GND(DGND) GND(DGND)

B

(RED) (BLK)

D+3.3V1 GND-3.3D D+3.3V2 GND-3.3D D+3.3V3 GND-3.3D D+3.3V4 GND-3.3D D+3.3V5 GND-3.3D N.C GND-3.3D

1

A12V GND N.C A5V GND A-5V

A+20V GND-20A N.C N.C GND-12A A-12V1 N.C A+5V GND-5A A-5V

E PWR6 PWR6 1 7 2 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 6 12

(RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) N.C N.C

D

3.3V GND 3.3V GND 3.3V GND 3.3V GND 3.3V GND


19.3 Wiring Diagrams

19.3.2 PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/2) 9 10

A To PAC22_PAC16

Light table

To CTC22_2/3_CY2 PZR22

PZR1 PZR1 1 2 To PAC22

PAC15 1 2

1 2 3 JNDL1 JNDL1 1 2 3

1 3 2 4 PWR5 PWR5

11

F

G

H 1 4 2 5 3 6 PWR4 PWR4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 PWR16 PWR16 1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18 PWR18 PWR18

PWR22 Circuit Board (2/2)

(RED) (BLK)

PDC23 PDC23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

N.C

N.C

P+5V GND

P+24V43 GND N.C

P+24V41 GND P+24V42 GND

P+24V32 GND GND N.C N.C

P+24V31

P+24V23 GND

P+24V02 GND

P+24V22 GND

Dryer unit detecting interlock switch (V-152-1C26)

6 7

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

(ORG) (BLK)


PDC24 PDC24 3 2 4 5 6

N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

N.C N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

1

N.C N.C

(BLK) (BLK)

P+24V21 GND

GND

(YEL) (YEL)

5

N.C

5 6

(ORG) (BLK)

PDC22 PDC22 3 4 7 8

(ORG) (ORG)

(ORG) (BLK)

1 2

N.C N.C

1 4 10

N.C N.C

N.C

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

N.C

1 2 D416A D416A 1 2 9

N.C

1 2 D410A D410A 1 2 P+24V01

D416B

N.C N.C N.C

D

(BLK)

D410

N.C

D410 Dryer unit detecting interlock switch (V-152-1C26)

1 2 J416A J416A 1 2

4

P+5V1 P+5V1 GND-5P GND-5P P+9V1 P+9V1 P+9V2 P+9V2 GND-9P GND-9P N.C N.C N.C N.C

PWR3 PWR3 D416A

(BLK) (BLK)

Feed section upper door sensor (V-152-1C26)

Feed section lower door sensor (V-152-1C26)

3

+24V30 +24V30 +24V31 +24V31 +24V32 +24V32 GND-24V3 GND-24V3 +24V41 +24V41 +24V42 +24V42 +24V43 +24V43 GND-24V4 GND-24V4 GND-24V4 GND-24V4

4 8 (GRY) (BLK)

1 4

N.C N.C

D323

D323

(RED)

D324B

D324B

Replenisher door detecting interlock switch (V-152-1C26)

D324A

D324A

(YEL) (YEL)

D325B

D325B

+24V01 +24V02 GND-24VO +24V11 +24V12 GND-24V1 +24V21 +24V22 +24V23 GND-24V2 GND-24V2 +24V01 +24V02 GND-24V0 +24V11 +24V12 GND-24V1 +24V21 +24V22 +24V23 GND-24V2 GND-24V2

3 7 N.C

Feed section lower door sensor (V-152-1C26)

Front upper cover sensor (V-152-1C26)

Front upper cover sensor (V-152-1C26)

2

D416A/D416B+ D416A/D416BN.C N.C

3 6 2 5 JHA5 JHA5 2 5 (YEL) (YEL) N.C

(YEL)

N.C

D325A

D325A

(RED) (BLK)

N.C N.C

(YEL)

N.C

D322

D322

D410+ D410-

3 6

(RED) (BLK)

N.C N.C

(YEL)

(BLK)

N.C

Magazine door detecting interlock switch (V-152-1C26)

1

D323+ D323-

2 6 (RED) (BLK)

1 5

D324A/D324B+ D324A/D324B-

E (RED) (BLK)

N.C

C

(RED) (BLK)

B

D325A/D325B+ D325A/D325B-

D322+ D322-



PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (2/2) 8

A

PDC22

PDC25 PDC25 1 2

1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14 PWR14 PWR14

9 10 11



19.3.3 CCD22/ADC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

H

(BLK) (RED)

1 2

(BLK) (RED)

7 13 14 6

N.C N.C (BLU) (BLK) (RED) N.C (BLU) (BLK) N.C N.C (BLK) (RED)

A-5V GND-5A A+5V A-12V2 A-12V1 GND-12A A+12V2 A+12V1 GND-20A A+20V A-5V GND-5A A+5V A-12V2 A-12V1 GND-12A A+12V2 A+12V1 GND-20A A+20V


GND GND SCK(+) SCK(-) SDTW(-) SDTW(+) SDTR(+) SDTR(-) /HD(-) /HD(+) CLK(+) CLK(-) DIN12(-) DIN12(+) DIN11(+) DIN11(-) DIN10(-) DIN10(+) DIN9(+) DIN9(-) DIN8(-) DIN8(+) DIN7(+) DIN7(-) DIN6(-) DIN6(+) DIN5(+) DIN5(-) DIN4(-) DIN4(+) DIN3(+) DIN3(-) DIN2(-) DIN2(+) DIN1(+) DIN1(-) DIN0(-) DIN0(+) GND GND

PWR22 Circuit Board

(BLK) (RED)

5 6 7

7 1314

1 212 223 234 245 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 2910 3011 3112 3213 33 1434 1535 1636 17 3718 3819 3920 40 BOX1 BOX1

(BLK) (RED)

3 4 JSA8 JSA8 3 4

2 1

GND A+20V

CCD2 CCD2 3 4 5 6 7 8

G

N.C

(RED) N.C N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1314 1516 1718 1920 PWR9 PWR9

5 6 7

N.C N.C (BLU) (BLK) (RED)

2 9

6

(RED)

(BLU) (BLK) (RED)

N.C N.C (BLK)

(BLK)

UL1007 18AWG

A12V

A-5V GND A+5V N.C A-12V GND

N.C

1 2

GND GND

(BLU) (BLK) (RED)

1 8

F

(BLU) (BLK) (RED)

6

A-5V GND A5V

3 4 10 11 12 5 JSA5 JSA5 3 4 10 1112 5

SDTWSDTW+ SCKSCK+ SDTRSDTR+ SYNCSYNC+ IDCKIDCK+ ADCKADCK+

2 9

1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 ADC3 ADC3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 JSA9 JSA9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

(BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY)

N.C N.C N.C

1 8

E

CCD22 Circuit Board

D

SDTWSDTW+ SCKSCK+ SDTRSDTR+ HDHD+ IDCKIDCK+ ADCKADCK+

CCD3 CCD3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

C

ADC2 ADC2 4 1 5 3 2

SIG

ADC22 Circuit Board

CCD1 CCD1

CCDOS

ADC1 ADC1

B

GND GND SCK(+) SCK(-) SDTW(-) SDTW(+) SDTR(+) SDTR(-) /HD(-) /HD(+) CLK(+) CLK(-) DIN12(-) DIN12(+) DIN11(+) DIN11(-) DIN10(-) DIN10(+) DIN9(+) DIN9(-) DIN8(-) DIN8(+) DIN7(+) DIN7(-) DIN6(-) DIN6(+) DIN5(+) DIN5(-) DIN4(-) DIN4(+) DIN3(+) DIN3(-) DIN2(-) DIN2(+) DIN1(+) DIN1(-) DIN0(-) DIN0(+) GND GND

ADC4 ADC4 1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 1030 11 3112 3213 3314 34 1535 1636 1737 1838 19 3920 40

A

11

H D211 D212 D213

F 1 2 3 JSA6 JSA6 1 2 3 1 2 3 JSA7 JSA7 1 2 3

1 2 3 D214 1 2 3 D215

D214 D215 CTC14 CTC14

D204/ F201 D216/ F216 1 4 2 5 3 6 M201 M201 1 4 2 5 3 6

(RED) (YEL) (BLU) (ORG)

1 7 2 8

CTC16 CTC16 3 9 4 10

M201 1 5 2 6 JSA4 JSA4

1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8

3 7 4 8

1 2 3 F217 F217 1 2 3 1 2 3 F218 F218 1 2 3

1 5 2 6 3 4 M202 M202 1 5 2 6 3 4 1 5 2 6 3 4 M203 M203 1 5 2 6 3 4

M202 M203

CTC15 CTC15

D217/ F217

4 5 6 7

D218/ F218

PZ201+ PZ201PZ202+ PZ202PZON+ PZONERR201 DGND ERR202 DGND ERRPZR DGND DGND DGND

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK)

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) N.C N.C

LTC4 CTC11 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PZR2 PZR2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CTC4 CTC4 1 2 3 4 5 6 CTC5 CTC5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LTC4 CTC11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 CTC13 CTC13

CTC17 CTC17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 141516

VCC2 IAUX0 GND(DGND) GND(DGND) VCC2 IAUX1 GND(DGND) GND(DGND)

OAUX0-(VCC) GND(DGND) OAUX0 GND(DGND) OAUX1-(VCC) GND(DGND) OAUX1 GND(DGND) OAUX2-(VCC) GND(DGND) OAUX2 GND(DGND) OAUX3-(VCC) GND(DGND) OAUX3 GND(DGND)

LH201+ LH201D203A GND(DGND) D203B GND(DGND) D203C GND(DGND) D203D GND(DGND)

(RED) (RED) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (BLK)

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

N.C

N.C

X-axis on+ X-axis onY-axis on+ Y-axis onPWONon+ PWONonX-axis SNG GND Y-axis SNG GND Power NG GND

LH201(+) LH201(-) D203A(+) D203A(-) D203B(+) D203B(-) D203C(+) D203C(-) D203D(+) D203D(-)

Vcc(D+5V2) Vcc(D+5V2) +24V1_on/off P+9V_on/off P+5V2_on/off GND(DGND)

+24V01 +24V012 GND-24V0 +24V11 +24V12 GND-24V1 +24V21 +24V22 +24V23 GND-24V2 GND-24V2 +24V01 +24V02 GND-24V0 +24V11 +24V12 GND-24V1 +24V21 +24V22 +24V23 GND-24V2 GND-24V2

LTC22 Circuit Board

8

Spare output circuitry for the Light Source and Scanner sections

1 2 3

M24V0 PGND D218 N.C

D M24V0 PGND D217

M203-A M203-/A M203-B M203-/B

Vcc Vcc +24V1_on/off P+9V_on/off P+5V2_on/off DGND

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK)

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

N.C

N.C

PWR2 PWR2 1 2 3 4 5 6

7

Spare output circuitry for the Light Source and Scanner sections

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY) N.C

1 2 3 JSA3 JSA3 1 2 3

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY)

5 11 6 12


M202-A M202-/A M202-B M202-/B

M201-A M201-/A M201-B M201-/B

(ORG) (BLK) (ORG) (BLK) N.C N.C N.C N.C

6

Image processing section cooling fan 2 (109P0824H2D01)

1 2 3 F216 F216 1 2 3

5

Image processing section cooling fan 1 (109P0824H2D01)

4 5 6

(RED) (BLU) (YEL) (ORG)

+24V01 GND_24V0 +24V11 GND_24V1 +24V01 GND_24V0 +24V11 GND_24V1

(RED) (BLK) N.C N.C

N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

PWR15 PWR15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

(RED) (YEL) (BLU) N.C (ORG) N.C

1 2 3 F201 F201 1 2 3

M24VO PGND D216

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CTC3 CTC3

Shutter drive motor

E (ORG) (BLK) (GRY)

To PAC

(ORG)

4 5 6

(RED) (BLK) To PZR

N.C N.C

4 5 6 1 2 3

UL1007 24AWG

(BLK)

PWR13 PWR13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

(RED) (YEL) (BLU)

1 2 3

P+5V1 GND-5P P+9V1 P+9V2 GND-9P +24v13 GND-24v1 P+5V1 GND-5P P+9V1 P+9V2 GND-9P N.C N.C

D+5V2 GND-5D D+5V1 D+5V1 D+5V2 GND-5D D+5V3 GND-5D D+5V3 GND-5D


N.C N.C

13 1415 16

4

Lens drive motor

JSA2 JSA2

N.C

(RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK)

N.C N.C N.C N.C

GND CTC_RXD CTC_TXD /CTC_IRQ /CTC_INT GND IN PORT1 OUT PORT1 IN PORT2 OUT PORT2

3

Conjugate length variable motor

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY)

1 2 3 4 CTC2 CTC2


(RED) (BLK) (RED)

C To the light table

M24V0 PGND D204

P+5V1 GND_5P P+9V1 GND_9P N.C P+5V1 GND_5P P+9V1 GND_9P N.C

(RED) (BLK)

To CY1 To CY2

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY)

VCC2 D215 GND(DGND) GND(DGND)

VCC D214 GND(DGND)

N.C N.C

PWR8 PWR8 2 4 1 6 7 9 3 5 8 10

Scanner cooling fan sensor (109P0824H4D01)

101112

(RED) (GRY) (BLK) N.C

UL1007 26AWG (RED) (GRY) (BLK)

D+5V2 GND_5D D+5V2 GND_5D

(BLK) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (BLK) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK)

2

Light source cooling fan sensor (109BF24HD2-2)

7 8 9 10

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

1 2 3 D213 1 2 3

(GRY) (BLK)

7 8 9 10

(RED)

N.C

CTC12 CTC12 7 8 9

Shutter home position sensor (GP1A73A)

4 5 6 JSA1 JSA1 4 5 6

VCC2 D213 GND(DGND)

(BLK) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (BLK) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 JGM1 JGM1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5 6

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

GND(DGND) TxD RxD int out int in GND(DGND) GMB_out1 GMB_in1 GMB_out2 GMB_in2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CTC1 CTC1

(GRY) (BLK)

N.C

1 2 3

VCC2 D212 GND(DGND)

VCC2 D211 GND(DGND)

BOX5 BOX5 5 2 1 4 3 17 7 6 9 8

Lens home position sensor (GP1A75E)

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

1 2 3 D212

Conjugate length variable lower limit sensor (GP1A73A)

1 2 3

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

1

(RED)

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

1 2 3 D211

Conjugate length variable upper limit sensor (GP1A73A)

G (RED) (GRY) (BLK)

B

Conjugate length variable home position sensor (GP1A73A)



19.3.4 CTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/3) 9 10

A PWR22 Circuit Board

PZR22 Circuit Board

To CY1 To CTC22_CY2

CT22 Circuit Board (1/3)

CTC18 CTC18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

11

G

H E CTC27 CTC27

1 2 D121 D121 1 2 1 2 D122 D122 1 2

D121 D122

3 4

CTC30 CTC30 1 2 3 4 5 1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18 CTC26 CTC26

CTC31 CTC31 1 2 3 4 5

7 8 9 10 11 12 JCA2 JCA2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18 JCA6 JCA6 1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18

1 2 JCA6 JCA6 1 2

To PWR8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 JCA1 JCA1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CTC22 Circuit Board (2/3)

To PWR10

D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 CTC23 CTC23

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314 15161718 CTC24 CTC24

2 18 3 1632


To PWR8

(RED) (BLK) N.C N.C N.C N.C

To PWR10

GND(FGND)

+24V12 GND-24V1

A+12V2 GND-12A A-12V2

D+5V3 GND(DGND)

7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314 JCA4 JCA4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 1314 1 2 JCA3 JCA3 1 2

1 2 3 4 JCA8 JCA8 1 2 3 4

1 4 2 3 5 6 JCA9 JCA9 1 4 2 3 5 6

To PWR15

(BLK)

1 17

(RED) (BLK)

NCC0 GND(DGND) NCC1 GND(DGND) NCC2 GND(DGND) NCC3 GND(DGND) NCC4 GND(DGND) key1 key2 BRS+(key3) BRS-(key_com)

RxD+ RxDCTS+ CTSTxD+ TxdRTS+ RTS/RPQ /RPQ-RTN

GND(FGND)

A+12V2 GND-12A A-12V2

D+5V3 GND-5D

Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK)

M4 round ground terminal

1 2 3 4 JCA7 JCA7 1 2 3 4

(BLK)

CY2 CY2 1026112712 2813291430 8 24 1531

23

6

N.C N.C N.C N.C

D123

4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 9 25


2 22 3


1 21

N.C

CY1 CY1 13 33 14 34 9 29 10 30 15 35 16 3611 31 12 321737

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) N.C N.C N.C N.C

1 2 JCA10 JCA10 1 2

M4 round ground terminal

18 38 19 39 20 40

5

NCC0 GND(DGND) NCC1 GND(DGND) NCC2 GND(DGND) NCC3 GND(DGND) NCC4 GND(DGND) key1 key2 key3 key COM N.C N.C N.C N.C

(RED) (BLK)

M101-A M101-/A M101B M101-/B M102-A M102-/A M102-B M102-/B M103-A M103-/A M103-B M103-/B M104-A M104-/A M104-B M104-/B S101+ S101-

4

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) N.C N.C

N.C

(BRN) (RED) (ORG) (YEL) (BRN) (RED) (ORG) (YEL) (BRN) (RED) (ORG) (YEL) (BRN) (RED) (ORG) (YEL) (ORG) (BLK)

SIO2+ SIO2SCLK2+ SCLK2RST2+ RST2-

3

TxD+ TxDRTS+ RTSRxD+ RxDCTS+ CTS/PRQ RQ-RTN GND(DGND) GND(DGND)

(RED) (YEL) (BLU) (ORG) (RED) (YEL) (BLU) (ORG) (RED) (YEL) (BLU) (ORG) (RED) (YEL) (BLU) (ORG) (ORG) (BLK)

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5 6

13 14 15 16 17 18

GND(DGND) TxD RxD RTS CTS

M101-A M101-/A M101-B M101-/B M102-A M102-/A M102-B M102-/B M103-A M103-/A M103-B M103-/B M104-A M104/A M104-B M104-/B S101+ S101-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213 CTC22 CTC22

GND(DGND) TxD RxD Int_out Int_in

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

SW1 SW1-RTN D123A D123A_RTN

SIO+ SIOSCLK+ CLKRST+ RST-

2

Serial communication I/F for debugging the Carrier CPU

1 2

D122 DGND

DIO+ DIOCLK+ CLKCRES+ CRESGND(DGND) SW1 GND(DGND) D123A D123A_RTN D123B D123_RTN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213 CTC21 CTC21

Serial communication I/F for debugging the CTC22 and GMB22 (GHT22)

(GRY) (BLK)

CTC25 CTC25 1 2 3 4 5 6

D121 DGND

UL1007 26AWG

4 24 5 25

(GRY) (BLK)


1 2 3 4 5 6


1

135 carrier position sensor

F (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) N.C (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK)

C 6 26 7 27 8 28

IX 240 carrier position sensor

DIO+ DIOCLK+ CLKCRES+ CRESGND(DGND) SW1 GND(DGND) D123A D123A_RTN D123B D123B_RTN

B

Key switch I/F (conventionally used as the J Carrier circuit board)

key1 key2 key3 key COM N.C N.C



CTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (2/3) 9 10

A Plug-in Connector for Film Carrier

19

11

F

G

H 12 32 1333 14341535163617 37183819392040 JCP1 JCP1 1232 1333 14341535163617 37183819392040 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 2910301131

Wiring group B for the LTC22 Wiring group A for the LTC22

1 24 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1415 16171819202122 23 2 CTC7 CTC7

N.C N.C

120 diffusion box sensor (VX-014-1A3)

D202

1 2 JCP3 JCP3

1 2 3 4 LED3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1415161718

21 22

31113010 29 9 28 8 27 7 26 6 25 5 24 4 23 3

1 2 21 22 31113010 29 9 28 8 27 7 26 6 25 5 24 4 23 3

1 2 CTC10 CTC10 3 4

CTC22 Circuit Board (3/3)

(BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (ORG) (ORG)

135 diffusion box sensor (VX-014-1A3)

D201

(BLK) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (ORG) (ORG) N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

LED2

(BLK) (ORG) (ORG) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

(ORG) (ORG) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK)

JCP2 JCP2

(GRY) (BLK)

1 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14151617181920 21 2 CTC6 CTC6 1 2

(GRY) (BLK)

3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 2910301131

7 8

LED3

LED_4-/CHK LED_4-/CHK_RTN LED_IR23 LED_B0 LED_IR20 LED_R0 LED_G0 LED_B3 LED_IR19 LED_R3 LED_G3 LED_B4 LED_IR16 LED_R4 LED_G4 LED_B7 LED_IR11 LED_IR8 L9V L9V L9V L9V N.C N.C N.C N.C LGND N.C

2 22 LED2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213 14151617181920

6

LED_3-/CHK LED_3-/CHK_RTN L9V L9V LED_IR15 LED_IR12 LED_B1 LED_G1 LED_R1 LED_IR7 LED_B2 LED_G2 LED_R2 LED_IR4 LED_B5 LED_G5 LED_R5 LED_IR3 LED_B6 LED_IR0 N.C N.C N.C N.C LGND N.C

2 22

1 21

5

D202 GND(DGND)

LED1

4

(GRY) (BLK)

3

(GRY) (BLK)

Peltier element (TEC1-12703)

2

D201 GND(DGND)

N.C N.C

LH201 LH201 1 2 LED1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 12131415161718

(BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (ORG) (ORG)

(ORG) (ORG) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK)

D203 1 2 LH201

(BLK) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (BRN) (ORG) N.C (ORG) N.C N.C N.C

(GRY) (BRK)

D203

(BLK) (ORG) (ORG) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) N.C (BLK) N.C

E 1 21

(RED) (BLK)

Thermistor (PB7-42H-F3)

1

LED_2-/CHK LED_2-/CHKRTN LED_IR10 LED_B8 LED_IR9 LED_R6 LED_G6 LED_B11 LED_IR6 LED_R9 LED_G9 LED_B12 LED_IR5 LED_R10 LED_G10 LED_B15 LED_IR2 LED_IR1 L9V L9V L9V L9V LGND N.C

LED_1-/CHK LED_1-/CHK_RTN L9V L9V LED_IR22 LED_IR21 LED_B9 LED_G7 LED_R7 LED_IR18 LED_B10 LED_G8 LED_R8 LED_IR17 LED_B13 LED_G11 LED_R11 LED_IR14 LED_B14 LED_IR13 LGND N.C

D (GRY) (BRK)

C

(RED) (WHT)



CTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (3/3) 9 10

A

B

3 4

LED4

LED4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14151617181920

40203919 3818 37173616351534 1433133212

40203919 3818 37173616351534 1433133212

1 26 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15 16171819202122 2324 25 2 CTC8 CTC8 1 28 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 16171819202122 2324 252627 2 CTC9 CTC9

11

G

H 7 8 9 10

7 8 9 10

1 2 3 D409 D409 1 2 3 4 JFS3 JFS3 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 D411 D411

N.C

N.C

CTP19 CTP19 1 2 3 4

PAC22 Circuit Board 1 2 FS409 FS409 1 2 1 2 FS413 FS413 1 2

N.C

N.C

(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK)

3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 11 10 13 12

15 14 CTP16 CTP16

(Not used)

CTP22 Circuit Board (1/3)

CTP21 CTP21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15161718192021 2223 24252627282930 31323334553637 3839 40 CTP18 CTP18 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314 15161718192021 2223 24252627282930 31323334553637 3839 40 PAC17 PAC17

1 2 3 D414 D414 1 2 3 1 2 3 D415 D415 1 2 3

1 2 3 D414 D414

D415

FS418 FS419

3 4 5 6 7 8

3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 FS420 FS420 1 2 3

(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK)

N.C

FS417

1 2

21 20 23 22 25 24 27 26 29 28

JFS1 JFS1

FS420 GND

FS419 GND

19 18

FS416

(RED) (BLK)

Waste solution level sensor (FLS-1005)

(FLS-1005)

External waste solution level sensor

(FS-08193F)

External washing solution level sensor

(FS-08193F)

External PSR level sensor

(FS-08193F)

External P2R level sensor

(FS-08193F)

External P1R level sensor

(FLS-1005)

PSR lower level sensor

(FS-08193F)

PSR upper level sensor

(FLS-1005)

P2RB lower level sensor

(FLS-1005)

P2RB upper level sensor

(FLS-1005)

P2RA lower level sensor

(FLS-1005)

P1R upper level sensor

(FLS-1005)

P1R lower level sensor

(FLS-1005)

P1R upper level sensor

(FLS-1005)

PS4 solution level sensor

(FLS-1005)

PS3 solution level sensor

8

FS418 GND

17 16

FS417 GND

1 2

(RED) (BLK)

PS2 solution level sensor (FLS-1005)

7

FS416 GND

1 2 FS415 FS415 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

1 2 3 FS414 FS414 1 2 3

FS415 GND

1 2 3 FS410 FS410 1 2 3

FS414 GND

PS1 solution level sensor (FLS-1005)

6

FS410 GND

FS413 GND

FS409 GND

FS412 GND

FS408 GND

FS411 GND

FS407 GND

P2 solution level sensor (FLS-1005)

5

N.C

1 30

1 2 FS412 FS412 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

1112

1 2 FS408 FS408 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

9 10

1 2 FS411 FS411 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

(BLK)

7 8

1 2 FS407 FS407 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

CTP16 IN GND

1 2 FS406 FS406 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

P1 solution level sensor (FLS-1005)

4

D415 GND GND

CTP15 CTP15

FS406 GND

5 6 1 2 FS405 FS405 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

3 4

FS405 GND

1 2 1 2 FS404 FS404 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

1 2 FS403 FS403 1 2

FS404 GND

1 2 FS402 FS402 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

1 2 3 CTP13 CTP13

FS403 GND

Dryer temperature sensor

3

VCC(FU1) D414 GND

8 10 12 1 2 FS401 FS401 1 2

(RED) (BLK)

1 2 TS406 TS406 1 2

FS402 GND

1 2 3 TS404 TS404 1 2 3

(GP1AQ36L)

PS3/4 processing tank temperature sensor (PNX-24)

TS406

CTP21 IN VCC (FU1) PU408 PU409 GND PU410 PU411 PU401 F405 VCC (FU1) H401 H402 GND H403 H404 H406A H406B VCC (FU1) Output spare 1 H407 GND REON H408 D401 D402 VCC (FU1) D403 D404 GND D406 D418 +5V ON signal GND VCC (FU1) PACP +5V PACP +24V GND PACSEL0 PACSEL1 GND

N.C

PS1/2 processing tank temperature sensor (PNX-24)

TS404

(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (WHT)

N.C

N.C

P2 processing tank temperature sensor (PNX-24)

TS403

FS401 GND

TS406 (0)AGND FGND

(RED) (WHT)

N.C

N.C

P1 processing tank temperature sensor (PNX-24)

TS402

CTP21IN (5)VCC PU408 PU409 (0)GND PU410 PU411 PU401 F405 (5)VCC H401 H402 (0)GND H403 H404 H406A H406B (5)VCC Output spare H407 (0)GND REON H408 D401 D402 (5)VCC D403 D404 (0)GND D406 Not used +5V ON signal (0)GND (5)VCC CTP P+5V notice CTP P+24V notice (0)GND PACSELO PACSEL1 CTP21OUT

1 2 3 D408 D408

N.C

4 5 6 JHO1 JHO1 4 5 6

(5)VCC D411 GND N.C

7 9 11

TS404 (0)AGND FGND

(RED) (WHT)

1 2 3 TS403 TS403 1 2 3

(RED) (GRY) (BLK) (BLK)

CTP12 CTP12

TS403 (0)AGND FGND

N.C

N.C

2

(GP1A73A)

N.C

2 4 6

N.C

VCC(FU1) D409 GND GND

(RED) (WHT)

N.C

1 2 3 TS402 TS402 1 2 3

(GP1AQ36L)

N.C

1 2 3

(BLK)

7 8 9 10

(RED) (GRY)

TS402 (0)AGND FGND

(RED) (WHT)

1

Dryer section exit sensor

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

1 2 3 D407 D407

VCC(FU1) D408 GND

1 3 5

(GP1A73A)

CTP17 CTP17 4 5 6

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

TS401 (0)AGND FGND 1 2 3 TS401 TS401 1 2 3

Cartridge box lower sensor

F 1 2 3

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

VCC(FU1) D407 GND TS401

(GP1A73A)

E 1 2 3

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

D

Cartridge box upper sensor

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

C

(GP1A73A)

B

Cartridge setting sensor



19.3.5 CTP22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/3) 9 10

A 11

G

H PDC22 Circuit Board

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 PWR1 PWR1

(RED) (GRY)

PWR22 Circuit Board


CTP11 CTP11 1 3 2 4

1 4 2 7 3 8 6 9 5 10 PWR7 PWR7

CTP4 CTP4

CTP7 CTP7 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 LDA7 LDA7

LDA22 Circuit Board

7 8 9 10 11 23 24 25

1 2 POSW POSW 1 2

CTP23 CTP23 1 2 3 4 5 CTP24 CTP24 1 2 3 4 5

For SH3 debug For H8S debug

26 27

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

CTP5 CTP5 3 4 5 JSY2 JSY2 3 4 5 6 7 8

(RED) (GRY) (BLK) N.C

1 2

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

1 2

1 2

(RED) (GRY) (BLK) N.C 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 CTP6 CTP6

CTP25 CTP25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

For program download

(5 ) VCC (FU1) D321 GND GND

D317 1 2 3

VCC (FU1) D305P GND GND

D304P 1 2

Processor entry sensor

D305L D305P

1 2 D305L D305L 1 2

3 2 1 D305P D305P 3 2 1 D321 1 2 3

Exit section up/down belt home position sensor GP1A73A)

Processor entry sensor LED

Power ON switch (LB-15SKS 1 / AT-484-M)

Sub-scanning nip home position sensor (GP1A73A)

D304L 1 2

(RED) (GRY)

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

Pre-exposure sensor (PT501B)

D304P

(RED) (GRY)

6 7 8

UL1007 26AWG (GRY) (BLK)

6 7 8

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

(RED) (WHT)

Pre-exposure sensor LED (GL514A)

D304L

(5 ) VCC (RD305) D305L

20 21 22

3 4 5 JHU3 JHU3 3 4 5

9

/ 5VRES GND NC GND H8MD0 GND H8MD1 GND H8P40 GND H8P41 GND H8P42 GND H8Txd0 GND H8Rxd0 VCC (FU1) NC VCC (FU1)

17 18 19

8

POONSW (D326) POONSW G (D326)

1 2

VCC (FU1) D317 GND

1 2

14 15 16

GND H8Txd0 H8Rxd0 NC NC

14 15 16

11 12 13

(RED) (WHT)

11 12 13

(RED) (BLK)

7

D304P GND FGND

14 15 16

(RED) (BLK)

8 9 10 JRE2 JRE2 8 9 10

D316 1 2 3

(5 ) VCC (RD304) D304L

SW

D315 1 2 3

GND TXD0 RXD0 NC NC

3 4 5

Register nip home position sensor (GP1A73A)

3 4 5


Flex. 3 Flex. 3


1 2 3 Flex.2 Flex.2 1 2 3

Width detecting home position sensor (GP1A73A)

Width detecting sensor (PT501B)

Width detecting sensor LED (GL514A)

6

VCC (FU1) D316 GND

12 13

(5 ) VCC (RD304LD) D304 signal output GND GND

1 2

N.C N.C

1 2

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

1 2 Flex.1 Flex.1 1 2

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

(RED) (WHT)

(RED) (GRY)

D314P 1 2

VCC (FU1) D315 GND

4 5 6

(RED) (WHT)

Flex.

D314P

D314L 1 2

N.C

CTP10 CTP10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

D314L

N.C N.C

6 7

(RED) (WHT)

6 7

3 4 5

D314P GND FGND

3 4 5

1 2

N.C N.C N.C N.C

1 2

(RED) (BLK)

Register sensor (PT501B)

D320

D+5V DGND D+5V DGND

28 1 2 3 (RED) (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5 JHA4 JHA4 1 2 3 4 5

(RED) (WHT)

D303P 1 2

(5 ) VCC (RD314) D314L

7 8 (RED) (WHT)

5

CTP _ RXD _ PCAGND / CTP _ RXD _ PC N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 PDC1 PDC1

D303P

D303L 1 2

(BLK) (BLK)

CTP1 CTP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

D303L

N.C

4 5 6

D303P GND FGND

1 2 3 D320 D320 1 2 3

Register sensor LED (GL514A)

Back printer set sensor (VX-016-1A3)

70328-1Faston/172076-1 Cover

A

UL1007 24AWG (RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK)

(GRY)

CTP3 CTP3

(RED) (BLK)

C

(RED) (BLK)

N.C

D319 1 2 3

N.C N.C

1 2 3 (GRY) (BLK)

Feed nip home position sensor (GP1A73A)

Back printer entrance sensor (OS-573533-710)

4

(GRY) (GRY)

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (BLK)

6 7 8 CTP2 CTP2 (GRY) (BLK)

1 2 3 JHA3 JHA3 1 2 3

D320 GND

D302 3 2 1

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

JDTM JDTM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

VCC (FU1) D319 GND

DTM DTM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

VCC (FU1) D302 GND

Magazine ID sensor 0 (GP1A53HR) Magazine ID sensor 1,2,3 (GP1A53HR) Magazine ID sensor 4 (GP1A53HR)

Paper end sensor (GP1A73A)

DTM00 Circuit Board

*** CTP14 IN (5 ) VCC (RD303) D303L

3 4 5

3

VCC (FU1) VCC (FU1) D322 D323 D324 D325 D416 D410 PINSP1 PINSP2 24VON PONSP1 PONSP2 PONSP3 GND GND

1 2 (RED) (GRY) (BLK)

1 2 3 JCU3 JCU3 1 2 3

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

3 4 5

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

3 4 5

(RED) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (BLK)

D311 1 2 3

VCC (FU1) D306 D307 D308 D309 D310 GND N.C

3 2 1 D301P D301P 3 2 1

(RED) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (BLK) N.C

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

Paper splice sensor

D301P

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

Paper splice sensor LED

D301L

VCC (FU1) D311 GND

D (RED) (GRY) (BLK)

JCU2 JCU2

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

(RED) (GRY)

1 2 D301L D301L 1 2

VCC (FU1) D301P GND

1 2

1 2

(RED) (GRY)

2

D+5V1 GND-5D D+5V2 D+5V2 D+5V3 D+5V3 D+5V1 GND-5D GND-5D GND-5D

N.C

F (RED) (RED) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY)

E (5 ) VCC (RD301) D301L

1

Vcc (D+5V1) Vcc (D+5V1) D322 D323 D324A / D324B D324A / D324B D416A / D416B D410 +24V2 _ on / off +24V3 _ on / off +24V4 _ on / off N.C GND (DGND) GND (DGND)

CTP1 IN GND M301CLK M302CLK VCC (FU1) M303CLK M304CLK M306CLK M309CLK GND M310CLK Spare 1 CLK VCC (FU1) M311CLK M313CLK M403CLK M314CLK GND M315CLK Spare 2 CLK VCC (FU1) M305CLK M305PD DOTSTB (301) PIOD0 GND PIOD1 PIOD2 VCC (FU1) PIOD3 PIOD4 PIOD5 PIOD6 GND PIOD7 PIOA0 VCC (FU1) PIOA1 PIOA2 PIOA3 PIOWR GND PDCP+5V PDCP+24V VCC (FU1) PDCPIO D312 D313 INSP1 GND N.C ASC POF5 VCC (FU1) GND GND GND Rxd1 Txd1 VCC (FU1) GND

B

CTPIN GND M301CLK M302CLK (5 ) VCC M303CLK M304CLK M306CLK M309CLK GND M310CLK Spare 1 CLK (5 ) VCC M311CLK M313CLK M403CLK M314CLK GND M315CLK Spare 2 CLK (5 ) VCC M305CLK M305PD S301 PIO data GND PI1 data PI2 data (5 ) VCC PI3 data PI4 data PI5 data PI6 data GND PI7 data PIOSEL0 (5 ) VCC PIOSEL1 PIOSEL2 PIOSEL3 PIOWR GND PDCP+5V PDCP+24V (5 ) VCC PDCP10 D312 Cutter home position sensor 1 D313 Cutter home position sensor 2 YOBBI _ OUT1 GND N.C YOBI _ IN1 (5 ) VCC GND GND GND Rxd1 Txd1 (5 ) VCC CTP1OUT



CTP22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (2/3) 10 11

1 2

6 7 8

F

G

H (BLK) N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

6


7 8

GIB22 Circuit Board

CTP22 CTP22

9

PC1 PC1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

To Image Processing Box 5

1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 JPC1 JPC1 1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 TS408 TS408 1 2 3

1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CTP20 CTP20

N.C

N.C

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

N.C

5

TS409 AGND FGND

1 2 3 4 5 CTP8 CTP8

4

TS408 AGND FGND

1 3 2 4 5 CTP9 CTP9

N.C

JGM2 JGM2 1 2 3 4

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY)

N.C

C 3

VCC(FU1) READCLK READCS READODT REOSP1 READIDT READBU REINSP1 REINSP2 GND

E 2

GND CLK RESET RD WE1 VCC(FU1) WE3 PCMWAIT CE2B CSO GND GI DENB NC A25 A23 VCC(FU1) A21 A19 A17 A15 GND A13 A11 A9 3.3V(FU2) A7 A5 A3 A1 GND D15 D13 D11 D9 3.3V(FU2) D7 D5 D3 D1 GND GND /G EN BS WE0 WE2 VCC(FU1) PCMINT PCMIOIS16 CS6 RW GND GI DDIR N.C. A24 A22 VCC(FU1) A20 A18 A16 A14 GND A12 A10 A8 3.3V(FU2) A6 A4 A2 A0 GND D14 D12 D10 D8 3.3V(FU2) D6 D4 D2 D0 GND

(BLK) (GRY)

D

N.C (GRY) N.C

1

PC ON signal (Collector) PC ON signal (Emitter) PC OFF signal GND GND

GND Txd2 Rxd2 NC NC



CTP22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (3/3) 10 11

A

B Main Control Unit

(Not used)

TS408 TS409

TS408 1 2 TS409 1 2

1 2 3 TS409 TS409 1 2 3

(Not used)

(Used for debugging only)

1 3 5 2 4 6 CTP14 CTP14

H

G Image Processing Box

1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36 BOX4 (ROS) BOX4 (ROS) LDD15 LDD15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011 1213141516 1718 19202122232425 26 27 282930

D LDD16 LDD16 1 2 4 3 5 6

1 2 4 3 5 6 JHU4 JHU4 1 2 4 3 5 6

F

1 2 4 3 5 6 THA THA

THA20 LDD14 LDD14 1 2 3 4 5 6

LDA22

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

*** ***

LDD22 Circuit Board

RPD+ RPDRMODE R-5V AGND R+5V RLDON RHFM AGND RL+5V AGND MPX_TH X_TrE R-5V X_TrB A+13VP

AGND RTH+ R_TrB R_TrC AGND N.C

*** *** N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10

1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12131415 16

*** *** 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

*** *** 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

*** *** 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12131415 16

1 2 3 4 5 6

*** ***

AGND RTH+ R_TrB R_TrC AGND N.C

A+5VP AGND2 GRSCK GRTXD GRRXD GRCS N.C

*** ***

8

RPD+ RPDRMODE R-5V AGND R+5V RLDON RHFM AGND RL+5V AGND MPX_TH X_TrE R-5V X_TrB A+13VP

GTH+ AGND GLD+ AGND GPD+ AGND A+13VP AGND A-13VP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A+5VP AGND2 GRSCK GRTXD GRRXD GRCS N.C

GP+ GP-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

N.C

N.C

1 2 3

*** *** 1 2 3

7

GTH+ AGND GLD+ AGND GPD+ AGND A+13VP AGND A-13VP

N.C A+5VP AGND2 BRSCK BRTXD BRRXD BRCS N.C

6

GP+ GP-

BTH+ ABND BLD+ AGND BPD+ AGND A+13VP AGND A-13VP BHFM

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617 1819 20212223242526 JROS JROS 25 2623 2421221920 1718 151613141112 9 10 7 8 5 6 3 4 1 2 N.C

Laser unit cooling fan

5

N.C A+5VP AGND2 BRSCK BRTXD BRRXD BRCS N.C

BP+ N.C B3P

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

1 2 3 F314 F314 1 2 3

BTH+ AGND BLD+ AGND BPD+ AGND A+13VP AGND A-13VP BHFM

(RED) (BLK) (GRY) N.C (ORG) (BLK) (GRY) (GRY) (ORG) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (GRY) N.C (RED) (BLK) (GRY) N.C (RED) (BLK) (GRY) N.C (RED) (BLK) (GRY) N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 AOM1 AOM1 1 2 3 4 5 6

BP+ N.C BP-

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY)

F314

A+5VP AGND2 RRSCK RRTXD RRRXD RRCS

THA AGND A+5VP A-13VP A+13VP AGND

(ORG) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (BLU) (GRY)

N.C N.C N.C N.C

AOM Driver

A+5VP AGND2 RRSCK RRTXD RRRXD RRCS

THA AGND A+5VP A-13VP A+13VP AGND

A+5VP AGND2 nSOS N.C +24VP AGNDP nPM_ON PM_ST S801 AGNDP A+5VP AGND2 S801_S N.C F801_2_3 AGNDP F801_S N.C F801_2_3 AGNDP F802_S N.C F801_2_3 AGNDP F803_S N.C

(ORG) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (BLU) (BLK)

N.C N.C N.C

A+13V3 A+24V2 GND-13A A+8V2 A+24V2 A+13V1 GND-24A A+13V3 A+24V1 A+8V1 A+24V1 GND-24A A+8V1 GND-8A A+8V2 GND-8A A+13V2 GND-13A A-13V GND-13A A+13V1 A+13V2 GND-13A A-13V

4

The part is not necessary (directly soldered to the circuit board).

LDA1 LDA1 1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36 F314 AGNDP F314_ST

+24I 24GI +13I 13GI -13I AOM_ST

+24I 24GI B+8I B8GI G+81 G8GI +13I 13GI -13I 13GI

N.C

21 2 22 5 14 7 15 9 1316 1 3 4 6 1718 8 10121119202324 PWR11 PWR11 21 2 22 5 14 7 15 9 1316 1 3 4 6 1718 8 101211 19 202324

3

(RED) (RED) (BLU) (BLK)

E N.C

N.C

PWR22

(WHT)

SCK RXD DEN PCS[0] PCS[1] PCS[2] PCS[3] PCS[4] N.C A+13V A+13V AGND AGND A-13V A-13V nRESET TXD AGND AGND N.C AGND AGND nSOS LDDERR A+13V A+13V AGND AGND A-13V A-13V

C (RED) N.C (BLK) N.C (ORG) N.C (BLK)

B 2

(WHT)

SCK RXD DEN PCS[0] PCS[1] PCS[2] PCS[3] PCS[4] N.C A+13V A+13V AGND AGND A-13V A-13V nRESET TXD AGND AGND N.C AGND AGND nSOS LDDERR A+13V A+13V AGND AGND A-13V A-13V

IL+13I N.C I13GI N.C IL+24I N.C I24GI

1

(RED) (RED) (BLU) (BLK)

GND GND D0+ D0D1D1+ D2+ D2D3D3+ D4+ D4D5D5+ D6+ D6D7D7+ FENR+ FENRFENGFENG+ FENB+ FENBDVALDVAL+ TXCLK+ TXCLKLREQRLREQR+ LREQG+ LREQGLREQBLREQB+ GND GND



19.3.6 LDD22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram 11

A

Laser unit

1 2 3 4 5 6

*** ***

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LDD1 LDD1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LDD2 LDD2

1 4 2 5 3 6 LDD3 LDD3

1 2 3 LDD4 LDD4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11121314151617 1819 20212223242526 LDD5 LDD5

1 2 3 LDD6 LDD6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LDD7 LDD7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LDD8 LDD8 1 2 LDD9 LDD9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 LDD10 LDD10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LDD11 LDD11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 121314 15 16 LDD12 LDD12 1 2 3 4 5 6 LDD13 LDD13

F

G

H LTC1 LTC1 3 4


(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (WHT)

PWR12 PWR12 1 13 2 14 3 15 4 16 5 17 6 18 7 19 8 20 9 21 1022 1123 1224

PWR22 Circuit Board CTC22 Circuit Board

D203A GND(DGND) D203B GND(DGND) D203C GND(DGND) D203D GND(DGND) LH201-(VCC) LH201

5 6

Part A of the CT22 circuit board wiring (3/3)

1 2 3 LTC2 LTC2

7

Part B of the CT22 circuit board wiring (3/3)

1 2 LTC3 LTC3

LTC22 Circuit Board

8

D203A(+) D203A(-) D203B(+) D203B(-) D203C(+) D203C(-) D203D(+) D203D(-) LH201(+) LH201(-)

1 2

(BLU) (BLK)

4

Thermo module + Thermo module -

E 3

Thermistor 1 Thermistor 2 GND (Shield)

(RED) (BLK)

C 2

-13V GND

+13V GND

1

A+24V1 A+24V1 A+24V2 A+24V2 GND-24A GND-24A A+8V1 A+8V1 A+8V2 A+8V2 GND-8A GND-8A A-13V1 A+13V1 A+13V2 A+13V2 A+13V3 A+13V3 GND-13A GND-13A GND-13A GND-13A A-13V A-13V



19.3.7 LTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram 9

A

B

CTC11 CTC11 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2

D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 LTC4 LTC4

10 11

G

H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 CTP21 CTP21 1 2 JPS1 JPS1 1 2

1 3 PWR5 12 14 PWR15 8 9 PWR13

To PWR22 To PWR22 To PWR22

CTP22 Circuit Board

1 4 PWR17

To PWR22

2 8 3 9

PAC22 Circuit Board

1 5

PAC12 PAC12 2 6 3 7 4 8 1 6 2 7

PAC13 PAC13 3 8 4 9 5 10

1 2 3 4 JPS2 JPS2 1 2 3 4

(BLK) (WHT)

(BLK) (WHT)

PAC4 PAC4 (BLK) (WHT)

4 10 5 11 6 12

PAC11 PAC11 1 3 2 4

1 3 2 4 JF306 JF306 1 3 2 4

1 2 F306 F306 1 2 1 2 F307 F307 1 2

F306 F307

1 2 PAC2 PAC2 1 2 PAC1 PAC1 1 2 PAC18 PAC18 PAC19 100V (L) 100V (N)

1 2 3 4 PU406 PU406 1 2 3 4

100V (L) 100V (N)

1 2 3 4 PU405 PU405 1 2 3 4

AC100V

DC power supply relay ON (K5)

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

Dummy jumper connector for ON

PS1 circulation pump

(MD-10-NL)


(MD-10-NL)


(MD-10-NL)


(MD-10-NL)

10

Change the connection.

Dummy jumper connector for OFF

PU406

100 VAC input from the transformer output panel mount

(YE L / GRN) N.C

(YE L / GRN) N.C

(YE L / GRN) N.C

(YE L / GRN) N.C

PU405

100V (L) 100V (N)

PU406G

PU405G

PU404G

PU403G

(MD-10-NL)

P2 circulation pump

(MD-10-NL)

P1 circulation pump

(KBR-3XAU1M)

PSR replenisher pump

(KBR-3XAU1M)

P2RB replenisher pump

(KBR-3XAU1M)

P2RA replenisher pump

(KBR-3XAU1M)

P1R replenisher pump

9

100V (L) 100V (N)

PAC3 PAC3 1 2 3 4 PU404 PU404 1 2 3 4

PU406 (L) PU406 (N)

(BLK) (WHT)

1 7

1 2 3 4 PU403 PU403 1 2 3 4

PU405 (L) PU405 (N)

(BLK) (WHT)

4 8

1 2 3 4 PU402 PU402 1 2 3 4

PU404 (L) PU404 (N)

(BLK) (WHT)

3 7

N.C

(BLK) (WHT)

2 6

(YE L / GRN) N.C

(BLK) (WHT)

1 5

PU402G

(BLK) (WHT)

N.C

1 2 PU411 PU411 1 2

K3 (+) K3 (-)

(YE L / GRN) N.C

1 2 PU410 PU410 1 2

PU404

(ORG) (BLK)

2 5

1 2 PU409 PU409 1 2

PU403

Power supply section exhaust fan 2

(ORG) (BLK)

PAC16 PAC16 1 4

1 2 PU408 PU408 1 2

(BLK) (WHT)

1 2 3 PAC8 PAC8

8

Power supply section exhaust fan 1

3 6

1 2 PAC7 PAC7

PU411

Solution heater 2 (K3)

4 5

PU403 (L) PU403 (N)

3 PAC6 PAC6

PU410 PU402

K1 (+) K1 (-)

1 2

7

Solution heater 1 (K1)

5 6

K4 (+) K4 (-)

3 4 PAC5 PAC5 PU409

1 2 3 4 PU401 PU401 1 2 3 4

Dryer heater (K2)

1 2

PU402 (L) PU402 (N)

7 14

K2 (+) K2 (-)

6 13 PU408 PU401

Dryer heater 1 (K2)

5 12

CRT relay (K6)

PU401G

4 11 PAC14 PAC14

PU401 (L) PU401 (N)

38

6

K6 (+ ) CRT Relay K6 (- ) CRT Relay

2 9

PU411 (L) PU411 (N)

1 2 3 H402 H402 1 2 3

Spare output (-) Spare output (+)

1 2 3 H401 H401 1 2 3

Spare output

1 2 3 H404 H404 1 2 3

PU410 (L) PU410 (N)

1 2 3 H403 H403 1 2 3

SSR1 (-) SSR1 (+)

1 2 D404 D404 1 2

Dryer SSR B

1 2 D403 D403 1 2

SSR2 (-) SSR2 (+)

1 2 D402 D402 1 2

PU409 (L) PU409 (N)

1 2 D401 D401 1 2

SSR3 (-) SSR3 (+)

(240 V / 360W)

P2 processing tank heater

(240 V / 360W)

P1 processing tank heater

(240 V / 360W)

PS3/4 processing tank heater

(240 V / 360W)

PS1/2 processing tank heater

(03EP-15A06B-090)

PS3/4 safety thermostat

D406

PU408 (L) PU408 (N)

H402

Solution heater (2) 200 V input from (K3)

H401

Solution heater (1) 200 V input from (K1)

H404

N.C

(BLK) (WHT)

H403

200V (L ) IN N.C 200V (N) IN

N.C

D404

+24V30 PGND

(BLK) (WHT)

D403

(ORG) (BLK)

200V (L ) IN 200V (N) IN

(BLK) (WHT)

D402

P+5V PGND

N.C N.C

1 10

N.C

(BLK) (WHT)

C D401

(RED) (BLK)

H402 (L) H402 (N)

N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

(03EP-15A06B-090)

PS1/2 safety thermostat

5

Dryer SSR A

N.C N.C

F N.C

H401 (L) H401 (N)

(ORG) (BLK)

(03EP-15A06B-090)

P2 safety thermostat

(03EP-15A06B-090)

P1 safety thermostat

4

Dryer fan SSR

N.C N.C

PAC15 PAC15 1 2 P+21V PGND

IL24 V (+ ) IN IL24 V (- ) IN

N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

(03EP-15A06B-090)

Dryer section safety thermostat

3

(RED) (BLK)

PAC17 PAC17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 H404 (L) H404 (N)

N.C N.C

H403 (L) H403 (N)

D404 (+) D404 (-)

D403 (+) D403 (-)

N.C N.C

1 2 JD406 JD406

D402 (+) D402 (-)

N.C N.C

(RED) (BLK)

1 2 D406 D406 1 2

D401 (+) D401 (-)

D419 (+) D419 (-)

D (ORG) (BLK)

2

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK)

E D418 (+) D418 (-)

D406 (+) D406 (-)

B

PAC21 IN (5 ) VCC PU408 PU409 (0 ) GND PU410 PU411 PU401 F405 (5 ) VCC H401 H402 (0 ) GND H403 H404 H406A H406B (5 ) VCC Spare output H407 (0 ) GND REON H408 D401 D402 (5 ) VCC D403 D404 (0 ) GND D406 Not used +5V ON signal GND (5 ) VCC P+5 V notification P+24 V notification (0 ) GND PACSEL0 PACSEL1 CTP21 OUT

1

(ORG) (BLK)

CTP21IN VCC (FU1) PU408 PU409 GND PU410 PU411 PU401 F405 VCC (FU1) H401 H402 GND H403 H404 H406A H406B VCC (FU1) Spare output 1 H407 GND REON H408 D401 D402 VCC (FU1) D403 D404 GND D406 D418 5VON signal GND VCC (FU1) PACP+5V PACP+24V GND PACSEL0 PACSEL1 GND



19.3.8 PAC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram 11

A



19.3.9 Main Control Unit Wiring Diagram 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

CTP22 circuit board Keyboard

Mouse

CTP8 CTP8 1 2 3 4 5

(WHT) (BLK) (YEL)

USB 1 2 3 4

(RED) (WHT) (GRN) (BLK)

USB-B

USB 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 USB USB

1 2 3 4 USB USB

VCC -DaTa +DaTa GND

VCC -DaTa +DaTa GND

1 2 3 4 5 6 KEY KEY

USB-B

(RED) (WHT) (GRN) (BLK)

N.C

(RED) (WHT) (BLK) (YEL) (BLU) (GRN) 1 2 3 4 5 6 MOUSE-A MOUSE-A

PC0 + PC0 -

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Dsub 9P Dsub 9P

PC + PC -

L N FG

1 6 2 7 3 8 10 13 5 14 4 11 9 12 15 CRT CRT

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

(BLK) (GRN) (BLK) (WHT) (BLK) N.C (RED) N.C N.C

Coaxial cable (BLU)

Coaxial cable (GRN)

Coaxial cable (RED)

D

N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 JKEY1 JKEY1 1 2 3 4 5 6

MOUSE-B MOUSE-B 1 2 3 4 5 6

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7 JPC1 JPC1 1 2 8 9 3 4 5 6 7

N.C

N.C (RED) N.C

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

N.C N.C N.C

N.C

JCRT JCRT 1 6 2 7 3 8 10 13 5 14 4 11 9 12 15

C

P1 P1 2 3 4 5 1

(WHT) (BLK) N.C (YEL)

4 5 6

CRT CRT

N.C (RED)

1 2 3

CRT CRT

PC signal GND PCOFF signal GND

4 5 6

CRT FG N L

L N FG

1 2 3

(BRN) (LBL) (YEL/GRN)

100V or 200V

(BRN) (LBL) (YEL/GRN)

B

200V

L N FG

Power supply section

Main Control Unit

E

ETH ETH 4 5 6 3 2 1 8 7

SIO SIO 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10

N.C

cut

N.C

PC 2 PC 2 1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 2054 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 64 31653266336734 68

G

Image Processing Box

H

4 5 6 3 2 1 8 7 JETH JETH

GND SD12 GND SD13 GND SD14 GND SD15 GND SDP1 GND SD0 GND SD1 GND SD2 GND SD3 GND SD4 GND SD5 GND SD6 GND SD7 GND SDP0 GND GND GND GND NC NC NC NC NC NC NC GND GND ATN GND GND GND BSY GND ACY GND RST GND MSG GND SEL GND C/D GND REQ GND I/O GND SD8 GND SD9 GND SD10 GND SD11

1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 2054 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 64 31653266336734 68 BOX3 BOX3

Panel

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10 JSIO JSIO

LBN ( • ) BLK LBN ( • ) RED YEL ( • ) BLK YEL ( • ) RED LGN ( • ) BLK LGN ( • ) RED GRY ( • ) BLK GRY ( • ) RED WHT ( • ) BLK WHT ( • ) RED

cut N.C

BLU WHT(BLU) ORG WHT(ORG) GRN WHT(GRN) BRN WHT(BRN)

N.C

F

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10

10

11

G

H (Not used)

M401 5 4 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 JS01 JS01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

M404 BZ401 8

8

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK)

M402 1 2 S401 S401 1 2 S402 S402 1 2 S403 S403 1 2 S404 S404 1 2 S407 S407 1 2 S408 S408 1 2 S409 S409 1 2 S4010 S4010

S401 S402 S403 S404 S407 S408 S409 S4010

P2RB cartridge washing valve

1 2 3 4 BZ BZ 1 2 3 4

(ORG) (BLK)

PDC12 PDC12

P2RA cartridge washing valve (B423-804A)

PDC6 PDC6 1 2 3 6 15 7 16

P+24V32 S410

P+24V32 S409

P+24V32 S408

P+24V32 S407

9

P1R stirring valve (B423-804A)

PDC12 PDC12 5 14

(B423-804A)

4 13

(B423-804A)

P+24V31 S404

P+24V31 S403

8

P1R cartridge washing valve

(ORG) (BLK)

3 12

(B423-804A)

2 11

PS3/4 rack auto washing valve

1 10

(ORG) (BLK)

7 8 9

(B423-804A)

5 6

PS1/2 rack auto washing valve

1 2 F406 F406 1 2

P+24V31 S402

1 2 F403 F403 1 2

(ORG) (BLK)

1 2 F402 F402 1 2

(B423-804A)

1 2 F401 F401 1 2

Processing tank exhaust tank (109R1224H1071)

7

P2 rack auto washing valve

Processing tank heater cooling fan

F406

P+24V31 S401

PS processing tank heater cooling fan (109R1224H1071)

F403

(109R1224H1071)

P1/P2 processing tank heater cooling fan (109R1224H1071)

F402

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK) N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK)

3 4

P+24V11 F406 N.C

P+24V11 F403

P+24V11 F402

P+24V11 F401

N.C N.C N.C N.C

Densitometer F401

(B423-804A)

P+5V GND N,C

M404 OUT1 M404 OUT2

(ORG) (BLK) (ORG) (ORG) (BLK)

6

(ORG) (BLK)

N.C

N.C

N.C

M402 OUT1 M402 OUT2

PU407 GND P+24V33 GND

P+24V11 GND TXD RXD GND

1 2


N.C N.C

(RED) (BLK) N.C N.C

(RED) (BLK)

N.C N.C

1 2 3 4 5 PDC5 PDC5

(BLK)

PU407

(BLK) (RED)

(RED) (BLK)

1 2 M404 M404 1 2

N.C


1 2 M402 M402 1 2

N.C

S411 1 3 2 4 PU407 PU407

(BLK)

S406 M403 PDC9 PDC9 1 6

N.C

S405 1 3 4 6 2 5 M403 M403 1 3 4 6 2 5 2 7 3 8

N.C

1 2 3 S411 S411 1 2 3

PDM PDM 1 5 3 4 9 7 8 2 6

(ORG)

1 2 S406 S406 1 2 5 12 8 13 7 14

(TG-06E-BG-500C365,24V)

1 3 2 4

1 2 S405 S405 1 2

M403-A M403-A M403-B M403-B N.C N.C

CTP22 Circuit Board

Sorter full buzzer (HMB-06)

M401C M401C

5

N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 10 12 M401B M401B

PDC10 PDC10 3 4 10 11

Plenisher cartridge opening drive motor

F317

2 9

S411OUT1 GND S411OUT2 N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 PDC1 PDC1

(PDH-05)

1 4 2 5 6 3 M401 M401 1 4 2 5 6 3

P+24V31 S406

P+24V31 S405

CTP1 CTP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

Auto washing pump

N.C N.C

1 8

N.C N.C

N.C

PDC11 PDC11 1 4 6 3 2 5

4

N.C

M401DRIVER

N.C

3

(TG-26A-AM-60-A732)

DIR

P+24V42 GND GND M401 DIR M401 ON / OFF GND

2

Sorter drive motor

1 2 M401A M401A

ON / OFF

1 2 F317 F317 1 2

(TL1117)

PDC8 PDC8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

171822-2 171825-2 N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

E (RED) (BLK) (BLK) (ORG) (ORG) (BLK)

D

Processor drive motor

F CTP IN GND M301CLK M302CLK VCC (FU1) M303CLK M304CLK M306CLK M309CLK GND M310CLK Spare 1 CLK VCC (FU1) M311CLK M313CLK M403CLK M314CLK GND M315CLK Spare 2 CLK VCC (FU1) M305CLK M305PD DOTSTB (301) PIOD0 GND PIOD1 PIOD2 VCC (FU1) PIOD3 PIOD4 PIOD5 PIOD6 GND PIOD7 PIOA0 VCC (FU1) PIOA1 PIOA2 PIOA3 PIOWR GND PDCP+5V PDCP+24V VCC (FU1) PDCPIO D312 D313 INSP1 GND N.C ASC POF5 VCC (FU1) GND GND GND Rxd1 Txd1 VCC (FU1) GND

1

(ORG) (BLK) (BLK) (ORG) (ORG) (BLK)

CTP1 IN (0 ) GND M301CLK M302CLK (5 ) VCC M303CLK M304CLK M306CLK M309CLK (0 ) GND M310CLK Spare 1 CLK (5 ) VCC M311CLK M313CLK M403CLK M314CLK (0 ) GND M315CLK Spare 2 CLK (5 ) VCC M305CLK M305PD S301 PIOD0 (0 ) GND PIOD1 PIOD2 (5 ) VCC PIOD3 PIOD4 PIOD5 PIOD6 (0 ) GND PIOD7 PIOSELO (5 ) VCC PIOSEL1 PIOSEL2 PIOSEL3 PIOWR (0 ) GND PDCP+5V PDCP+24V (5 ) VCC PDCPIOON D312 D313 YOBI OUT1 (0) GND N.C YOBI IN1 (5 ) VCC GND GND (0 ) GND Rxd1 Txd1 (5 ) VCC CTP1OUT

19.3.10

24V GND

(ORG) (BLK)

P+24V11 F404 P+24V11 F407 P+24V11 GND P+24V11 GND

B

Processor control section cooling fan (109R1224H1071)

N.C N.C N.C N.C



PDC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (1/2) 10

8 17

11

A

C PDC7 PDC7

PDC22 Circuit Board (1/2)

9 18

H M305

1 2 3 4 5 6 M305 M305 1 2 3 4 5 6 M305 Driver

1 2 3

4 5 6

1 4 2 5 3 6 JHU1 JHU1 1 4 2 5 3 6

1 2 3 D312 D312 1 2 3 D313 D313

1 2 M307 M307 1 2

4 5 6 M307


1 5 2 6

1 3 4 6 2 5 M306 M306 1 3 4 6 2 5


1 5 2 6

1 5 2 6

N.C N.C

JCU4 JCU4

M314 A M314 / A M314 B M314 / B

M306 A M306 / A M306 B M306 / B

Printer exhaust fan 2 (109R0824H202)

F311 F312 F313

1 2 F308 F308 1 2 1 2 F309 F309 1 2 1 2 F315 F315 1 2 1 2 F316 F316 1 2 1 2 F310 F310 1 2 1 2 F311 F311 1 2 1 2 F312 F312 1 2 1 2 F313 F313 1 2

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 PDC21 PDC21

M306 M314

(ORG) (BLK)


F310

5 6 7 8

P+24V02 (F313 ) GND


F316

(ORG) (BLK)

Printer function fan 3 (109R0824H202)

F315



F309

P+24V02 (F312 ) GND

P+24V02 F311 GND

P+24V02 F310 GND

P+24V02 (F316 ) GND

PDC20 PDC20

(103-564-5245)

1 2 JCU1 JCU1 1 2

Exit section up/down belt motor

1 3 5 10 8 9 2 4 6 7 11 12 DR1 DR1 PDC13 PDC13 1 2

UL1007 24AWG (RED) (YEL) (BLU) (ORG) N.C N.C

4 5 6

(ORG)

PDC2 PDC2

N.C N.C

1 2 3

3 8 4 9

N.C N.C

1 2 3

5 10 PDC18 PDC18 P+24V02 (F315 ) GND

1 6 2 7


7 15 8 16

F308

(ORG) (BLK)

5 13 6 14

P+24V02 F309 GND

7 15 8 16

M307OUT1 M307OUT2

5 13 6 14

9

(RED) (YEL) (BLU)

(ORG) (BLK)

1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12


N.C N.C

1 5 2 6 3 4 M313 M313 1 5 2 6 3 4 N.C N.C

Feed nip motor (103-564-5245)

M313

(ORG) (BLK)


Feed drive motor 2 (103G770-2264)

M303

P+24V02 F308 GND

PDC4 PDC4


N.C N.C

Back printer drive solenoid 2 (125A8413422)

8

Exit drive motor (103G770-2264)

(ORG) (BLK)

DR2 DR2 1 2 3 4 5

1 3 4 6 2 5 M303 M303 1 3 4 6 2 5 N.C N.C

5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10 S302 S302 5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10

M313 A M313 / A M313 B M313 / B

JHA2 JHA2 (RED) (YEL) (BLU) (ORG)

N.C N.C

N.C N.C

S302

P+5V D313 sensor signal GND


N.C N.C

N.C N.C

7

Cutter drive motor

PDC3 PDC3 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

6 16 7 17 8 18 9 19 10 20 M303 A M303 / A M303 B M303 / B

1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

P+5V D312 sensor signal GND

1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14 JHA1 JHA1 1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14

(BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (ORG) (ORG)

(ORG)

5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10 S301 S301 5 12 3 11 2 9 4 6 7 8 1 10

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

5 10

N.C N.C

S301

Cutter home position sensor 2 (GP1A71A)

1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14 PWR14 PWR14

6

(RED) (GRY) (BLK)

PDC25 PDC25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10


1 11 2 12 3 13 4 14 5 15 S302 1 S302 2 S302 3 S302 4 S302 5 S302 6 S302 7 S302 8 P+24V21 P+24V21

N.C N.C

1 2 F301 F301 1 2

P+24V23 GND P+5V GND M305 CLK M305 PD

Back printer drive solenoid 1 (125A8413422)

F301

(BLK) (RED) (ORG) (YEL) (BLU) N.C

PDC25 PDC25 1 2

5 10

(BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (BLK) (ORG)

Sub-scanning nip motor cooling fan (119C889854A)

M311

(ORG) (BLK) (ORG) (BLK) (ORG) (BLK) N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C


Sub-scanning nip motor (103-564-5245)

M310

S301 1 S301 2 S301 3 S301 4 S301 5 S301 6 S301 7 S301 8 P+24V21 P+24V21

N.C N.C

Width detecting drive motor (103-564-5245)

M309

TDI GND

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 JHU2 JHU2 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9

(ORG) (BLK)

1 5 2 6 3 4 M311 M311 1 5 2 6 3 4

N.C N.C

N.C N.C

1 5 2 6 3 4 M310 M310 1 5 2 6 3 4 N.C N.C

Register nip motor (103-564-5245)

M304

24V GND 5V 4/4.5 switch CLK PD

PLD IPS connector

(ORG) (BLK) N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PDC19 PDC19

P+24V02 (F301 ) GND P+24V02 (F302 ) GND P+24V02 (Spare) GND P+24V02 (Spare) GND

N.C N.C N.C N.C

(RED) (YEL) (BLU) (ORG) N.C N.C N.C N.C

N.C N.C

1 5 2 6 3 4 M309 M309 1 5 2 6 3 4

N.C N.C

A Register drive motor (103-564-5245)

5

N.C

PWR22 Circuit Board (RED) (YEL) (BLU) (ORG)

N.C N.C N.C N.C

N.C N.C

1 5 2 6 3 4 M304 M304 1 5 2 6 3 4

N.C N.C

N.C N.C

4

(BLK) (RED) (ORG) (YEL) (BLU) N.C

1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18 PWR18 PWR18 1 3 2 4 PDC15 PDC15

M311 A M311 / A M311 B M311 / B

7 15 8 16

TCK GND TDO VCC TMS

5 13 6 14

P+5V GND

M315 A M315 / A M315 B M315 / B

PDC16 PDC16

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

PDC23 PDC23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

(RED) (BLK)

P+24V43 GND N.C

5 11 6 12

N.C

PDC24 PDC24 3 2 4 5 6

N.C


3 11 4 12 (RED) (YEL) (BLU) (ORG)

1 9 2 10

(ORG) (BLK)

1 P+24V41 GND P+24V42 GND



3 9 4 10

N.C


M310 A M310 / A M310 B M310 / B

M309 A M309 / A M309 B M309 / B


5 11 6 12

1 7 2 8 3 9 4 10 JRE1 JRE1 3 9 4 10


1 3 2 4 JHK1 JHK1 1 3 2 4 1 7 2 8

GND-5P

N.C

P+24V32 GND GND N.C N.C

5 6 N.C N.C

P+24V31

7 8

N.C N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

(ORG) (BLK)

M304 A M304 / A M304 B M304 / B

N.C N.C

Feed drive motor 1 (103G770-2264)

3

P+5V1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 PWR16 PWR16 N.C N.C

P+24V23 GND


1 2 3 4 M301 M301 1 2 3 4


1 3 4 6 2 5 M302 M302 1 3 4 6 2 5

N.C N.C

(ORG) (BLK)

M302 A M30 2 / A M302 B M30 2 / B

(XSH7126-347)

Paper supply motor

M302

+24V30 +24V30 +24V31 +24V31 +24V32 +24V32 GND-24V3 GND-24V3 +24V41 +24V41 +24V42 +24V42 +24V43 +24V43 GND-24V4 GND-24V4 GND-24V4 GND-24V4

N.C

PDC22 PDC22 3 4

P+24V02 GND

P+24V22 GND

M301

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

1 2

(ORG) (BLK)

10

(BLK) (BLK)

5 11 6 12 PDC16 PDC16

N.C

P+24V21 GND


2

N.C

G M301A M301 / B M301A M301 / B

1

Cutter home position sensor 1 (GP1A71A)

Sub-scanning drive motor

F 9

(ORG) (ORG)

P+24V01

1 7 2 8

N.C

E GND

D

(BLK)

(ORG)

C

N.C N.C N.C

N.C

B

+24V01 +24V02 GND-24VO +24V11 +24V12 GND-24V1 +24V21 +24V22 +24V23 GND-24V2 GND-24V2 +24V01 +24V02 GND-24V0 +24V11 +24V12 GND-24V1 +24V21 +24V22 +24V23 GND-24V2 GND-24V2



PDC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram (2/2) 10 11

PDC22 Circuit Board (2/2)

PDC17 PDC17

3 7 4 8

JSY1 JSY1

3 7 4 8

3 7 4 8

1 5 2 6 3 4 M314 M314 1 5 2 6 3 4

E

G

H 1 2 3 JNDL1 To the light table 1 2 PZR1 PZR1

F PZR22 Circuit Board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112 PZR2 PZR2 1 2 3 4

N.C

(RED) (BLK)

N.C N.C

CTC13 CTC13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011121314

N.C N.C

N.C

PZ201

1 2 3 4 5 PZ201 PZ201 1 2 3 4 5

(AE203D16)

Piezoelectric actuator 2

(AE203D16)

Piezoelectric actuator 1

7

N.C

CTC22 Circuit Board N.C N.C

B

N.C N.C

6

X-axis output NC GND

(RED) (BLK)

5

N.C

N.C

PWR13 PWR13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 1314

X-axis output NC GND NC

PWR22 Circuit Board

PZ201+ PZ201PZ202+ PZ202PZON+ PZONERR201 DGND ERR202 DGND ERRPZR DGND DGND DGND

4

N.C N.C

(RED) (BLK) N.C N.C

(RED) (BLK) N.C

3

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK)

D (BLK)

C 2

X-axis on + X-axis on Y-axis on + Y-axis on PWONon + PWONon X-axis SNG GND Y-axis SNG GND Power supply NG GND

+9V GND

(ORG) (BLK) N.C

1

P+5V1 GND-5P P+9V1 P+9V2 GND-9P N.C N.C P+5V1 GND-5P P+9V1 P+9V2 GND-9P N.C N.C

19.3.11

(RED) (BLK) (RED) N.C



PZR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram 8 9

A

PZ202

1 2 3 4 PZ202 PZ202 1 2 3 4

To CTC3 To PAC16

PZR3 PZR3 5 6 7

10 11



19.3.12 1

Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Laser Unit) 2

3

4

A

5

6

7

8

9

(GRY)

B image data output (GRY)

G image data output (GRY)

R image data output

LDA22 Circuit Board

B

Power supply output voltages for the AOM driver

C R-LD drive system

D R-LD EEPROM I/F

(ORG) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (BLU) (GRY)

(GRY)

(GRY)

(GRY) (BLU) (BLK) (RED) (GRY) (RED) (BLK) (RED) (GRY)

(RED) (BLU) (BLK) (RED) (RED) (RED) (BLK) (RED) (GRY)

(GRY) (BLU) (GRY) (GRY) (RED)

(RED) (RED) (RED) (RED) (RED)

(RED) (BLK) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY)

(RED) (BLK) (RED) (RED) (RED) (RED) (GRY)

APC22 Circuit Board

(GRY)

R-LD temperature control system

E

G-SHG drive system

G-SHG temperature control system

F

G-SHG EEPROM I/F

B-SHG drive system

(RED) (RED) (RED)

(GRY) (GRY) (GRY) (GRY)

(GRY)

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY)

(GRN) (GRN) (GRY)

(RED) (BLK) (BLU) (RED)

(GRN) (GRN) (GRN)

(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK)


(GRN) (GRN) (GRN) (GRN)

(GRY)

(GRY)

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY)

(BLU) (BLU) (GRY)

(RED) (BLK) (BLU)

(BLU) (BLU) (BLU) (BLU)

JMR22 Circuit Board

JMG22 Circuit Board

(RED)

G

B-SHG temperature control system

G-SHG EEPROM I/F

LDD22 Circuit Board

H

(RED)

(RED)

(BLK)

(BLK)

(RED) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK)


(BLU) (BLU) (BLU) (BLU)

JML22 Circuit Board

JMB22 Circuit Board

Laser Unit

10

11



19.3.13 1

Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Sensors and Mechanical System) 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

10

SOS Detecting Circuit Board

(RED) (BLK) (GRY)

JND20 Circuit Board

DTA22 Circuit Board

B (GRY) (GRY) (BLK) (ORG)

C

D

Laser unit internal mechanical system (I/O)

(RED) (BLK) (GRY)

(RED) (BLK) (GRY)

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK) (ORG) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (GRY)

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY) (GRY) (ORG) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (GRY)

(RED) (BLK) (GRY)

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY)

(RED) (BLK) (GRY)

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY)

(RED) (BLK) (GRY)

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY)

E

Polygon Motor Circuit Board

JND20 Circuit Board

(RED) (BLK)

Shutter solenoid (SDC-1040)

Shutter sensor (GP1A21) (RED) (BLK) (YEL)

Dustproof fan 1

(RED) (BLK) (YEL)

Dustproof fan 2

(RED) (BLK) (YEL)

Dustproof fan 3

Laser Unit

F

(ORG) (BLK) (GRY)


(RED) (BLK) (YEL)


Frame (Printer Section) Exposure section temperature sensor circuit board

G Exposure section temperature sensor

(RED) (BLK) (BLU) (BLK)

(RED) (BLK) (BLU) (BLK)

THA20 Circuit Board

LDD22 Circuit Board

H

Sub-scanning Unit

11



19.3.14 1

Image Processing Circuit Board Wiring Diagram 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

PWR22 Circuit Board Main Control Unit

ADC22 Circuit Board D+3.3V1 GND-3.3V D+3.3V1 GND-3.3V D+3.3V1 GND-3.3V D+3.3V1 GND-3.3V D+3.3V1 GND-3.3V D+3.3V1 GND-3.3V

B

PC2 PC2 1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 20 54 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 643165 3266 336734 68

PWR6 PWR6 1 7 2 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 6 12 N.C N.C

ADC4 ADC4 1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 10 30 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40

(RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK) (RED) (BLK)

C

1 35 2 36 3 37 4 38 5 39 6 40 7 41 8 42 9 43 10 4411 4512 46 13 47 14 48 1549 16 50 17 51 18 52 19 53 20 54 21 55 22 56 23 57 24 58 2559 26 60 27 61 28 62 29 63 30 643165 3266 336734 68 BOX3 (S CSI) BOX3 (S CSI)

1 4 2 5 3 8 6 9 7 10 BOX2 BOX2

GND SD12 GND SD13 GND SD14 GND SD15 GND SDP1 GND SD0 GND SD1 GND SD2 GND SD3 GND SD4 GND SD5 GND SD6 GND SD7 GND SDP0 GND GND GND GND NC NC NC NC NC NC NC GND GND ATN GND GND GND BSY GND ACY GND RST GND MSG GND SEL GND C/D GND REQ GND I/O GND SD8 GND SD9 GND SD10 GND SD11

3.3V GND 3.3V GND 3.3V GND 3.3V GND 3.3V GND

D

GND GND DIN0(+) DIN0(-) DIN1(-) DIN1(+) DIN2(+) DIN2(-) DIN3(-) DIN3(+) DIN4(+) DIN4(-) DIN5(-) DIN5(+) DIN6(+) DIN6(-) DIN7(-) DIN7(+) DIN8(+) DIN8(-) DIN9(-) DIN9(+) DIN10(+) DIN10(-) DIN11(-) DIN11(+) DIN12(+) DIN12(-) CLK(-) CLK(+) /HD(+) /HD(-) SDTR(-) SDTR(+) SDTW(+) SDTW(-) SCK(-) SCK(+) GND GND

1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 10 30 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40 BOX1 (S CANN ER) BOX1 (S CANN ER)

CPL_VCCO LDA_TXD CPL_VCCI LDA_RXD

N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

GND DBG_TXD DBG_RXD

GND CTP_TXD CTP_RXD

GND CTC_RXD CTC_TXD /CTC_IRQ /CTC_INT GND IN PORT1 OUT PORT1 IN PORT2 OUT PORT2

BOX5 BOX5 22 2324 25

N.C

(GRY) (BLK) (GRY) (BLK)

1 2 3 4 JGM2 JGM2 1 2 3 4

10 18192021 N.C N.C N.C N.C N.C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 JGM1 JGM1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1415 16

(BLK) (GRY) (GRY)

1112 13 (BLK) (GRY) (GRY)

5 2 1 4 3 17 7 6 9 8

G

H

CTC22 Circuit Board

CTP22 Circuit Board

N.C

1 2 3 4 5 JGM4 JGM4 1 2 3 4 5

To DBG

(RED) (GRY) (RED) (GRY)

N.C

1 3 2 4 5 CTP9 CTP9

1 2 3 JGM3 JGM3

1 2 3 4 LDA6 LDA6

GHT_RxD_PAC GHT_RxD_PC GHT_TxD_PAC GHT_TxD_PC

LDA22 Circuit Board

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CTC1 CTC1

(BLK) (GRY) (GRY) N.C N.C

1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36 LDA1 LDA1

GND(DGND) TxD RxD int out int in GND(DGND) GMB_out1 GMB_in1 GMB_out2 GMB_in2

F

GND RXD2 TXD2 N.C N.C


N.C

E

BOX4 (ROS) BOX4 (ROS) 1 19 2 20 3 21 4 22 5 23 6 24 7 25 8 26 9 27 10 28 11 29 12 30 13 31 14 32 15 33 16 34 17 35 18 36


GND GND DOUT0(+) DOUT0(-) DOUT1(-) DOUT1(+) DOUT2(+) DOUT2(-) DOUT3(-) DOUT3(+) DOUT4(+) DOUT4(-) DOUT5(-) DOUT5(+) DOUT6(+) DOUT6(-) DOUT7(-) DOUT7(+) Enable-R(+) Enable-R(-) Enable-G(-) Enable-G(+) Enable-B(-) Enable-B(+) Datavalid(-) Datavalid(+) CLOCK(+) CLOCK(-) R-REQ(-) R-REQ(+) G-REQ(+) G-REQ(-) B-REQ(-) B-REQ(+) GND GND

Image Processing Box Circuit Board

LDA22 Circuit Board

10

11

1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 10 30 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40

(M3_scr ew) (M3_scr ew) (M3_scre w)

CY1 QR/P4-40S-C(01) LEF1

LEB22

ZHR-9

B2B-ZR

LEF22

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CYS7

CYS53J CYS53J

D104L ZHR-2

B2B-ZR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CYS13 PHR-8

B20B-PHDSS B4B-PH-K-S CYS6

CYS6 PHR-7

51005-0400 51006-0400

B9B-ZR

D101L ZHR-2

D107P D107P

FSP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MSB1 ZHR-3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4

D120 ZHR-2 LED1

MSC1 ZHR-5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

LED101_G GND LED101_R

S4B-ZR

D117 ZHR-3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 2 3 4

B3B-ZR

D103P ZHR-4

D107P_1 D107P_2 D107P_3 D107P_4 +12V GND -12V

1 2 3 4

S2B-ZR

D104P ZHR-3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4

B5B-ZR

1 2

1 2 3 4

1 2 3

1 2

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3

S3B-ZR

E_D101L R_D101L

E_D104L R_D104L

D118 D119 GND

D120 GND

D124 D125 D126 D127 GND

VCC D117 GND

B4B-ZR

135 frame sensor3 (D107P-3) 135 frame sensor4 (D107P-4)

ZHR-4

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

1 2 3 4

1 2 3

S3B-ZR

135 frame sensor1 (D107P-1)

B4B-ZR

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

D103P

VCC

D104P

VCC

1 2 3 4 5

DTE22

LED-Ar

DTE22

SSE22

DTE22

DT G22

LED22

MSB22

MSA22

Status indicator LED_G (LED101_G)

Status indicator LED_R (LED101_R)

135 lower mask F sensor (D119)

135 lower mask H sensor (D118)

Upper cover open/close sensor (D120)

Key4_> (D127)

Key3_>> (D126)

Key2_<< (D125)

Key1_< (D124)

Mask motor home position sensor (D117)

135 downstream perforation sensor (D103P)

IX240 TAP and leading end sensor (D104P)

IX240 TAP and leading end sensor (D104P)

IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor (D108P)

IX240 perforation sensor (D105P)

135 frame sensor (D107L)

135 leading end sensor (D101P)

9

135 frame sensor2 (D107P-2)

LEB1

51005-0900 51006-0900

LEE22

B2B-ZR

D105L ZHR-2

CYS52J CYS52J

135 leading end sensor (D101L)

D103L ZHR-2

B16B-PHDSS

LEE22

MWH20

CYS7 PHR-4

IX240 TAP and leading end sensor (D104L)

W-head C

MRH90

51005-0800 51006-0800

135 check tape sensor (D106L)

CYS51J CYS51J

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

51006-0400

135 rear fogging sensor (D110L)

R-head C

CYS5

135 front fogging sensor (D111L)

ZHR-6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

B18B-PHDSS

E_D102L R_D102L E_D111L R_D111L E_D110L R_D110L E_D106L R_D106L

S6B-ZR

CYS5 PHDR-20VS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

CYS8

E_D108L R_D108L E_D109L R_D109L

MRH1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CYS4

MSC22

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

F B10B-PHDSS

1 2 3 4

51005-0400

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CYS4 PHDR-18VS

CYS8 PHDR-16VS

E_D105L R_D105L

B6B-PH-K-S

VCC CMWR1(MG101_1) CMEN1(MG101_2) CMWR2(MG101_3) CMEN2(MG101_4) GND

CYS9

ZHR-5

1 2

M104

D108P D109P +12V GND -12V

DTB1

M-12V MGND M+12V MGND CMRD2(D116_2) CMRD1(D116_1)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

B3B-PH-K-S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

D105P ZHR-4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4

AR

E_D103L R_D103L

51005-0400

D105P

D101P ZHR-4

1 2

M102

VCC

1 2 3

ZHR-5

240MAG_write2 (MG101_3)

51006-0400

CYS9 PHDR-10VS

DTB22

240MAG_W/Enable2 (MG101_4)

S101 51005-0200

E_D107L R_D107L-MY R_D107L-MR

B5B-ZR

1 2 3 4 5 6

51006-0200

Door motor (M104)

CYS10

M104

B12B-PHDSS

1 2 3

B4B-ZR

8

135 upstream perforation sensor (D102L)

51006-0600 51005-0600

1 2 3 4

S3B-ZR

240MAG_W/Enable1 (MG101_2)

FGND S101+ S101-

D101P

B4B-ZR ZHR-3

7

IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor (D108L) IX240 front unexposed frame sensor (D109L)

JMS1 JMS1

B5B-ZR

240MAG_read1(D116_1)

M103 51005-0400

6

LEE22

CY1 QR/P4-40P-C(01)

135 upstream perforation sensor (D102P)

5

240MAG_write1 (MG101_1)

1 2 3 4 5 6

51006-0400

M101 51005-0400 CYS10 PHR-3

1 2 3 4

51006-0400

1 2 3

C

CY1-11 CY1-31 CY1-12 CY1-32

CYS3 PHR-6

Supply motor (M102)

CYS11

M102

CYS3

VCC

DTF22

1 2 3 4

B14B-PHDSS DTF1

135 check tape sensor (D106P)

4

CY1-9 CY1-29 CY1-10 CY1-30

B6B-PH-K-S ZHR-6

Solenoid (S101)

S6B-ZR

S101

CYS11 PHDR-12VS

1 2 3 4 5

B

VCC D102P VCC D106P

DTF2

135 front fogging sensor (D111P)

135 rear fogging sensor (D110P)

ZHR-4

Mask motor (M103)

1 2 3 4 5 6

D113

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

SSA22

1 2

M103

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

D110P D111P +12V GND -12V

CYS122J 51006-0600 CYS122J 51005-0600

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6

IPI sensor (D113)

Cartridge sensor (D115)

Door open/close sensor (D112)

Supply motor home position sensor (D114)

3

240MAG_read2 (D116_2)

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

S4B-ZR

1 2 3 4 5 6

M103-A M103-/A M103-B M103-/B

CYS2 PHR-6 ZHR-5


CYS2

Feed motor (M101)

CYS12

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5

SSD22

SSB22


M101

B5B-EH

VCC D113 GND

VCC D112 D115 GND

SSB1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6

D114 ZHR-3

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3

S5B-ZR

CY1-15 CY1-35 CY1-16 CY1-36 CY1-17 CY1-37

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

VCC D114 GND

B3B-ZR

M101-A M101-/A M101-B M101-/B

CY1-9 CY1-29 CY1-10 CY1-30 CY1-11 CY1-31 CY1-12 CY1-32

D

SIO+ SIOSCLK+ SCLKRST+ RST-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1 2 3

2

IX240 perforation sensor (D105L)

H FGND

1 2 3 4 5 6

CYS121J 51006-0300 CYS121J 51005-0300

1 2 3 4 5 6

CYS1

SIO+ SIOSCLK+ SCLKRST+ RST-

CYS12 PHDR-14VS

SW1

1 2 3

A

D123B

1 2 3 4 5

1

LEE22

CY1-15 CY1-35 CY1-16 CY1-36 CY1-17 CY1-37

G D+5V DGND A+12V AGND A-12V

CYS1 EHR-5

1 2 3 4 5

19.3.15

135 downstream perforation sensor (D103L)

1 21 2 22 3 23 4 24 5 25 6 26 7 27 8 28 9 29 10 30 11 31 12 32 13 33 14 34 15 35 16 36 17 37 18 38 19 39 20 40

E D+5V DGND A+12V AGND A-12V



Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Wiring Diagram 10 11

ZHR-4

CYS123J 51006-0500 CYS123J 51005-0500

for debug

B7B-PH-K-S

CYS13

CYS22 Circuit Board

51005-0700 51006-0700

MWH1 IL-Y-6S-S15C3

IL-Y-6P-S15L2-EF

B8B-ZR

ZHR-8

B2B-ZR

FS-P

B8B-PH-K-S


19.4 Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams 19.4.1 PAC22 Circuit Board Circnit Diagram (1/4) 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

A PAC01 1

HM20 2A 250V

2

A

6

2

1

5V power-up signal (+) 4

5 2

100 VAC input

K1

F1

1

TNR5V271K

VD1

4

2

5V power-up signal (-) 4

1

K AQV253H

B

PAC19 2

1 DC power supply relay ON 100 VAC

Jumper connector for the dummy switch (ON)

1

3

C

PAC02

2 PAC18

4 1

D+5V D1

D2 1

P+24V

K

EC10DS1 2 A

1

P+24V

K

EC10DS1 2 A

K4 8

3

4

G3VM-V K2 6

K3 1

2

R1

A

1 270 1/4W 5%

5

1

5

4

2

Processing tank circulation pump 4

K

PAC04 F2

6

5

1

4 2

P1 circulation pump

7

G2R-1A-E-DC24V TN1 1 2

HM50 5A 250V

G2R-1A-DC24V

2 TN2 1

1

XE1201

P2 circulation pump

2

XE1201 F3 HM20 2A 250V

8

3 PS1 circulation pump

9

D+5V

ERZV07D471 2

VD2 1


10

U1 1

E

1

3

2

D

Jumper connector for the dummy switch (OFF)

3

~

~

2

5

4

11


+ G3M-202P-UTU-1-DC5V

P1 replenisher PU408 4


ERZV07D471 2

VD3 1

12

U2 1

3

F

~

~

2

4


ERZV07D471 2

P2RA replenisher PU409 4

VD4 1

PAC03 1

U3 1

3

~ +

~ -

2

4

P2RB replenisher PU410 4

G3M-202P-UTU-1-DC5V ERZV07D471 2

H

1

3

~

2 P2RA replenisher pump

6

VD5 1

3

P2RB replenisher pump

7

U4

G

P1 replenisher pump

5

~

2

4 PSR replenisher pump

4


PSR replenisher PU411 4

8


19.4 Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams

PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram (2/4) 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

A R2 3.9K 1/4W 5%

P+24V

1

R3 3.9K 1/4W 5%

A 2

K

B

D3 SML-310DT

PAC15 1 2

<24 V from PWR22>

R5

3.9K 1/4W 5%

R6

3.9K 1/4W 5%

P+5V

R4 330 1/4W 5%

PC1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

P+5V input check 4 P+24V input check 4 Dryer safety thermostat 4 Not used

TLP281-4(GB)

D5 EC10DS1

2

A

K

1

2 1

6

D4 EC10DS1

P+24V

A

K

1

D

5

P+24V

4 3

K5 G4W-2212P-VD-TV5-DC24V

C

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10

CRT relay Dryer heater relay (1) Dryer heater relay (2)

E

Solution heater relay (1) Solution heater relay (2)

K6 G4W-2212P-VD-TV5-DC24V 4 2 3 1

2

PAC13

1 D6 K

A

1 D7 K

A

1 D8 K 1 D9 K

2 EC10DS1 2 EC10DS1

5

6

2 EC10DS1 A

D10 2 EC10DS1

2

A

D+5V

1 A K EC10DS1

K7

R7270 A

6

1 1/4W 5%

5 4

2

REON

K

F

4

G3VM-V

PAC14 Dryer heater thermostat Slit plate thermostat (1) Slit plate thermostat (2) P1 heater thermostat

G

P2 heater thermostat PSA heater thermostat PSB heater thermostat

1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14

P+24V PC2 R8 3.9K

1/4W 5% R9

3.9K

1/4W 5% R10

3.9K

1/4W 5% R11

3.9K

1/4W 5%

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 TLP281-4(GB)

H

P1 safety thermostat 4 P2 safety thermostat 4 PSA safety thermostat 4 SBP safety thermostat 4




2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

A

D+5V

VD6 2

B

U5

F4

PAC08

1

Solution heater 200 Vin

1

2

1

HM32 3.2A 250V

2

3

3

C

ERZV07D471 1 PAC06

~

~

+

-

2

1

4

2

P1 solution heater H401 P1 solution heater H401 4

G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V

3

ERZV07D471 1

4

VD7 2

P2 solution heater H402 5

U6

F5

1

2

1

HM32 3.2A 250V

D

3

~

~

+

-

2 4

P2 solution heater H402 4

G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V

D+5V

VD8 2

E PAC07

Solution heater 200 Vin

U7

F6

1

2

1

HM32 3.2A 250V

2

ERZV07D471 1

1 3

F

PAC05

~

~

+

-

2

1

4

2

PSA solution heater H403 PSA solution heater H403 4

G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V

3

ERZV07D471 1

4

VD9 2

5

U8

F7

1

G

H

2 HM32 3.2A 250V

1 3

PSA solution heater H404

~

~

+

-

2 4

G3M-203P-UTU-1-DC5V

6

PSB solution heater H404 4




2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

A

P+5V

P+5V

1

PC3

R16 330 1/4W 5%

R17 330 1/4W 5%

D+5V R18 330 1/4W 5%

R19 680 1/4W 5%

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

P+5V

PAC12

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

2

4

6

8

16 14 12

10

SN74LS244N

1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8

18

1

C

R20 330 1/4W 5%

4.7k 4.7k 4.7k 4.7k 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 1/4W 5% 5% 5% 5%

VCC

D+5V D+5V

TP1

U11-1

R12 R13 R14 R15

C1 0.1u

20

B

A

D11 SML-310VT

K

2

P2RB replenisher PU410 1 PSR replenisher PU411 1 Processing tank circulation pump 1 P1 solution heater H401 3 P2 solution heater H402 3

TP2 P+5V P+5V

PSA solution heater H403 3 PSB solution heater H404 3 PAC16

P+5V input check 2 P+24V input check 2

TP5

DGND

H

Processor exhaust fan

1 3 2 4

1

+ C3 47u 50V

D12 SML-310DT

K

1

+ C2 47u 16V

R22 680 1/4W 5% A

Dryer safety thermostat 2 Slit plate safety thermostat 2 5V power-up signal (+) 1 5V power-up signal (-) 1

R21 3.9k 1/4W 5%

K

PSA thermostat 2 PSB thermostat 2

2

+24V 30

2

P+24V input REON 2 Slit plate heater (2) H408 3 P1 safety thermostat 2 P2 safety thermostat 2

2

Slit plate heater (1) H407 3

1

1 4 2 5 3 6

P+5V input

PAC11

G

TP3 P+24V

P+24V

A

F

PAC17

E

P1 replenisher PU408 1 P2RA replenisher PU409 1

1

D

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

2

CTP22 communication connector

D13 SML-310VT

TP4

PGND

Dryer fan SSR Dryer SSR A Dryer SSR B Output reserved for future use



19.4.2 PDC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram (1/14) 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

VCC

CTP Connector

A

8 7 6 5

1

RA8 1K 1/16W 5%

RA9 1K 1/16W 5%

2

6 8

VCC

74LS244

G EN

4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

RA7 1K 1/16W 5%

RA6 1K 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5 RA5 330 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5 RA4 330 1/16W 5%

RA3 330 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

RA2 330 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

D+5V

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

U1-1

RA1 330 1/16W 5%

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

18 16 14 12

PC1 1

R1 680 1/10W 5%

7

C1 0.1u

2 3 6

1

19

A

74LS244

G EN

TLP2630

K

B

U1-2

4

D1 SML-310LT

2

11 13

PC2

15

1 7

17

2 3

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9

/STB

7

BD0 3

5

5

BD1 3

3

BD2 3

6 TP1

4

RCU00000C

TLP2630

D

PDC1

E

1 CTP18IN 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

PC3

DGND 1

M301CLK 2 M302CLK 2

D+5V

M303CLK M304CLK M306CLK M309CLK

7

2 3

2 2 2 2

U2-1

6

1

TLP2630 2

M310CLK 2 YOBI1CLK 2 M311CLK M313CLK M403CLK M314CLK

4

2 2 2 2

6

PC4

8

1

Y1 Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

18

BD3 3

16

BD4 3

14

BD5 3

12

BD6 3

2 3 6

4

TLP2630

PIO0 PIO1 PIO2

VCC

PIO3 PIO4 PIO5 PIO6

C2 0.1u

PC5 1

PIO7 PIOSEL0

U2-2

7

2 3

19

74LS244

G EN

6

4 11

TLP2630

13

P+5V 2 P+24V 2

15 17

PIOON 2 D312 2 D313 2 YOBIOUT1 2 YOBIIN1

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9

BD7 3

7

IA0

5

IA1

3

3

IA2

3

18

IA3

3

16

PIOWR 3

3

PC6 1 7

PIOSEL1 PIOSEL2

2

U3-1

2 3

1

6

74LS244

G EN

4

TLP2630

2 4 6 8

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

14 12

1 7

2 3

1

PIOSEL3

+ C3 47u 50V

C4 0.1u

VCC 6 C5

2

4

1u

C6 0.1u

VCC

TLP2630 U3-2 19

74LS244

C7 0.1u

G EN

U4 C8

1 3 4 5 11 10 12 9

1u

PC8 1 7 TP2

11

2 3

TXD1 RCU00000C

13

6

4

D+5V

15

VCC

TLP2630

17

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9 7 5

C1+ C1C2+ C2T1IN T2IN R1OUT R2OUT

VS+ VST1OUT T2OUT R1IN R2IN

2 6 14 7 13 8

P+24V43 C9 1u

C10 1u

MAX232NS

3

TXD_232c

+ C11 47u 50V

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

2

G

RA10 2.2k 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

8

1 2 3 4

RA11 330 1/16W 5% PC9 1 7

RXD1

2 3 6

4

D+5V

VCC C12 0.1u

VCC C13 0.1u

VCC C14 0.1u

VCC C15 0.1u

VCC C16 0.1u

VCC C17 0.1u

VCC C18 0.1u

VCC C19 0.1u

5

VCC

H

A1 A2

7

M315CLK 2 YOBI2CLK 2 M305CLK 2 M305PD 2

PC7

F

74LS244

G EN

4

1

C

C21 0.1u

C20 0.1u

TLP2630

RXD_232c TP3

TP4

PDC5 1 2 3 4 5



PDC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram (2/14) 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

VCC The PDC22 circuit board is used to communicate with the CTP22 pulse motor clocks.

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

RA21 1K 1/16W 5%

VCC

VCC C22 0.1u

1 2 3 4

RA20 2.2k 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

RA19 2.2k 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

RA18 2.2k 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

RA17 2.2k 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

RA16 330 1/16W 5%

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5 RA15 330 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

RA14 330 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

RA13 330 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4

RA12 330 1/16W 5%

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

D+5V

A

U5-1 1

C23 0.1u

74LS244

G EN

PC10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 M301CLK 1 M302CLK 1 M303CLK 1 M304CLK

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

2 4 6 8

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

18

M301_CLK 4

16

M302_CLK 4

14

M303_CLK 4

12 U5-2 19

TLP281-4(GB)

B

M304_CLK 4

74LS244

G EN

PC11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 M306CLK 1 M309CLK 1 M310CLK 1 M311CLK

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

11 13 15 17 U6-1 1

TLP281-4(GB)

74LS244

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9

M306_CLK 4

7

M309_CLK 4

5

M310_CLK 4

3

M311_CLK 4

G EN

PC12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 M313CLK 1 M314CLK

C

1 M315CLK 1 M403CLK

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

2 4 6 8

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

18

M313_CLK 4

16

M314_CLK 4

14

M315_CLK 4

12 U6-2 19

TLP281-4(GB)

M403_CLK 4

74LS244

G EN

PC13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 YOBI1CLK 1 YOBI2CLK 1 YOBIIN1

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9

11 13 15 17

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9

YOBI1_CLK

7

4

Sub-scanning drive motor (M305)

5

P+24V23

3

VCC TLP281-4(GB) PC14

1

1

D

R2 470 1/10W 5%

6 4

R3 10k 1/10W 5%

U7-1 TLP2630 1

2

VCC 74LS07 VCC 3

5

/RESET

3,4

TP5

MB3771PF

C27 1u

RCU00000C

TP6

RCU00000C

C26 0.1u U9-1

74LS240

TP7

RA22 330 1/16W 5%

RCU00000C

G EN

1 2 3 4

1

8 7 6 5

VCC 8 7 6 4

8 7 6 5

CT RESET VSC VSA OUTC VSB/RESIN GND

Reset time of 100 msec 2

3 PIOON_PDC

4 6 8 VCC

VCC

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

18 16 14 12

U10-1 74LS244 VCC

Cutter signal

F

R4 2.2k 1/10W 5%

R5 2.2k 1/10W 5%

1

VCC P+24V21

P+24V23

P+24V31

P+24V41

P+24V43

2 4 R6

10

1/10W 5%

R7

10

1/10W 5%

6 8 C28 0.047u

RCU00000C

R9 6.8k 1/4W 5%

R10 6.8k 1/4W 5%

R11 6.8k 1/4W 5%

R12 6.8k 1/4W 5%

R13 6.8k 1/4W 5%

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

18 16 14

D312PLD 4

12

D313PLD 4

C29 0.047u

C31 0.1u TP10

RCU00000C

U10-2 74LS244 1 U11 2 3 4

19

11 13 U9-2

74LS30 19

11 R16 0.82k 1/4W 5%

R17 0.82k 1/4W 5%

R18 0.82k 1/4W 5%

R19 0.82k 1/4W 5%

R20 0.82k 1/4W 5%

R21 0.82k 1/4W 5%

13 15 17

H

This circuit detects whether or not the P+24 V is turned on. (The input voltage to 74LS30 must be between 2.24 V and 2.58 V.)

G EN VCC

8 5 6 11 12

74LS240

15

G EN

17

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9 7 5 3

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 TLP281-4(GB)

C30 0.1u

G

PIOON 1 P+5V 1 YOBIOUT1 1 P+24V 1

“H” level when the sensor detects the specified condition.

G EN

VCC R8 6.8k 1/4W 5%

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 TLP281-4(GB)

RCU00000C TP9

“H” level when an abnormal condition is detected.

PC15

PC16

PDC2 1 2 3 4 5 6

RA23 330 1/16W 5%

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TP8

P+24V01

4 74LS07

1 2 3 4

E

VCC

U8

PDC3 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8

U7-2

C25 0.1u

1 2 3

+ C24 47u 50V

2

7 2 3

1 M305CLK 1 M305PD

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9 D2 7

2

R14

1 K

A

5 SML-310MT

2 D3

R15

1 K

A

3 SML-310MT

680 1/10W 5%

680 1/10W 5%

VCC

D312 1 D313 1




2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Parallel I/O U12-1 74LS240 1

A

M301PD_dum

2

M302PD_dum

4

M303PD_dum

6

M304PD_dum

8

U13-1 74LS240 1

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

18

M301PD 4,6

M313PD_dum

2

16

M302PD 4,6

M314PD_dum

4

14

M303PD 4,10

M315PD_dum

6

12

M304PD 4,8

M403PD_dum

8

U12-2 74LS240 19

8 7 6 5

M309PD_dum

13

M310PD_dum

15

M311PD_dum

17

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

18

M313PD 4,10

16

M314PD 4,11

14

M315PD 4,9

12

M403PD 4,7

U13-2 74LS240 19

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9

M306PD 4,11

M402A_dum

11

7

M309PD 4,8

M402B_dum

13

5

M310PD 4,8

M404_dum

15

3

M311PD 4,9

PU407_dum

17

RA31 10k 1/16W 5%

VCC

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9

M402A 7

7

M402B 7

5

M404 7

3

PU407 7

VCC

VCC

1 2 3 4

RA30 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

RA29 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

RA28 10k 1/16W 5%

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

RA27 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

RA26 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

RA25 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

RA24 10k 1/16W 5%

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

B

M306PD_dum

11

G EN

VCC C32 0.1u

R22 22k 1/10W 5%

C33 0.1u

R207 22k 1/10W 5%

U15-1

1 1 1 1 2,4

8 9 10 11 26 27 28 29

BD0 BD1 BD2 BD3 BD4 BD5 BD6 BD7

18 20 21 22

IA0 IA1 IA2 IA3

23 14 15 16

/RESET

1 PIOWR

D

VCC

E

VCC

F

VCC C36 0.1u

C37 0.1u

19

D[0] D[1] D[2] D[3] D[4] D[5] D[6] D[7]

P0[0] P0[1] P0[2] P0[3] P0[4] P0[5] P0[6] P0[7] P1[0] ADR[0] P1[1] ADR[1] P1[2] ADR[2] P1[3] ADR[3] P1[4] P1[5] L_SYSCLR P1[6] L_CS P1[7] L_RD P2[0] L_WR P2[1] P2[2] P2[3] P2[4] P2[5] P2[6] P2[7] P3[0] P3[1] P3[2] P3[3] P3[4] P3[5] P3[6] P3[7] P4[0] P4[1] P4[2] P4[3] P4[4] P4[5] P4[6] P4[7] P5[0] P5[1] P5[2] P5[3] P5[4] P5[5] P5[6] P5[7] P6[0] P6[1] P6[2] P6[3] P6[4] P6[5] P6[6] P6[7] P7[0] P7[1] P7[2] P7[3] P7[4] P7[5] P7[6] P7[7] P8[0] P8[1] P8[2] P8[3] P8[4] P8[5] P8[6] IC P8[7]

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

M301PD_dum M302PD_dum M303PD_dum M304PD_dum M306PD_dum M309PD_dum M310PD_dum M311PD_dum M313PD_dum M314PD_dum M315PD_dum M403PD_dum

PLDYOBI1A 4

4

PLDYOBI1B 6

U15-2 3 74LS06

VCC

PLDYOBI2 4 M301DIR M304DIR M310DIR M314DIR PLDYOBI3 M307A 4 M307B 4 M307C 4

Processor drive motor (M401)

4 4 4 4

C34 0.1u

4

DOT11 DOT12 DOT13 DOT14 DOT15 DOT16 DOT17 DOT18 DOT21 DOT22 DOT23 DOT24 DOT25 DOT26 DOT27 DOT28

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

5 74LS06 U15-4

VCC 8 74LS06 M401 M401DIR

13 13 13 13 13 13

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

RA41 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

RA40 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

RA39 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

RA38 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

RA37 10k 1/16W 5%

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

RA36 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

RA35 10k 1/16W 5% 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5

8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4

RA34 10k 1/16W 5%

10

PDC6 1 2 3

74LS06

Buzzer connector

VCC

12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

R208 22k 1/10W 5%

U15-6 13

12 74LS06

PIOON_PDC 2

RA33 10k 1/16W 5%

R25 22k 1/10W 5%

U15-5

S409 12 S410 12 S411 12 S411DIR 12

RA32 10k 1/16W 5%

+ C35 47u 50V

6

9

S401 S402 S403 S404 S405 S406 S407 S408

G

R24 22k 1/10W 5%

U15-3

11 F401 F402 F403 F404 F406 F407

P+24V42 R23 22k 1/10W 5%

M402A_dum M402B_dum M404_dum PU407_dum

TX180

H

2 74LS06

1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

2

C

1 U14

PDC11 1 4 2 5 3 6




2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

U17-1 74LS244

A

PLD circuitry This circuitry is used to reshape the pulse motor clocks.

1

2 4 6 8

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

18 U18-1 74LS244 16 14 12

1

2

CUTTER_OUT2 6

4 U17-2 74LS244 19

6

G EN

8 11 13 15 17

B

R26 33

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9

M403A 7

7

M403B 7

5

M403/A 7

3

M403/B 7 11

1/10W 5%

R28 33

1/10W 5%

13 R29 33

1/10W 5%

R30 33

1/10W 5%

15

VCC R32 33 TCK

2 D312PLD 2 D313PLD 3 M307C

C

1/10W 5%

R33 33

1/10W 5%

R35 33

1/10W 5%

R37 33

1/10W 5%

R39 33

1/10W 5%

R34 33

1/10W 5%

R36 33

1/10W 5%

R38 33

1/10W 5%

R40 33

1/10W 5%

R42 33

1/10W 5%

2 1/10W 5% 4

VCC

6

2,3 2 2 2 3 3 3,6 3 3,10 3,10 3,8 3 3,11

/RESET M303_CLK M302_CLK M301_CLK M307A M307B M301PD M301DIR M302PD M303PD M304PD M304DIR M306PD

U20 EPM7128SQC160-15

I/O VCC/3.3V I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VCC/3.3V I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

VCC/3.3V TDI I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/ O I/O I/O I/O I/O TMS I/O I/O I/O VCC/3.3V I/ O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

M310_CLK M309_CLK M306_CLK M304_CLK

I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O VCC/3.3V I/O I/O I/O I/O INPUT/GCLK1 INPUT/OE1 INPUT/GCLRn INPUT/OE2/GCLK2 I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

D

2 2 2 2

122 123 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 139 140 141 142 144 145 146 147 149 150 151 152 153 158 159 160

I/O TDO I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/ O VCC/3.3V I/O I/O I/O I/O TCK I/O I/O I/O I/ O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O I/O

121 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 94 93 92 91 90 89 88

8

PLDYOBI3 M403_CLK M315_CLK M314_CLK M313_CLK M311_CLK

19 80 79 78 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 65 64 63 62 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 43 41

R43 33

1/10W 5%

R44 33

1/10W 5%

R46 33

1/10W 5%

R48 33

1/10W 5%

R50 33

1/10W 5%

R52 33

1/10W 5%

R54 33

1/10W 5%

R56 33

1/10W 5%

R58 33

1/10W 5%

R61 33

1/10W 5%

R63 33

1/10W 5%

R65 33

R45 33

1/10W 5%

11

R47 33

1/10W 5%

13

R49 33

1/10W 5%

15

R51 33

1/10W 5%

17

R53 33

1/10W 5%

R55 33

1/10W 5%

R57 33

1/10W 5%

R59 33

1/10W 5%

2

R60 33

1/10W 5%

4

R62 33

1/10W 5%

6

R64 33

1/10W 5%

8

R66 33

1/10W 5%

1

VCC

11 VCC

VCC

VCC

13 15

C39 0.1u

C40 0.1u

C41 0.1u

17

1

M309PD M310PD M310DIR M311PD M313PD M314PD M314DIR M315PD M403PD YOBI1_CLK PLDYOBI1A

2 4 6 8 U23-2 74LS244 19

F

G EN

R68 33

R70 33

1/10W 5%

1/10W 5% R69 33

11 13

1/10W 5%

1/10W 5%

15 17

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

9 7

M306B 11

11

5

M306/A 11

13

M306/B 11

15

3

U24-1 74LS244 1

VCC

R71 33

1/10W 5%

2

VCC R72 33

1/10W 5%

8 7 6 5

R73 33 R74 33

4 1/10W 5%

1/10W 5%

6 8

1

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

18

M314A 11

2

16

M314B 11

4

14

M314/A 11

6

12

M314/B 11

8

VCC

1 2 3 4 PDC26

9

M304A 8

7

M304B 8

5

M304/A 8

3

M304/B 8

18

M309A 8

16

M309B 8

14

M309/A 8

12

M309/B 8

9

M310A 8

7

M310B 8

5

M310/A 8

3

M310/B 8

18

M311A 9

16

M311B 9

14

M311/A 9

12

M311/B 9

9

M313A 9

7

M313B 9

5

M313/A 9

3

M313/B 9

18

M315A 9

16

M315B 9

14

M315/A 9

12

M315/B 9

9

M302A 10

7

M302B 10

5

M302/A 10

3

M302/B 10

18

M303A 10

16

M303B 10

14

M303/A 10

12

M303/B 10

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3 A4

Y3 Y4

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

R75 33

1/10W 5%

R77 33

1/10W 5%

11 R76 33

1/10W 5%

13 15

1/10W 5%

17

G EN

VCC C43 0.1u

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3 A4

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3 A4

Y3 Y4

U23-1 74LS244

VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC

VCC

U24-2 74LS244 19

R78 33

PLD_ISP function connector

M301/B 6

M306A 11

17

H

M301/A 6

12

U22-2 74LS244 19

R67 33 TMS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Y4

U22-1 74LS244

TDI

RA42 1K 1/16W 5%

A4

M301B 6

14

U21-2 74LS244 19

C38 0.1u

C42 0.1u

Y3

M301A 6

16

U21-1 74LS244

1/10W 5%

E

G

A3

18

U19-2 74LS244

VCC

3,8 3,8 3 3,9 3,9 3,11 3 3,9 3,7 2 3

Y2

U19-1 74LS244 1

VCC

3 2 2 2 2 2

Y1

A2

1/10W 5%

R41 33

TDO

3 PLDYOBI2

17 R31 33

A1

U18-2 74LS244 19

1/10W 5% R27 33

G EN

CUTTER_OUT1 6

Y3 Y4

9

MYOBI1A 11

7

MYOBI1B 11

5

MYOBI1/A 11

3

MYOBI1/B 11

C44 0.1u

C45 0.1u

C46 0.1u

C47 0.1u

C48 0.1u

C49 0.1u

G EN

A1

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4




2

Back printer circuitry

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

VCC P+24V21

1

R79 4.7k 1/10W 5%

A

U25-1 74HC244

G

1

G EN

D

1 /STB

6

S

8

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

R81 100 1/10W 5%

16

1 A

U1ZB36

5

A2

18

R82 100 1/10W 5%

14

R83 100 1/10W 5%

12

G

3 DOT14

6

Y1

8

3 DOT13

4

A1

K

D

3 DOT12

2

ZD1

2

G

3 DOT11

R80 100 1/10W 5%

QA1-1 SMA5106 2 3 4

D

S

4 3 2 1

B

7

ZD2

1

2 K

A

D

RA43 4.7K 1/16W 5%

QA1-2 SMA5106 9 10 11

5 6 7 8

12

G

U1ZB36

C

1

P+24V21

U25-2 74HC244

G

19

D

G EN 6

S

15

17

Y1

A2

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

R84 100 1/10W 5%

9

R85 100 1/10W 5%

7

A

P+24V21

U1ZB36

PDC4

5

A1

1 11 2 12 3 13 4 14 5 15 6 16 7 17 8 18 9 19 10 20

R86 100 1/10W 5%

5

R87 100 1/10W 5%

3

G

3 DOT18

13

8

3 DOT17

11

1 K

D

3 DOT16

Back printer

ZD3

2

G

3 DOT15

QA2-1 SMA5106 2 3 4

D

S

4 3 2 1

7

1 K

A

U1ZB36

5 6 7 8

12

G

D

ZD4

2

D

RA44 4.7K 1/16W 5%

QA2-2 SMA5106 9 10 11

VCC P+24V21

C50 0.1u

G

1

D

G EN 6

S

6

3 DOT23

8

Y2

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

R89 100 1/10W 5%

16

+ C51 10000u 50V

1 K

A

U1ZB36

5

Y1

A2

R90 100 1/10W 5%

14

R91 100 1/10W 5%

12

G

3 DOT24

A1

8

4

ZD5

2

G

3 DOT21 3 DOT22

R88 100 1/10W 5%

18

D

2

QA3-1 SMA5106 2 3 4

2

U26-1 74HC244

1

P+24V21

1

E

D

S

4 3 2 1

7

1 K

A

U1ZB36

5 6 7 8

12

G

F

ZD6

2

D

RA45 4.7K 1/16W 5%

QA3-2 SMA5106 9 10 11

1

P+24V21

U26-2 74HC244

G

G EN

D

G

19

6

S

3 DOT27

17

A3

Y3

A4

Y4

R93 100 1/10W 5%

7

U1ZB36

R94 100 1/10W 5%

5

R95 100 1/10W 5%

3

D

5 6 7 8

12

C53 0.1u

G

C52 0.1u

QA4-2 SMA5106 9 10 11

ZD8

1

2 K

A

D

H

S

4 3 2 1

7 RA46 4.7K 1/16W 5%

VCC

VCC

1 A

5

Y2

G

3 DOT28

A2

9

8

15

Y1

K

G

13

3 DOT26

A1

ZD7

2

D

11

3 DOT25

R92 100 1/10W 5%

QA4-1 SMA5106 2 3 4

U1ZB36




2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

VCC

P+24V02

Paper supply motor (M301) Feed drive motor1 (M302) Spare motor

1

C54 0.1u

+ C55 47u 50V

2

A

NF1 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

U27 CVCC

13 14 12

4 M301A 4 M301/A

L SPLY

PHASE1 ENA1 RC1

OUT1A OUT1B E1

1 17 18 16

NF2 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

2

SENSE1

5

2

11

2.4k 1/10W 1%

2.4k 1/10W 1%

C58 3300p

2

1

K

A

A

D15 EC31QS09

3

C

Q1 2

M301PD

D14 EC31QS09

B DTC113ZKA E

1

C

3,4

R101 0.39 2W 2%

C59 3300p

R102 0.39 2W 2%

R103 1k 1/10W 1%

NF4 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

2

R100 27k 1/10W 1%

C57 680p

2

Current values 1.28/0.64

D13 EC31QS09

2

R99 27k 1/10W 1%

C56 680p

D12 EC31QS09

2

R97

A2918SWV

R98 1k 1/10W 1%

1

R96

A

CGND

K

K

REF.

10

NF3 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

K

6

A

SENSE2

15

B

2 4 3

2

VCC

OUT2A OUT2B E2

1

PHASE2 ENA2 RC2

1

8 7 9

4 M301B 4 M301/B

VCC

P+24V22

VCC R146 910 1/10W 1%

1

C102 0.1u + C104 47u 50V

2

C103 0.1u

2

2

MTD2005

R150 13k 1/10W 1%

D46 EC31QS09

2

NF36 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

D47 EC31QS09

A

R149 0.82 2W 2%

2

PGND

3

13

2

ALARM

LG A LG B

NF35 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

D45 EC31QS09

2

E

7 21

D44 EC31QS09

1

VCC

11 17

1

Phase A Phase B ENA A ENA B Decay

14 18

K

5 23 6 22 24

M302A M302B M302/A M302/B

Rs A Rs B

A

4 4 4 4

Out 3 Out 4

CR

K

Vs A Vs B

4

A

1 27

NF34 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

10 12

1

1

DTC113ZKA E

Out 1 Out 2

K

Vmm A Vmm B

Vref A Vref B

A

CVCC

2 26

8 20

1

3 B

25

K

M302PD

U38 R148 180 1/10W 1%

2

3,4

NF33 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

C105 0.1u

C

Q9 2

2

R147 180 1/10W 1%


D

R151 0.82 2W 2%

C106 4700p

VCC

VCC

VCC

P+24V22

F

R170 1k 1/10W 1%

1

C122 0.1u

+ C124 47u 50V

2

C123 0.1u

R174 13k 1/10W 1%

H

C126 4700p

PGND

2

2

3 R173 0.82 2W 2%

13

MTD2005 R175 0.82 2W 2%

1 D62 EC31QS09

2 1

ALARM

NF51 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

D61 EC31QS09

A

K

D60 EC31QS09

K

LG A LG B

11 17

A

7 21

Rs A Rs B

2

VCC


NF50 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

14 18

2

5 23 6 22 24

MYOBI1A MYOBI1B MYOBI1/A MYOBI1/B

Out 3 Out 4

1

4 4 4 4

Vs A Vs B CR

K

4

10 12

2

G

Out 1 Out 2

8 20

A

Vref A Vref B

1

1 27

Vmm A Vmm B

1

2 26

DTC113ZKA E

CVCC

K

25

A

3 B

NF49 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

U42 R172 91 1/10W 1%

2

3 PLDYOBI1B

C

Q13 2

C125 0.1u

D63 EC31QS09

NF52 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

2

R171 91 1/10W 1%


PDC16 1 7 2 8 3 9 4 10 5 11 6 12




2

3

4

Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor (M402) Paper reverse feed motor (M403) Sorter drive motor (M404)

5

6

7

8

9

VCC P+24V32

A

1

C62 0.1u

2

+ C63 47u 50V

U29 11

12

10

VS

PTH8L18AR3R3M6B790

4 8

IN1 IN2

OUT1 OUT2

ST

PGND

P+24V31

6 1

3 M402A 3 M402B

RT1

CVCC

1 2

+ C64 47u 50V

TA8429H U7-3

2

B

PDC9 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10

5

3 PU407 VCC

6

P+24V31

1

74LS07

+ C66 47u 50V

NFB2

2

C65 0.1u

RXE075 0.75A U30 11

C

1 2

3 M404

12

RT2

CVCC

VS

IN1 IN2

OUT1 OUT2

ST

PGND

10 PTH8L18AR3R3M6B790

4 8 6

U7-4

TA8429H 9

8 74LS07 U7-5

VCC

11

10 74LS07

D

C67 0.1u

U7-6 VCC R104 1k 1/10W 1%

P+24V42

13

12

1

74LS07 + C69 47u 50V

2

C68 0.1u

R108 13k 1/10W 1% C71 4700p

G

H

LG A LG B

ALARM PGND

2

M403OUT/A 12

2

3 R107 0.82 2W 2%

13

MTD2005 R109 0.82 2W 2%

NF7 DSS306-55FZ103N100 1 3 G

D17 EC31QS09

M403OUTB 12

2

D16 EC31QS09

D18 EC31QS09

1

11 17

1

Rs A Rs B

K


K

7 21

CR

14 18

A

VCC

Out 3 Out 4

10 12

2

F

5 23 6 22 24

M403A M403B M403/A M403/B

Out 1 Out 2

M403OUTA 12

NF6 DSS306-55FZ103N100 1 3 G

A

4 4 4 4 4

Vs A Vs B

8 20

2

1 27

Vmm A Vmm B

1

Vref A Vref B

1

DTC113ZKA E

CVCC

K

2 26

A

25

2

R106 150 1/10W 1%

1

C

B

K

Q2 2

NF5 DSS306-55FZ103N100 1 3 G

U31

A

M403PD

C70 0.1u

2

3,4

3

E

D19 EC31QS09

NF8 DSS306-55FZ103N100 1 3 G 2

R105 150 1/10W 1%


M403OUT/B 12

10

11




2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

VCC

Register drive motor (M304) Register nip motor (M309) Width detecting drive motor (M310)

P+24V22

VCC R110 1k 1/10W 1%

1

C72 0.1u

+ C74 47u 50V

C73 0.1u

2

A

R111 91 1/10W 1%

2

2 1

2

D21 EC31QS09

NF12 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

1

D22 EC31QS09

D23 EC31QS09

2

R113 0.82 2W 2%

13

PGND

MTD2005

R114 13k 1/10W 1%

C

D20 EC31QS09

K

LG A LG B

3

A

7 21

ALARM

NF11 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

2

VCC

11 17

Rs A Rs B

K


A

5 23 6 22 24

M304A M304B M304/A M304/B

2

4 4 4 4

14 18

Out 3 Out 4

CR

2

Vs A Vs B

4

NF10 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

10 12

1

1

B

1 27

Vmm A Vmm B Out 1 Out 2

K

Vref A Vref B

A

CVCC

2 26

DTC113ZKA E

8 20

1

B

25

K

R112 91 1/10W 1%

A

M304PD

NF9 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

U32

C

Q3 2

2

3,4

C75 0.1u

3


R115 0.82 2W 2%

C76 4700p

VCC

C77 0.1u

P+24V22

1

VCC R116 1k 1/10W 1%

+ C79 47u 50V

2

C78 0.1u

PDC14

R117 91 1/10W 1%

U33

LG A LG B

2

2 R119 0.82 2W 2%

13

PGND

MTD2005

R120 13k 1/10W 1%

NF16 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

1

ALARM

D25 EC31QS09

2

D24 EC31QS09

D26 EC31QS09

D27 EC31QS09

2

7 21

3

9 9 9 9

NF15 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

K

VCC

E

11 17

A


2

5 23 6 22 24

M309A M309B M309/A M309/B

Rs A Rs B

2

4 4 4 4

NF14 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

14 18

Out 3 Out 4

CR

1

Vs A Vs B

4

K

1 27

8 20 10 12

A

1

DTC113ZKA E


2

Vref A Vref B

1

CVCC

2 26

K

25

A

R118 91 1/10W 1%

B

1

C

Q4 2

K

M309PD

NF13 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

A

3,4

C80 0.1u

3


2

D

R121 0.82 2W 2%

C81 4700p

VCC

C82 0.1u

P+24V22

F

1

VCC R122 1k 1/10W 1%

+ C84 47u 50V

2

C83 0.1u

R126 13k 1/10W 1%

H

C86 4700p

PGND

2

2

3 R125 0.82 2W 2%

13

MTD2005 R127 0.82 2W 2%

1 D30 EC31QS09

2 1

ALARM

NF19 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

D29 EC31QS09

A

K

D28 EC31QS09

K

LG A LG B

11 17

A

7 21

Rs A Rs B

2

VCC


NF18 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

14 18

2

5 23 6 22 24

M310A M310B M310/A M310/B

Out 3 Out 4

1

4 4 4 4

Vs A Vs B CR

K

4

10 12

2

G

Out 1 Out 2

8 20

A

Vref A Vref B

1

1 27

Vmm A Vmm B

1

2 26

DTC113ZKA E

CVCC

K

3 B

25

A

M310PD

NF17 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

U34 R124 91 1/10W 1%

2

3,4

C

Q5 2

C85 0.1u

D31 EC31QS09

NF20 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

2

R123 91 1/10W 1%


M315OUTA M315OUT/A M315OUTB M315OUT/B

1 9 2 10 3 11 4 12 5 13 6 14 7 15 8 16




2

3

Sub-scanning nip motor (M311) Pre-register drive motor (M315)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

VCC

A

P+24V23

VCC R128 1k 1/10W 1%

1

C87 0.1u

+ C89 47u 50V

2

C88 0.1u

R129 91 1/10W 1%

2

2 1

LG A LG B

PGND

R131 0.82 2W 2%

13

MTD2005

R132 13k 1/10W 1%

NF24 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

1

3

D33 EC31QS09

2

K

D32 EC31QS09

D34 EC31QS09

K

ALARM

NF23 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

D35 EC31QS09

2

C

11 17

A

7 21

Rs A Rs B

14 18

PDC15 1 3 2 4

2

VCC


NF22 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

A

5 23 6 22 24

M311A M311B M311/A M311/B

Out 3 Out 4

CR

2

4 4 4 4

Vs A Vs B

2

4

Out 1 Out 2

8 20 10 12

1

1 27

Vmm A Vmm B

K

1

DTC113ZKA E

CVCC Vref A Vref B

A

25 2 26

1

R130 91 1/10W 1%

B

K

C

Q6 2

M311PD

A

3,4

NF21 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

U35

2

B

C90 0.1u

3


R133 0.82 2W 2%

C91 4700p

D VCC

P+24V23

C97 0.1u

R140 1k 1/10W 1%

2 R144 13k 1/10W 1%

H

C101 4700p

PGND

2

2

M315OUT/A 8

R143 0.82 2W 2%

13

MTD2005 R145 0.82 2W 2%

D42 EC31QS09

M315OUTB 8

2 1

3

D41 EC31QS09

A

K

D40 EC31QS09

K

ALARM

NF31 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

1

11 17

A

LG A LG B

Rs A Rs B

2

7 21

CR Phase A Phase B ENA A ENA B Decay

M315OUTA 8

NF30 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

14 18

2

VCC

Out 3 Out 4

10 12

1

5 23 6 22 24

M315A M315B M315/A M315/B

Out 1 Out 2

K

4

4 4 4 4

Vs A Vs B

2

1 27

Vmm A Vmm B

A

1

DTC113ZKA E

CVCC Vref A Vref B

1

2 26

8 20

K

3 B

25

A

M315PD

NF29 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

U37

R142 91 1/10W 1%

2

3,4

C

Q8 2

C100 0.1u

D43 EC31QS09

NF32 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

2

R141 91 1/10W 1%


G

+ C99 47u 50V

C98 0.1u

E

F

1

VCC

M315OUT/B 8




3

Feed drive motor 2 (M311) Feed nip motor (M313)

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

VCC

A

P+24V22

VCC

C107 0.1u R152 910 1/10W 1%

1

1

+ C109 47u 50V

2

C108 0.1u

R153 180 1/10W 1%

2

2 1

PGND

3 R155 0.82 2W 2%

13

MTD2005

R156 13k 1/10W 1%

D49 EC31QS09

2

D48 EC31QS09

NF40 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

1

ALARM

NF39 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

D50 EC31QS09

D51 EC31QS09

2

C

LG A LG B

11 17

K

7 21

14 18

A

VCC


Rs A Rs B

NF38 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

2

M303A M303B M303/A M303/B

Out 3 Out 4

2

4 4 4 4

5 23 6 22 24

Vs A Vs B CR

10 12

K

4

Out 1 Out 2

8 20

A

1 27

Vmm A Vmm B

2

1

DTC113ZKA E

CVCC Vref A Vref B

1

2 26

K

25

A

R154 180 1/10W 1%

B

1

C

Q10 2

K

M303PD

A

3,4

NF37 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

U39

2

B

C110 0.1u

3


R157 0.82 2W 2%

C111 4700p

PDC18

D

1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 10

VCC

P+24V23

R134 1k 1/10W 1%

2 R138 13k 1/10W 1%

H

C96 4700p

PGND

2

2

3 R137 0.82 2W 2%

13

MTD2005 R139 0.82 2W 2%

1 D38 EC31QS09

2 1

ALARM

NF27 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

D37 EC31QS09

A

K

D36 EC31QS09

K

LG A LG B

11 17

A

7 21

Rs A Rs B

2

VCC


NF26 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

14 18

2

5 23 6 22 24

M313A M313B M313/A M313/B

Out 3 Out 4

1

4 4 4 4

Vs A Vs B CR

K

4

10 12

A

1 27


2

1

DTC113ZKA E

CVCC Vref A Vref B

1

2 26

8 20

K

3 B

25

A

M313PD

NF25 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

U36 R136 91 1/10W 1%

2

3,4

C

Q7 2

C95 0.1u

D39 EC31QS09

NF28 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

2

R135 91 1/10W 1%


G

+ C94 47u 50V

C93 0.1u

E

F

1

VCC

C92 0.1u




2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

VCC

Exit drive motor (M306) Exit section up/down belt motor (M314) and the cutter drive motor (M307)

P+24V23

VCC R158 910 1/10W 1%

1

C112 0.1u

+ C114 47u 50V

C113 0.1u

2

A

R159 180 1/10W 1%

2

2

13

1

2

NF44 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

1

R161 0.82 2W 2%

K D54 EC31QS09

D55 EC31QS09

2

PGND

3

NF43 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

D53 EC31QS09

K

ALARM

LG A LG B

MTD2005

R162 13k 1/10W 1%

C

D52 EC31QS09

A

7 21

11 17

2

VCC

Rs A Rs B


NF42 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

14 18

2

5 23 6 22 24

M306A M306B M306/A M306/B

Out 3 Out 4

2

4 4 4 4

Vs A Vs B CR

1

4

10 12

A

1 27

A


K

DTC113ZKA E

CVCC Vref A Vref B

A

2 26

8 20

1

B

25

K

R160 180 1/10W 1%

2

M306PD

NF41 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

U40

C

Q11 2

1

B

3,4

C115 0.1u

3


R163 0.82 2W 2%

C116 4700p

VCC

P+24V22

VCC R164 1k 1/10W 1%

+ C119 47u 50V

C118 0.1u

2

D

1

C117 0.1u

PDC17

PGND

2

2

13

1

2

K

D57 EC31QS09

1

R167 0.82 2W 2%

MTD2005

R168 13k 1/10W 1%

D56 EC31QS09

D58 EC31QS09

K

ALARM

LG A LG B

3

NF47 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

A

7 21

11 17

2

VCC

Rs A Rs B


R169 0.82 2W 2%

C121 4700p

F

P+24V02

VCC

G

1

C60 0.1u

2

+ C61 47u 50V

NFB1 U28 11

4 CUTTER_OUT1 4 CUTTER_OUT2

1 2 12

H

CVCC

VS

IN1 IN2

OUT1 OUT2

ST

PGND

TA8429H

10

4 8 6

NF46 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

14 18

2

5 23 6 22 24

M314A M314B M314/A M314/B

Out 3 Out 4

2

4 4 4 4

Vs A Vs B CR

1

4

K

E

A

1 27

10 12

A


1

DTC113ZKA E

CVCC Vref A Vref B

A

2 26

8 20

1

3 B

25

K

M314PD

NF45 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

U41 R166 91 1/10W 1%

2

3,4

C

Q12 2

C120 0.1u

RXE090 0.90A

PDC13 1 2

D59 EC31QS09

NF48 DSS306-55FZ103N100 3 1 G

2

R165 91 1/10W 1%


1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8




2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

VCC

10

11

P+24V31

VCC VCC C127 0.1u

3 S411DIR

C128 0.1u

C129 0.1u

+ C130 47u 50V

2

VCC

1

A

U43-1 1 2

Two-way solenoid

U44-1 & A B

3 14 15

3 S411 R176 33k 1/10W 1%

74HC123

CLR Cext Rext/Cext

1 7

Q Q

U45

2

13 4

11 TC7W08F

R CX RX/CX

U46-1

1 2

U43-2 1

7

5 3 6

TC7W04F

IN1 IN2 ST

VS OUT1 OUT2 PGND

10 4 8

S411OUT1 S411OUT2

6

TA8429H TC7W08F

B

U46-2 C131 1u

VCC

P+24V31 3 C132 0.1u

5 TC7W04F 9 10

U46-3 6

2 P+24V31 TC7W04F

3 S405

11 6 7

U44-2 & A B CLR Cext Rext/Cext

74HC123 Q Q R CX RX/CX

5 12

PDC10 1 8 2 9 3 10 4 11 5 12 6 13 7 14

R177

1

Solenoid valve

G

100 1/10W 5%

D

C

12

CVCC

6

S

QA5-1 SMA5106 2 3 4

7 7 7 7

M403OUTA M403OUT/A M403OUTB M403OUT/B

D

5%

R180 100 1/10W

5%

8

R178 100 1/10W

5

G

3 S406 3 S401

G D

7

R179 15 5W 5%

S

QA5-2 SMA5106 9 10 11

D

R181

1

3 S402

12

G + C133 47u 50V

100 1/10W 5%

2

D

1

P+24V32

+ C134 47u 50V

2

PDC12

R182

1

3 S403

100 1/10W 5%

G D

E

1 10 2 11 3 12 4 13 5 14 6 15 7 16 8 17 9 18

6

S

QA6-1 SMA5106 2 3 4

D

5%

R184 100 1/10W

5%

8

R183 100 1/10W

5

G

3 S404

G D

7

S

QA6-2 SMA5106 9 10 11

D 12

G

F

R185

100 1/10W 5% P+24V32

1

3 S407

R186

G D

100 1/10W 5%

6

S

QA7-1 SMA5106 2 3 4

D

R187 100 1/10W

5%

R188 100 1/10W

5%

8

3 S408 3 S409

5

G

G

G D

7

S D

R189

100 1/10W 5%

H

12

G

3 S410

QA7-2 SMA5106 9 10 11




2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

Controlled fans

A + C135 47u 50V

Uncontrolled fans

2

P+24V41

1

P+24V41

QA8-1 SMA5106 2 3 4

D

R191100 1/10W 5%

P+24V01

+ C136 47u 50V

R192100 1/10W 5%

8

3 F403

5

G

3 F402

PDC7

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1

D

6

S

B

G

100 1/10W 5%

2

1

3 F401

R190

G D

7

S

QA8-2 SMA5106 9 10 11

D G

C

3 F406

12

PDC19

R194100 1/10W 5%

1

3 F404

R193100 1/10W 5%

G D

6

S

QA9-1 SMA5106 2 3 4

D

5

G

3 F407

R195100 1/10W 5%

8

D

G D

7

S

G

H

12

G

F

D

E

QA9-2 SMA5106 9 10 11

PDC8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DF1EC-8P-2.5DSA

PDC21

PDC20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DF1EC-8P-2.5DSA




2

3

4

5

6

7

8 P+24V21

R196 NF53 NFM46P11C155 1 3 G

4.7k

1/4W

TP11

RCU00000C

TP12

RCU00000C

TP13

RCU00000C

TP14

RCU00000C

TP15

RCU00000C

2

TP21

RCU00000C

2

TP22

RCU00000C

2

TP23

RCU00000C

TP25

RCU00000C

TP26

RCU00000C

2 A K SML-310DT

5%

2 4

A

D64

1

P+24V22

R197

D65

2

1

4.7k

1/4W

A K SML-310DT

5%

2 4

NF54 NFM46P11C155 1 3 G

PDC22

1 P+24V23

R198

2

3

4

B

NF55 NFM46P11C155 1 3 G

2

4.7k

1/4W

A K SML-310DT

5%

2 4

5

D66

1

6 P+24V02

R199

7

D67

2

1

8

9

NF56 NFM46P11C155 3 G

4.7k

1/4W

A K SML-310DT

5%

1

2 4

10

P+24V01

R200

D68

2

1

NF57 NFM46P11C155 3 G

4.7k

1/4W

A K SML-310DT

5%

1

2 4

C TP16

TP17

TP18

TP19

TP20

D

R201

RCU00000C

D69

1

4.7k

1/4W

5%

1/4W

5%

P+24V41

A K SML-310DT

2 4

NF58 NFM46P11C155 1 3 G

R202

D70

1 NF59 NFM46P11C155 1 3 G

PDC23

E

P+24V42

A K SML-310DT

2 4

1

4.7k

2

R203

3

D71

1 4

5

NF60 NFM46P11C155 1 3 G

4.7k

1/4W

5%

2 4

6

P+24V43

A K SML-310DT

7

F P+24V31

R205 NF62 NFM46P11C155 3 G

2

1

4.7k

1/4W

A K SML-310DT

5%

2 4

1

D73

PDC24 P+24V32

1 R206

3

G

4

NF63 NFM46P11C155 1 3 G

D74

2

1

4.7k

1/4W

A K SML-310DT

5%

2 4

2

5

6 VCC

R204

D72

1

H

2

TP24

RCU00000C

+ C137 47u 50V

2

NF61 NFM46P11C155 1 3 G

2 4

PDC25

A K SML-310LT

1

2

1

680 1/10W 5%

C138 0.1u

9

10

11


19.5 List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC Power Supply Unit 19.5.1 DC Power System 1. Alpha 400 Power Supply Unit Slot

Voltage

Fuse

LED

SLOT5

D+3.3V

FH16 (4A) to 20

PD17 to PD21

PWR6

GMB22 circuit board (Image processing)

SLOT4A

A+24V1

FH12(4A)

PD13

PWR11

LDD22 circuit board

A+24V2

FH13(4A)

PD14

PWR11

LDD22 circuit board

A+8V1

FH14(4A)

PD15

PWR11

LDD22 circuit board

A+8V2

FH15(4A)

PD16

PWR11

LDD22 circuit board

A+13V1

FH9(4A)

PD9

PWR12

LDD22 circuit board

A+13V2

FH10(4A)

PD10

PWR11

LDD22 circuit board

A+13V3

FH10(4A)

PD11

PWR11

LDD22 circuit board

SLOT3B

A-13V1

FH11(5A)

PD12

PWR11,12

LDD22 and LTC22 circuit boards

SLOT2A

A+20V

FH8(1.6A)

PD8

PWR9

CCD22 circuit board

SLOT2B

D+5V

FH5(5A)

PD5

PWR7

CCD22 circuit board

FH6(4A)

PD6

PWR8

CCD22 circuit board

FH7(4A)

PD7

PWR8

Manual carrier M69D

FH1(1.6A)

PD1

PWR9

ADC22 circuit board

FH2(1.6A)

PD2

PWR10

Manual carrier M69D

FH3(1.6A)

PD3

PWR9

CCD22 circuit board

FH4(1.6A)

PD4

PWR10

Manual carrier M69D

SLOT4B

SLOT3A

SLOT1A

SLOT1A

A+12V

A-12V

Connector Name

Destination


19.5List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC Power Supply Unit

2. Alpha 600 Power Supply Unit Slot

Voltage

Fuse

LED

Connector Name

Destination

SLOT5A

A+5V

FH38(1.6A)

PD39

PWR9

CCD22 and ADC22 circuit boards

SLOT5B

A-5V

FH39(1.6A)

PD40

PWR9

CCD22 and ADC22 circuit boards

SLOT4A

P+5V1

FH35(5A)

PD36

PWR13,14

CTC22 and PDC22 circuit boards

SLOT4B

P+9V1

FH36(4A)

PD37

PWR13

CTC22 circuit board

P+9V2

FH37(1.6A)

PD38

PWR13

PZR22 circuit board

+24V01

FH30(4A)

PD31

PWR15,16

CTC22, PDC22, and PAC22 circuit boards

+24V02

FH31(4A)

PD32

PWR16

PDC22 circuit board

+24V11

FH32(4A)

PD33

PWR15

CTC22 circuit board

+24V12

FH33(4A)

PD34

PWR15

Manual carrier M69D

+24V13

FH34(1.6A)

PD35

PWR13

Light table

+24V21

FH27(4A)

PD28

PWR16

PDC22 circuit board

+24V22

FH28(4A)

PD29

PWR16

PDC22 circuit board

+24V23

FH29(4A)

PD30

PWR16

PDC22 circuit board

+24V30

FH21(4A)

PD22

PWR17

PAC22 circuit board

+24V31

FH22(4A)

PD23

PWR18

PDC22 circuit board

+24V32

FH23(4A)

PD24

PWR18

PDC22 circuit board

+24V41

FH24(4A)

PD25

PWR18

PDC22 circuit board

+24V42

FH25(4A)

PD27

PWR18

PDC22 circuit board

+24V43

FH26(4A)

PD26

PWR18

PDC22 circuit board

SLOT3A

SLOT3B

SLOT2

SLOT1A

SLOT1B



3. LED Colors Color

Function

Green

AC power supplies (starts when the Start switch is pressed)

Yellow

Power supplies controlled by the CPU

Red

Power supplies linked to the interlock switches

4. Fuse Used Type AC Power Fuse

DC Power Fuse

Rated Current

Quantity

2A

2

3.2A

4

5A

1

0.5A

2

1A

4

1.6A

11

2A

9

3.2A

3

4A

28

5A

8

5. PWR22 Circuit Board Component Layout Drawing (1/2)



PWR22 Circuit Board Component Layout Drawing (2/2)



19.5.2 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PAC22 Circuit Board LED No.

Voltage

LED coordinates (on the circuit board)

D3

24V

4-G

Not lit: 1) The interlock cover is open. 2) The 24V is not supplied from the PWR22 circuit board.

D11

D+5V

7-G

Not lit: The D+5V is not supplied from the CTP22 circuit board.

D12

P+24V

5-G

Not lit: The P+24V is not supplied from the PWR22 circuit board.

D13

P+5V

5-G

Not lit: The P+5V is not supplied from the PWR22 circuit board.

Remarks

19.5.3 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PDC22 Circuit Board LED No.

Voltage


D1

5V

6-A

-

Used in the PDC22 circuit board. Not lit: When an error occurs in the CTP22 or PDC22 circuit board.

D64

24V (24V21)

10-F

S301 S302

Back printer drive solenoid 1 Back printer drive solenoid 2

24V (24V22)

10-F

M302 M303 M304 M309 M310 M314

Feed drive motor1 Feed drive motor2 Register drive motor Register nip motor Width sensor drive motor Exit section up/down belt motor

24V (24V23)

10-G

M311 M313 M306

Sub-scanning nip motor Feed nip motor Exit section drive motor

24V (24V02)

10-G

M301 M307

Paper supply motor Cutter drive motor

D65

D66

D67

Load Number

Remarks




Load Number

LED No.

Voltage

D68

24V (24V01)

10-G

F301 F308 F309 F310 F311 F312 F313 F314 F315 F316

Sub-scanning nip motor cooling fan Printer suction fan 1 Printer suction fan 2 Printer suction fan 3 Printer exhaust fan 1 Printer exhaust fan 2 Printer exhaust fan 2 Laser unit cooling fan Printer exhaust fan 3 Printer exhaust fan 4

24V (24V41)

10-E

F317 F401 F402 F403 F406

Control section exhaust fan P1/P2 processing tank heater cooling fan PS processing tank heater cooling fan Processing tank heater cooling fan Processing tank exhaust fan

24V (24V42)

10-E

M401

Processor drive motor

(24V43)

10-E

-

Densitometer power supply

5V

10-B

D312 D313

Cutter home position sensor 1 Cutter home position sensor 2

-

Sorter full sensor buzzer power supply

S401


S402 S403 S404

P2 rack auto washing valve PS1/PS2 rack auto washing valve PS3/PS4 rack auto washing valve

M404

Sorter drive motor

S407 S408 S409 S410

P1R cartridge washing valve P2RA cartridge washing valve P2RB cartridge washing valve P1R stirring valve

M402

Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor

D69

D70

D71

D72

D73

D74

Remarks

24V

24V (24V31)

24V (24V32)

10-B

10-D



19.5.4 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTP22 Circuit Board LED No.

Voltage


D2

3.3V

1-F

-

Lit: Abnormality (Refer to *1 below)

D3

3.3V

1-F

-


D4

3.3V

1-F

-


D5

3.3V

1-F

-

Lit: When the software starts.

D6

5V

9-B

H401

Lit: When the P1 processing tank heater is turned on.

D7

5V

9-B

H402

Lit: When the P2 processing tank heater is turned on.

D8

5V

9-B

H403

Lit: When the PS1/PS2 processing tank heater is turned on.

D9

5V

9-B

H404

Lit: When the PS3/PS4 processing tank heater is turned on.

D16

5V

9-B

H406A

Lit: When the Dryer heater A is turned on.

D17

-

9-B

-

Not used

D18

-

9-B

-

Not used

D19

5V

9-B

H406B

Lit: When the Dryer heater B is turned on.

D20

5V

8-B

RESET

Lit: When the circuit board is reset

D21

5V

8-B

REON

Lit: When the processing tank level is normal.

D22

5V

8-B

CN

Lit: When the contacts at the connectors CTP1, CTP4, CTP16, and CTP21 are proper.

D31

5V

10-H

-

Lit: When the 5 V, which is output from the CTP22 circuit board to an external load, is normal (D31 is not lit when FA1 is blown or the power supply fails). (Refer to Note *2 below)

D33

A5V

11-H

A+5V

A+5V is used in the CTP22 circuit board. Lit: When the power supply is normal.

Load Number

Remarks

*1: Confirm that there are good contacts at the following connectors: CTP1: PDC22 circuit board CTP4: Sub-scanning unit sensor CTP16: Replenisher solution level sensor CTP21: PAC22 circuit board *2: 1) Failure in the PDC22 circuit board 2) Check D31 when the temperature does not rise while D6 to D16 are lit. 3) Abnormality with one of the sensors: D302, D306 to D313, D315 to D319, D321, D407 to D409, and D411



19.5.5 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTC22 Circuit Board LED No.

Voltage


D64

5V

1-A

Load Number -

Remarks 5V used in the internal circuitry Not lit: The fuse is blown due to a problem in the CTC22 circuit board.

D65

5V

1-A

D211 D212 D213 D214 D215

Conjugate length variable home position sensor Conjugate length variable upper limit sensor Conjugate length variable lower limit sensor Lens home position sensor Shutter home position sensor

D66

3.3V

2-G

-

Control voltage of the LED driver Not lit: The fuse is blown due to a problem in the CTC22 circuit board.

D67

9V

1-G

-

Four LED light source power supplies Not lit: Harness breakage or short circuit

D68

5V

3-F

-

Used in the internal circuitry. Not lit: The fuse is blown due to a problem in the CTC22 circuit board.

D69

24V

7-J

F201/D204 F216/D216 F217/D217 F218/D218

Light source cooling fan CCD cooling fan Image processing section cooling fan 1 Image processing section cooling fan 2

D70

24V

7-H

M201 M202 M203

Conjugate length variable motor Lens drive motor Shutter drive motor

D71

24V

7-G

M101 M102 M103 M104 S101

Feed motor Supply motor Mask motor Door motor Solenoid

Meaning of the LED colors Control system power supplies (5 V, 3.3 V, etc.): Power system (12 V, 24 V, etc.): Analog system (±12 V and A5V, etc.):

Red Orange Yellow



19.5.6 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CYS22 Circuit Board LED No.

Voltage


D35

5V

6-A

Load Number

Remarks

D101 D102 D103 D104 D105 D106 D108 D109 D112 D113 D114 D115 D117

135 leading end sensor 135 upstream perforation sensor 135 downstream perforation sensor IX240 TAP & leading end sensor IX240 perforation sensor 135 check tape sensor IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor IX240 front unexposed frame sensor Door open/close sensor IPU sensor Supply motor home position sensor Cartridge sensor Mask motor home position sensor

L101

Indicator lamp

D36

12V

9-D

D107 D110 D111 D116 MG101

135 frame sensor 135 rear fogging sensor 135 front fogging sensor Magnetic head (Read) Magnetic head (Write)

D37

-12V

8-D

D107 D110 D111 D116 MG101

135 frame sensor 135 rear fogging sensor 135 front fogging sensor Magnetic head (Read) Magnetic head (Write)


19.6 DC Voltage Adjustment 19.6.1 DC Voltage Check List Preparations before turning the system power on

Voltage/ Fuse

Circuit Board

Lit LED

- Short-circuit Pins 2 and 3 on the CTP22 circuit board. - Turn the five interlock switches on. - Press the Start switch to turn the system power on.

Test Pin +Terminal

(GND)

Voltage Range

Remarks

D+5V

CTP22

TP10

TP16

5.0 ± 0.1V

D+3.3V

CTP22

TP14

TP16

3.3 ± 0.1V

FA1

CTP22

D31

RLED

FA2

CTP22

D1

RLED

A+5V

CTP22

D33

RLED

D+5V

PDC22

TP1

TP2

5.0 ± 0.1V

P+5V

PDC22

TP24

TP20

5.0 ± 0.25V

P+24V31

PDC22

TP25

TP20

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+24V32

PDC22

TP26

TP20

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+24V41

PDC22

TP21

TP20

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+24V42

PDC22

TP22

TP20

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+24V43

PDC22

TP23

TP20

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+24V21

PDC22

TP11

TP20

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+24V22

PDC22

TP12

TP20

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+24V23

PDC22

TP13

TP20

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+24V02

PDC22

TP14

TP20

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+24V01

PDC22

TP15

TP20

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+24V

PAC22

TP3

TP4

24.0 ± 1.2V

P+5V

PAC22

TP2

TP4

5.0 ± 0.1V

D+5V

PAC22

TP1

TP5

5.0 ± 0.1V

P+24V0

PAC22

PAC15-1

PAC15-2

24.0 ± 1.2V

Measure at the connector

P+24V0

PAC22

PAC16-3

PAC16-6

24.0 ± 1.2V


PRREF2.5V

PRREF2.5V

D+5V

CTC22

TP41

TP43

5.0 ± 0.1V

+3.3V

CTC22

TP50

TP52

3.3 ± 0.1V

P+5V

CTC22

TP57

TP58

5.0 ± 0.1V

P+9V1

CTC22

TP54

TP51

9.0 ± 0.2V

P+24V01

CTC22

TP61

TP62

24 ± 0.2V


19.6DC Voltage Adjustment

DC Voltage Check List Test Pin

Voltage/ Fuse

Circuit Board

P+24V11

CTC22

FE2

CTC22

D65

RLED

FE7

CTC22

D71

OLED

P+9V1

PZR22

PZR1-1

PZR1-2

9.0 ± 0.2V


Image processing

CN16-1

CN16-1

3.45 ± 0.05V


A+20V

CCD22

JAS8-2

JAS8-1

20.0 ± 1.0V

Measure at the relay connector

A-12V

CCD22

JAS8-4

JAS8-3

-12.0 ± 1.0V


A+5V

CCD22

JAS8-5

JAS8-6

5.0 ± 0.25V


A-5V

CCD22

JAS8-7

JAS8-6

-5.0 ± 0.25V


A+12V

ADC22

JAS5-5

JAS5-6

12.0 ± 1.0V


A+5V

ADC22

JAS5-7

JAS5-13

5.0 ± 0.25V


A-5V

ADC22

JAS5-14

JAS5-13

-5.0 ± 0.25V


A+13V

LTC22

LTC1-1

LTC1-2

13 ± 0.6V


A-13V

LTC22

LTC1-3

LTC1-4

-13 ± 0.6V


A+13V

LDD22

A+13V

AGND

13 ± 0.6V

A-13V

LDD22

A-13V

AGND

-13 ± 0.6V

A+8VG

LDD22

A+8VG

AGND

8.0 ± 0.8V

A+8VB

LDD22

A+8VB

AGND

8.0 ± 0.8V

+V24

LDD22

+V24

AGND

24.0 ± 1.2V

IL+24V

LDD22

IL+24V

AGND

24.0 ± 1.2V

IL+13V

LDD22

IL+13V

AGND

13 ± 0.6V

L+5V

LDD22

L+5V

AGND

5.0 ± 0.25V

A+5V

LDD22

A+5V

AGND

5.0 ± 0.25V

A-5V

LDD22

A-5V

AGND

-5.0 ± 0.25V

PR+5V

LDD22

PR+5V

AGND

5.0 ± 0.25V

PRREF2.5V

LDD22

PRREF2.5V

AGND

2.5 ± 0.05V

D+5V

LDA22

D+5V

GND

5.0 ± 0.3V

+3.3V

LDA22

+3.3V

GND

3.3 ± 0.2V

D+3.3V1

Lit LED

+Terminal

(GND)

TP65

TP62

Voltage Range

Remarks

24 ± 0.2V


19.6DC Voltage Adjustment

19.6.2

Potentiometers Used to Adjust the DC Power Supply Voltages

A+24V A+13V A+20V A+12V

D+3.3V

A+8V

A-13V

D+5V

A+12V

SLOT5 SLOT4 SLOT3 SLOT2 SLOT1

A+5V

A+5V

P+5V

+24V0

+24V4

P+9V +24V1 +24V2

+24V4

SLOT5 SLOT4 SLOT3 SLOT2 SLOT1 CD170


20. APPENDIX 20.1 Adjustment Jigs 20.2 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement 20.2.1 20.2.2 20.2.3 20.2.4 20.2.5

Operation Section/Carrier Section Scanner Section Printer Section Processor Section Electrical Section

20.3 Index


20.1 Adjustment Jigs No. 1

Name and Shape

Part Number

Carrier Extension Cable

Purpose

See subsection

Connection between the carrier and the scanner to enable input, output and operation checks to be carried out.

5.5.8

Focus calibration (Menu 432)

5.4.2

Optical axis adjustment (Menu 43E)

5.4.9

Optical magnification calibration (Menu 43F)

5.4.10

Back printer head clearance adjustment

11.3.6

Spectral calibration (Menu 43J)

5.4.13

Locating the exposure section frame

12.3.1

CD837 2

Focusing Chart Jig

CD833 3

Back Printer Head Clearance Adjusting Jig

340A8894950

EZ1814 4

Spectral Calibration Chart (for reversal and negative)

EZ1815 5

Exposure Section Frame Locating Jig

CD1026


20.2 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement 20.2.1 Operation Section/Carrier Section No.

Replacement Parts

Ref.

Adjustment Item

Menu

Ref.

1

Monitor

7.1.1

(1) Monitor Color Adjustment (2) Monitor Adjustment

– 426

7.1.2 5.3.5

2

Feed Motor (M101)

8.2.27

(1) Belt Tension Adjustment

–

8.2.27

3

Feed Rollers/IX240 Drive Belt

8.2.28

(1) Belt Tension Adjustment

–

8.2.27

4

Film Carrier

–

(1) Focus Position Adjustment (2) Mask Position Adjustment

433 441

5.4.3 5.5.1

5

Carrier Table

8.5.3

(1) Optical Axis Adjustment (2) Focus Position Adjustment (3) Mask Position Adjustment

43E 433 441

5.4.9 5.4.3 5.5.1

20.2.2 Scanner Section No.

Replacement Parts

Ref.

Adjustment Item

Menu

Ref.

1

Light Source Unit

9.1.1

(1) LED Light Amount Adjustment (2) Spectral Calibration (3) LED Operation Time Clear

43L 43J 434

5.4.15 5.4.4 5.4.4

2

LED Circuit Board Assembly

9.1.5

(1) LED Light Amount Adjustment (2) Spectral Calibration (3) LED Operation Time Clear

43L 43J 434

5.4.15 5.4.4 5.4.4

3

CCD Unit

9.2.4

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

– – 43E 43F 432 433 441 – 434

– 9.4.6 5.4.9 5.4.10 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5.1 – 5.4.4

4

PZR22 Circuit Board

9.4.5

(1) Piezoelectric Voltage Adjustment

–

9.4.6

5

Lens Unit

9.3.2

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Lens Registration Carrier Inclination Display Optical Axis Adjustment Optical Magnification Calibration Focus Calibration Focus Position Adjustment Mask Position Adjustment

43D 43B 43E 43F 432 433 441

5.4.8 5.4.6 5.4.9 5.4.10 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.5.1

6

Lens Motor (M202)

9.3.3

(1) Optical Magnification Calibration (2) Focus Calibration (3) Focus Position Adjustment

43F 432 433

5.4.10 5.4.2 5.4.3

7

Lens Home Position Sensor (D214)

9.3.1

(1) Optical Magnification Calibration (2) Focus Calibration (3) Focus Position Adjustment

43F 432 433

5.4.10 5.4.2 5.4.3

8

Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201)

9.4.2

(1) Focus Calibration (3) Focus Position Adjustment

432 433

5.4.2 5.4.3

9

Conjugate Length Drive Gear

9.4.3


432 433

5.4.2 5.4.3

10

Conjugate Length Variable Home Position Sensor (D211)

9.4.1


432 433

5.4.2 5.4.3

CCD Data Setup Piezoelectric Voltage Adjustment Optical Axis Adjustment Optical Magnification Calibration Focus Calibration Focus Position Adjustment Mask Position Adjustment Pixel Correction Piezoelectric Actuator Operating Time Clear


20.2 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement No.

Replacement Parts

Ref.

Adjustment Item

Menu

Ref.

11

Conjugate Length Variable Upper Limit Sensor (D212)

9.4.1


432 433

5.4.2 5.4.3

12

Conjugate Length Variable Lower Limit Sensor (D213)

9.4.1


432 433

5.4.2 5.4.3

20.2.3 Printer Section No.

Replacement Parts

Ref.

Adjustment Item

Menu

Ref.

1

Back Printer Head

11.3.5

(1) Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment (2) Back Printing Quantity Clear

– 45Q

11.3.6 5.6.22

2

Platen

11.3.7

(1) Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment

–

11.3.6

3

Laser Unit Air Filter

2.3.1

(1) Filter Replacement History

45B

5.6.9

4

Laser Unit

12.2.1

(1) Main Scanning Position Adjustment/ Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (2) Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (3) G, B Laser (SHG)Optimal Temperature Setup (4) Print Condition Upkeep

45H

5.6.15

45J 454

5.6.16 5.6.4

16

–

5

Sub-scanning Unit

12.3.1

(1) Nip Roller Data Entry

45M

12.3.1

6

Sub–scanning Drive Motor (M305)

12.3.3

(1) Sub-scanning Motor Operation Clear

45Q

5.6.22

7

Printer Exit Unit

13.1.1

(1) Up/Down Belt Data Entry

45M

12.3.1

8

Exit Unit Up/Down Belt and Related parts

–

(1) Up/Down Belt Height Adjustment

45M

13.1.16

9

Exit Unit Lower Belt/Pulleys

13.1.14

(1) Lower Belt Height Adjustment

–

13.1.15

20.2.4 Processor Section No.

Replacement Parts

Ref.

Adjustment Item

Menu

Ref.

1

Processing Tank Heater

15.2.6

(1) Heater ON Time Clear

46D

5.7.12

2

PSR Replenisher Filter

16.2.3

(1) Pump Output Measurement/Setting

461

5.7.1

3

P1R/P2RA/P2RB Replenisher Pump/ Valves

16.2.4

(1) Pump ON Time Clear

46D

5.7.12

4

PSR Replenisher Pump/Valves

16.2.4

(1) Pump ON Time Clear

46D

5.7.12

(2) Pump Output Measurement/Setting

461

5.7.1

5

Auto Washing Pump (PU407)

16.3.1

(1) Pump ON Time Clear (2) Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/ Setting

46D 462

5.7.12 5.7.2

6

Rack Auto Washing Valve

16.3.3

(1) Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/ Setting

462

5.7.2

7

Dryer Heater (H406)

17.3.3

(1) Heater ON Time Clear

46D

5.7.12


20.2 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement

20.2.5 Electrical Section No.

Replacement Parts

Ref.

Adjustment Item

Menu

Ref.

1

DC Power Supply

18.2.5

(1) DC Voltage Adjustment

–

18.2.6 19.6

2

GHT22 Circuit Board

18.3.5

(1) System Software Reinstallation

–

4.3

3

CTC22 Circuit Board

18.3.7

(1) System Software Reinstallation

–

4.3

4

Main Control Unit

18.4.1

(1) System Software New Installation

–

4.4

5

CTP22 Circuit Board

18.5.2

(1) Reposition the jumper plug J2 from 1-2 to 2-3 (backup) (2) If backup battery has been discharged, proceed to Starting Up when Battery Discharged (3) Data Loading (select “All”) (4) System Software Reinstallation

–

18.5.2

–

18.5.3

45U –

5.6.26 4.3


20.3 Index 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor (D103P) (DTE22 Circuit Board) Replacement .................................. 8.2.13 135 Downstream Perforation Sensor LED (D103L) Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.3 135 Dust Removal Roller Replacement.................... 8.2.15 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation....... 8.1.4 135 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement 8.1.7 135 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement ...... 8.1.8 135 Frame Sensor (D107P) Replacement................ 8.2.17 135 Frame Sensor LED (D107L) (FSP Circuit Board) Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.5 135/IX240 Diffusion Box Sensor (D201/D202) Replacement ........................................................... 9.1.2 135 Leading End Sensor (D101P) Replacement ..... 8.2.16 135 Leading End Sensor LED (D101L) Replacement .... 8.1.2 135 Lower Mask H/F Sensor (D118/D119) (MSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ............................................. 8.2.10 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor (DTF22 Circuit Board) Replacement..... 8.2.18 135 Upstream Perforation/Check Tape/Rear Fogging/Front Fogging Sensor LED (LEF22 Circuit Board) Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.6 AC Power Supply Wiring Diagram ............................ 19.3.1 ADC22 Circuit Board Replacement ............................ 9.4.4 Adjustment Jigs ........................................................... 20.1 Anti-Dust Fan 1/2/3 (FAN1/FAN2/FAN3) Replacement....... 12.2.2 AOM Driver Replacement......................................... 12.1.5 APPENDIX ..................................................................... 20 Auto Cleaning Output Measurement/Setting (462)..... 5.7.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Main Body Section) ......... 8.2 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC (Upper Cover Section)...... 8.1 Auto Film Carrier NC100AC Wiring Diagram.......... 19.3.15 Auto Washing/P1R Stirring System ............................. 16.3 Auto Washing Pump (PU407) Replacement............. 16.3.1

Back Printer Entrance Sensor (D302) Replacement .... 11.3.4 Back Printer Head Clearance Adjustment ................ 11.3.6 Back Printer Head/JNE20 Circuit Board Replacement....... 11.3.5 Back Printer Section .................................................... 11.3 Back Printer Section Feed Roller Replacement ....... 11.2.9 Back Printer Section Guide Plate Roller Replacement....... 11.2.8 Back Printer Set Sensor (D320) Replacement ......... 11.3.3 Back Printer Test (45N)............................................. 5.6.20 Back Printer Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................. 11.3.1 Ball Catch Replacement ............................................. 8.5.7

Belt Tension Adjustment ........................................... 17.2.4 B Laser (B-SHG) Data (45F) .................................... 5.6.13 Block Diagram ............................................................. 19.2 Blur along the periphery ........................................... 6.11.2 Bottom Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................ 8.2.2 Bottom Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation............... 8.2.4 Bottom Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ................. 8.2.3 Brightness Correction (43G)..................................... 5.4.11 Built-in Circuit Breaker (NFB1) Replacement ........... 18.1.2 Calibration print density is too low to be measured .. 6.10.2 Cam Roller Replacement ......................................... 8.3.20 Carrier Adjustment/Maintenance (44) ........................... 5.5 Carrier Base Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation...... 8.5.1 Carrier Base Section ..................................................... 8.5 Carrier Inclination Display (43B)................................. 5.4.6 Carrier Sensor (D123) Replacement.......................... 8.5.4 Carrier Table Removal/Reinstallation ......................... 8.5.3 Carrier Upper Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............. 8.1.1 Cartridge Box Upper/Lower Sensor (D408/D409) Replacement......................................................... 16.1.4 Cartridge Holder Replacement................................. 8.3.18 Cartridge Setting Sensor (D407) Replacement........ 16.1.6 Cartridge Washing /P1R Stirring Valve Replacement......... 16.3.2 CCD22/ADC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram.......... 19.3.3 CCD Data Display (43C) ............................................ 5.4.7 CCD Unit Removal/Reinstallation............................... 9.2.4 Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing .................... 15.3.2 Circuit Board Circuit Diagrams .................................... 19.4 Circuit Protector (CP11 to CP14) Replacement ....... 18.1.9 Circuit Protector (CP1 to CP10) Replacement ......... 18.1.5 Circulation Pump Inspection....................................... 2.3.9 Circulation Pump Replacement................................ 15.2.7 Circulation Pump Section Cover Removal/ Reinstallation ........................................................ 15.2.1 Clear Error Log (41E) ................................................. 5.2.7 Clearing All Operation Data (45R)............................ 5.6.23 Clearing Selected Operation Data (46D).................. 5.7.12 Clearing Selected Printer Operation Data (45Q)...... 5.6.22 Color Abnormalities ....................................................... 6.1 Color abnormality general .......................................... 6.1.6 Color becomes worse after calibration. Paper cannot be fed in Densitometer ............................................... 6.10.3 Color Misalignment........................................................ 6.2 Command (49C)......................................................... 5.9.3 Conjugate Length Variable Gear Replacement .......... 9.4.3 Conjugate Length Variable Motor (M201) Replacement .... 9.4.2 Conjugate Length Variable Section/Circuit Board Section . 9.4


20.3 Index Conjugate Length Variable Section Home Position Sensor (D211)/Upper and Lower Limit Sensor (D212 and D213) Replacement ........................................................... 9.4.1 Control Circuit Board Section ...................................... 18.5 Control Section Exhaust Fan (F317) Replacement .. 18.5.5 Control Strip Processing (423) ................................... 5.3.3 Cover and Electrical Parts ........................................... 12.1 Crossover Rack No.1 Disassembly/Reassembly...... 14.1.1 Crossover Rack No.6 Disassembly/Reassembly...... 14.1.3 Crossover Racks.......................................................... 14.1 Crossover Racks No.2 to No.5 Disassembly/Reassembly.. 14.1.2 CTC22 Circuit Board Replacement .......................... 18.3.7 CTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ....................... 19.3.4 CTP22 Circuit Board Replacement........................... 18.5.2 CTP22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ....................... 19.3.5 CTS04 Circuit Board Replacement........................... 17.2.5 Custom Setting Regist/Delete (42M) ........................ 5.3.13 Cutter Drive Motor (M307) Replacement.................. 10.4.4 Cutter Home Position Sensor 1/2 (D312/D313) Replacement ......................................................... 10.4.3 Cutter Inspection ........................................................ 2.3.2 Cutter Unit.................................................................... 10.4 Cutter Unit Replacement .......................................... 10.4.2 Cyan non-existent or too light ..................................... 6.1.2 CYS22 Circuit Board Removal/Reinstallation............. 8.2.8 D101P (135 leading end sensor) Replacement ....... 8.2.16 D101L (135 leading end sensor LED) Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.2 D102P (135 upstream perforation sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 8.2.18 D102L (135 upstream perforation sensor LED) Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.6 D103P (135 downstream perforation sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 8.2.13 D103L (135 downstream perforation sensor LED) Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.3 D104P (IX240 TAP and leading end sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 8.2.20 D104L (IX240 TAP and leading end sensor LED) Replacement ........................................................... 8.1.9 D105P (IX240 perforation sensor) Replacement ..... 8.2.19 D105L (IX240 perforation sensor LED) Replacement ......................................................... 8.1.10 D106P (135 check tape sensor) Replacement......... 8.2.18 D106L (135 check tape sensor LED) Replacement... 8.1.6 D107P (135 frame sensor) Replacement................. 8.2.17 D107L (135 frame sensor LED) Replacement........... 8.1.5 D108P (IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 8.2.21 D108L (IX240 rear unexposed frame sensor LED) Replacement ......................................................... 8.1.16

D109P (IX240 front unexposed frame sensor) Replacement......................................................... 8.2.21 D109L (IX240 front unexposed frame sensor LED) Replacement......................................................... 8.1.16 D110P (135 rear fogging sensor) Replacement....... 8.2.18 D110L (135 rear fogging sensor LED) Replacement........................................................... 8.1.6 D111P (135 front fogging sensor) Replacement...... 8.2.18 D111L (135 front fogging sensor LED) Replacement........................................................... 8.1.6 D112 (Door open/close sensor) Replacement ........ 8.3.3 D113 (IPI sensor) Replacement ............................ 8.3.10 D114 (Supply motor home position sensor) Replacement......................................................... 8.3.13 D115 (Cartridge sensor) Replacement.................... 8.3.3 D116 (Magnetic reading head) Replacement ........ 8.1.13 D117 (Mask motor home position sensor) Replacement......................................................... 8.2.12 D118 (135 lower mask H sensor) Replacement .... 8.2.10 D119 (135 lower mask F sensor) Replacement .... 8.2.10 D120 (Upper cover open/close sensor) Replacement........................................................... 8.2.6 D124 (Input key 1 (<)) Replacement........................ 8.2.7 D125 (Input key 2 (<<)) Replacement ..................... 8.2.7 D126 (Input key 3 (>>)) Replacement ..................... 8.2.7 D127 (Input key 4 (>)) Replacement........................ 8.2.7 D121 (IX240 carrier position sensor) Replacement........................................................... 8.5.2 D122 (135 carrier position sensor) Replacement .... 8.5.2 D123 (Carrier sensor) Replacement........................ 8.5.4 D201 (135 diffusion box sensor) Replacement........ 9.1.2 D202 (120 diffusion box sensor) Replacement........ 9.1.2 D211 (Conjugate length variable home position sensor) Replacement........................................................... 9.4.1 D212 (Conjugate length variable upper limit sensor) Replacement........................................................... 9.4.1 D213 (Conjugate length variable lower limit sensor) Replacement........................................................... 9.4.1 D214 (Lens home position sensor) Replacement ... 9.3.1 D215 (Shutter home position sensor) Replacement........................................................... 9.2.5 D301P (Paper splice sensor) Replacement ............. 10.4.1 D301L (Paper splice sensor LED) Replacement ..... 10.4.1 D302P (Back printer entrance sensor) Replacement......................................................... 11.3.4 D302L (Back printer entrance sensor LED) Replacement......................................................... 11.3.4 D303P (Register sensor) Replacement ................... 12.4.4 D303L (Register sensor LED) Replacement ........... 12.4.3 D304P (Pre-exposure sensor) Replacement ........... 12.3.6 D304L (Pre-exposure sensor LED) Replacement ... 12.3.7 D305P (Processor entry sensor) Replacement ....... 13.1.6 D305L (Processor entry sensor LED) Replacement 13.1.7


20.3 Index D306 (Magazine ID sensor 0) Replacement.......... 10.1.6 D307 (Magazine ID sensor 1) Replacement.......... 10.1.6 D308 (Magazine ID sensor 2) Replacement.......... 10.1.6 D309 (Magazine ID sensor 3) Replacement.......... 10.1.6 D310 (Magazine ID sensor 4) Replacement.......... 10.1.6 D311 (Paper end sensor) Replacement................. 10.1.4 D312 (Cutter home position sensor 1) Replacement ......................................................... 10.4.3 D313 (Cutter home position sensor 2) Replacement ......................................................... 10.4.3 D314P (Width detecting sensor) Replacement ........ 12.4.5 D314L (Width detecting sensor LED) Replacement ......................................................... 12.4.7 D315 (Width detecting home position sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 12.4.2 D316 (Register nip home position sensor) Replacement ....................................................... 12.4.10 D317 (Sub-scanning nip home position sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 12.3.4 D319 (Feed nip home position sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 11.2.3 D320 (Back printer set sensor) Replacement ........ 11.3.3 D321 (Exit section up/down belt home position sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 13.1.2 D322 (Magazine door detecting interlock switch) Replacement ......................................................... 10.1.7 D323 (Feed section lower door detecting interlock switch) Replacement ............................................. 11.1.3 D324A/B(Feed section upper door detecting interlock switch) Replacement ............................................. 11.1.2 D325A/B(Front upper cover detecting interlock switch) Replacement ......................................................... 11.1.5 D401 (P1 safety thermostat) Replacement............ 15.2.5 D402 (P2 safety thermostat) Replacement............ 15.2.5 D403 (PS1/2 safety thermostat) Replacement ...... 15.2.5 D404 (PS3/4 safety thermostat) Replacement ...... 15.2.5 D407 (Cartridge setting sensor) Replacement ...... 16.1.6 D408 (Cartridge box upper sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 16.1.4 D409 (Cartridge box lower sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 16.1.4 D410 (Replenisher door detecting interlock switch) Replacement ......................................................... 16.1.3 D411 (Dryer section exit sensor) Replacement ..... 17.1.3 D416A (Dryer unit detecting interlock switch A) Replacement ....................................................... 17.1.11 D416B (Dryer unit detecting interlock switch B) Replacement ....................................................... 17.1.12 Darkness Correction (43H)....................................... 5.4.12 Data Backup (417)...................................................... 5.2.6 Data Download (45U) ............................................... 5.6.26 Data Saving (45T)..................................................... 5.6.25 DC Offset Cancel (43K) ............................................ 5.4.14

DC Power Supply Bracket Removal/Reinstallation... 18.2.2 DC Power Supply Replacement ............................... 18.2.5 DC Power Supply Section ........................................... 18.2 DC Power System .................................................... 19.5.1 DC Voltage Adjustment ............................................ 18.2.6 DC Voltage Adjustment ............................................... 19.6 DC Voltage Check List.............................................. 19.6.1 Densitometer and Calibration Print Error .................... 6.10 DI Manager Administrative Setting (41I)................... 5.2.10 Door Drive Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ............ 8.3.5 Door Drive Gear Replacement ................................. 8.3.12 Door Motor (M104) Replacement............................. 8.3.11 Door Open/Close Sensor (D112)/Cartridge Sensor (D115) (SSB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ...................... 8.3.3 Drive Sprocket/Gear Replacement........................... 14.3.5 Dryer Drive Gear Replacement ................................ 14.3.7 Dryer Fan (F405) Replacement................................ 17.3.2 Dryer Fan/Heater Section............................................ 17.3 Dryer Fan Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .... 17.3.1 Dryer Heater (H406) Replacement........................... 17.3.3 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Lubrication ......................... 2.3.12 Dryer Rack Drive Chain Replacement...................... 17.1.7 Dryer Rack Drive Gear Replacement ....................... 17.1.5 Dryer Rack Exit Roller Replacement ........................ 17.1.8 Dryer Rack Removal/Reinstallation.......................... 17.1.6 Dryer Rack Roller Inspection/Cleaning ...................... 2.3.3 Dryer Section Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D416A) Replacement....................................................... 17.1.11 Dryer Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........... 17.1.1 Dryer Section Exit Sensor (D411) Replacement ...... 17.1.3 DRYER/SORTER SECTION .......................................... 17 Dryer Temperature Sensor (TS406) Replacement ... 17.1.4 Dryer Unit .................................................................... 17.1 Dryer Unit Open/Close Detecting Interlock Switch (D416B) Replacement....................................................... 17.1.12 Dummy Head Opposite Roller Replacement ........... 8.2.24 Dummy Head Replacement ..................................... 8.1.19 Each color shifts (Increments of 0.1mm).................... 6.2.2 Each color shifts perpendicular to feeding direction (Increments of 1 cm) ............................................... 6.2.1 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS.............................. 19 Electrical Parts and Circuit Board Layout Diagrams.... 19.1 ELECTRICAL SECTION ................................................ 18 Electrical Section...................................................... 20.2.5 Entrance Feed Roller Replacement ....................... 12.4.17 Entrance Guide Plate Roller Replacement............... 11.2.6 Entrance Nip Roller Replacement .......................... 12.4.14 Entrance Side Feed Roller Replacement ................. 11.2.7 Entrance Side Roller Replacement ........................ 17.1.10 Error Indication Rule...................................................... 3.1 Error Information Check (415) .................................... 5.2.4 Evaporation Correction Rate Setting (465)................. 5.7.5


20.3 Index Exit Drive Motor (M306)/Gear Replacement............. 13.1.4 Exit Feed Roller Replacement ................................ 11.2.11 Exit Feed Roller Replacement ................................ 12.4.18 Exit Guide Plate Roller Replacement ..................... 11.2.10 Exit Nip Roller Replacement................................... 12.4.15 Exit Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation ............ 8.1.20 Exit Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement .... 8.1.21 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Home Position Sensor (D321) Replacement ......................................................... 13.1.2 Exit Section Up/Down Belt Motor (M314) Replacement ..... 13.1.3 Explorer (410B)........................................................... 5.9.2 Exposure Section Temperature Sensor (THA1) Replacement ......................................................... 12.3.9 Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Laser Unit) ...... 19.3.12 Exposure Section Wiring Diagram (Sensors and Mechanical System) ............................................ 19.3.13 F201 (Light source cooling fan) Replacement ......... 9.1.9 F216 (Scanner cooling fan) Replacement ............... 9.2.3 F217 (Image processing section cooling fan 1) Replacement ......................................................... 18.3.4 F218 (Image processing section cooling fan 2) Replacement ......................................................... 18.3.4 F301 (Sub-scanning nip motor cooling fan) Replacement ......................................................... 12.3.8 F306 (Power supply section exhaust fan 1) Replacement ......................................................... 18.5.6 F307 (Power supply section exhaust fan 2) Replacement ......................................................... 18.5.6 F308 (Printer suction fan 1) Replacement............. 11.1.7 F309 (Printer suction fan 2) Replacement............. 11.1.7 F310 (Printer suction fan 3) Replacement............. 11.1.6 F311 (Printer exhaust fan 1) Replacement............ 18.3.2 F312 (Printer exhaust fan 2) Replacement............ 18.3.2 F313 (Printer exhaust fan 2) Replacement............ 18.3.3 F314 (Laser unit cooling fan) Replacement........... 12.1.2 F315 (Printer exhaust fan 3) Replacement............ 12.1.3 F316 (Printer exhaust fan 4) Replacement............ 12.1.3 F317 (Control section exhaust fan) Replacement ......................................................... 18.5.5 F401 (P1/2 processing tank heater cooling fan) Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.4 F402 (PS processing tank heater cooling fan) Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.4 F403 (Processing tank heater cooling fan) Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.3 F405 (Dryer fan) Replacement .............................. 17.3.2 F406 (Processing tank exhaust fan) Replacement ......................................................... 18.5.4 FAN1 (Anti-dust fan 1) Replacement...................... 12.2.2 FAN2 (Anti-dust fan 2) Replacement...................... 12.2.2 FAN3 (Anti-dust fan 3) Replacement ..................... 12.2.2

FS401 (P1 solution level sensor) Inspection ............. 2.3.4 FS401 (P1 solution level sensor) Replacement....... 15.1.2 FS402 (P2 solution level sensor) Inspection ............. 2.3.4 FS402 (P2 solution level sensor) Replacement....... 15.1.2 FS403 (PS1 solution level sensor) Inspection ........... 2.3.4 FS403 (PS1 solution level sensor) Replacement .... 15.1.2 FS404 (PS2 solution level sensor) Inspection .......... 2.3.4 FS404 (PS2 solution level sensor) Replacement ... 15.1.2 FS405 (PS3 solution level sensor) Inspection .......... 2.3.4 FS405 (PS3 solution level sensor) Replacement .... 15.1.2 FS406 (PS4 solution level sensor) Inspection .......... 2.3.4 FS406 (PS4 solution level sensor) Replacement .... 15.1.2 FS407 (P1R upper level sensor) Replacement ....... 16.2.8 FS408 (P2RA upper level sensor) Replacement ..... 16.2.9 FS409 (P2RB upper level sensor) Replacement ..... 16.2.9 FS410 (PSR upper level sensor) Replacement ..... 16.2.10 FS411 (P1R lower level sensor) Replacement ........ 16.2.8 FS412 (P2RA lower level sensor) Replacement...... 16.2.9 FS413 (P2RB lower level sensor) Replacement...... 16.2.9 FS414 (PSR lower level sensor) Replacement...... 16.2.10 FS415 (Waste solution level sensor) Inspection........ 2.3.5 FS415 (Waste solution level sensor) Replacement......................................................... 15.3.3 Feed Belt/Pulley Replacement ................................. 17.1.2 Feed Drive Motor 1 (M302) Replacement ................ 11.2.5 Feed Drive Motor 2 (M303) Replacement ................ 11.2.4 Feed Motor Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............... 8.2.26 Feed Motor (M101) Replacement............................. 8.2.27 Feed Nip Cam Shaft Replacement......................... 11.2.12 Feed Nip Home Position Sensor (D319) Replacement ...... 11.2.3 Feed Nip Motor (M313) Replacement ...................... 11.2.2 Feed Roller/IX240 Drive Belt Replacement.............. 8.2.28 Feed Section Cover ..................................................... 11.1 Feed Section Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ... 11.1.4 Feed Section Lower Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D323) Replacement............................................. 11.1.3 Feed Section Roller Replacement............................ 17.1.9 Feed Section Upper Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D324) Replacement............................................. 11.1.2 Feed Unit ..................................................................... 11.2 Feed Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................ 11.2.1 FILM CARRIER SECTION ............................................... 8 Film Guide Replacement............................................ 8.4.4 Film Lane Changing Linkage Disassembly/Reassembly.... 8.5.9 Film Mask Replacement........................................... 8.1.22 Filter Replacement History (45B) ............................... 5.6.9 Fine Adjustment of the Print Mag.Setting (42D)......... 5.3.7 Focus Calibration (432) .............................................. 5.4.2 Focus Position Adjustment (433)................................ 5.4.3 Focus Problems........................................................... 6.11 Fogged magenta ........................................................ 6.1.4


20.3 Index Frame Misalignment ...................................................... 6.5 Frame misalignment in both monitor and print ........... 6.5.1 Frame misalignment in prints, OK in monitor.............. 6.5.2 Front Feed Rubber Belt Replacement .................... 12.3.11 Front Lower Cover Removal/Reinstallation............... 18.1.1 Front Upper and Lower Connector Cover Removal/ Reinstallation......................................................... 15.2.2 Front Upper Cover Detecting Interlock Switch (D325A/B) Replacement ......................................................... 11.1.5

G, B Laser (SHG) Optimal Temperature Setup (454) ..... 5.6.4 Gear Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ......................... 8.5.5 Gear Replacement ..................................................... 8.5.6 Ghost .......................................................................... 6.1.5 GHT22/GIA22/GPA22 Circuit Board Replacement... 18.3.5 G Laser (G-SHG) Data (45E) ................................... 5.6.12 GMB22 Circuit Board Replacement.......................... 18.3.6 Graininess and Jaggedness .......................................... 6.6 Guide Assembly Removal/Reinstallation .................. 8.3.17 Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ....................... 12.4.16 H401 (P1 processing tank heater) Inspection .......... 2.3.11 H401 (P1 processing tank heater) Replacement ..... 15.2.6 H402 (P2 processing tank heater) Inspection .......... 2.3.11 H402 (P2 processing tank heater) Replacement ..... 15.2.6 H403 (PS1/2 processing tank heater) Inspection .... 2.3.11 H403 (PS1/2 processing tank heater) Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.6 H404 (PS3/4 processing tank heater) Inspection .... 2.3.11 H404 (PS3/4 processing tank heater) Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.6 H406 (Dryer section heater) Replacement .............. 17.3.3 Help Update (492) ...................................................... 5.8.2 Holiday File Registration/Delete (42N) ..................... 5.3.14 Hose Connection ...................................................... 15.2.8 Image Abnormality Analyzer (493) ............................. 5.8.3 Image Correction Setup (42C).................................... 5.3.6 Image Processing Circuit Board Bracket Opening/Closing 18.3.1 Image Processing Circuit Board Section ..................... 18.3 Image Processing Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ... 19.3.14 Image Processing Section Cooling Fan 1/2 (F217/F218) Replacement ......................................................... 18.3.4 Indicator Lamp (L101) Replacement .......................... 8.2.5 Ink Ribbon Drive Gear Replacement ........................ 11.3.2 Input Check (431) ....................................................... 5.4.1 Input Key 1 to 4 (D124 to D127) Replacement ........... 8.2.7 Input Power Supply Section...................................... 19.1.1 Installation (46F) ....................................................... 5.7.14 Installation Information Confirmation (416)................. 5.2.5 Installation Information Setup (41F)............................ 5.2.8 I/O Check (43A) .......................................................... 5.4.5

IPI Sensor (D113) (SSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement .... 8.3.10 IPI Unit Disassembly/Reassembly............................ 8.3.16 IX240/135 Carrier Position Sensor (D121/D122) Replacement........................................................... 8.5.2 IX240 Dust Removal Roller Replacement ................ 8.2.22 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Removal/Reinstallation ... 8.1.15 IX240 Entrance Pressure Guide Section Roller Replacement......................................................... 8.1.17 IX240 Entrance Side Dust Removal Roller Replacement .. 8.1.18 IX240 Guide Roller Replacement............................. 8.2.25 IX240 Perforation Sensor (D105P) Replacement..... 8.2.19 IX240 Perforation Sensor LED (D105L) Replacement ....... 8.1.10 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor (D108P/ D109P) (DTB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ....... 8.2.21 IX240 Rear/Front Unexposed Frame Sensor LED (D108L/ D109L) (LEB22 Circuit Board) Replacement ........ 8.1.16 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor (D104P) (DTG22 Circuit Board) Replacement ............................................. 8.2.20 IX240 TAP & Leading End Sensor LED (D104L) Replacement........................................................... 8.1.9 Jaggedness in large-size prints/Jaggedness of straight line.............................................................. 6.6.2 JML22 Circuit Board Replacement........................... 12.1.4 Keyboard Replacement .............................................. 7.2.3 L101 (Indicator lamp) Replacement ......................... 8.2.5 LH201 (Peltier element) Replacement ........................ 9.1.6 Laser Beam Sync. Fine Adjustment Print (45J)........ 5.6.16 Laser Exposure Check (45C) ................................... 5.6.10 Laser History Display (45K)...................................... 5.6.17 Laser Unit .................................................................... 12.2 Laser Unit Air Filter Replacement .............................. 2.3.1 Laser Unit Cooling Fan (F314) Replacement ........... 12.1.2 Laser Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 12.2.1 LDA22 Circuit Board Replacement........................... 18.3.9 LDD22 Circuit Board Replacement ........................ 18.3.10 LDD22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram....................... 19.3.6 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Replacement ..... 18.1.4 Leakage Breaker (NFB2 to NFB4) Test .................... 18.1.3 LED Circuit Board Assembly Replacement ................ 9.1.5 LED Circuit Board Replacement .............................. 18.2.3 LED Light Amount Adjustment (43L)........................ 5.4.15 Left Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........................... 11.1.1 Lens Drive Motor (M202) Replacement ..................... 9.3.3 Lens Home Position Sensor (D214) Replacement..... 9.3.1 Lens Registration (43D) ............................................. 5.4.8 Lens Unit ....................................................................... 9.3


20.3 Index Lens Unit Removal/Reinstallation............................... 9.3.2 Light Source Assembly Removal/Reinstallation ......... 9.1.3 Light Source Cooling Fan (F201) Replacement ......... 9.1.9 Light Source Section ..................................................... 9.1 Light Source Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .. 9.1.7 Light Source Unit Removal/Reinstallation .................. 9.1.1 Light Table (Optional) Replacement............................ 7.2.4 List of LEDs, Fuses and Destinations for Each DC Power Supply Unit .................................................... 19.5 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTC22 Circuit Board.......................................................... 19.5.5 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CTP22 Circuit Board.......................................................... 19.5.4 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the CYS22 Circuit Board.......................................................... 19.5.6 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PAC22 Circuit Board.......................................................... 19.5.2 List of the LEDs and DC Voltages on the PDC22 Circuit Board.......................................................... 19.5.3 Lower Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..... 13.1.11 Lower Exit Belt Height Adjustment ......................... 13.1.16 Lower Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement ....................... 13.1.15 Lower Pulley Drive Belt Replacement..................... 13.1.14 Low Volume Setup (466)............................................. 5.7.6 LTC22 Circuit Board Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..... 9.1.8 LTC22 Circuit Board Replacement ........................... 9.1.10 LTC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ........................ 19.3.7 M101 (Feed motor) Replacement............................ 8.2.27 M102 (Supply motor) Replacement........................... 8.3.9 M103 (Mask motor) Replacement ........................... 8.2.14 M104 (Door motor) Replacement ............................ 8.3.11 M201 (Conjugate length variable motor) Replacement ........................................................... 9.4.2 M202 (Lens drive motor) Replacement ..................... 9.3.3 M203 (Shutter drive motor) Replacement ................. 9.2.6 M301 (Paper feed motor) Replacement................... 10.3.2 M302 (Feed drive motor 1) Replacement ................ 11.2.5 M303 (Feed drive motor 2) Replacement ................ 11.2.4 M304 (Register drive motor) Replacement............ 12.4.12 M305 (Sub-scanning drive motor) Replacement ..... 12.3.3 M306 (Exit drive motor) Replacement ..................... 13.1.4 M307 (Cutter drive motor) Replacement ................. 10.4.4 M309 (Register nip motor) Replacement............... 12.4.11 M310 (Width detecting drive motor) Replacement ....................................................... 12.4.13 M311 (Sub-scanning drive motor) Replacement ... 12.3.10 M313 (Feed nip motor) Replacement ...................... 11.2.2 M314 (Exit section up/down belt motor) Replacement ......................................................... 13.1.3 M401 (Processor drive motor) Replacement ........... 14.3.2 M402 (Replenisher cartridge opening drive motor) Replacement ......................................................... 16.1.7

M404 (Sorter drive motor) Replacement ................. 17.2.1 MG101 (Magnetic writing head) Replacement ......... 8.1.14 Magazine Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D322) Replacement......................................................... 10.1.7 Magazine Drive Gear Replacement ......................... 10.1.2 Magazine ID Sensor (D306 to 310) Replacement.... 10.1.6 Magazine ID Sensor Section Cover Removal/ Reinstallation ........................................................ 10.1.5 Magazine Setting Bevel Gear Replacement............. 10.2.3 Magazine Table Front Cover Removal/Reinstallation ... 10.2.1 Magazine Table Setting Gear Replacement ............. 10.2.2 Magazine Table Unit Removal/Reinstallation ........... 10.2.4 Main Control Unit Replacement ............................... 18.4.1 Main Control Unit Section............................................ 18.4 Main Control Unit Wiring Diagram ............................ 19.3.9 Main Scanning Position Adjustment/Laser Beam Sync. Rough Adjustment (45H) ...................................... 5.6.15 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION................................ 2 Maintenance and Inspection ......................................... 2.3 MAINTENANCE MENU.................................................... 5 Maintenance Schedule.................................................. 2.1 Manual Negative Carrier M69D (Optional) .................... 8.6 Mask Motor Home Position Sensor (D117) (SSE22 Circuit Board) Replacement ............................................. 8.2.12 Mask Motor (M103) Replacement ............................ 8.2.14 Mask Position Adjustment (441)................................. 5.5.1 MENU............................................................................... 1 Menu Table .................................................................... 1.1 Message Icon ............................................................. 3.1.2 Message Number ....................................................... 3.1.1 MESSAGES AND ACTIONS............................................ 3 Messages and Actions .................................................. 3.2 MNC Circuit Board Replacement ............................... 8.6.1 Monitor .......................................................................... 7.1 Monitor Adjustment (426) ........................................... 5.3.5 Monitor Frame Ratio Setup (448) ............................... 5.5.3 Monitor Replacement ................................................. 7.1.1 Monotone Correction Setting (42G) ........................... 5.3.9 Mouse/Keyboard ........................................................... 7.2 Mouse Replacement .................................................. 7.2.1 NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Display (44D) ... 5.5.6 NC100AC Carrier Installation Information Setup (44E) ...... 5.5.7 NC100AC Fixed Feeding Setup (44R) ..................... 5.5.12 NC100AC Input Check (442)...................................... 5.5.2 NC100AC I/O Check (44F)......................................... 5.5.8 NC100AC Machine Data Setup (44K) ........................ 5.5.9 NC100AC Magnetic Information Reading (44M) ...... 5.5.10 NC100AC Magnetic Verify (44N) .............................. 5.5.11 NC100AC Sensor Calibration (44A) ........................... 5.5.4 NC100AC Sensor Calibration Information (44C)........ 5.5.5


20.3 Index Negative Mask Adjustment ......................................... 8.6.4 Negative Mask Detection Pin Replacement ............... 8.6.3 Negative Press Solenoid (S10) Replacement ............ 8.6.2 Nest Section .................................................................. 8.3 Nest Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............... 8.3.1 Nest Unit Removal/Reinstallation ............................... 8.3.4 New Installation ............................................................. 4.4 Nip Belt Replacement ............................................. 12.3.13 Nip Roller Replacement............................................ 10.1.3 Nip Roller Replacement.......................................... 12.3.14 Noise Filter (NF1 to NF3)/Capacitor (C1 to C3) Replacement ....................................................... 18.1.10 Non-existent image or too light/white print.................. 6.1.1 Operational Procedure................................................... 5.1 Operation Information Display (434) ........................... 5.4.4 OPERATION SECTION .................................................... 7 Operation Section/Carrier Section ............................ 20.2.1 Opposite Roller Replacement................................... 8.2.23 Optical Axis Adjustment (43E) .................................... 5.4.9 Optical Magnification Calibration (43F)..................... 5.4.10 Others .......................................................................... 6.13 Overall blur................................................................ 6.11.1 Overall graininess ....................................................... 6.6.1 PU401 (P1 circulation pump) Inspection .................... 2.3.9 PU401 (P1 circulation pump) Replacement ............ 15.2.7 PU402 (P2 circulation pump) Inspection .................... 2.3.9 PU402 (P2 circulation pump) Replacement ............. 15.2.7 PU403 (PS1 circulation pump) Inspection.................. 2.3.9 PU403 (PS1 circulation pump) Replacement........... 15.2.7 PU404 (PS2 circulation pump) Inspection.................. 2.3.9 PU404 (PS2 circulation pump) Replacement........... 15.2.7 PU405 (PS3 circulation pump) Inspection.................. 2.3.9 PU405 (PS3 circulation pump) Replacement........... 15.2.7 PU406 (PS4 circulation pump) Inspection.................. 2.3.9 PU406 (PS4 circulation pump) Replacement........... 15.2.7 PU407 (Auto washing pump) Replacement ............. 16.3.1 PU408 (P1R replenisher pump) Replacement ......... 16.2.4 PU409 (P2RA replenisher pump) Replacement....... 16.2.4 PU410 (P2RB replenisher pump) Replacement....... 16.2.4 PU411 (PSR replenisher pump) Replacement......... 16.2.4 P1R Tank Replacement .......................................... 16.2.11 P1R Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS407/FS411) Replacement ......................................................... 16.2.8 P2RA/P2RB Tank Replacement ............................. 16.2.12 P2RA/P2RB Upper/Lower Level Sensor Replacement ...... 16.2.9 PAC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram ....................... 19.4.1 PAC22 Circuit Board Replacement......................... 18.1.12 PAC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram ....................... 19.3.8 Paint (410A)................................................................ 5.9.1 Paper Condition Setup (421) ...................................... 5.3.1

Paper Condition Method Setup (42J) ....................... 5.3.10 Paper Condition Setup Table (LUT) Copy (45L) ....... 5.6.18 Paper End Sensor (D311) Replacement .................. 10.1.4 Paper End Sensor Plate Replacement..................... 10.1.1 Paper Feed (455) ....................................................... 5.6.5 Paper Feed Check (494) ............................................ 5.8.4 Paper Feed Length Adjustment (452) ........................ 5.6.2 PAPER FEED SECTION ................................................ 11 Paper Magazine .......................................................... 10.1 Paper Magazine Registration (451)............................ 5.6.1 Paper Magazine Table ................................................. 10.2 Paper scratch general ................................................ 6.3.3 Paper Splice Sensor (D301) Replacement............... 10.4.1 Paper Supply Drive Belt Replacement ..................... 10.3.3 Paper Supply Drive Section......................................... 10.3 Paper Supply Drive Unit Removal/Reinstallation...... 10.3.1 Paper Supply Motor (M301) Replacement ............... 10.3.2 PAPER SUPPLY SECTION ............................................ 10 PDC22 Circuit Board Circuit Diagram ...................... 19.4.2 PDC22 Circuit Board Replacement.......................... 18.5.1 PDC22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram .................... 19.3.10 Peltier Element (LH201) Replacement ....................... 9.1.6 Periphery blur ........................................................... 6.11.3 Piezo Electric Voltage Adjustment .............................. 9.4.6 Platen Replacement ................................................. 11.3.7 Plug-in Connector (on Frame) Replacement............ 9.1.11 Plug-in Connector (on Light Source Unit) Replacement .... 9.1.4 Plug-in Connector Replacement .............................. 8.2.29 Plug-in Connector Replacement ................................ 8.5.8 Plug-in Connector Replacement ................................ 8.6.5 Plug-in Connector Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation.. 8.2.1 Potentiometers Used to Adjust the DC Power Supply Voltages .................................................... 19.6.2 Power Supply Input Section ........................................ 18.1 Power Supply Section Bracket Removal/Reinstallation...... 18.1.6 Power Supply Section Exhaust Fan 1 (F306/F307) Replacement......................................................... 18.5.6 Precut Length Setting (45V) ..................................... 5.6.27 Pre-exposure Sensor (D304P) Replacement ........... 12.3.6 Pre-exposure Sensor LED (D304L) Replacement ... 12.3.7 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 10L kit ...... 15.4.5 Preparing Processing Solutions (CP-48S) with 4.2L kit ..... 15.4.6 Print Condition Setup and Check (42)........................... 5.3 Printer Adjustment/Maintenance (45)............................ 5.6 Printer Exhaust Fan 1/2 (F311/F312) Replacement ..... 18.3.2 Printer Exhaust Fan 2 (F313) Replacement ............. 18.3.3 Printer Exhaust Fan 3/4 (F315/F316) Replacement ..... 12.1.3 PRINTER EXIT SECTION.............................................. 13


20.3 Index Printer Exit Unit............................................................ 13.1 Printer Exit Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................... 13.1.1 Printer Input Check (457)............................................ 5.6.7 Printer I/O Check (45A) .............................................. 5.6.8 Printer Mechanical Fine Adjustment (45M) .............. 5.6.19 Printer Operation Data Display (45P) ....................... 5.6.21 Printer Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation .............. 18.2.1 Printer Rear Section ................................................. 19.1.2 Printer Section .......................................................... 20.2.3 Printer Suction Fan 1/2 (F308/F309) Replacement .. 11.1.7 Printer Suction Fan 3 (F310) Replacement .............. 11.1.6 Printer Temperature Display (456) .............................. 5.6.6 Print Size Setup (424) ................................................ 5.3.4 Processing Chemical Handling Precautions............. 15.4.1 Processing Rack Drive Gear Lubrication.................... 2.3.6 Processing Rack Roller Inspection ........................... 2.3.10 Processing Racks ........................................................ 14.2 Processing Rack Washing and Processing Solution Draining ................................................................. 15.4.2 PROCESSING SOLUTION CIRCULATION SYSTEM.... 15 Processing Solution Level Sensor Inspection............. 2.3.4 Processing Solution Replacement............................... 15.4 PROCESSING SOLUTION REPLENISHMENT SYSTEM ..................................................................... 16 Processing Solution Replenishment System ............... 16.2 Processing Tank Exhaust Fan (F406) Replacement ..... 18.5.4 Processing Tank Heater/Circulation Pump Section ..... 15.2 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F401/F402) Replacement ......................................................... 15.2.4 Processing Tank Heater Cooling Fan (F403) Replacement 15.2.3 Processing Tank Heater Inspection .......................... 2.3.11 Processing Tank Heater Replacement...................... 15.2.6 Processing Tank Temperature Sensor Replacement .... 15.1.1 Processing Tank Washing and Processing Rack Reinstallation......................................................... 15.4.3 Processing Temperature Setting (463) ....................... 5.7.3 Processor Adjustment/Maintenance (46)....................... 5.7 Processor Drive Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..... 14.3.4 Processor Drive Chain Lubrication ............................. 2.3.7 Processor Drive Chain Replacement........................ 14.3.8 Processor Drive Idler Sprocket Replacement ........... 14.3.6 Processor Drive Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..... 14.3.1 Processor Drive Motor Driver Replacement ............. 14.3.3 Processor Drive Motor (M401) Replacement ........... 14.3.2 Processor Drive System .............................................. 14.3 Processor Entry Sensor (D305P) Replacement ....... 13.1.6 Processor Entry Sensor LED (D305L) Replacement.... 13.1.7 Processor Input Check (468) ...................................... 5.7.8 Processor I/O Check (46A)......................................... 5.7.9 Processor Operating Condition Setup (46B) ............ 5.7.10 Processor Operation Data Display 2 (46E)............... 5.7.13

Processor Operation Data Display (46C) ................. 5.7.11 Processor Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ........ 15.3.1 Processor Rear Section ........................................... 19.1.3 PROCESSOR SECTION ............................................... 14 Processor Section .................................................... 20.2.4 Processor Temperature Calibration (467)................... 5.7.7 Processor Temperature Check (422).......................... 5.3.2 Production Information 1 (411)................................... 5.2.1 Production Information 2 (412)................................... 5.2.2 PSR Tank Replacement ......................................... 16.2.13 PSR Upper/Lower Level Sensor (FS410/FS414) Replacement....................................................... 16.2.10 Pulse Motor Driver Replacement ............................. 18.3.8 PWR22 Circuit Board Replacement ......................... 18.2.4 PWR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram...................... 19.3.2 PZR22 Circuit Board Wiring Diagram..................... 19.3.11 PZR22 (Piezo Power Supply) Circuit Board Replacement . 9.4.5 Rack Auto Washing Valve Replacement................... 16.3.3 Rack Center Guide Replacement............................. 14.2.4 Rack Drive Shaft Removal/Reinstallation ................. 14.2.3 Read Head Circuit Board Replacement ................... 8.1.12 Reading Magnetic Head (D116) Replacement......... 8.1.13 Rear Feed Rubber Belt Replacement .................... 12.3.12 Rear Lower Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ....... 16.2.7 Rear Upper Connector Cover Removal/Reinstallation ....... 16.2.6 Red paper scratches at the leading end of black print .... 6.3.1 Register Drive Motor (M304) Replacement ............ 12.4.12 Register Nip Home Position Sensor (D316) Replacement. 12.4.10 Register Nip Motor (M309) Replacement............... 12.4.11 Register Sensor (D303P) Replacement ................... 12.4.4 Register Sensor LED (D303L) Replacement ........... 12.4.3 REGISTRATION AND EXPOSURE SECTIONS ............ 12 Registration Unit.......................................................... 12.4 Registration Unit Removal/Reinstallation ................. 12.4.1 Regular Maintenance and Inspection Table .................. 2.2 Regular unevenness in feed direction (mm spacing) .... 6.12.2 Regular unevenness perpendicular to feeding direction (mm spacing).......................................... 6.12.1 Reinstallation................................................................. 4.3 Relay (K1 to K6) Replacement ................................. 18.1.7 Repeated calibrations do not improve the result ...... 6.10.1 Replenisher Box Door Lock Manual Releasing ........ 16.1.2 Replenisher Cartridge Box Removal/Reinstallation...... 16.1.5 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Drive Motor (M402) Replacement......................................................... 16.1.7 Replenisher Cartridge Opening Gear Replacement..... 16.1.8 Replenisher Cartridge Section .................................... 16.1 Replenisher Cartridge Washing Nozzle Cleaning ...... 2.3.8


20.3 Index Replenisher Door Detecting Interlock Switch (D410) Replacement ......................................................... 16.1.3 Replenisher Filter Replacement ............................... 16.2.3 Replenisher Pump Bracket Removal/Reinstallation...... 16.2.2 Replenisher Pump Output Measurement/Setting (461)...... 5.7.1 Replenisher Pump Replacement .............................. 16.2.4 Replenisher Pump Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation . 16.2.1 Replenisher Pump Valve Replacement .................... 16.2.5 Replenisher Rate Setting (464) .................................. 5.7.4 Replenishing Section Cover Removal/Reinstallation .... 16.1.1 Required Adjustments after Parts Replacement.......... 20.2 Reversion....................................................................... 4.5 R Laser (R-LD) Data (45D)....................................... 5.6.11 Roller Nip Cam Arm Replacement ......................... 12.4.20 Roller Nip Cam Shaft Replacement........................ 12.4.19 Roller Replacement .................................................. 14.2.2 S101 (Pressure solenoid) Replacement .................... 8.2.9 S301 (Back printer drive solenoid 1) (Printer head 1) Replacement ......................................................... 11.3.5 S302 (Back printer drive solenoid 2) (Printer head 2) Replacement ......................................................... 11.3.5 S401 (P1 rack auto washing valve) Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.3 S402 (P2 rack auto washing valve) Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.3 S403 (PS1/2 rack auto washing valve) Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.3 S404 (PS3/4 rack auto washing valve) Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.3 S407 (P1R cartridge washing valve) Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.2 S408 (P2RA cartridge washing valve) Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.2 S409 (P2RB cartridge washing valve) Replacement ......................................................... 16.3.2 S410 (P1R stirring valve) Replacement................... 16.3.2 SW (Start switch) Replacement .......................... 18.3.11 Safety Thermostat Replacement .............................. 15.2.5 Scanner Adjustment/Maintenance (43) ......................... 5.4 Scanner Cooling Fan (F216) Replacement ................ 9.2.3 Scanner Front Cover Unit Removal/Reinstallation...... 9.2.1 Scanner Rear Cover Removal/Reinstallation ............. 9.2.2 SCANNER SECTION ....................................................... 9 Scanner Section ............................................................ 9.2 Scanner Section ....................................................... 20.2.2 Scanner Section ....................................................... 19.1.4 Scanning Position/Scanning Home Position Parameter Setup (45G)........................................................... 5.6.14 Scratches....................................................................... 6.3

Scratch restoration malfunction or image scratch general .................................................................... 6.3.2 Self-Diagnostic (49)....................................................... 5.8 Sensor Cover Removal/Reinstallation ...................... 12.3.5 Set Lever Assembly Removal/Reinstallation .............. 8.3.6 Set Lever Stopper Replacement .............................. 8.3.19 Setup confirmation when developer degraded (Developer Degradation) ....................................... 6.13.1 Shipping Information Reference (41G)....................... 5.2.9 Shop Logo Regist/Delete (42K)................................ 5.3.11 Shutter Drive Motor (M203) Replacement.................. 9.2.6 Shutter/Gear Replacement......................................... 9.2.7 Shutter Home Position Sensor (D215) Replacement ..... 9.2.5 Side Register Calibration (45S) ................................ 5.6.24 Simple Upgrade............................................................. 4.1 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION ........................................... 4 Solenoid (S101) Replacement ................................... 8.2.9 Solution Level Sensor Replacement ........................ 15.1.2 Solution Preparation Tools and Procedure ............... 15.4.4 Sorter .......................................................................... 17.2 Sorter Belt Replacement .......................................... 17.2.3 Sorter Drive Motor (M404) Replacement ................. 17.2.1 Sorter Full Sensor LED Replacement ...................... 17.2.6 Sorter Full Sensor Replacement .............................. 17.2.7 Sorter Removal/Reinstallation.................................. 17.2.2 Special Film CH Setting (42E).................................... 5.3.8 Special Operations (410)............................................... 5.9 Spectral Calibration (43J) ......................................... 5.4.13 Spool Assembly Removal/Reinstallation .................... 8.3.7 Spool Rack Replacement ......................................... 8.3.14 Spool Replacement .................................................. 8.3.15 Spots ............................................................................. 6.9 SSR (SSR1 to SSR3) Replacement......................... 18.1.8 Stainless Steel Exit Guide Plate Removal/Reinstallation ... 13.1.5 Start Switch Replacement ...................................... 18.3.11 Start Up Procedure When Battery on CTP22 Circuit Board Discharged............................................................ 18.5.3 Step Down Transformer Replacement.................... 18.1.11 Straight continuous scratch in fixed image position even if the film is exchanged...................... 6.3.2 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (53mm spacing) ...................................................... 6.7.1 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (60mm spacing) ...................................................... 6.7.2 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 13mm of leading end) .............................. 6.7.4 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 23mm of trailing end) ............................... 6.7.9 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Black blurred streak at 2mm of leading end) ................................ 6.7.3 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 48mm of trailing end) ........................................ 6.7.11


20.3 Index Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 52mm and 68mm of trailing end)....................... 6.7.12 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks at 72mm and 88mm of trailing end)....................... 6.7.13 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks within 0 to 25mm and at 33mm of trailing end) ..... 6.7.10 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (Pitch streaks within 0 to 40mm of leading end) ............................ 6.7.5 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (White/black blurred streak at 13mm of trailing end).................... 6.7.7 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (White clear streak at 13mm of trailing end)................................ 6.7.8 Streak perpendicular to feed direction (White clear streak at 4mm of trailing end).................................. 6.7.6 Streaks .......................................................................... 6.7 Strip Film Guide Removal/Reinstallation .................... 8.3.2 Sub-scanning Drive Motor (M305) Replacement...... 12.3.3 Sub-scanning Nip Home Position Sensor (D317) Replacement ......................................................... 12.3.4 Sub-scanning Nip Motor Cooling Fan (F301) Replacement 12.3.8 Sub-scanning Nip Motor (M311) Replacement....... 12.3.10 Sub-scanning Steel Belt Replacement ..................... 12.3.2 Sub-scanning Unit ....................................................... 12.3 Sub-scanning Unit Removal/Reinstallation............... 12.3.1 Sub-tanks .................................................................... 15.1 Supply Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation............ 8.3.8 Supply Motor Home Position Sensor (D114) Replacement 8.3.13 Supply Motor (M102) /Gear Replacement .................. 8.3.9 System Operation Setup and Check (41) ...................... 5.2 THA1 (Exposure section temperature sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 12.3.9 TS401 (P1 processing tank temperature sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 15.1.1 TS402 (P2 processing tank temperature sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 15.1.1 TS403 (PS1/2 processing tank temperature sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 15.1.1 TS404 (PS3/4 processing tank temperature sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 15.1.1 TS406 (Dryer temperature sensor) Replacement ......................................................... 17.1.4 Table Top Cover Removal/Reinstallation..................... 7.2.2 Template Regist/Delete (42L) ................................... 5.3.12 Test Pattern Printing (453) .......................................... 5.6.3 Timer Setup (414)....................................................... 5.2.3 Timer Waiting Time Setup (41J) ............................... 5.2.11 Top Inner Cover Removal/Reinstallation................... 12.1.1 Trouble Help (491) ...................................................... 5.8.1 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR ABNORMAL IMAGES ......... 6

Unevenness................................................................. 6.12 Unexposed Frame Detect Level Set (43U) ............... 5.4.16 Update........................................................................... 4.2 Up/Down Arm Removal/Reinstallation ................... 13.1.10 Up/Down Belt Height Adjustment ........................... 13.1.17 Up/Down Belt Motor Bracket Removal/Reinstallation......... 13.1.8 Up/Down Gear Replacement ................................... 13.1.9 Upper Cover Open/Close Sensor (D120) (MSA22 Circuit Board) Replacement ............................................... 8.2.6 Upper Exit Belt Bracket Removal/Reinstallation..... 13.1.12 Upper Exit Belt/Pulley Replacement ...................... 13.1.13 Upper Guide Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 14.2.1 UPS Battery (Optional) Replacement....................... 18.4.2 Variable Mask Removal/Reinstallation ..................... 8.2.11 Vignetting ...................................................................... 6.4 Vignetting (M69D/Negative) ....................................... 6.4.2 Vignetting (M69D/Reversal) ....................................... 6.4.3 Vignetting (NC100AC) ................................................ 6.4.1 Waste Solution Hose Replacement.......................... 15.3.5 Waste Solution Level Sensor (FS415) Replacement.... 15.3.3 Waste Solution Level Sensor Inspection .................... 2.3.5 Waste Solution System ............................................... 15.3 Waste Solution Tank Replacement........................... 15.3.4 White Border Imprecision .............................................. 6.8 White border imprecision (Inclination) ........................ 6.8.3 White border imprecision (Shifted in feed direction)... 6.8.1 White border imprecision (Shifted perpendicular to feed direction) ......................................................... 6.8.2 Width Detecting Belt Replacement........................... 12.4.9 Width Detecting Bracket Removal/Reinstallation ..... 12.4.6 Width Detecting Drive Motor (M310) Replacement .... 12.4.13 Width Detecting Guide Shaft Replacement.............. 12.4.8 Width Detecting Home Position Sensor (D315) Replacement......................................................... 12.4.2 Width Sensor (D314P) Replacement ....................... 12.4.5 Width Sensor LED (D314L) Replacement................ 12.4.7 Winding Gear Replacement ....................................... 8.4.2 Winding Section ............................................................ 8.4 Winding Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly ................... 8.4.3 Winding Unit Removal/Reinstallation ......................... 8.4.1 Wiring Diagrams.......................................................... 19.3 Write Head Circuit Board Replacement ................... 8.1.11 Writing Magnetic Head (MG101) Replacement........ 8.1.14 X-#### Actions ........................................................... 3.1.3 Yellow non-existent or too light ................................... 6.1.3


FUJI PHOTO FILM CO., LTD. 26-30, Nishiazabu 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 106-8620,Japan

Ref.No.PP3-C917E TD-01.11-F G (SR) Printed in Japan

FRONTIER MINILAB 330 service Manual

Recommend Documents